aisd johnson & francis elementary schools aldine … · 2017. 2. 6. · aldine independent...

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 2 OF 2FOR

AISD JOHNSON & FRANCIS ELEMENTARY SCHOOLSALDINE INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT

OWNER:ALDINE INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT 1617 LAUDER ROADHOUSTON, TEXAS 77039

ARCHITECT: PROGRAM MANAGER:MORRIS ARCHITECTS, JLLA HUITT ZOLLARS COMPANY 1400 POST OAK BLVD.1001 FANNIN STREET, SUITE 4040 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77056HOUSTON, TEXAS 77002

COST ESTIMATOR: STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:PROJECT COST RESOURCES SCHMITZ PARTNERS ENGINEERS, LLC RICHMOND, TEXAS 77406 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77042

CIVIL ENGINEER: LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT:STANLEY, SPURLING & HAMILTON, INC. WONG AND ASSOCIATES, INC.HOUSTON, TEXAS 77027 BELLAIRE, TEXAS 77401-3310

MEP CONSULTANT: TECHNOLOGY:STANTON ENGINEERING, LLC KME SALAS O’BRIENHOUSTON, TEXAS 77402 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77064

FOOD SERVICES: ACOUSTICIAN/THEATER CONSULTANT:FCA DESIGN, INC. JAFFE HOLDEN TECHNOLOGIESHOUSTON, TEXAS 77042 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77006

SPECIFICATIONS CONSULTANT:SPIKER BALDWIN ASSOCIATES, INC.NORCROSS, GEORGIA 30093

BID ISSUE - 02/03/2017

Aldine Independent School District CERTIFICATIONS PAGE Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools DOCUMENT 00 0105 MA No. R306408.01 & MA No. R306409.01 SBA-16143

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0105-1

DOCUMENT 00 0105 - CERTIFICATIONS PAGE The following design professionals, by affixing their seal and signature on this page, certify that they have personally prepared, or have had prepared under their direct supervision, their respective portions of the Contract Documents, for use in this Project. Parties include: Architect of Record and the following as applicable; Civil Engineer, Landscape Architect, Structural Engineer, Mechanical Engineer, Plumbing Engineer, Fire Protection Engineer, Electrical Engineer and Low Voltage Consultant. ARCHITECT OF RECORD MORRIS ARCHITECTS 1001 FANNIN STREET, SUITE 4040 HOUSTON, TX 77002

Aldine Independent School District CERTIFICATIONS PAGEJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools DOCUMENT 00 0105MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01SBA-16141

STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS

SCHMITZ PARTNERS ENGINEERS, LLC2825 Wilcrest Drive,Suite 415Houston, Texas 77042

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0105-2

Aldine Independent School District CERTIFICATIONS PAGE Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools DOCUMENT 00 0105 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SBA-16141

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0105-3

PLUMBING ENGINEER STANTON ENGINEERING, LLC 13 W. Sam Houston Pkwy, STE 121 Houston, TX 77042

02.03.2017


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0105-4

MECHANICAL ENGINEER STANTON ENGINEERING, LLC 13 W. Sam Houston Pkwy, STE 121 Houston, TX 77042

02.03.2017


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0105-5

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER STANTON ENGINEERING, LLC 13 W. Sam Houston Pkwy, STE 121 Houston, TX 77042

02/03/2017


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0105-6

TECHNOLOGY

KME SALAS O'BRIEN 10930 W. Sam Houston Pkwy, Suite 900 Houston, TX 77064

Aldine Independent School District TABLE OF CONTENTS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools DOCUMENT 00 0110 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SBA-16141

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0110-1

DOCUMENT 00 0110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 OF 2 DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION Document 00 0101 Project Title Page Document 00 0105 Certification Pages 00 0105-1 Architect 00 0105-2 Structural Engineer 00 0105-3 Plumbing Engineer 00 0105-4 Mechanical Engineer 00 0105-5 Electrical Engineer 00 0105-6 Technology 00 0105-7 Civil Engineer Document 00 0110 Table of Contents PROCUREMENT AND BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Document 00 01 00 Request for Competitively Sealed Proposals Document 00 0150 Intention to Bid Form Document 00 3132 Geotechnical Data CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Document 00 5213 Form of Agreement (To Be Issued Later) Document 00 7201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction Document 00 7301 Supplementary Conditions to the Contract for Construction DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 2100 Allowances Section 01 2200 Unit Prices Section 01 2500 Substitution Procedures Section 01 2513 Substitution Request Form Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures Section 01 4000 Notice to Architect Section 01 4200 Reference Standards Section 01 4500 Quality Control Section 01 5200 Trench Safety Systems Section 01 5720 Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation Section 01 5730 Filter Fabric Fence Section 01 5750 Stabilized Construction Exit Section 01 5760 Waste Material Disposal Section 01 5900 Temporary Facilities Section 01 6000 Materials and Equipment Section 01 7123 Field Engineering Section 01 7300 Operation & Maintenance Data Section 01 7500 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 7700 Construction Closeout DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS (NOT USED)


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0110-2

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03 3500 Concrete Finishing DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04 0513 Masonry Mortaring and Grouting Section 04 0523 Masonry Accessories Section 04 2113 Brick Masonry Section 04 2200 Unit Masonry Section 04 4245 Limestone Masonry DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05 1200 Structural Steel Section 05 2100 Open Web Steel Joist Framing Section 05 3000 Steel Form Deck Section 05 4000 Cold Formed Metal Framing Section 05 5000 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITE Section 06 1000 Rough Carpentry Section 06 1643 Exterior Gypsum Sheathing Section 06 2200 Finish Carpentry and Millwork Section 06 7300 Composite Wood Decking DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 1900 Water-Repellents Section 07 2100 Thermal Insulation Section 07 2726 Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers Section 07 4213 Metal Wall Panels Section 07 4293 Metal Soffit Panels Section 07 5422 Adhered Thermoplastic Roofing Section 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07 6510 Flexible Flashing/Drainage System Section 07 7213 Manufactured Curbs Section 07 7233 Roof Hatches Section 07 7236 Smoke Vents Section 07 8400 Firestopping Section 07 9200 Joint Sealants Section 07 9500 Expansion Control DIVISION 8 OPENINGS Section 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 1423 Plastic Faced Wood Doors Section 08 3113 Access Doors and Panels Section 08 3323 Overhead Coiling Steel Doors Section 08 3324 Overhead Coiling Aluminum Doors Section 08 3472 Acoustically Gasket Doors


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0110-3

DIVISION 8 OPENINGS (CONT’D) Section 08 3473 Sound Control Door Assemblies Section 08 3514 Folding Fire Doors Section 08 4413 Aluminum Entrances, Storefront and Fixed Framingl Systems Section 08 6200 Fixed Curb Mount Skylights Section 08 7100 Door Hardware Section 08 7113 Automatic Door Operators Section 08 8000 Glazing DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09 2900 Gypsum Board Section 09 3000 Tiling Section 09 5100 Acoustical Ceilings Section 09 6105 Moisture Vapor Control for Flooring Section 09 6400 Stage Flooring Section 09 6500 Resilient Flooring Section 09 6566 Resilient Athletic Flooring Section 09 6813 Carpet Tile Section 09 7216 Dry Erase Wall Covering Section 09 7217 Vinyl Wall Coverings Section 09 7813 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Wall Panels Section 09 8300 Sound Diffusers Section 09 8413 Acoustical Wall Panels Section 09 8430 Hanging Acoustical Baffles Section 09 9100 Painting and Coating Section 09 9419 Decorative Interior Coatings DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10 1100 Visual Display Boards Section 10 1200 Display Cases Section 10 2115 Plastic Toilet Compartments Section 10 2813 Toilet Accessories Section 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties Section 10 5613 Industrial Metal Shelving Section 10 7326 Aluminum Walkway Covers Section 10 7500 Ground-Set Aluminum Flagpoles DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT Section 11 1616 Safes Section 11 3100 Residential Appliances Section 11 4000 Foodservice Equipment Section 11 5123 Library Shelving Section 11 5213 Projection Screens Section 11 6143 Curtains at Stage Section 11 6623 Gymnasium Equipment Section 11 6653 Exterior Sports Equipment


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0110-4

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Section 12 2113 Horizontal Louver Blinds Section 12 2417 Shades DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13 4813 Sound Isolation and Control DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS No Sections Requires END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 OF 2


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0110-5

TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 2 OF 2 DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION Document 00 0101 Project Title Page Document 00 0105 Certification Pages 00 0105-1 Architect 00 0105-2 Structural Engineer 00 0105-3 Plumbing Engineer 00 0105-4 Mechanical Engineer 00 0105-5 Electrical Engineer 00 0105-6 Technology 00 0105-7 Civil Engineer Document 00 0110 Table of Contents DIVISION 21 FIRE PROTECTION Section 21 13 13 Fire Sprinkler System DIVISION 22 PLUMBING Section 22 00 00 General Plumbing Requirements Section 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing Section 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation Section 22 11 00 Building Water Distribution Section 221113 Facility Water Distribution Piping Section 22 13 00 Building Sanitary Sewerage Section 221313 Facility Sanitary Sewers Section 22 14 00 Building Storm Drainage Section 22 16 00 Building Natural Gas Piping Section 22 33 00 Electric Domestic Water Heaters Section 22 34 00 Fuel-fired Domestic Water Heaters Section 22 42 00 Commercial Plumbing Fixtures Section 22 47 00 Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers Section 22 66 00 Chemical Waste System DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Section 23 00 00 General Hvac Requirements Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC Section 23 0548 Vibration Isolation Section 23 0550 Noise Control for Mechanical Systems Section 23 05 93 HVAC Test and Balance Section 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation Section 23 09 23 Direct Digital Control System for HVAC Section 23 09 93 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls Section 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping Section 23 21 16 Hydronic Piping Specialties Section 23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps Section 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping Section 23 25 13 HVAC Water Treatment for Closed Hydronic Systems Section 23 29 00 Low Voltage Controllers Section 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings Section 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0110-6

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)(CONT'D) Section 23 34 00 HVAC Fans Section 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units Section 23 37 13 Air Outlets and Inlets Section 23 37 16 Duct Sox Section 23 41 00 Particulate Air Filtration Section 23 51 00 Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks Section 23 52 00 Heating Boilers Section 23 64 00 Water Chillers Section 23 72 23 Air to Air Energy Recovery Units Section 23 73 13 Indoor Central-station Air-handling Units Section 23 74 13 Outdoor Packaged Air Handling Units Section 23 81 00 Decentralized unitary Air conditioners DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Section 26 00 00 General Electrical Requirements Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical Section 26 0550 Noise Control for Electrical Systems Section 26 09 43 Network Lighting Controls Section 26 22 13 Transformers Section 26 24 00 Switchboards and Panelboards Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices Section 26 28 00 Low-Voltage Circuit Protective Devices Section 26 29 00 Low-Voltage Controllers Section 26 43 00 Surge Protective Devices Section 26 51 00 Interior Lighting Section 26 55 00 Theatrical Lighting System Section 26 55 10 Theatrical Rigging System Section 26 56 00 Outdoor Lighting DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS Section 27 01 00 Electronic Communications O&M Manuals Section 27 05 00 Communications General Provisions Section 27 05 07 Communications Shop Drawings Section 27 05 09 Contract Quality Control Section 27 05 10 Firestops Section 27 10 00 Data Communications Structured Cabling Section 27 41 00 Integrated Audio Video Section 27 50 10 School Communication System Section 27 51 16 Local Sound Systems DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 28 01 00 Safety & Security O&M Manuals Section 28 05 00 Safety & Security General Provisions Section 28 05 10 Contract Quality Control Section 28 10 00 Access Control Section 28 20 00 Video Surveillance Section 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 00 0110-7

DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK Section 311000 Site Clearing Section 312000 Earth Moving Section 31 2300 Building Excavation and Fill Section 31 3116 Soil Treatment for Termite Control Section 31 3213 Lime/Fly Ash Stabilization Section 31 6329 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 321216 Asphalt Paving Section 321313 Concrete Paving Section 321373 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants Section 32 1540 Aggregate Trail Section 321713 Parking Bumpers Section 321723 Pavement Markings Section 321726 Tactile Warning Surfacing Section 32 1824 Outdoor Basketball Court Surfacing Section 32 3113 Chain Link Fences and Gates Section 32 3119 Ornamental Metal Fence and Gates DIVISION 33 UTILITIES Section 330500 Common Work Results for Utilities Section 334100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 2 OF 2 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Aldine Independent School District FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 21 13 13 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 21 13 13-1

SECTION 21 13 13 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Systems and installation shall comply with the requirements of City Fire Marshall, applicable NFPA codes, FM/UL approving agencies and the State Board of Insurance requirements.

B. Provide all piping and equipment shown on the drawings, and all accessories necessary for a complete operating system.

C. Sprinkler piping shall not be installed over electrical panels or transformers.

D. All sprinkler piping shall be manufactured in the United States of America by American Tube, Wheatland Tube or Allied Tube.

E. Prospective contractors shall flow test the domestic water utility system at a fire hydrant nearest the proposed fire line connection prior to bidding to determine the conditions that he must design to. A safety factor must be applied to these conditions based on his experience to accommodate time of day and time of year variations. Do not assume a residual pressure higher than 48 psi.

PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Engage the services of a sprinkler subcontractor who will perform detailed hydraulic calculations and system design to meet the design requirements as noted on the drawings. The subcontractor shall also furnish and install all equipment and piping according to his approved design. He shall provide all labor, scaffolding and equipment necessary for the performance of this work.

B. Contractor shall draw his piping in the project Revit Model that shows the mechanical and plumping systems. His design and layout shall accommodate these systems in the available space.

2.2 SCOPE OF WORK:

A. Make connection to water main, install double check backflow preventer with isolating O S & Y valves and 1" metered leak detector bypass in vault, fire department connection, post indicator valve with supervisory switch and underground main to building installed based on Civil Engineer’s Contract Documents. Refer to other sections of the specifications for piping installation and backfill requirements.

B. In location shown on drawings, install system riser including O S & Y valve, check valve, alarm valve, water motor alarm, retarding chamber and, water flow sensor. Provide fire department test valves at appropriate places with approval of the Engineer. Piping for test valves shall not be exposed in any location unless in a mechanical room.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 21 13 13-2

C. Install sprinkler branch piping and sprinkler heads in all areas of the building unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

2.3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS:

A. SPRINKLERS: Provide Reliable Model G1 concealed sprinkler red glass and white ceiling disk in all areas with ceilings. Provide Reliable Model G1 concealed sprinkler in all corridors, lobby areas, offices, restrooms and PE rooms with ceilings. Install chrome plated, upright type in mechanical rooms or other rooms with no ceiling. Provide chrome plated, semi-recessed type for other areas. Similar style, extended coverage or quick response heads are also acceptable. All sprinkler heads installed in ceiling tile shall be centered in the tile. Provide metal guard on all exposed heads in gymnasiums or similar sports areas, and in mechanical or electrical rooms. Upright heads shall be a minimum of 6” below overhead structure, ducts, etc. Fusible links shall have a temperature rating of a

minimum of 50°F above normal ambient temperature, 145°F minimum.

B. ALARM VALVES: UL approved alarm check valve complete with necessary trimmings, including water gongs as shown on the drawings. Provide supervising switch on interior O S & Y valves for fire alarm interconnection.

C. VALVES AND DEVICES: All sprinkler control valves, alarm check valves, check valve and accessories shall be UL listed and FM approved.

D. PIPING BELOW GRADE: UL/FM listed PVC Class 200 water pipe installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION: Wall type, chrome plated finish, thread size to suit local fire department hardware, 2-way threaded dust caps and chains of same material, 1/4” automatic drip, marked “Sprinkler – FDC”. Acceptable manufacturers are Reliable, Elkhart Brass and Potter-Roemer.

F. PIPING ABOVE GRADE: Schedule 40 or heavier, black steel with screwed or Victaulic joint complying with NFPA 13. Thinwall pipe is not acceptable. For every sprinkler head, tap main/branch pipe serving each individual sprinkler head on top of pipe to prevent trash from collecting at head. For all sprinkler heads in ceilings, install swing joint (return bend) over to sprinkler head. Flexible connections to sprinkler heads will be acceptable with ceiling brace. All sprinkler heads installed in ceilings shall be centered in tile. Saddle taps are not acceptable. Where piping is exposed such as in stairwells it shall be installed tight to structure and a minimum of eight feet above the floor.

G. MISCELLANEOUS PIPING: Piping exposed to view outside such as drain and test piping shall be chrome plated and installed so as not to be a pedestrian hazard or stain building.

H. SIGNS: Furnish metal signs in accordance with NFPA 13.

I. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Central, Grinnell, Reliable and Viking (All equipment such as retarding chamber, valves, sprinkler heads, alarms and similar items shall be from the same manufacturer.)

2.4 CONCRETE PADS

A. All equipment mounted on the floor shall have a concrete housekeeping pad. Concrete pads shall be sized for the equipment to be supplied. Pad shall exceed base dimensions by approximately 4" all around. Reinforce pads rebar including #4 bar around perimeter. Nominal thickness shall be 4”. Tool pad to form a chamfered edge.

2.5 SYSTEM TESTING

A. All underground piping shall be thoroughly flushed in accordance with NFPA 13 and 24.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 21 13 13-3

The flush test shall be witnessed by the proper governing authority.

B. All underground piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 psi for a period of two hours. Comply with NFPA 13 and 24.

C. All above ground piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 psi for a period of two hours. All piping, valves and sprinkler heads shall be water tight.

D. Provide inspector's test connection at the required test points. Connection shall consist of 1" tap, 1" ball valve and discharge nozzle. Test stations shall not be located exposed in finished rooms. If test station is required in finished room, piping shall be installed concealed in wall with valve located above accessible ceiling or in wall behind 12 gauge, stainless steel access panel with hinged and lockable door. Test stations shall not be located in or above ceiling of Girls/Womens Restrooms, locker rooms or dressing areas under any circumstances. All test valves and drainage valves shall be piped to a floor drain in a mechanical room or to a grassy area outside building (not onto sidewalk). Test valves shall be located out in the system piping, not at the building service entrance.

2.6 SPARES

A. Provide sprinkler box with a minimum of 12 spare sprinkler heads. Provide an assortment of head types in proportion to those types installed with a minimum of two of each type. Include sprinkler head wrench to fit each type head installed.

2.7 GUARANTEE

A. All materials and installation shall be guaranteed for one year from Owner's acceptance.

2.8 PAINTING

A. All equipment exposed to view shall have a painted finish. All piping exposed to view, including in mechanical rooms, shall be painted red with two coats of industrial, epoxy enamel paint.

2.9 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit seven complete sets of shop drawings checked and certified by the contractor as being checked, and lists of materials furnished under this Division. Shop drawings shall be approved before installation of the material under consideration.

B. Submit equipment, hydraulic design calculations and layout drawings for approval. These drawings shall be approved by the applicable state and insuring agencies. Alternately, contractor may submit design drawings for preliminary approval prior to submitting to governing agencies. After agency approval, resubmit to architect for final approval.

C. Submittal drawing shall show the location of ductwork, mechanical equipment above the ceiling, ceiling devices, and other items that may cause conflict with sprinkler piping and sprinkler heads. Drawings shall indicate height of pipes not in mechanical rooms, and any pipe that cannot be installed above 8 feet shall be highlighted. Piping shall be coordinated with ductwork contactor and may require relocation due to mechanical/plumbing ductwork and piping constraints.

D. Submittal drawing shall show the location of all drain and test valves and piping discharge. These drains shall discharge into main mechanical or air handling unit rooms if at all possible.

E. Provide a printed sheet giving brief instructions relative to all necessary aspects of sprinkler controls and emergency procedures next to sprinkler riser mains. Instruction shall be


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 21 13 13-4

protected by glass or a transparent plastic cover.

F. These drawings shall also be approved by the applicable state and insuring agencies. The front sheet of each copy of the submittal shall have the following typed information:

01 Job name and location.

02 General Contractor's name, address, Project Manager's name and telephone number.

03 Submitting Sub-contractor's name, address, Project Manager's name and telephone number.

04 Suppliers company name, address, salesman's name and telephone number.

05 Signature of an officer of the Sub-contractor with date and title and a statement that the submittal materials and equipment complies with the Contract Documents.

G. Approval of these submittals shall not be construed as releasing the contractor from compliance with the contract Documents. They are a means of coordinating the work and aiding in the proper selection and installation of equipment.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 00 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 00 00-1

SECTION 22 00 00 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS



1.2 INTENT OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. GENERAL: Drawings and Specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work described in either of them, shall be work required under this contract. Should any work required by the drawings and specifications be in violation of any Federal, State, County or City laws, ordinance or regulation, those laws and regulations shall prevail, and shall be complied with by the Contractor as a part of this work with no extra compensation.

B. DRAWINGS: The drawings are schematic in nature, intended to show the various components of the system approximately to scale and indicate how they are to be integrated with other parts of the building. Determine exact locations by close coordination with the Owner’s Representative, job measurements, determining the requirements of other trades and reviewing all contract documents. The Drawings indicated general routing of the various parts of the systems, but do not indicated all fittings and offsets which may be required to fit the system into spaces allotted for them. The Contract shall include these items as required for a complete installation.

C. BASIS OF DESIGN: Equipment that is scheduled is the basis of the design and has been coordinated for space, installation and electrical requirements. Equipment and models from other acceptable manufacturers have not been verified or coordinated. Contractor shall verify these requirements prior to using other equipment in his bid and include any additional costs for installation of the substitute equipment.

1.3 MATERIALS

A. GENERAL: Manufacturer's printed directions shall be followed for preparing, assembling, installing, erecting and cleaning manufactured materials or equipment, unless otherwise directed. Materials, when not otherwise definitely specified, shall conform to applicable National Specifications and Standards. All materials shall be certified to not contain any asbestos or other material banned by the Environmental Protection Agency. Lead shall not be used in any material, pipe or solder in contact with the domestic water system.

B. SUBSTITUTION: The names of manufacturers and model numbers have been used in the Contract Documents to establish type of equipment and standard of quality. Where only one name is mentioned for a particular item of material, then that manufacturer is the only one acceptable. Where several names are mentioned, any one of those listed may be furnished provided submittal contains sufficient information to show complete compliance with contract Documents. No attempt has been made to determine if each manufacturer listed will produce material that will comply with all requirements of this project or will fit the allotted space.

C. SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS: Requests for substitution during the bidding period, in accordance with the requirements of the Special Conditions, must be accompanied by a complete product submittal with all features, accessories and capacities noted. Large equipment must include a drawing to scale showing how the equipment and required access space will fit the available space. Acceptance for bidding does not waive the post


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 00 00-2

bidding requirement for formal submittal and approval.

1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. ELECTRICAL: Power wiring is specified in the Electrical Section. Controllers and starters, unless part of a motor control center, are specified under this Section.

B. PAINTING OF EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND ACCESSORIES: Painting Section. However, all items furnished under this Section shall be kept clean and free from corrosion.

C. OPENINGS: Various Sections. The locations of all inserts and openings shall be determined under this Section and coordinated with other Sections in ample time to avoid cutting new construction.

D. EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS REQUIREMENTS: Refer to structural drawings, details and notes for specific support and pipe hanging requirements. Specific loading and attachment methods shall be followed to assure that individual structural members are not overloaded.

1.5 ALTERNATES

A. PROJECT ALTERNATES: Determine the scope of each specified alternate proposal by carefully reading all Divisions of the Documents. The Bid Form contains information explaining the extent of the construction to be performed under a specific alternate. Alternate proposals, which are not predominantly plumbing in scope, are described in other Divisions of these Documents. Pay particular note to re-roofing items that may necessitate adjustments to existing piping.

1.6 PERMITS, FEES AND APPROVALS

A. The contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and fees to perform his work. He shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work specified or shown on the drawings. This applies to Federal, State and Local Codes and Requirements. Approval from the various insuring and inspection authorities shall also be obtained. Refer to Architectural sections for additional information.

1.7 PLUMBING RELATED UTILITIES

A. WATER, SEWER, STORM AND FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS: These systems will be coordinated by the Civil Engineer with the various utility districts.

B. NATURAL GAS: Contractor shall contact and coordinate with the gas provider to provide service to the building. Installation of the meter shall be in accordance with the gas company’s requirements and standards. Where the meter is located in paved areas, leave a minimum 48”x48” (or larger if required by the provider) block-out in the concrete for the gas piping to turn up to grade if the concrete is poured before the gas main is installed.

1.8 VISITING THE SITE

A. The Contractor shall be familiar with the Drawings and Specifications and shall have examined the premises and understand the conditions under which he will be obligated to operate in performing the contract. No additional compensation shall be allowed for failure to fully understand the requirements.

1.9 GUARANTEE


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 00 00-3

A. All equipment and materials furnished under this Section of these Specifications shall be new and free from any defects when accepted by the Owner and shall be guaranteed in writing for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner unless noted to have extended warranties.

1.10 NOISE AND VIBRATIONS

A. The Contractor shall guarantee that the entire system and its component items of equipment, as installed by him, shall operate without objectionable vibration or noises. If, in the opinion of the Architect, objectionable vibration or noise is present, the Contractor shall execute such remedial measures as are necessary to eliminate such unsatisfactory operating conditions and the material and labor thereby required shall be performed at the Contractor's expense.

1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. COORDINATION: The Contractor shall cooperate with other trades on the job and make installations in the proper sequence during the construction of the buildings, and he shall notify the Architect well in advance of construction of all interference of his work with that of other trades and of building construction. This notification shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibilities to coordinate his work with the total project.

B. WORKMANSHIP: All work shall be performed in a neat workmanlike manner and in the best practice of the trade. Only workmen skilled in the trades shall be employed to perform the work included in these specifications.

C. CLEAN-UP: Keep area of operations free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish at all times. All piping above accessible ceilings shall be cleaned of cement, plaster and other construction debris prior to being concealed. The parts of the Plumbing installation which are to be painted or insulated shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, grease, oil spots and other materials in preparation for painting or insulating.

D. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION: Do not deliver equipment to jobsite until it is actually needed for installation. Protect equipment from damage due to construction activities and the weather. Equipment allowed to stand in weather will be rejected and Contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment at no cost to Owner.

1.12 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

A. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: Obtain a set of project drawings and keep these at jobsite during construction. During the course of construction, mark on these prints any changes which are made, noting particularly locations for those items which will need to be located for servicing. At completion of job, mark each sheet " As-Built Drawings", date and deliver to Architect.

B. OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS: Provide four hours of instruction on operation and maintenance of the installed systems to the Owner's designated personnel upon completion of the system's installation.

C. CLOSEOUT MANUALS: At completion of job, furnish three copies of spare parts lists and operating instructions for all equipment furnished under this Division. These lists and instructions shall be published by the manufacturer of the equipment. Bind in 3-ring binders with project name.

D. SPARE PARTS: Upon completion of the installation, deliver to the Owner all tools and spare parts that are furnished by the Equipment Manufacturer for use with the equipment furnished under this Contract.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 00 00-4

1.13 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. All submittals shall be submitted in PDF form. Submittal will be reviewed with comments incorporated in this PDF. After final approval, Contractor shall provide a hard copy for use at the project site.

B. The purpose of these submittals is to attempt to aid the contractor in such a manner that improper or unacceptable materials are not delivered to or installed on the job. Shop drawings shall be approved before installation of the material under consideration. Approval of these submittals shall not be construed as releasing The Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. All materials and equipment shall be subject to final acceptance by the Engineer at completion of construction.

C. Shop Drawings shall consist of published ratings of capacity data, detailed construction drawings, wiring and control diagrams, performance curves, installation instructions, manufacturer's installation drawings and other pertinent data. Where the literature is submitted covering a group or series of similar items, the item under consideration shall be clearly indicated. Drawings shall be submitted showing revisions to equipment layouts due to use of alternate or substitute equipment. The front sheet of each copy of the submittal shall have the following typed information:


02 General Contractor's name, address, Project Manager's name and telephone number.

03 Submitting Sub-contractor's name, address, Project Manager's name and telephone number.


D. Shop Drawings are required for but are not limited to the following items:

Plumbing Carriers, Drains & Cleanouts Roof Pipe Supports Grease Trap & Sampling Wells Shower Mixing Valves Pumps Plumbing Fixtures & Equipment Insulation Plumbing Pipe, Valves & Fittings Motor Starters Trap Priming Manifolds Water Heaters Acid Dilution Basin Gas Pressure Regulators Pipe Markers Vibration Isolation Piping Materials

E. If a submittal is returned to the Contractor marked “Rejected” or “Revise and Resubmit”, only one (1) additional submittal will be permitted without the Contractor incurring charges for the additional re-submittals. SEG shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for any expense in connection with any necessary submission in addition to the two (2) submissions allowed. Contractor will be billed by SEG at a rate of $125/hr for these occurrences.

1.14 PLUMBING INSPECTIONS

A. GENERAL: Contractor shall formally request inspections of any and all plumbing systems installations. Inspections shall include but not be limited to: pipe tests, underground installations prior to backfill, rough-in installations, wall cover inspections, above ceiling inspections and final inspection.

B. Contractor shall provide a MINIMUM of 48 hour notice prior to requested inspection time, no exceptions.

C. INSPECTION REPORTS: After each inspection, SEG will generate an inspection report


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 00 00-5

and distribute promptly. The Contractor will then be given 7 working days from date of report to address all deficiencies listed on the report. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall verify that all items on each inspection report have been addressed by their subcontractors in this time period. Once verified the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall sign-off on each deficiency listed on the report and return the signed-off copy of the inspection report to SEG via e-mail. After the signed-off report is returned to SEG, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall request a re-inspection by SEG to close the report. If after 7 working days no re-inspection is requested by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR to close a report, SEG reserves the right to re-inspect whenever our schedule allows, with these re-inspections still being subject to Paragraph D below.

D. TEST REJECTIONS AND RE-INSPECTIONS: If a test is rejected or a re-inspection of an issued SEG Inspection Report is found to NOT be completely addressed, only ONE (1) additional inspection will be permitted without the Contractor incurring charges for each additional inspection required. SEG shall be reimbursed $500 by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR for expenses in connection with EACH inspection in addition to the two (2) inspections allowed.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 05 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 05 00-1

SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS



B. The General Plumbing Requirements as specified in Sections 22, apply to the work specified in this Section.

C. Equipment shall meet or follow applicable requirements in other sections of the specifications and on the drawings.

D. Equipment shall meet applicable requirements include in the NEC, UL, NEMA and ANSI Standards and be so labeled.

E. Provide Shop Drawings per Section 22 00 00.


2.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Coordinate the work with other trades to arrange for all holes, chases, and other spaces necessary for the installation of all components of the plumbing systems. Inform the other trades in ample time for these to be provided. Failure to comply with this requirement may necessitate cutting and patching work. If such work becomes necessary, it will be done under this Section of the specifications, and shall conform to all applicable requirements of other Sections of the Specifications.

B. Where concrete flooring or paving must be cut to install MEP systems, contractor shall take measures to prevent damaging existing underground services. Contractor shall utilize ground penetrating radar and electrical circuit tracing equipment in the area to be saw cut to determine the existence of underground services. When saw cutting, limit the depth of the cut to less than the thickness of the concrete. Breakout the concrete manually with special care in areas of possible underground services.

2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. All structural steel used for the purpose of fabricating pipe supports, pipe guides, pipe anchors and equipment supports, shall conform to ASTM Designation A-36. All steel used for these purposes shall be new, clean, straight and galvanized.

2.3 CONCRETE PADS

A. All equipment mounted on the floor shall have a concrete housekeeping pad. Concrete pads shall be sized for the equipment to be supplied. Pad shall exceed base dimensions by approximately 4" all around. Reinforce pads rebar including #4 bar around perimeter. Tool pad to form chamfered edge. Nominal thickness shall be 4”. Refer to details for outdoor equipment.

2.4 PIPE SUPPORTS


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 05 00-2

A. GENERAL: Provide pipe supports and guides of size and type to support pipe as well as limit movement. Minimum size hanger rod shall be 3/8”. Piping connected to a piece of equipment shall have a support located near enough to the equipment that there will be no pipe weight supported by the equipment. In no case shall the nearest support be more than two feet horizontally from the connection point. Pipe support material shall be selected to be compatible with the pipe material to prevent galvanic corrosion. Un-insulated copper piping shall be wrapped with gas wrap tape at each hanger (minimum 2” beyond hanger), and supports shall be hot dipped copper clad or plastic covered. Vertical copper piping shall have a minimum on one intermediate support if over five feet.

B. HORIZONTAL PIPING SUPPORT SPACING: As recommended by support manufacturer, but spaced not more than listed below:

Pipe Size Steel Pipe Other Pipe

1" & Smaller 6 Feet 4 Feet

1¼" & 1½" 8 Feet 5 Feet

2" 8 Feet 5 Feet

2½" to 4" 8 Feet 6 Feet

6" and Larger 8 Feet 6 Feet

C. SUPPORT FROM ABOVE: Support piping near roof or upper floor from structure if sufficient strength exists. Use a method suitable for type of construction and of sufficient strength. Use threaded steel hanger rods of diameter required to safely support loads. Minimum size hanger rod shall be 3/8”. Install rods through holes drilled in beam flanges, 1½" x 1½" x 8" angles welded to structural members or top cord slot at joist panel points and secure with large washers and nuts. Refer to structural drawing details for additional information. Hangers shall be manufactured by Grinnell or Tolco. Do not use perforated strap.

01 SINGLE RUNS OF PIPE, NO EXPANSION PROBLEM: Adjustable clevis type Grinnell Figure 260.

02 MULTIPLE RUNS: Trapeze hangers.

03 BEAM CLAMPS: Grinnell Figure 92 for smaller pipe

04 BEAM CLAMPS: Grinnell Figure 228 (storm or sanitary 8” and larger)

D. SUPPORT FROM BELOW: All piping near the floor, or where ceiling structure does not have sufficient strength, or where there is no ceiling shall be supported from below. Support members shall be steel pipe with base plates, or welded steel structure suitably braced. Unless described by detail on the drawings, provide Tolco Pipe Pier Supports four foot on center to support piping on the roof. Select for proper weight loading.

E. SUPPORT MATERIAL FINISH: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel. Provide hot dipped copper clad supports for copper piping.

F. PIPE SADDLES: Install 18 gauge, formed galvanized sheets at each support point for insulated pipe, shaped to fit pipe, and covering bottom half of pipe. Length at saddle shall be not less than twice the insulation outside diameter, 16” minimum length. Provide compressible gasketing between non-insulated plastic pipe and hangers. Provide insulating material between dissimilar metal.

G. PLUMBING CHASE PIPING: Plumbing piping located in chases and at individual fixtures not located at chases shall be rigidly supported and aligned using the Sumner Pipe Support and Alignment System, Hubbard Holdrite System or Unistrut with U-bolts and pipe clips.

H. SWAY BRACING: All horizontal no-hub cast iron piping larger than 4” shall have sway


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 05 00-3

bracing per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION

A. GENERAL: All vibration isolation devices shall be designed and furnished by a single manufacturer, or supplier, who will be responsible for adequate coordination of all phases of this work. Submittal data shall show type, size and deflection of each isolator proposed.

B. CORROSION PROTECTION:

01 All vibration isolators shall be designed or treated for resistance to corrosion.

02 Steel components shall be PVC coated or phosphated and painted with industrial grade enamel. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc electroplated. Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of welding slag and primed with zinc chromate or metal etching primer. A finish coat of industrial enamel shall be applied over the primer.

C. SELECTION: Spring deflections listed are static deflection and are minimum requirements. Isolation efficiencies listed are the minimum required. The springs shall be capable of 30% over-travel before becoming solid (minimum 1/2" clearance at final inspection). All isolators supporting a given piece of equipment shall be selected for approximately equal deflection.

D. FIRST TWO PIPE HANGERS FROM EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT ISOLATED ON SPRINGS: Provide a spring hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box, coil spring, spring cups, neoprene impregnated fabric washer and steel washer. The hanger box shall be capable of supporting a load of 200% of rated load without noticeable deformation or failure. Static deflection shall be equal to isolation units supporting equipment to which piping is connected.

E. FIRST TWO PIPE HANGERS FROM EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT ON ISOLATORS OTHER THAN SPRINGS: Provide an elastomeric hanger, consisting of a rectangular steel box and an elastomeric isolation element, which shall be of Neoprene or high quality synthetic rubber with anti-ozone additive. The elements shall be designed for approximately 1/4" deflection and loaded so that deflection does not exceed 15% of the free height of the element. The design shall be such as to prevent metal-to-metal contact between the hanger rod and the steel box.

F. PUMPS: Mount floor mounted pumps on a CPF inertia base consisting of steel pouring frame with reinforcing bars welded in place and inboard isolator attachments with Amber/Booth Type RSW-1 spring isolators, 1" deflection.

G. FLEXIBLE HOSE: Flexible connections at pumps shall be stainless steel flexible hose with flanges and stainless steel wire braid. Amber Booth Type SS-FP.

H. AIR COMPRESSORS AND VACUUM PUMPS: Mount air compressor on a pad type mounting consisting of two layers of 3/8" ribbed neoprene bonded to galvanized steel separator plate with free hole drilled through all. Provide top bearing plate with hole to spread point loads. Size pads for approximately 40 PSI load.

I. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Amber/Booth, Kinetics, Korfund, Mason, Peabody, Vibra-Sonics, Vibration Mountings and Southeastern Hose.

2.2 VALVE AND FITTING SIZES

A. All hand valves, fittings and other piping accessories shall be size of the line in which installed unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

2.3 VALVES, STRAINERS AND DEVICES


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 05 00-4

A. GENERAL: All pressures shown below are minimum working pressures. Provide memory stops for valves used for throttling service. All devices shall suitable for domestic water service.

B. BALL VALVE: Provide for 2" and smaller pipe: Bronze body, threaded connection, full port, Teflon seat, stainless steel trim, extension stem for insulation. Nibco T-585-70-66-EL

C. BUTTERFLY: 2½" and larger, 200# full lug ductile iron type body, EPDM stem seals and seat liner, aluminum bronze disc, 416 stainless steel stem, extended neck for insulated lines, notched top plate with handle for throttling. All valves certified suitable for dead end service with no downstream flange. Nibco LD-2000

D. GATE VALVE: Provide for copper pipe 2½" and larger only: 150# bronze, threaded connection, union bonnet, solid wedge and rising stem. Nibco T-134 or F-617-0. Nibco LD-2000-3, 200 psig butterfly valve with lever-lock operator shall be acceptable in lieu of gate valve.

E. GAS VALVES: Ball type ANSI B16.33-1981, ANSI B16.38-1978 or UL 842-1980 approved and rated at the gas pressure of application. Nibco T-580-70-UL

F. SMALL GAS COCKS: Nibco T-585-70-UL

G. SHUTOFF VALVE AT GAS METER: Rockwell plug valve with grease fittings

H. CHECK: 2" and under, 125# bronze body, bronze swing check with Teflon seat; 2½" and over 125# iron body, flanged, bronze trim. Nibco T-413-Y or W-920-W

I. UNIONS: Brass insert, ground joint

J. INSULATION PROVISIONS: Valves on insulated lines shall have stems extending through insulation.

K. BACKFLOW PREVENTER: Provide Watts Series U-909SQT preventer at makeup water connection to building chilled and heating water systems. Provide 909AG air gap drain funnel with drain line extension. No other brand or model is acceptable.

L. INSTALLATION: Ball and butterfly valves shall be installed such that handle for valve is positioned on the side of the pipe and is pulled down to close the valve. All valves above a ceiling shall be installed within 24” of the ceiling.

M. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Milwaukee and Nibco

2.4 MOTORS

A. GENERAL: This section applies to motors larger than 1/2 horsepower and not part of an assembly. Select for starting torque and current, suitable to start and continuously run equipment served. Horsepower rating shown on Drawings are preferred, but motor must not be loaded more than 1.0 X nameplate horsepower. Provide larger motor if required to stay within this limitation, and include all costs for any required increases in the electrical system. All motors shall have metallic nameplates marked with information required by NEC 430-7. Motors that are controlled by inverters shall be designed for this application.

B. ENCLOSURE: Drip proof for locations protected from the weather; totally enclosed fan cooled for exposure to weather or installed inside air handling units or serving pumps. Frame construction shall be steel or cast iron with all surfaces including air passages coated with a rust inhibiting primer and finished with an alkyd or epoxy enamel paint.

C. INSULATION: Class B for maximum 40° C ambient, Class F or H or higher.

D. EFFICIENCY: Motors shall be premium efficiency type and have all copper windings.

E. SERVICE FACTOR: 1.15.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 05 00-5

F. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS: Provide nameplate ratings the same as circuit voltage indicated on the electrical drawings. Coordinate to give proper operation with starting equipment scheduled.

G. SINGLE PHASE MOTORS: Permanent split capacitor start unless special load requires another type, resilient mounting, inherent overload protection and sealed bearings requiring no lubrication but with provisions for future lubrication.

H. THREE PHASE MOTORS: Ball bearings with grease lubrication fitting on top and drain on side or bottom. Provide sleeve bearings with oil cups for units requiring minimum noise level. Average bearing life shall be 150,000 hours.

I. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Allis Chalmers, Baldor, Century, General Electric,

Marathon, Reliance, Siemens, US Motors and Westinghouse.

2.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Ball and butterfly valves shall be installed such that handle for valve is positioned on the side of the pipe and is pulled down to close the valve. Provide access panels of adequate size for concealed valves. All valves above a ceiling shall be installed within 24” of the ceiling.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. GENERAL: Each piece of mechanical equipment shall be suitably marked with the name as listed on the plans. Name shall be prominently displayed so it may be easily located and read after equipment installation. Pumps may be marked on adjacent piping.

B. The following equipment shall be marked with decal or stencil painted, 3" high letters:

01 Water Heaters

C. Install factory made arrow marker on piping in Mechanical Rooms.

2.7 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify all new system piping. Use EMED Co. Kwik-Koil Pipe Markers of appropriate legend and background color, complete with direction arrow. Select appropriate size for O.D. of piping including insulation. Markers or arrows not wrapping the full circumference of the pipe shall be tie wrapped in place, otherwise taped at each end.

B. Apply markers as follows:

01 At input and output of each piece of equipment inside building.

02 At each valve not in a mechanical room.

03 At every point a pipe enters or exits a wall or floor.

04 At intervals not exceeding 20 feet.

C. These markers shall conform to OSHA and ANSI A 13.1 Codes. Arrow markers must have same ANSI background colors as their companion pipe markers and wrap completely around pipe with 3” overlap.

D. Pipe markers and arrow markers shall be provided as follows:

01 Domestic Hot Water

02 Domestic Cold Water

03 Domestic Hot Water Return


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 05 00-6

04 Natural Gas

2.8 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. GENERAL: Each valve 2” and larger, except those located adjacent to the equipment they serve, shall have a tag of .050-inch-thick by 1½" diameter brass, stamped or engraved with the valve number and service symbol. Attach tag to the valve with stainless steel chain.

B. SCHEDULE: Furnish a valve schedule properly identifying the valve number and service with the exact location, the material within the pipe and the room numbers or area that the valve serves. Mark the symbol and number of all valves, exactly as the valves are tagged on the "As Built" Drawings. Provide one valve schedule, as above, installed in aluminum frame with plastic shield, and mount on wall of main equipment room.

C. CEILING IDENTIFICATION: For valves above accessible ceilings, glue red star on ceiling tee intersection nearest the valve location.

2.9 PAINTING

A. GENERAL: All piping or insulation on piping exposed to view shall be painted. Insulated pipe with required metal jacket shall not be painted. All above grade gas piping shall be painted.

B. PAINT TYPE: Industrial grade, high gloss enamel over suitable primer. Provide two finish coats.

C. COLOR CODING: (Verify with Architect prior to painting)

01 Gas Piping Yellow

02 Fire System Red

2.10 HEAT TRACE SYSTEM

A. GENERAL: Install freeze protection system on plumbing piping where noted on the Drawings.

B. MATERIALS: Raychem XL-Trace self-regulating heat tape, Catalog 2XL1-CR/CT, 2 watts per foot, 208 volts. Provide power connection kit for plugging into a receptacle, end seal and thermostat.

C. INSTALLATION: Install straight along bare pipe wrapping twice around valves. Tie wrap to pipe at short intervals. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

2.11 ACCESS PANELS

A. REQUIRED: Panels of size and location to provide access to all concealed valves and equipment. Obtain Architect's approval of locations and type before ordering.

B. SIZE: Minimum 12" x 12", larger where required for adequate service access.

C. WALL MOUNTED: Best suited for surface materials in which installed, constructed of 12 gauge stainless steel, complete with anchor straps, concealed hinges, dust tight door and cylinder lock, all doors keyed alike. Prime coated steel is acceptable for installation in painted surfaces. U. L. Listed for 1-1/2 hour rating.

D. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Acudor, Mi-Fab and Zurn.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 05 00-7

2.12 CLEANING DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Flush thoroughly, then sterilize with chlorine solution for minimum 24 hours. Strength of chlorine solution shall be a minimum dosage 50 ppm, and methods must comply with local Code and Health Authorities. System shall be flushed afterwards with clean water until remaining chlorine content is less than 0.2 ppm. At completion, there must be no discernible odor. Post warnings until sterilization is complete.

2.13 TESTING WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

A. GENERAL: Test all piping systems to assure that they are absolutely leak free. Pipe to be insulated shall be proved leak free before pipe is concealed. SEG to witness and approve all testing. If piping is concealed prior to SEG witnessing and approving testing, contractor shall expose entire piping system and re-test piping for SEG to witness and approve.

B. PRESSURE TEST METHOD: Hydraulically test domestic water piping with a minimum test pressure of 125 psig. Maintain pressure for 8 hours. During this test period, inspect all pipe fittings and accessories in the piping and eliminate all leaks.

C. FINAL TEST: Subject each piping system to its normal operating pressure and temperature for not less than twenty-four hours. The piping systems must remain absolutely tight during this period. The satisfactory completion of any test or series of tests will not relieve the contractor of responsibility for ultimate proper and satisfactory operation of piping systems and their accessories.

2.14 TESTING SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SYSTEMS

A. GENERAL: Test all piping systems to assure that they are absolutely leak free. Test for sanitary piping shall include the first fitting above slab (i.e. transition fitting between underground PVC and cast iron). Pipes that will contain water or sewage shall be leak tested with water. Pipe to be insulated shall be proved leak free before pipe is concealed. SEG to witness and approve all testing. If piping is concealed prior to SEG witnessing and approving testing, contractor shall expose entire piping system and re-test piping for SEG to witness and approve.

B. PRESSURE TEST METHOD: For drainage systems, plug outlet and fill piping with water to top of vent. System shall remain plugged and filled with water until after system below grade is backfilled and compacted per specification. Multistory systems shall be tested one floor at a time at ten feet of hydrostatic head without leaks. Maintain pressure for 8 hours. During this test period, inspect all pipe fittings and accessories in the piping and eliminate all leaks.

C. UNDERGROUND PIPE TESTING AND INSPECTION

01 Initial open trench underground piping tested to 10-foot head for 8 hours. SEG will inspect pipe installation, approve/reject test and approve installation for backfill.

02 Pipe to remain full of water through backfill and compaction.

03 After backfill and compaction, pipes to be topped off for 10-foot head to account for evaporation. New water level to be marked and dated on pipe.

04 Prior to concrete pour, Architect’s CA (already on site for concrete pour) and Contractor to check water levels and CA to approve/reject test for concrete pour.

05 After concrete is poured and dry, Architect’s CA or SEG to check water levels and approve/reject pipe tests accordingly. Test shall not be removed until approval is granted by A/E team.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 05 00-8

06 If water drops or is released prior to A/E review after concrete is placed then an investigation will begin immediately by the sub and GC to locate the problem. If issue is determined to be a leak then it must be located, concrete removed, corrections made, pipe re-tested and water from test left on until after re-compaction and concrete placement.

D. FINAL TEST: Test underground PVC sanitary drainage piping for physical deformation by passing a mandrel of 95% pipe inside diameter through piping 8" and larger. Just prior to substantial complete, contractor shall smoke test all sanitary and vent piping to confirm that the piping system is complete, access cleanouts are properly installed and all joints are tight.

E. UNDERGROUND PIPE CLEANING AND CERTIFICATION: All underground sanitary sewer piping shall be hydro-flushed or rodded prior to substantial completion. After cleaning, contractor shall provide 3rd-party subcontractor to camera and video tape inside of all underground sanitary sewer piping and provide video tape as well as detailed report outlining quality of installation and noting exact areas of poor installation. Contractor shall repair all areas noted as problems and re-camera/video tape those areas to confirm proper installation at no cost to the Owner. Just prior to substantial complete, contractor shall smoke test all sanitary and vent piping to confirm that the piping system is complete, access cleanouts are properly installed and all joints are tight. Owner’s Representative and the Engineer shall both be present at smoke testing to review and approve. Both Owner and the Engineer must approve smoke testing of sanitary and vent systems before substantial completion can be granted.

2.15 TESTING GAS PIPING SYSTEMS

A. GENERAL: All new and existing gas piping shall be tested and repaired as required for safe operation and the passing of the Texas Railroad Commission requirements. All testing shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer and the Owner’s Representative.

B. GAS PIPING TESTING

01 Preliminary gas test as required by Code, but a minimum test pressure of 50 PSIG held for not less than eight hours without noticeable drop.

02 Test joints with a soap solution while lines are under pressure. Repair any leaks that are detected.

03 Final gas test shall be with a 24 inch column of mercury or a diaphragm gauge with a minimum dial size of 3.5 inches with a set hand and a pressure range not to exceed 20 PSIG with 2/10 pound increments. The minimum test pressure shall be not less than 10 PSIG and the maximum pressure shall not exceed 12 PSIG. The test shall be observed by the Engineer and the Owner’s Representative for a minimum of 30 minutes with no drop in pressure.

04 Perform gas piping test as required by the Texas Railroad Commission and submit competed Texas Pipeline Safety Form PS-86B.

05 Provide a copy of the gas pressure test reports in the Operations & Maintenance Manual provided at closeout.


2.16 SLEEVES


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 05 00-9

A. Provide sleeves for all piping passing through walls, floors not on grade and roof slabs. Make sleeves of galvanized pipe and sized to provide clearance of 1/4" around piping or pipe insulation if pipe is insulated. Set end of sleeve flush with the surrounding surface of wall or ceiling in which sleeve is installed. Floor slab sleeves shall extend 3" above floor level. Provide vented sleeves for all gas piping below floor slabs, paved areas and unventilated walls and ceiling cavities. Pipes through grade beams shall be sleeved per structural engineer’s drawings. As a minimum pipe through structure shall be wrapped with 1” thick closed cell pipe insulation.

B. Sleeves through floors and through fire walls shall be fire caulked or otherwise protected to maintain the fire rating of the wall.

2.17 PLATES

A. Provide chromium plated wall and ceiling plates for all exposed piping, at point piping passes through walls or ceilings. Plates shall be large enough to completely cover pipe sleeves. On insulated piping, inside diameter of plates shall just exceed outside diameter of pipe covering. Plates may be omitted for pipe sizes larger than 3".

2.18 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Provide dielectric insulating unions at all connections between dissimilar metals.

2.19 MISCELLANEOUS COPPER PIPING

A. GENERAL: Provide all required piping not specifically shown on the drawings but necessary for the proper operation of the systems and equipment. Piping materials, methods of installation, fittings, valves, etc., shall conform to that specified for similar piping systems.

B. PLUMBING CONNECTIONS: Make all required connections between HVAC Systems and Plumbing Systems. Pipe extensions to equipment shall be same materials as supply. Provide a valve at each and every connection between Plumbing and HVAC Systems.

C. TRAP PRIMER PIPING: Use Type K copper. Piping in contact with concrete shall be installed in a protective sleeve.

D. MISCELLANEOUS DRAINS: Provide drain line to floor drain from backflow preventers, relief valves and other plumbing equipment with automatic drains.

2.20 ROUGH-INS AND CONNECTIONS

A. SPECIAL FIXTURES AND TRIM: Provide rough-ins and connections to cabinet sinks and all trim where shown on the Drawings. Fixtures and trim requiring rough-ins and connections will be furnished loose under the special equipment section of those specifications, installation shall be under this Section. Refer to Architectural Specifications for information on prefab cabinets. Provide stops, risers and P-traps under this Section for prefab cabinets and kitchen equipment provided under the Architectural Specifications.

B. COORDINATION: The piping and connections for these areas have been indicated approximately. The exact arrangements and locations of various piping and connections shall be determined by shop drawings provided under other sections of these Specifications.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District PLUMBING INSULATION Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 07 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 07 00-1

SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL








A. Install all insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications.

B. Insulation materials manufactured by the following list of companies will be acceptable provided their materials conform to these specifications: Armstrong, CertainTeed, Knauf, Koolphen, Manville and Owens-Corning.

C. Flame Spread and Smoke Requirements:

01 All jackets, adhesives, coatings, insulating materials and vapor barrier mastics for piping and equipment shall have a flame spread not higher than 25 and smoke developed rating not higher than 50.

02 All materials containers shall have a U. L. Label.

D. At each pipe support point, provide 10” long, formed 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal saddle. For piping 1½” and larger, install a hard section of Koolphen K phenolic foam pipe insulation the same length as the pipe saddle. Seal and finish to match adjoining insulation.

E. Install .020" thick aluminum jacket with minimum 2” overlap joint on all insulated piping exposed outside building. Install factory made aluminum covers on all elbows. Cut aluminum neatly to fit all tees, such that all insulation is covered by aluminum. Use waterproofing aluminum colored Foster 95-44 or Childers CP-76-1 sealer to seal all joints. Provide .020x3/4” aluminum bands not more than 12" on center for all jacketing. Install aluminum covers on insulated pipe inside that is exposed to view in finished areas including inside gymnasiums. Cover is not required in mechanical or AHU rooms.


2.1 DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING

A. GENERAL: Insulate all water piping outside and above grade, in exterior walls, within eight feet of exterior walls, central mechanical and boiler room piping, piping inside the building but outside the building insulation and all piping subject to condensation.

B. MATERIALS FOR PIPING INSIDE BUILDING: 1" thick factory molded pipe covering


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 07 00-2

insulation made with fiberglass having a density not less than 3 pounds per cubic foot. Conductivity (k) shall be .25 or less at 100° mean temperature difference. Insulation shall have a factory attached fire retardant jacket.

C. MATERIALS FOR PIPING OUTSIDE BUILDING: Insulate piping outside including backflow preventers outside with 1” thick Molded Koolphen K phenolic foam pipe insulation. Install .010” stainless steel protective jacket. Insulation and jacketing for backflow preventers shall be installed with easily removable sections to allow periodic servicing, testing and inspection of backflow preventer without damaging insulation installation or integrity.

D. INSTALLATION: Install insulation over pipe and carefully connect seal sealing laps. Provide 3" butt strips at each joint between sections, sealed with Foster 85-75 or Childers CP-82 adhesive. Coat all vapor retarder film (ASJ) longitudinal and butt joints with anti-fungal Foster 30-80AF vapor barrier coating to prevent moisture ingress. Reinforcing mesh shall be 10x10 Childers Chil Glas #10 or Foster Mast a Fab. Apply Foster 95-50 or Childers CP-76 insulation joint sealant in phenolic insulation longitudinal and butt joints to prevent moisture ingress.

E. FITTINGS: Insulate fittings with pre-molded cover of same materials and thickness as pipe covering. Coat all fittings and elbows with anti-fungal Foster 30-80AF vapor barrier coating and 10x10 Childers Chil Glas #10 or Foster Mast a Fab reinforcing mesh. Finish all joints and seams smooth and even.

2.2 DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPING

A. GENERAL: Insulate all hot water supply and return piping, including booster heater piping and tempered water piping.

B. MATERIALS: 1" thick factory molded pipe covering insulation made with fiberglass having a density not less than 3 pounds per cubic foot. Conductivity (k) shall be .25 or less at 100° mean temperature difference. Insulation shall have a factory attached fire retardant jacket.

C. EXECUTION: Secure all laps and joints with staples at 4" on center. Provide 3" butt strips at each joint between sections. Insulate fittings with pre-molded cover of same materials and thickness as pipe covering.

2.3 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING ABOVE SLAB

A. GENERAL: Insulate horizontal and vertical piping including roof drain bodies, including overflow drains and piping.

B. MATERIALS: 1½" thick flexible fiberglass blanket with vapor barrier or 1" thick fiberglass pipe insulation with vapor barrier. Insulated piping exposed to view shall be insulated with pipe insulation.

C. EXECUTION: Seal vapor retarder laps with white Foster 85-75 or Childers CP-82 and staple at 4" on center. Vapor seal staples with Foster 30-80AF. Provide 3" butt strips at each joint between sections and seal as above. Install vapor stop every 15'-0" using Foster 30-80AF. Finish all joints and seams smooth and even. Reinforcing mesh shall be 10x10 Childers Chil Glas #10 or Foster Mast a Fab. This application shall provide a minimum dry film thickness of 37 mils. Piping exposed to view in finished areas, including inside gymnasiums, shall have aluminum jacketing per specification.

2.4 SANITARY DRAIN PIPING ABOVE GRADE

A. GENERAL: Insulate horizontal piping, floor drain bodies, elbow at drain, first elbow that


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 07 00-3

turns down and all piping in ceiling plenums of sanitary system serving floor and hub drains receiving condensate from air conditioning and refrigeration equipment.

B. MATERIALS: 1½" thick flexible fiberglass blanket with vapor barrier or 1/2" thick pipe insulation with vapor barrier. Insulated piping exposed to view shall be insulated with pipe insulation.

C. EXECUTION: Seal vapor retarder laps with white Foster 85-75 or Childers CP-82 and staple at 4" on center. Vapor seal staples with Foster 30-80AF. Provide 3" butt strips at each joint between sections and seal as above. Install vapor stop every 15'-0" using Foster 30-80AF. Finish all joints and seams smooth and even. Reinforcing mesh shall be 10x10 Childers Chil Glas #10 or Foster Mast a Fab.

2.5 DRINKING FOUNTAIN DRAIN LINES

A. Insulate from connections to fountains to connection to next larger size drain, or, if drain runs into floor, from fountain to floor, with 1/2" thick pipe covering the same as for Domestic Cold Water Piping.

2.6 FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING

A. Insulate all water piping outside and above grade, in exterior walls, within two feet of exterior walls, and piping inside the building but outside the building insulation (i.e. above insulation on ceiling) with 1" thick factory molded fiberglass pipe covering, density not less than 3 pounds per cubic foot, conductivity (k) not higher than .25 at 100° mean temperature difference with factory attached fire retardant, vapor barrier jacket. Piping inside mechanical rooms with local space heater or boiler need not be insulated.

2.7 LAP AND JOINT ATTACHMENT

A. Self-sealing type jackets will be acceptable provided the laps are sealed per the manufacturers recommendations.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District BUILDING WATER DISTRIBUTION Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 11 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 11 00-1

SECTION 22 11 00 BUILDING WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Piping shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner parallel to building coordinates with vertical drops.

B. Piping shall be concealed in wall, chases and above ceilings except in the vicinity of equipment such as water heaters.

C. Piping in the vicinity of equipment shall be arranged to not interfere with access panels and maintenance space. Provide unions, flanges and shutoff valves to allow removal of the equipment and its subassemblies without having to remove excessive amounts of building piping or drain water systems.

D. Piping shown underground shall be buried a minimum of 12 inches to top of pipe.

E. All materials shall conform to the City Building Code. All piping, fittings and valves shall be manufactured in the United States of America.







PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 EXTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER

A. GENERAL: This paragraph relates to all water piping below grade, all piping above grade outside of building and piping in contact with concrete.

B. MATERIALS: Type "K" copper rigid water tubing per ASTM B-42 and ASTM B-88, with solder type ASME B 16.18 cast bronze, or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy fittings. Piping in contact with concrete shall be protected with Benjamin Foster 60-25 mastic or be PVC coated.

C. INSTALLATION: Clean inside and outside of all tubing and fittings. Make up joints with lead-free solder. Solder shall be 95.5% tin, 4% copper, 0.5% silver (lead free, antimony free, zinc-free). Silvabrite 100 by Engelhard Corporation or approved equal.

D. TESTING: Test in accordance with recommendations of AWWA.

Aldine Independent School District BUILDING WATER DISTRIBUTION Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 11 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 11 00-2

2.2 INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER

A. GENERAL: This paragraph relates to all piping inside of building.

B. MATERIALS:

01 All piping shall be hard drawn, copper water tube, Type "L" per ASTM B-88, with solder type ASME B 16.18 cast bronze, or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy fittings, made up with lead-free solder. Victaulic copper piping connection system or Grinnell grooved system may be used for sizes 3” and larger.

02 All individual branches serving fixtures, from surface of walls to connections to fixtures or equipment, shall be chrome plated.

03 Solder shall be 95.5% tin, 4% copper, 0.5% silver (lead free, antimony free, zinc-free). Silvabrite 100 by Engelhard Corporation or approved equal.

04 Press Fit System is acceptable.

05 Below grade water piping may be soft drawn copper without joint below slab. Note only allowed where specifically shown and must be sleeved.

C. AIR CHAMBERS: Install in each water branch, at each fixture and each piece of water supplied equipment. Locate in chases or walls as close to fixture or equipment as possible. Chambers shall be minimum 24" high Type L copper.

D. WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS: Provide on both hot and cold water branches in addition to air chambers at each bank of fixtures and also where shown on the Drawings. Arresters shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. or Sioux Chief, size and location shall be based on pipe size, fixture unit count and manufacturer’s recommendation.

E. VALVES: Provide shutoff valve in branch line to each piece of water consuming equipment or fixture. Stop valves serving plumbing fixtures do not require additional valve unless shown on the Drawings.

F. SLEEVES: Where water piping is shown below slabs to serve island sinks, etc. shall be encased in DWV PVC sleeve with solvent joints. Sleeve shall extend above slab.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 221113 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004

90% Construction Documents – 01/24/2017 221113 - 1

SECTION 221113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for water service and fire-service mains.

B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.

B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

C. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic.

D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

E. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings.

H. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for alarms.



1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.

2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.

3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping.

E. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products.

F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.

G. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.

2. Comply with NSF 61 Annex G for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:



1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-

point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Architect's written

permission.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC, Schedule 40 Pipe: ASTM D 1785.

1. PVC, Schedule 40 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466.



B. PVC, Schedule 80 Pipe: ASTM D 1785.

1. PVC, Schedule 80 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467. 2. PVC, Schedule 80 Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464.

C. PVC, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C900, [Class 150] [and] [Class 200], with bell end with gasket, and with spigot end.

1. Comply with UL 1285 for fire-service mains if indicated. 2. PVC Fabricated Fittings: AWWA C900, [Class 150] [and] [Class 200], with bell-and-spigot

or double-bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. 3. PVC Molded Fittings: AWWA C907, Class 150, with bell-and-spigot or double-bell ends.

Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. 4. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern

or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

5. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

2.2 GATE VALVES

A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:

1. Nonrising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with cast-iron or bronze double-disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stem, and stem nut.

1) Standard: AWWA C500. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

2. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.

1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.



3. Nonrising-Stem, High-Pressure, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.

1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa). 3) End Connections: Push on or mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

4. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with cast-iron double disc, bronze disc and seat rings, and bronze stem.

1) Standard: AWWA C500. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged.

5. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, and bronze stem.

1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged.

B. UL/FMG, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: 1. UL/FMG, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating material, and inside screw.

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged.

2. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet and bronze seating material.

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged.

C. Bronze Gate Valves:

1. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Bronze body and bonnet and bronze stem.



1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3) End Connections: Threaded.

2. Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Class 125, Type 1, bronze with solid wedge, threaded ends, and malleable-iron handwheel.

1) Standard: MSS SP-80.

2.3 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:

1. Tapping Sleeve Assemblies shall be from a manufacturer acceptance to the water service provider.

2. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.

a. Standard: MSS SP-60. b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve

with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.

c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches (125 mm) in diameter.

1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve.

2.4 CHECK VALVES

A. AWWA Check Valves:

1. Description: Swing-check type with resilient seat. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550 and ends to match piping.

a. Standard: AWWA C508. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

B. UL/FMG, Check Valves:



1. Description: Swing-check type with pressure rating; rubber-face checks, unless otherwise indicated; and ends matching piping.

a. Standards: UL 312 and FMG approved. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

2.5 DETECTOR CHECK VALVES

A. Detector Check Valves: 1. Description: Galvanized cast-iron body, bolted cover with air-bleed device for access to

internal parts, and flanged ends. Include one-piece bronze disc with bronze bushings, pivot, and replaceable seat. Include threaded bypass taps in inlet and outlet for bypass meter connection. Set valve to allow minimal water flow through bypass meter when major water flow is required.

a. Standards: UL 312 and FMG approved. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. c. Water Meter: Meter shall meet the specification of jurisdiction providing water

service.

2. Description: Iron body, corrosion-resistant clapper ring and seat ring material, flanged ends, with connections for bypass and installation of water meter.

a. Standards: UL 312 and FMG approved. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa).

2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. AWWA Butterfly Valves: 1. Description: Rubber seated.

a. Standard: AWWA C504. b. Body: Cast or ductile iron. c. Body Type: Flanged d. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).

B. UL Butterfly Valves: 1. Description: Metal on resilient material seating.

a. Standards: UL 1091 and FMG approved. b. Body: Cast or ductile iron. c. Body Type: Flanged. d. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa).



2.7 PLUG VALVES

A. Plug Valves: 1. Description: Resilient-seated eccentric.

a. Standard: MSS SP-108. b. Body: Cast iron. c. Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1207-kPa) minimum CWP. d. Seat Material: Suitable for potable-water service.

2.8 CORPORATION VALVES

A. Service-Saddle Assemblies: Comply with AWWA C800. Include saddle and valve compatible with tapping machine.

1. Service Saddle: Copper alloy with seal and AWWA C800, threaded outlet for corporation valve.

2. Corporation Valve: Bronze body and ground-key plug, with AWWA C800, threaded inlet and outlet matching service piping material.

3. Manifold: Copper fitting with two to four inlets as required, with ends matching corporation valves and outlet matching service piping material.

2.9 WATER METERS

A. Water meters shall comply with utility company specifications.

B. Displacement-Type Water Meters:

1. Description: With bronze main case.

a. Standard: AWWA C700. b. Registration: Flow in gallons.

C. Turbine-Type Water Meters:

1. Description:


D. Compound-Type Water Meters:

1. Description:




E. Remote Registration System:

1. Description: Utility company standard; direct-reading type. Include meter modified with signal-transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly.


F. Remote Registration System:

1. Description: Utility company standard; encoder type. Include meter modified with signal-transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly.

a. Standard: AWWA C707. b. Registration: Flow in gallons. c. Data-Acquisition Units: Comply with utility company requirements for type and

quantity. d. Visible Display Units: Comply with utility company requirements for type and

quantity.

2.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:

1. Standard: AWWA C511. 2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 3. Size: As stated in the drawings. 4. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2

(DN 65) and larger.

B. Double-Check, Detector-Assembly Backflow Preventers:

1. Standards: ASSE 1048 and UL listed or FMG approved. 2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 3. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 4. Size: As stated on drawings. 5. End Connections: Flanged. 6. Accessories:

a. Valves: UL 262, FMG-approved, OS&Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Bypass: With displacement-type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced-pressure backflow preventer.

C. Backflow Preventer Test Kits:

1. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-procedure instructions.



2.11 PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURES

A. Weather-Resistant Enclosures:

1. Description: Uninsulated enclosure designed to protect aboveground water piping, equipment, or specialties from weather and damage.

a. Standard: ASSE 1060. b. Class III: For equipment or devices other than pressure or atmospheric vacuum

breakers. c. Class III-V: For pressure or atmospheric vacuum breaker equipment or devices.

Include drain opening in housing.

1) Housing: Reinforced aluminum construction.

a) Size: Of dimensions indicated, but not less than those required for access and service of protected unit.

b) Drain opening for units with drain connection. c) Access doors with locking devices. d) Anchoring devices for attaching housing to concrete base.

B. Expanded-Metal Enclosures:

1. Description: Enclosure designed to protect aboveground water piping, equipment, or specialties from damage.

a. Material: ASTM F 1267, expanded metal side and top panels, of weight and with reinforcement of same metal at edges as required for rigidity.

b. Type: Type I, expanded. c. Class: Class 3, corrosion-resisting steel. d. Finish: Manufacturer's enamel paint. e. Size: Of dimensions indicated, but not less than those required for access and

service of protected unit. f. Locking device. g. Lugs or devices for securing enclosure to base.

C. Enclosure Bases:

1. Description: 4-inch minimum thickness precast concrete, of dimensions required to extend at least 6 inches (150 mm) beyond edges of enclosure housings. Include openings for piping.

2.12 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants:

1. Manufacturer shall be listed on the City of Houston approved water products list. 2. Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4-1/2 (DN 115) and two NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)

outlets, 5-1/4-inch (133-mm) main valve, drain valve, and NPS 6 (DN 150) mechanical-joint inlet. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550. Hydrant shall have cast-iron body, compression-type valve opening against pressure and closing with pressure.



a. Standard: AWWA C502. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum.

3. Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4-1/2 (DN 115) and two NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) outlets, 5-1/4-inch (133-mm) main valve, drain valve, and NPS 6 (DN 150) mechanical-joint inlet. Hydrant shall have cast-iron body, compression-type valve opening against pressure and closing with pressure.

a. Standards: UL 246, FMG approved. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. c. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire

department. Include cast-iron caps with steel chains. d. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) point to flat. e. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to left or

counterclockwise. f. Exterior Finish: Red alkyd-gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated, by

jurisdiction having authority.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.

B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

D. Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.

E. Underground water-service piping 1” to 30” size shall be the following:

1. PVC, Schedule [40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40] [80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80] socket fittings;

and solvent-cemented joints.

F. Underground water-service piping 4” to 8” size shall be the following:

1. NPS 4 through NPS 8 PVC, AWWA Class 150 pipe; PVC, AWWA C900, DR18 pressure Class 150 psi fabricated or molded fittings; and gasketed joints.



G. Water Meter Box Water-Service Piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 2 DN 20 to DN 50 shall be same as underground water-service piping.

H. Underground Fire-Service-Main Piping 4” to 8” shall be the following:

1. PVC, AWWA Class 150 pipe listed for fire-protection service; PVC Class 150 fabricated or molded fittings; and gasketed joints.

I. Underground Combined Water-Service and Fire-Service-Main Piping 4” to 8” shall be[the following: 1. PVC, AWWA Class C900 DR-18 pressure 150 pipe listed for fire-protection service; PVC

fabricated or molded fittings of same class as pipe; and gasketed joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger underground installation. Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG, nonrising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller installation.

B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valves with valve box.

2. Underground Valves, NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger, for Indicator Posts: UL/FMG, cast-iron, nonrising-stem gate valves with indicator post.

3. Use the following for valves in vaults and aboveground:

a. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze, nonrising stem.

b. Gate Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AWWA, cast iron, OS&Y rising stem, resilient seated or UL/FMG, cast iron, OS&Y rising stem.

c. Check Valves: AWWA C508 or UL/FMG, swing type.

4. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults and aboveground to control water pressure.

5. Relief Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults and aboveground.

a. Air-Release Valves: To release accumulated air. b. Air/Vacuum Valves: To release or admit large volume of air during filling of piping. c. Combination Air Valves: To release or admit air.

6. Detector Check Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults and aboveground to detect unauthorized use of water.



3.4 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. See Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for piping-system common requirements.

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main.

B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated.

C. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.

D. Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to ASTM F 645 and AWWA M23.

E. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches.

1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches cover over top.

F. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other obstructions that cannot be disturbed.

G. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.

1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed.

H. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. See Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Make pipe joints according to the following: 1. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to AWWA C900. Construct

joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used include the following:



1. Concrete thrust blocks. 2. Locking mechanical joints. 3. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands. 4. Bolted flanged joints. 5. Heat-fused joints. 6. Pipe clamps and tie rods.

B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: 1. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23. 2. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.

C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices.


A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.

C. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.

D. UL/FMG, Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.

E. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.

F. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with service box.

G. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in vault or aboveground between shutoff valves. Install full-size valved bypass.

H. Relief Valves: Comply with AWWA C512. Install aboveground with shutoff valve on inlet.

3.9 DETECTOR-CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install in vault or aboveground.

B. Install for proper direction of flow. Install bypass with water meter, gate valves on each side of meter, and check valve downstream from meter.

C. Support detector check valves, meters, shutoff valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.

3.10 WATER METER INSTALLATION A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to utility company's written instructions.



3.11 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS

A. Rough-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility company's written instructions.

3.12 VACUUM BREAKER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

A. Install pressure vacuum breaker assemblies of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Do not install pressure vacuum breaker assemblies in vault or other space subject to flooding.

3.13 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to flooding.

C. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

D. Support NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger backflow preventers, valves, and piping near floor and on brick or concrete piers.

3.14 WATER METER BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install water meter boxes in paved areas flush with surface.

B. Install water meter boxes in grass or earth areas with top 2 inches above surface.

3.15 CONCRETE VAULT INSTALLATION

A. Install precast concrete vaults according to ASTM C 891.

3.16 PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

A. Install concrete base level and with top approximately 2 inches above grade.

B. Install protective enclosure over valves and equipment.

C. Anchor protective enclosure to concrete base.



3.17 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position.

B. AWWA Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17.

C. UL/FMG Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFPA 24.

3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.

1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

C. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.19 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic water-service piping, on main electrical meter panel. See Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for identifying devices.

3.20 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows: City of Houston specifications.

B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

END OF SECTION 221113

Aldine Independent School District BUILDING SANITARY SEWERAGE Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 13 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 13 00-1

SECTION 22 13 00 BUILDING SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 - GENERAL








A. Piping shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner parallel to building coordinates with vertical drops. Piping shown underground shall be buried a minimum of 12 inches to top of pipe. Piping in the vicinity of equipment shall not interfere with access panels and maintenance space.

B. Piping shall be concealed in walls, chases and above ceilings except in mechanical equipment areas.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING

A. GENERAL: Provide for all fixtures, equipment and floor drains as indicated and as required by Code. Provide appropriate wye fittings and bends. Do not use sanitary tees. Do not use any fittings prohibited by the codes. Cast iron pipe shall be manufactured by Charlotte or Tyler Pipe. All piping shall comply with ASTM D1785/D2665.

B. MATERIALS:

01 ABOVE SLAB: Standard weight, centrifugally cast, bell and spigot cast iron, standard weight fittings per ASTM A-74, with Ty-seal joints. No hub piping with no hub clamps may be used if proper pipe supports are installed to maintain uniform slope and rigidity. Heavy weight, medium duty no-hub clamps shall be installed on all sanitary piping, excluding vents. Piping above inaccessible ceilings shall be bell and spigot cast iron.

02 BELOW SLAB: Schedule 40, DWV PVC

03 BELOW GRADE, BEYOND FIVE FEET FROM BUILDING: Schedule 40, DWV PVC. Pipe sizes over 6" may be heavy wall SDR-26 PVC sewer pipe meeting ASTM D3034 requirements.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 13 00-2

C. GASKETS: Hub and spigot gaskets shall be Tyler Ty-Seal, positive double seal compression type conforming to ASTM C564. No-hub joints shall be made with gasket and one piece stainless steel, heavy weight, medium duty no-hub clamps. No-hub clamps for pipes 6” and larger shall have 6 bands. Clamps shall be Husky SD 2000 or equal by Mission or Mi-Fab.

D. CLEANOUTS: Install at each change of direction and at locations indicated on drawings. Exact location shall be reviewed by Architect prior to setting. Cleanouts shall be size of the line served, except maximum size of 4". Provide double cleanout for two-way rodding after each pipe exits the building. Wall cleanouts behind access panels shall be within 2” of the panel for ease of use.

E. DRAINS: Floor drains installed in floors with waterproofing membranes shall have clamping collars.

F. GRADING: Continuously grade all drainage piping. Inside building, grade 1/4" per foot for lines 3" and smaller. Grade 1/8" per foot for line 4" and larger. Piping below grade beyond five feet from building shall have maximum continuous slope consistent with site conditions of existing mains to which they will be connected or 1/8" per foot whichever is less (1/4" per foot for lines smaller than 4").

G. SYSTEM CLEANING: Hydroflush or rod out all sections of sanitary waste lines prior to substantial completion.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. GENERAL: For all drains, either provide ½” trap primer tap in toilets where drain is trap primed from water closet or delete ½” trap primer tap and provide Proset Systems Trap Guard sewer gas emissions protection device as indicated on the drawings. In addition to the manufacturers listed, equipment of identical design, quality and appearance will be considered when manufactured by Mi-Fab, Wade or Zurn

B. TOILET ROOMS, LOCKER ROOMS, SHOWER AREAS AND SIMILAR LOCATIONS: Mi-Fab F1100C-X6-3-6 or Zurn ZS-415-6B-HD-P-VP cast iron two-piece floor drain with seepage flange, reversible clamping collar, 6" diameter, heavy duty stainless steel strainer, 1/2" trap primer tap, Proset Systems Trap Guard sewer gas emissions protection, security screws.

C. EQUIPMENT DRAINS: Mi-Fab F1340C–TFB-3-7-22 or Zurn ZS-540-LG-P cast iron, medium depth floor drain with flange, clamping device, seepage openings with 12” stainless steel rim, less top grate but with internal ductile iron sediment bucket and 1/2“ trap primer tap and Proset Systems Trap Guard sewer gas emissions protection.

D. GRATED EQUIPMENT DRAINS: Mi-Fab F1320C-3 or Zurn ZS-540-LG-P cast iron floor drain with flange, seepage openings, 9” heavy duty ductile iron grate with stainless steel veneer, clamping device and 1/2“ trap primer tap and Proset Systems Trap Guard sewer gas emissions protection.

E. KITCHEN: Mi-Fab F1300C-3-7 (F4-3) or Zurn ZS-415-7N-P cast iron two-piece floor drain with seepage flange, reversible clamping collar, trap primer connection, 7" stainless steel strainer with tractor grate, riser and 1/2“ trap primer tap and Proset Systems Trap Guard sewer gas emissions protection. Provide 4” diameter stainless steel funnel at indirect waste connections.

F. SANITARY FLOOR SINK: Mi-Fab FS1730-FL-C-3-175 or Zurn ZS-1901-KC-HD-3-P-32 cast iron floor sink with 8” sump, 12"x12" acid resisting enamel coated interior, heavy duty stainless steel frame and 3/4 tractor grate, ductile iron secondary dome strainer, and Proset Systems Trap Guard sewer gas emissions protection. All floor sinks shall have integral flange with seepage openings for support, clamping device and 1/2“ trap primer tap.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 13 00-3

G. ACID WASTE: George Fischer Sloane PVDF floor drain with 8” PVDF grate and 1/2“ trap primer tap and Proset Systems Trap Guard sewer gas emissions protection. Equal by IPEX shall be acceptable.

H. CLOTHES WASHER TRENCH FLOOR DRAIN: Same as for toilet rooms except provide 6" diameter nickel bronze strainer with vandal proof dome grate. Mi-Fab or Zurn

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. GENERAL: Install cleanouts at bends, angles, and at ends of all waste and sewer piping and as noted on Drawings. Bring all cleanouts up to grade and make accessible. All cleanouts shall have extra heavy PVC plugs. For cleanouts in unpaved areas, install in 18" x 18" x 6" thick concrete pad. The top of cleanout shall be 2” above grade with the pad sloping to edges at grade level. For cleanouts in paving, sidewalks, etc., install flush with finished surface. Refer to detail on Architectural Drawings.

B. MATERIALS:

01 UNFINISHED AREAS AND CHASES: Mi-Fab C1450 or Zurn Z-1440 cast iron caulking ferrule with countersunk head with PVC plug.

02 FINISHED WALLS: Mi-Fab C1450 or Zurn Z-1440 cast iron caulking ferrule with countersunk slotted head with PVC plug (full size up to 4”). Provide Mi-Fab UA-SS-VP square smooth finish, 8”x8”, 16 gauge stainless steel, vandal-proof access cover, flanged frame with anchoring lugs. Also provide flanged frame for pre-finished or CMU walls.

03 FINISHED FLOORS: MiFab C1100-R-3-6 or Zurn Z-1440-VP floor cleanout with adjustable extension housing, cast iron ferrule with PVC plug (full size up to 4”), round scoriated stainless steel, secured, vandal-proof access cover and round frame. Provide top style compatible with floor type. Carpet: - carpet flange (carpet markers will not be acceptable); Terrazzo: - top with terrazzo recess.

04 OUTSIDE AREAS: Mi-Fab C1100-XR-4-6 or Zurn Z-1440-HD-VP extra heavy duty, vandal-proof ductile iron cover, cast iron ferrule for caulk, PVC plug (full size up to 4”) and positioning set screws.

05 ACID WASTE SYSTEM FLOOR CLEANOUT: George Fischer Sloane PVDF cleanout with 6” nickel-bronze top stamped “AWCO”. Outdoor cleanout shall have heavy-duty tractor type top. Equal by IPEX shall be acceptable.

2.4 SAND/OIL SEPARATORS, GREASE TRAP AND SAMPLE WELLS

A. Provide as shown on the Drawings, complete with all piping, manhole covers, rims for covers, grates, rim for grates and concrete work.

2.5 ACID NEUTRALIZATION TANK

A. See Detail on Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 221313 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004


SECTION 221313 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Nonpressure and pressure couplings. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Manholes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Expansion joints and deflection fittings. 2. Backwater valves.

B. Shop Drawings: For manholes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewer system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of cast-iron soil pipe and fitting, from manufacturer.

C. Field quality-control reports.




A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Architect's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Type PSM Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 26, PVC Type PSM sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints.

2. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, PVC with bell ends. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

B. PVC Gravity Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 679, T-1 T-2 wall thickness, PVC gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends and with integral ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals for gasketed joints.

C. PVC Pressure Piping:

1. Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150 PVC pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints. 2. Fittings: AWWA C900, Class 150 PVC pipe with bell ends. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

D. PVC Water-Service Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 PVC, with plain ends for solvent-cemented joints. 2. Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Schedule 40 PVC, socket type. See Editing Instruction No. 1 in

the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers. Retain one of first two paragraphs and list of manufacturers below. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements."



2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. PVC Cleanouts:

1. Description: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.

2.3 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:

1. Description: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section,

as required to prevent flotation. 4. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (100-mm)

minimum thickness for walls and base riser section; with separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

5. Riser Sections: 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness, of length to provide depth indicated. 6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated;

with top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole

walls, for each pipe connection. 9. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder; wide enough to allow worker to place both

feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm)

10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, with diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and with height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

B. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (175- to 225-mm) riser, with 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum-width flange and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER."

2. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames and Grates shall be in accordance with City of Houston standards.

2.4 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete complying with ACI 318, ACI 350/350R (ACI 350M/350RM), and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.



B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.

a. Invert Slope: 1 percent through manhole.

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

a. Slope: 4 percent.

D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewer piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.



E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process of microtunneling.

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place-concrete supports or anchors.

3. Install piping with 36-inch (915-mm) minimum cover. 4. Install PVC Type PSM sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 5. Install PVC gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.

G. Install force-main, pressure piping according to the following:

1. Install piping with restrained joints at tee fittings and at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place-concrete supports or anchors.

2. Install piping with 36-inch (915-mm) minimum cover. 3. Install PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23 or to ASTM D 2774 and

ASTM F 1668. 4. Install PVC water-service piping according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 1668.

H. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join PVC Type PSM sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for

elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasket joints. 2. Join PVC gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for

elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasket joints. 3. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible or rigid couplings.

B. Join force-main, pressure piping according to the following:

1. Join PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23 for gasketed joints. 2. Join PVC water-service piping according to ASTM D 2855. 3. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure-type couplings.

3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.



C. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.

D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches (76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install manhole-cover inserts in frame and immediately below cover.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.

3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts, and use cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas. 2. Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas. 3. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas. 4. Use Extra-Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) deep. Set with tops 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

B. Connect force-main piping to building's sanitary force mains specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." Terminate piping where indicated.

C. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch (150-mm) overlap with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).

2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20 (DN 100 to DN 500). Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).



3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 (DN 525) or larger, or to underground manholes by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches (76 mm) of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or manhole wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches (300 mm) to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.

a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) unless otherwise indicated.

b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials.

4. Protect existing piping and manholes to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

3.8 CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:

1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch- (203-mm-) thick, brick masonry bulkheads.

2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.

B. Abandoned Manholes: Excavate around manhole as required and use either procedure below:

1. Remove manhole and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of manhole down to at least 36 inches (915 mm) below final grade. Fill to

within 12 inches (300 mm) of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.

C. Backfill to grade according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 31200 "Earth Moving" for underground utility identification devices. Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground manholes.

1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

manholes.




A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction and the following:

a. Fill sewer piping with water. Test with pressure of at least 10-foot (3-m) head of water, and maintain such pressure without leakage for at least 15 minutes.

b. Close openings in system and fill with water. c. Purge air and refill with water. d. Disconnect water supply. e. Test and inspect joints for leaks.

6. Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417. b. Option: Test concrete gravity sewer piping according to ASTM C 924

(ASTM C 924M).

7. Force Main: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, supports, and anchors have hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the maximum system operating pressure, but not less than [150 psig (1035 kPa).

a. Ductile-Iron Piping: Test according to AWWA C600, "Hydraulic Testing" Section. b. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.



8. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969 (ASTM C 969M).

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and superfluous material from interior of piping.[ Flush with potable water.]


Aldine Independent School District BUILDING STORM PIPING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 14 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 14 00-1

SECTION 22 14 00 BUILDING STORM PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Piping shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner parallel to building coordinates with vertical drops. Piping shown underground shall be buried a minimum of 12 inches to top of pipe. Piping in the vicinity of equipment shall not interfere with access panels and maintenance space.

B. Piping shall be concealed in walls, chases and above ceilings except in mechanical equipment areas.







PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 STORM DRAINAGE, INSIDE BUILDING

A. GENERAL: Provide roof drains, flashings and piping extending from drains to five feet outside of building. Cast iron pipe shall be manufactured by Charlotte or Tyler Pipe. All piping shall comply with ASTM D1785/D2665.

B. MATERIALS:

01 ABOVE SLAB: Standard weight, bell and spigot cast iron, per ASTM A-74, with Ty-Seal joints. No hub piping with heavy weight, medium duty no-hub clamps may be used on piping 8” and smaller if proper pipe supports are installed to maintain uniform slope and rigidity. Piping above inaccessible ceilings shall be bell and spigot cast iron.

02 BELOW SLAB: Schedule 40 PVC

C. GASKETS: Hub and spigot gaskets shall be Tyler Ty-Seal, positive double seal compression type conforming to ASTM C564. No-hub joints shall be made with gasket and one piece stainless steel, heavy weight, medium duty no-hub clamps. Clamps shall be Mi-Fab Heavy Duty, Husky SD 2000, Clamp All Hi-Torque 80 or equal by Mission. No-hub clamps for pipes 6” and larger shall have 6 bands.

Aldine Independent School District BUILDING STORM PIPING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 14 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 14 00-2

D. INSTALLATION: Continuously grade down in direction of flow 1/8" per foot. Piping below grade shall have maximum continuous slope consistent with the site conditions of existing mains to which they will be connected.

E. FINAL CLEANING: Hydroflush or rod out all sections of storm drain lines prior to substantial completion.

F. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Specifications for extension of drains.

2.2 STORM DRAINAGE, OUTSIDE BUILDING

A. GENERAL: Refer to Civil Engineering Drawings for location of storm inlets or junction boxes. Plumbing subcontractor shall extend building storm piping to the storm inlets that are provided by site subcontractor and make connection to inlet or junction box.

B. MATERIALS: SDR-26 PVC pipe in sizes through 12", and Schedule 40 PVC or standard weight cast iron with Ty-Seal joints for larger sizes. Cast iron pipe shall be manufactured by Charlotte or Tyler Pipe. All piping shall comply with ASTM D1785/D2665.

C. INSTALLATION: Continuously grade down in direction of flow 1/8" per foot. Piping below grade shall have maximum continuous slope consistent with the site conditions of mains to which they will be connected.

D. FINAL CLEANING: Hydroflush or rod out all sections of storm drain lines prior to substantial completion.

2.3 ROOF DRAINS

A. STANDARD ROOF DRAINS: Zurn Z-100-DP-DR Series or equal by Mi-Fab, adjustable cast iron roof drain with no hub connection. Provide heavy duty, vandal proof, galvanized, cast iron mushroom dome strainer and flashing rim with integral gravel stop, all secured with non-corrosive clamping units and vandal-proof locking mechanism that includes stainless steel, vandal proof hardware. Roof drains shall not have any gasket or other types of water sealing components below the roof flashing line. Where no-hub coupling at drain connection is not accessible due to roof thickness, provide deep sump roof drain to allow accessibility of coupling for maintenance purposes.

B. SIPHONIC ROOF DRAIN: Mi-Fab R1200-SR deep sump siphonic roof drain with secured siphonic air baffle. Provide heavy duty, vandal proof, galvanized, cast iron mushroom dome strainer and flashing rim with integral gravel stop, all secured with non-corrosive clamping units and vandal-proof locking mechanism that includes stainless steel, vandal proof hardware. Roof drains shall not have any gasket or other types of water sealing components below the roof flashing line.

C. ACCESSORIES:

01 Series 1015 adjustable extension collar for insulated roof (where required)

02 Bearing pan and underdeck clamp

03 2” water dam for overflow drains

04 Vandal-proof, galvanized cast iron dome

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District BUILDING NATURAL GAS PIPING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 16 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 16 00-1

SECTION 22 16 00 BUILDING NATURAL GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Piping shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner parallel to building coordinates with vertical drops.

B. Piping shall be concealed in wall, chases and above ceilings except in the vicinity of equipment. All materials shall conform to the City Building Code.

C. Piping shall be sloped to prevent pockets. Slope toward equipment and provide dirt leg.

D. Piping in the vicinity of equipment shall be arranged to not interfere with access panels and maintenance space. Provide unions, flanges and shutoff valves to allow removal of the equipment and its subassemblies.

E. Piping shown underground shall be buried a minimum of 30 inches to top of pipe. All below grade non-metallic, non-conducting pipe not under building slab shall have a tracer wire installed parallel to pipe. Tracer wire shall be a 14 gage, solid copper wire with PVC jacket with all joints and splices sealed water-tight. Carry end of wire up through slab and terminate in an accessible location. Provide identification label attached to wire.

F. All piping, fittings and valves shall be manufactured in the United States of America by National Tube, Republic and Youngstown.








2.1 NATURAL GAS, OUTSIDE BUILDING

A. GENERAL: Gas utility company will provide and install metering equipment for 5 psi service pressure. Extend piping from meter to building and install pressure reducing valve at building. Provide grounding per NFPA 70.

B. MATERIALS:

01 ABOVE GROUND: Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM ERW A-53, Grade B or ASTM A106, with malleable iron screw type fittings. Welded joints may be used for piping 2½” and larger.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 16 00-2

02 BELOW GRADE: Polyethylene gas piping with socket weld connection, conforming to ASTM D2513, installed per manufacturer's requirements. Install minimum #14 copper wire in trench with pipe for locating purposes. Install X-Truecoat type schedule 40 steel pipe for the last five feet before exiting ground. Install dielectric union after piping exits the ground.

C. TEST TEES: Provide test tee in pipe at meter and on both sides of pressure reducing stations.

D. SLEEVES: Install pipe in vented sleeves when passing under roads, driveways, parking lots and similar areas. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC below grade and Schedule 40 galvanized steel otherwise. Install vent in a manner to prevent entry of rainwater, insects or foreign objects.

E. PAINTING: All exposed gas piping shall be painted with two coats of industrial grade, yellow epoxy paint.

F. ACCEPTABLE PIPE MANUFACTURERS: National Tube, Republic and Youngstown

2.2 NATURAL GAS, INSIDE BUILDING

A. GENERAL: Extend gas to all fixtures, appliances and equipment as required.

B. MATERIALS ABOVE GRADE: Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM ERW A-53, Grade B or ASTM A106. Joints may be welded or screwed, except that piping in inaccessible locations and all piping 2½" and larger shall be welded. Threaded nipples less than 1/2” shall be Schedule 80. All thread nipples are not allowed. All bolts, nuts and all thread used in the piping system and components shall be cadmium plated to resist rust. Final connections at low pressure appliances shall be corrugated flexible brass connections with epoxy coating, complying with ANSI ANS-Z21-24-1981, minimum pressure rating of 1/2 PSI. Science lab gas cocks shall be “hard piped” with schedule 40 black steel as specified above. Flex connections will not be accepted at gas cocks.

C. MATERIALS BELOW GRADE: Do not install piping below grade unless specifically shown on the Drawings.

D. INSTALLATION:

01 Do not install any gas piping in unventilated spaces including inside walls, unless totally encased with airtight sleeving. Sleeving shall be all metallic construction, welded or screwed black steel, Schedule 10 or heavier. Sleeves shall be vented as shown on the Drawings.

02 Provide an all brass lever handle gas cock in an accessible location branch line at each individual piece of gas consuming equipment.

03 Branch connections to gas consuming equipment shall be size indicated on the Drawings up to points immediately adjacent to equipment. Do not reduce to size of equipment until immediately adjacent to equipment.

04 All welded connections shall be made with bevel-ended pipe by certified welders.

05 All branch connections shall be made off the top of the main line.

E. PAINTING: All gas piping shall be painted with two coats of industrial grade, yellow epoxy paint.

F. ACCEPTABLE PIPE MANUFACTURERS: National Tube, Republic and Youngstown

2.3 GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS:

A. Size for full connected load, with stop valves on both inlet and outlet connections.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 16 00-3

B. Equip with internal relief valve to vent full capacity if regulator fails wide open. Extend full size vent pipe without reduction to the outside.

C. Provide weather and bug proof screening on vent.

D. Select orifices for inlet pressures established by the gas company serving the building, and for outlet pressures as required to serve the proper pressure at the items of equipment being supplied.

E. Outlet pressure shall be field adjustable.

F. Capacities as indicated in Schedule plus 10%.

G. Unit shall conform to latest published ANSI Code.

H. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: American Meter Company, Equimeter, Fisher and Rockwell

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATER Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 33 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 33 00-1

SECTION 22 33 00 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATER

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Provide all equipment, accessories and specialties indicated on the Contract Drawings, as specified, and as required under Section General Plumbing.

B. Heaters shall have three year commercial warranty.







1.3 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES:

A. GENERAL: Provide ASME rated, AGA certified and CGA listed for each water heater.

B. REQUIREMENTS: Select valve with the AGA-CGA rating equal to or greater than the input of the heater. Heaters with ASME constructed and labeled vessels, may use the ASME rating equal to or greater than the input to the heater, 1" minimum size. Valves shall be automatic re-seating type similar to Watts 40XL with test lever and extension bulb thermostat.

C. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Cash, McDonnell-Miller and Watts

PART 2 - EQUIPMENT

2.1 SMALL ELECTRIC WATER HEATER

A. DESCRIPTION: Glass lined tank, 2" fiberglass tank insulation with enameled steel jacket, three year commercial warranty (tank and parts), magnesium anode rods, ASME labeled T & P relief valve pipe to drain, vacuum breaker on inlet, adjustable controller and high limit safeties.

B. ELECTRICAL ELEMENTS: Shall have two non-simultaneous elements, built-in fusing and disconnecting means, U. L. listed. Provide proper voltage and rating as scheduled on the Drawings.

C. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER: A. O. Smith, Lochinvar, Rheem/Ruud or State

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District FUEL FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 34 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 34 00-1

SECTION 22 34 00 FUEL FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Provide all equipment, accessories and specialties indicated on the Contract Drawings, as specified, and as required under Section General Plumbing.







1.3 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVES:

A. GENERAL: Provide ASME rated, AGA certified and CGA listed for each water heater.

B. REQUIREMENTS: Select valve with the AGA-CGA rating equal to or greater than the input of the heater. Heaters with ASME constructed and labeled vessels, may use the ASME rating equal to or greater than the input to the heater, 1" minimum size. Valves shall be automatic re-seating type similar to Watts 40XL with test lever and extension bulb thermostat.

C. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Cash, McDonnell-Miller and Watts

PART 2 - EQUIPMENT

2.1 GAS FIRED WATER HEATER

A. GENERAL: Heater shall be vertical fire tube type condensing gas water heater. The unit shall be design certified and tested by the American Gas Association Laboratories and be inspected and bear the ASME Section IV seal for 150 PSI working pressure. System shall have a minimum efficiency of 96%. Water heater shall matc the BTU input and storage capacity indicated on the equipment schedule.

B. CONSTRUCTION: Water heaters shall have a single pass, down-fired, spiraled fire tube design contained within an integral storage tank. Tank, combustion chamber and fire tubes will be unlined. Lined or plated water heaters will not be acceptable. Tank, combustion chamber and fire tubes will be constructed from phase-balanced austenitic and ferritic duplex steel with a chemical structure containing a minimum of 21% chromium to prevent corrosion and mill certified per ASTM A 923Methods A. Materials shall meet ASME Section II material requirements and be accepted by NSF 61 for municipal potable water systems.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 34 00-2

All water contacting tank surfaces will be non-porous and exhibit 0% water absorption. All tank connections/fittings will be non-ferrous or stainless steel. Connection for a building return circulation line will be made to a dedicated hot return fitting at the center of the storage vessel and not the cold inlet piping. Finished vessel will not require sacrificial anode rods and none will be used. Water heaters that employ anode rods of any type will not be acceptable. Burner will be stainless steel and burner NOx emissions shall be less than 20ppm.

C. VENTING: Water heater will be a category IV, condensing appliance and vent through CPVC or Polypropylene. Water heater will satisfy requirements for sealed combustion. Vents for inlet air and exhaust can terminate in different pressure zones. Minimum size of flue shall be 3” diameter. Provide larger flue where required by manufacturer and building requirements. Barometric damper shall be installed where required by building conditions. Rain entrapment section shall be installed on all flues.

D. CONTROLS: Shall meet the requirements of ANSI Standard Z21.13 and include electronic flame monitoring, electronic low water cutoff, an immersion operating control, and an immersion UL listed temperature limiting device. The water heater shall employ an electronic operating control with digital temperature readout. Operator shall be capable of connecting to a BacNet MSTP/IP building automation system. All necessary controls cards shall be provided with unit. Also, unit shall be provided with high water temperature limit, operating temperature control, gas pressure regulator, redundant electric gas valve, water flow sensor and manual shut-off gas valve. Provide necessary control voltage transformers.

E. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: PVI Conquest ONLY.

2.2 SMALL GAS WATER HEATER

A. GENERAL: This specification refers to heaters 200 gallons or less and 199MBH or less.

B. DESCRIPTION: Glass lined tank, 2" fiberglass tank insulation with enameled steel jacket, three year commercial warranty (tank and parts), magnesium anode rods, ASME labeled T & P relief valve pipe to drain, vacuum breaker on inlet, adjustable controller and high limit safeties.

C. GAS UNITS: Shall be AGA certified, complete with pilot safety shutoff and draft diverter.

D. WARRANTY: Heaters shall have three year commercial warranty.

E. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER: A. O. Smith, Lochinvar or State

2.3 HOT WATER STORAGE TANK

A. GENERAL: Storage Tanks shall be a vertical Lochinvar Lock-Temp “Energy Saver“ tank having a storage capacity as specified on the Drawings. The tanks shall be constructed with an inner chamber designed to receive all circulation to and from the water heater to eliminate turbulence in the tank. The baffled tank shall supply 80% of tank capacity without a decrease in outlet temperature, regardless of rate of draw.

B. CONSTRUCTION: Storage tanks shall be constructed in accordance with ASME - stamped and registered with the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. The jacket and tank base shall be a water tight construction and a built-in drain pan, complete with a 3/4” drain connection. Storage tanks shall have a working pressure of 125PSI. Storage tanks shall be glass lined and fired to 1600 degrees F, and carry a five (5) year warranty.

C. INSULATION: Storage tanks shall be completely encased in high density fiberglass insulation of sufficient thickness to meet the energy efficiency requirements of the latest


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 34 00-3

edition of the ASHRAE 90.1 Standard.

D. FINISH: The Lock-Temp Tank shall be furnished with a factory installed jacket of 16GA steel, galvanized inside and out and finished with three coats of acrylic enamel.

E. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Lochinvar or equal by Niles.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 42 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 42 00-1

SECTION 22 42 00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Provide all fixtures, drains, equipment, accessories and specialties indicated on the Contract Drawings, as specified, and as required under Section General Plumbing.

B. All fixtures and equipment shall be constructed of materials that are non-hazardous to the user.

C. Faucets, shower heads, shower valves and similar items shall have chrome plated brass handles, spouts, plates and trim.

D. Include all necessary accessories and trim pieces such as escutcheons, traps, supply tubing, stop and basin cocks, etc. All brass piping shall be seamless brass tubing. Fittings shall be heavy cast brass. Nipples shall be extra heavy. All exposed pipe shall be chrome plated.

E. All flush valves shall have screwdriver angle stops with cap covers, vacuum breakers and be chrome plated.

F. P-traps shall be chrome plated, cast brass body, adjustable type with bottom cleanout plug and 17 gauge tubing outlet with wall flange.

G. Provide 1/2" x 3/8" angle valve, loose key, supply stops with flexible supply risers for fixtures. Provide Marvel mechanical coupling for connection to copper piping.

H. Handicap fixtures shall have handicap compatible trim including stops and supplies, drains and valves. Provide Truebro Handi Lav-Guard vandal proof insulation kit over p-trap supplies and all sharp edges. Prowrap by McGuire or Trap Wrap by Brocar Products, Inc., will also be acceptable. Controls for flush valves shall be mounted on the wide side of toilet areas as required by the handicap codes.

I. Install Symmons 5-110-CK mixing valve on HW supply side of all lavatories and sinks, including fixtures not provided by Plumbing Contractor (i.e. lab sinks, kitchen faucets, etc.). Refer to Plumbing Drawings.







1.3 ROUGH-INS AND CONNECTIONS

A. SPECIAL FIXTURES AND TRIM: Provide rough-ins and connections to cabinet sinks and all trim where shown on the Drawings. Fixtures and trim requiring rough-ins and


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 42 00-2

connections will be furnished loose under the special equipment section of those specifications, installation shall be under this Section. Refer to Architectural Specifications for information on prefab cabinets. Provide stops, risers and P-traps under this Section for prefab cabinets and kitchen equipment provided under the Architectural Specifications.

B. COORDINATION: The piping and connections for these areas have been indicated approximately. The exact arrangements and locations of various piping and connections shall be determined by shop drawings provided under other sections of these Specifications.

1.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. WATER CLOSETS, LAVATORIES AND URINALS: American Standard or Toto

B. SINKS AND SERVICE SINKS: Elkay or Just

C. MOP BASINS: Fiat or Sterns Williams

D. DRINKING FOUNTAINS: Elkay, Halsey-Taylor or Oasis

E. TOILET SEATS: Bemis 1655-C/SS with stainless steel, self-sustaining check hinge or equal by Church

F. FAUCETS: Chicago or Zurn (Zurn shall have 5 year warranty)

G. METERING FAUCETS: Symmons only

H. ELECTRONIC FAUCETS: Chicago, Sloan, Symmons or Toto

I. MANUAL FLUSH VALVES: Sloan Royal or Toto

J. ELECTRONIC FLUSH VALVES: Toto only.

K. FIXTURE STOPS, P-TRAPS AND RISERS: McGuire or Zurn

L. CARRIERS: Mi-Fab or Zurn

M. WASH FOUNTAINS: Acorn or Bradley

N. INDIVIDUAL SHOWER VALVES: Symmons Safetymix or Leonard PAM II

O. COLUMN SHOWERS: Acorn or Bradley


2.1 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. GENERAL:

01 Provide fixture supports for all water closets, lavatories, urinals, drinking fountains and other wall hung fixtures.

02 All foot supports on all types of fixture supports shall be the type that does not extend out from under the wall on which the fixture is mounted.

03 Construction and installation of the supports shall be as required to suit the job conditions, the space available, and the riser diagrams and details on the Drawings.

B. CARRIERS:

01 WATER CLOSET CARRIER: Mi-Fab MC-10, 13, 14, 15 adjustable, horizontal or


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 42 00-3

vertical closet carrier as required by waste piping. Provide hanger-rod support feet for carriers that span wide chases. Provide flush valve support with all water closet carriers.

02 LAVATORY CARRIER: Mi-Fab MC-41 with concealed arms.

03 URINAL CARRIER: Mi-Fab MC-32 with hanger and bearing plate.

04 ELECTRIC DRINKING FOUNTAIN AND BUBBLER CARRIERS: Mi-Fab MC-32 with hanger and bearing plate.

05 EYEWASH: Mi-Fab MC-32 with hanger and bearing plate.

06 SERVICE SINK: Mi-Fab MC-32 with hanger and bearing plate.

2.2 PLASTER TRAPS

A. Provide Mi-Fab MI-SOLID-SA-6 Series cast iron solids interceptor for sinks scheduled to have a plaster trap. Install to allow removal of bucket and to meet all ADA/TAS clearance requirements. No substitutions.

2.3 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE FOR GANG SHOWERS

A. GENERAL:

01 Valves shall mix hot and cold water to deliver a preset constant outlet temperature of 105° F when supplied with 140° F hot water and 70° F cold water. Accuracy of ± 2° F at 75% drop in inlet pressures.

02 Designed and constructed so that failure of cold water supply instantly shuts off hot water supply, failure of hot water instantly shuts off cold water, and failure of thermostatic element will shut off both hot and cold water.

03 Entire assembly shall be factory piped and tested. It shall have the capacity to deliver scheduled gpm of tempered water at scheduled pressure drop through valve. Refer to Drawings.

B. COMPONENTS:

01 Bellows or Bi-metallic type thermostatic actuator.

02 Dial stem thermometer on outlet, range 0-200° F.

03 Pressure regulating valve with dial stem pressure gages.

04 Outlet ball valve shutoffs on each mixing valve.

05 Union end angle stops with checks and strainers.

06 Adjustable high temperature limit stop.

07 Outlet temperature adjustment knob with vandal proof screws on all mixing valves in each system.

08 Top inlets and outlet.

09 Fittings and piping as required for a complete cabinet installation with 16 gauge, painted enamel steel, surface mounted cabinet with 12 gauge steel door and mounting flange with chromed key lock (all keyed alike).

10 Minimum 1/2 GPM flow requirement.

C. Piping and components inside surface mounted steel cabinet shall have standard brass finish.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 42 00-4

D. Locate cabinets as shown on the Drawings.

E. MANUFACTURER: Leonard or Symmons

2.4 FIXTURES

A. See Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND COOLERS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 47 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 47 00-1

SECTION 22 47 00 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND COOLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Provide all fixtures indicated on the Contract Drawings, as specified, and as required under Section General Plumbing.

B. All fixtures and equipment shall be constructed of materials that are non-hazardous to the user.

C. Include all necessary accessories and trim pieces such as escutcheons, traps, supply tubing, stop and basin cocks, etc. All brass piping shall be seamless brass tubing. Fittings shall be heavy cast brass. Nipples shall be extra heavy. All exposed pipe shall be chrome plated.

D. Fixtures and equipment shall be delivered to the building properly crated and in perfect condition.

E. In addition to the manufacturers listed, equipment of identical design, quality and appearance will be considered when of the following manufacture:

01 DRINKING FOUNTAINS: Elkay, Halsey-Taylor or Oasis








2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. See Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District CHEMICAL WASTE SYSTEM Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 22 66 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 22 66 00-1

SECTION 22 66 00 CHEMICAL WASTE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Piping shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner. Piping in the vicinity of equipment shall not interfere with access panels and maintenance space.







PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 ACID WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

A. GENERAL: The contractor shall provide and install a complete acid drainage and vent system as indicated on the drawings. Piping directly accessible inside casework or in sink knee spaces shall be fire-rated polypropylene piping with mechanical joints. Install all systems per manufacturer's recommendations and requirements.

B. POLYPROPYLENE PIPING: Flame-retardant, Schedule 40 polypropylene constructed in accordance with ASTM D2146-65T, mechanical joints. George Fischer Sloane Fuseal II-MJ, IPEX Labline or Orion. This piping will only be acceptable in accessible lab sink knee spaces or where piping is directly/easily accessible inside lab millwork.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 00 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 00 00-1

SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 INTENT OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. GENERAL: Drawings and Specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work described in either of them, will be work required under this contract. Should any work required by the drawings and specifications be in violation of any Federal, State, County or City laws, ordinance or regulation, those laws and regulations shall prevail, and shall be complied with by the Contractor as a part of this work with no extra compensation.

B. DRAWINGS: The drawings are schematic in nature, intended to show the various components of the system approximately to scale and indicate how they are to be integrated with other parts of the building. Determine exact locations by close coordination with the Owner’s Representative, job measurements, determining the requirements of other trades and reviewing all contract documents. The Drawings indicated general routing of the various parts of the systems, but do not indicated all fittings and offsets which may be required to fit the system into spaces allotted for them. The Contract shall include these items as required for a complete installation.

C. BASIS OF DESIGN: Equipment that is scheduled is the basis of the design and has been coordinated for space, installation and electrical requirements. Equipment and models from other acceptable manufacturers have not been verified or coordinated. Contractor shall verify these requirements prior to using other equipment in his bid and include any additional costs for installation of the substitute equipment.

1.3 MATERIALS

A. GENERAL: Manufacturer's printed directions shall be followed for preparing, assembling, installing, erecting and cleaning manufactured materials or equipment, unless otherwise directed. Materials, when not otherwise definitely specified, shall conform to applicable National Specifications and Standards. All materials shall be certified to not contain any asbestos or other material banned by the Environmental Protection Agency. Lead shall not be used in any material, pipe or solder in contact with the domestic water system.

B. SUBSTITUTION: The names of manufacturers and model numbers have been used in the Contract Documents to establish type of equipment and standard of quality. Where only one name is mentioned for a particular item of material, then that manufacturer is the only one acceptable. Where several names are mentioned, any one of those listed may be furnished provided submittal contains sufficient information to show complete compliance with contract Documents. No attempt has been made to determine if each manufacturer listed will produce material that will comply with all requirements of this project or will fit the allotted space.

C. SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS: Requests for substitution during the bidding period, in accordance with the requirements of the Special Conditions, must be accompanied by a complete product submittal with all features, accessories and capacities noted. Large equipment must include a drawing to scale showing how the equipment and required access space will fit the available space. Acceptance for bidding does not waive the post


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 00 00-2

bidding requirement for formal submittal and approval.


A. ELECTRICAL: Power wiring is specified in the Electrical Section. Interlock and control wiring (any voltage) is specified under this Section. Controllers and starters, unless part of a motor control center, are specified under this Section.

B. PAINTING OF EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND ACCESSORIES: Painting Section. However, all items furnished under this Section shall be kept clean and free from corrosion.

C. OPENINGS: Various other sections. The locations of all inserts and openings shall be determined under this Section and coordinated with the other Sections in ample time to avoid cutting new construction.

D. EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS: Refer to structural drawings, details and notes for specific support and pipe hanging requirements. Specific loading and attachment methods shall be followed to assure that individual structural members are not overloaded.

1.5 ALTERNATES

A. GENERAL: Determine the scope of each specified alternate proposal by carefully reading all Divisions of the Documents. The Bid Form contains information explaining the extent of the construction to be performed under a specific alternate. Alternate proposals, which are not predominantly mechanical in scope, are described in other Divisions of these Documents. Pay particular note to re-roofing items that may necessitate adjustments to existing piping.

1.6 PERMIT, FEES AND APPROVALS

A. The contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and fees to perform his work. He shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work specified or shown on the drawings. This applies to Federal, State and Local Codes and Requirements. Approval from the various insuring and inspection authorities shall also be obtained. Refer to Architectural sections for additional information.


A. The Contractor shall be familiar with the Drawings and Specifications and shall have examined the premises and understand the conditions under which he will be obligated to operate in performing the contract. No additional compensation shall be allowed for failure to fully understand the requirements.

1.8 GUARANTEE

A. All materials, apparatus and equipment furnished and installed under this Section of these Specifications shall be new and free from any defects when accepted by the Owner and shall be guaranteed in writing for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner unless noted to have extended warranties.

1.9 NOISE AND VIBRATIONS

A. The Contractor shall guarantee that the entire system and its component items of equipment, as installed by him, shall operate without objectionable vibration or noises, as determined by the Architect. If, in the opinion of the Architect, objectionable vibration or transmission thereof to the building occurs, the Contractor shall execute such remedial


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 00 00-3

measures as are necessary to eliminate such unsatisfactory operating conditions and the material and labor thereby required shall be performed at the Contractor's expense.


A. COORDINATION: The Contractor shall cooperate with other trades on the job and make installations in the proper sequence during the construction of the buildings, and he shall notify the Architect well in advance of construction of all interference of his work with that of other trades and of building construction. This notification shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibilities to coordinate his work with the total project.


C. CLEAN-UP: Keep area of operations free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish at all times. All piping above accessible ceilings shall be cleaned of cement, plaster and other construction debris prior to being concealed. The parts of the Plumbing installation which are to be painted or insulated shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, grease, oil spots and other materials in preparation for painting or insulating.

D. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION: Do not deliver equipment to jobsite until it is actually needed for installation. Protect equipment from damage due to construction activities and the weather. Equipment allowed to stand in weather will be rejected and Contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment at no cost to Owner.

E. CUTTING AND PATCHING: Coordinate the work with other trades to arrange for all holes, chases, and other spaces necessary for the installation of all components of the mechanical systems. Inform the other trades in ample time for these to be provided. Where concrete flooring or paving must be cut to install MEP systems, contractor shall take measures to prevent damaging existing underground services. Contractor shall x-ray the area to be saw cut to determine the existence of underground services. When saw cutting, limit the depth of the cut to less than the thickness of the concrete. Breakout the concrete manually with special care in areas of possible underground services.

F. CONCRETE PADS: All equipment mounted on the floor, including expansion tanks and pot feeder, shall have a concrete housekeeping pad. Concrete pads shall be sized for the equipment to be supplied. Pad shall exceed base dimensions by approximately 4" all around. Reinforce pads rebar including #4 bar around perimeter. Tool pad to form chamfered edge. Nominal thickness shall be 4” except air handling units and indoor chillers shall be 6”. Refer to details for outdoor equipment.

G. STRUCTURAL STEEL: All structural steel used for the purpose of fabricating equipment supports, pipe supports, pipe guides, pipe anchors and framing for large ducts and plenums, shall conform to ASTM Designation A-36. All steel used for these purposes shall be new, clean, straight and galvanized.


A. ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: No portion of the total contract will be declared substantially complete until the automatic temperature controls for that portion has been demonstrated to be complete and functioning as intended. The temperature control system shall maintain all of the space temperatures at plus or minus two degrees of set point.

B. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: Obtain a set of project drawings and keep these at jobsite during construction. During the course of construction, mark on these prints any changes which are made, noting particularly locations for those items which will need to be located for servicing. At completion of job, mark each sheet " As-Built Drawings", date and deliver to Architect.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 00 00-4

C. OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS: Provide the following periods of instruction to the Owner's designated personnel upon completion of the system's installation. Provide additional training as noted in individual equipment specifications.

01 HVAC System - 8 Hours 02 Temperature Controls Systems - 8 Hours

D. CLOSEOUT MANUALS: At completion of job, furnish three copies of spare parts lists and operating instructions for all equipment furnished under this Division. These lists and instructions shall be published by the manufacturer of the equipment. Bind in 3-ring binders with project name.

E. REFRIGERANT: Furnish and install full refrigerant and oil charge in the air conditioning refrigeration systems and maintain it for full term of the guarantee.

F. LUBRICATION: After the installation is completed, lubricate all moving parts of all equipment furnished under this Division of the Specifications. Leave with the Owner a brief but complete set of lubrication instructions, showing the recommended frequency of lubrication and the type of lubricant recommended for each piece of equipment.

G. SPARE PARTS: Upon completion of the installation, deliver to the Owner all tools and spare parts that are furnished by the Equipment Manufacturer for use with the equipment furnished under this Contract.

1.12 OPERATION TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. After completion of the work and before final acceptance thereof, the Contractor shall notify the Architect when he is ready for the balancing of air and hydronic systems which will be performed by a professional test and balance firm selected by the Owner as described in Section 23 05 93.

1.13 SHOP DRAWINGS


B. The purpose of these submittals is to attempt to aid the contractor in such a manner that improper or unacceptable materials are not delivered to or installed on the job. Shop drawings shall be approved before installation of the material under consideration. Approval of these submittals shall not be construed as releasing The Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. All materials and equipment shall be subject to final acceptance by the Engineer at completion of construction.

C. Shop Drawings shall consist of published ratings of capacity data, detailed construction drawings, wiring and control diagrams, performance curves, installation instructions, manufacturer's installation drawings and other pertinent data. Where the literature is submitted covering a group or series of similar items, the item under consideration shall be clearly indicated. Ductwork shop drawings shall include one printed set of drawings in addition to the PDF. Drawings shall be submitted showing revisions to equipment layouts due to use of alternate or substitute equipment. The front sheet of each copy of the submittal shall have the following typed information:


02 General Contractor's name, address, project manager's name and telephone number.

03 Submitting Sub-contractor's name, address, project manager's name and telephone number.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 00 00-5


D. Equipment that has regional representation shall only be supplied by the regional representative that serves the area where the project is located. The regional representative’s name and signature shall be included with the shop drawing.

E. Shop Drawings are required for but are not limited to the following items:

Chillers Air Handling Units Boilers Pumps Fans & Roof Curbs Water Treatment Rooftop Units VAV Boxes Ductwork Insulation Air Devices Controls Water Specialties Fire & Smoke Dampers Motor Starters Vibration Isolation Piping Materials DX Condensing Units Sound Attenuators Electric Duct Heaters Pipe Markers Roof Pipe Supports Chilled Water Storage Tank Unit Heaters

F. Approval of these submittals shall not be construed as releasing the contractor from compliance with the contract Documents. They are a means of coordinating the work and aiding in the proper selection and installation of equipment. Do not release items such as fire dampers and starters until associated equipment or ductwork drawings are approved. All materials and equipment shall be subject to final acceptance by the Engineer at the completion of construction and adjustments of the system.

G. If a submittal is returned to the Contractor marked “Rejected” or “Revise and Resubmit”, only one (1) additional submittal will be permitted without the Contractor incurring charges for the additional re-submittals. SEG shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for any expense in connection with any necessary submission in addition to the two (2) submissions allowed. Contractor will be billed by SEG at a rate of $125/hr for these occurrences.

1.14 MECHANICAL INSPECTIONS

A. GENERAL: Contractor shall formally request inspections of any and all mechanical systems installations. Inspections shall include but not be limited to: pipe tests, underground installations prior to backfill, rough-in installations, wall cover inspections, above ceiling inspections and final inspection.

B. Contractor shall provide a MINIMUM of 48 hour notice prior to requested inspection time, no exceptions.

C. INSPECTION REPORTS: After each inspection, SEG will generate an inspection report and distribute promptly. The Contractor will then be given 7 working days from date of report to address all deficiencies listed on the report. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall verify that all items on each inspection report have been addressed by their subcontractors in this time period. Once verified the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall sign-off on each deficiency listed on the report and return the signed-off copy of the inspection report to SEG via e-mail. After the signed-off report is returned to SEG, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall request a re-inspection by SEG to close the report. If after 7 working days no re-inspection is requested by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR to close a report, SEG reserves the right to re-inspect whenever our schedule allows, with these re-inspections still being subject to Paragraph D below.

D. TEST REJECTIONS AND RE-INSPECTIONS: If a test is rejected or a re-inspection of an issued SEG Inspection Report is found to NOT be completely addressed, only ONE (1) additional inspection will be permitted without the Contractor incurring charges for each additional inspection required. SEG shall be reimbursed $500 by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR for expenses in connection with EACH inspection in addition to the two (2) inspections allowed.

END OF SECTION


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 00 00-6

Aldine Independent School District COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 05 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 00-1

SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. The General Mechanical Requirements as specified in Sections 23, apply to the work specified in this Section.






A. Coordinate the work with other trades to arrange for all holes, chases, and other spaces necessary for the installation of all components of the plumbing systems. Inform the other trades in ample time for these to be provided. Failure to comply with this requirement may necessitate cutting and patching work. If such work becomes necessary, it will be done under this Section of the specifications, and shall conform to all applicable requirements of other Sections of the Specifications.

B. Where concrete flooring or paving must be cut to install MEP systems, contractor shall take measures to prevent damaging existing underground services. Contractor shall utilize ground penetrating radar and electrical circuit tracing equipment in the area to be saw cut to determine the existence of underground services. When saw cutting, limit the depth of the cut to less than the thickness of the concrete. Breakout the concrete manually with special care in areas of possible underground services.

2.2 PIPE SUPPORTS

A. GENERAL: Provide pipe supports and guides of size and type to support pipe as well as limit movement. Minimum size hanger rod shall be 3/8”. Piping connected to a piece of equipment shall have a support located near enough to the equipment that there will be no pipe weight supported by the equipment. In no case shall the nearest support be more than two feet horizontally from the connection point. Pipe support material shall be selected to be compatible with the pipe material to prevent galvanic corrosion. Un-insulated copper piping shall be wrapped with gas wrap tape at each hanger (minimum 2” beyond hanger), and supports shall be hot dipped copper clad or plastic covered. Vertical copper piping shall have a minimum on one intermediate support if over five feet.

B. HORIZONTAL PIPING SUPPORT SPACING: As recommended by support manufacturer, but spaced not more than listed below:

Pipe Size Steel Pipe Other Pipe


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 00-2

1" & Smaller 6 Feet 4 Feet

1¼" & 1½" 8 Feet 5 Feet

2" 8 Feet 5 Feet

2½" to 4" 8 Feet 6 Feet

6" and Larger 8 Feet 6 Feet

C. SUPPORT FROM ABOVE: Support piping near roof or upper floor from structure if sufficient strength exists. Use a method suitable for type of construction and of sufficient strength. Use threaded steel hanger rods of diameter required to safely support loads. Minimum size hanger rod shall be 3/8”. Install rods through holes drilled in beam flanges, 1½" x 1½" x 8" angles welded to structural members or top cord slot at joist panel points and secure with large washers and nuts. Refer to structural drawing details for additional information. Hangers shall be manufactured by Grinnell or Tolco. Do not use perforated strap.

01 SINGLE RUNS OF PIPE, NO EXPANSION PROBLEM: Adjustable clevis type Grinnell Figure 260.

02 MULTIPLE RUNS: Trapeze hangers.

03 BEAM CLAMPS: Grinnell Figure 92 for smaller pipe

04 BEAM CLAMPS: Grinnell Figure 228 (storm or sanitary 8” and larger)

D. SUPPORT FROM BELOW: All piping near the floor, or where ceiling structure does not have sufficient strength, or where there is no ceiling shall be supported from below. Support members shall be steel pipe with base plates, or welded steel structure suitably braced.

E. SUPPORT MATERIAL FINISH: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel. Provide hot dipped copper clad supports for copper piping.

F. PIPE SADDLES: Install 18 gauge, formed galvanized sheets at each support point for insulated pipe, shaped to fit pipe, and covering bottom half of pipe. Length at saddle shall be not less than twice the insulation outside diameter, 16” minimum length. Provide compressible gasketing between non-insulated plastic pipe and hangers. Provide insulating material between dissimilar metal.


A. GENERAL: All vibration isolation devices shall be designed and furnished by a single manufacturer, or supplier, who will be responsible for adequate coordination of all phases of this work. Submittal data shall show type, size and deflection of each isolator proposed.

B. CORROSION PROTECTION:

01 All vibration isolators shall be designed or treated for resistance to corrosion.

02 Steel components shall be PVC coated or phosphated and painted with industrial grade enamel. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc electroplated. Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of welding slag and primed with zinc chromate or metal etching primer. A finish coat of industrial enamel shall be applied over the primer.

C. SELECTION: Spring deflections listed are static deflection and are minimum requirements. Isolation efficiencies listed are the minimum required. The springs shall be capable of 30% over-travel before becoming solid (minimum 1/2" clearance at final inspection). All isolators supporting a given piece of equipment shall be selected for approximately equal deflection.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 00-3

D. FIRST TWO PIPE HANGERS FROM EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT ISOLATED ON SPRINGS: Provide a spring hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box, coil spring, spring cups, neoprene impregnated fabric washer and steel washer. The hanger box shall be capable of supporting a load of 200% of rated load without noticeable deformation or failure. Static deflection shall be equal to isolation units supporting equipment to which piping is connected.

E. FIRST TWO PIPE HANGERS FROM EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT ON ISOLATORS OTHER THAN SPRINGS: Provide an elastomeric hanger, consisting of a rectangular steel box and an elastomeric isolation element, which shall be of Neoprene or high quality synthetic rubber with anti-ozone additive. The elements shall be designed for approximately 1/4" deflection and loaded so that deflection does not exceed 15% of the free height of the element. The design shall be such as to prevent metal-to-metal contact between the hanger rod and the steel box.

F. AIR HANDLING UNITS: Units are internally isolated from the factory.

G. PUMPS: Mount floor mounted pumps on a CPF inertia base consisting of steel pouring frame with reinforcing bars welded in place and inboard isolator attachments with Amber/Booth Type RSW-1 spring isolators, 1" deflection.

H. FLEXIBLE HOSE: Flexible connections at pumps shall be stainless steel flexible hose with flanges and stainless steel wire braid. Amber Booth Type SS-FP.

I. AIR COMPRESSOR: Mount air compressor on a pad type mounting consisting of two layers of 3/8" ribbed neoprene bonded to galvanized steel separator plate with free hole drilled through all. Provide top bearing plate with hole to spread point loads. Size pads for approximately 40 PSI load.

J. CHILLERS: See Chiller Specification

K. FANS:

01 GENERAL: This Section refers to in-line fans and other structure hung fans including CVT (VAV) BOXES.

02 FANS LARGER THAN .5 HORSEPOWER: Provide a spring hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box, coil spring, spring cups, neoprene impregnated fabric washer and steel washer. The hanger box shall be capable of supporting a load of 200% of rated load without noticeable deformation or failure. Size for 1½" deflection, 95% efficient.

03 SMALL HORSEPOWER, STRUCTURE MOUNTED FANS INCLUDING CVT BOXES: Provide an elastomeric hanger, consisting of a rectangular steel box and an elastomeric isolation element, which shall be of Neoprene or high quality synthetic rubber with anti-ozone additive. The elements shall be designed for approximately 1/4" deflection and loaded so that deflection does not exceed 15% of the free height of the element. The design shall be such as to prevent metal-to-metal contact between the hanger rod and the steel box.

L. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Amber/Booth, Kinetics, Korfund, Mason, Peabody, Vibra-Sonics, Vibration Mountings and Southeastern Hose.

2.4 MOTORS

A. GENERAL: This section applies to motors larger than 1/2 horsepower and not part of an assembly. Select for starting torque and current, suitable to start and continuously run equipment served. Horsepower rating shown on Drawings are preferred, but motor must not be loaded more than 1.0 X nameplate horsepower. Provide larger motor if required to stay within this limitation, and include all costs for any required increases in the electrical


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 00-4

system. All motors shall have metallic nameplates marked with information required by NEC 430-7. Motors that are controlled by inverters shall be designed for this application.

B. ENCLOSURE: Drip proof for locations protected from the weather; totally enclosed fan cooled for exposure to weather or installed inside air handling units or serving pumps. Frame construction shall be steel or cast iron with all surfaces including air passages coated with a rust inhibiting primer and finished with an alkyd or epoxy enamel paint.

C. INSULATION: Class B for maximum 40° C ambient, Class F or H or higher.

D. EFFICIENCY: Motors shall be premium efficiency type and have all copper windings.

E. SERVICE FACTOR: 1.15.

F. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS: Provide nameplate ratings the same as circuit voltage indicated on the electrical drawings. Coordinate to give proper operation with starting equipment scheduled.

G. SINGLE PHASE MOTORS: Permanent split capacitor start unless special load requires another type, resilient mounting, inherent overload protection and sealed bearings requiring no lubrication but with provisions for future lubrication.

H. THREE PHASE MOTORS: Ball bearings with grease lubrication fitting on top and drain on side or bottom. Provide sleeve bearings with oil cups for units requiring minimum noise level. Average bearing life shall be 150,000 hours.

I. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Allis Chalmers, Baldor, Century, General Electric,

Marathon, Reliance, Siemens, US Motors and Westinghouse.


A. Ball and butterfly valves shall be installed such that handle for valve is positioned on the side of the pipe and is pulled down to close the valve. Provide access panels of adequate size for concealed valves. All valves above a ceiling shall be installed within 24” of the ceiling.

2.6 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. GENERAL: Each valve 2” and larger, except those located adjacent to the equipment they serve, shall have a tag of .050-inch-thick by 1½" diameter brass, stamped or engraved with the valve number and service symbol. Attach tag to the valve with stainless steel chain.

B. SCHEDULE: Furnish a valve schedule properly identifying the valve number and service with the exact location, the material within the pipe and the room numbers or area that the valve serves. Mark the symbol and number of all valves, exactly as the valves are tagged On the "As Built" Drawings. Provide one valve schedule, as above, installed in aluminum frame with plastic shield, and mount on wall of main equipment room.

C. CEILING IDENTIFICATION: For valves above accessible ceilings, glue red star on ceiling tee intersection nearest the valve location.

2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. GENERAL: Each piece of mechanical equipment shall be suitably marked with the name as listed on the plans. Name shall be prominently displayed so it may be easily located and read after equipment installation. Pumps may be marked on adjacent piping.

B. The following equipment shall be marked with decal or stencil painted, 3" high letters:

01 Air Handling Units


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 00-5

02 Chillers 03 Boilers

C. The following equipment shall be marked with decal or stencil painted, 2" high letters:

01 Fans 02 VAV/CVT Boxes

2.8 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify all new and existing system piping. Use EMED Co. Kwik-Koil Pipe Markers of appropriate legend and background color, complete with direction arrow. Select appropriate size for diameter of the piping including insulation. Markers or arrows not wrapping the full circumference of the pipe shall be tie wrapped in place, otherwise taped at each end.

B. Apply markers as follows:

01 At input and output of each piece of equipment inside building.

02 At each valve not in a mechanical room.

03 At every point a pipe enters or exits a wall or floor.

04 At intervals not exceeding 20 feet.

C. These markers shall conform to OSHA and ANSI A 13.1 Codes. Arrow markers must have same ANSI background colors as their companion pipe markers and wrap completely around pipe with 3” overlap.

D. Pipe markers and arrow markers shall be provided as follows:

01 Chilled Water Supply

02 Chilled Water Return

03 Heating Water Supply

04 Heating Water Return

2.9 PIPE PAINTING

A. GENERAL: All piping or insulation on piping exposed to view shall be painted. Insulated pipe with required metal jacket shall not be painted.

B. PAINT TYPE: Industrial grade, high gloss enamel over suitable primer. Provide two finish coats.

C. COLOR CODING: (Verify with Architect prior to painting)

01 Chilled Water Medium Blue

02 Heating Water Maroon

2.10 ACCESS PANELS

A. REQUIRED: Panels of size and location to provide access to all concealed valves and equipment. Obtain Architect's approval of locations and type before ordering.

B. SIZE: Minimum 12" x 12", larger where required for adequate service access.

C. WALL MOUNTED: Best suited for surface materials in which installed, constructed of 12 gauge stainless steel, complete with anchor straps, concealed hinges, dust tight door and cylinder lock, all doors keyed alike. Prime coated steel is acceptable for installation in


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 00-6

painted surfaces. U. L. Listed for 1-1/2 hour rating.

D. DUCT MOUNTED: Galvanized steel construction with four cam latches. Provide 1" fiberglass insulation for insulated ducts. Minimum size of 16"x16" unless limited by duct size.

E. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Acudor, Mi-Fab and Zurn.

2.11 SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves for all piping passing through walls, floors not on grade and roof slabs. Make sleeves of galvanized pipe and sized to provide clearance of 1/4" around piping or pipe insulation if pipe is insulated. Set end of sleeve flush with the surrounding surface of wall or ceiling in which sleeve is installed. Floor slab sleeves shall extend 3" above floor level.

B. Sleeves through floors and through fire walls shall be fire caulked or otherwise protected to maintain the fire rating of the wall.

2.12 PLATES

A. Provide chromium plated wall and ceiling plates for all exposed piping, at point piping passes through walls or ceilings. Plates shall be large enough to completely cover pipe sleeves. On insulated piping, inside diameter of plates shall just exceed outside diameter of pipe covering. Plates may be omitted for pipe sizes larger than 3".

2.13 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Provide dielectric insulating unions at all connections between dissimilar metals.

2.14 HEAT TRACE SYSTEM

A. GENERAL: Install freeze protection system on mechanical piping where noted on the Drawings or in these specifications.

B. MATERIALS: Raychem XL-Trace self-regulating heat tape, Catalog 2XL1-CR/CT, 2 watts per foot, 208 volts. Provide power connection kit for plugging into a receptacle, end seal and thermostat.

C. INSTALLATION: Install straight along bare pipe wrapping twice around valves. Tie wrap to pipe at short intervals. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District VIBRATION ISOLATION Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 0548 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 JH- R16-0941.00

Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0548-1

SECTION 23 0548 - VIBRATION ISOLATION PART 1- GENERAL


A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. B. This section is supplementary to other sections of Division 23, except where conflict exists

between Section 230550 and other sections of Division 23, this Section 230548 shall govern.

1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Complete vibration isolation systems for equipment, piping and ductwork including: B. Vibration isolators. C. Foundations and supports.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following data, in a schedule, for approval, clearly identifying each item of equipment supported and the isolation to be installed at each point of support: 1. Horsepower of each motor and rpm of both driven and driver, in each supported unit. 2. Scheduled deflection of each isolator. Identification of each isolator to be selected by

model number and spring color. 3. Deflection of each isolator under the calculated load, actual loaded and unloaded

measurable spring height. 4. The loading at which each isolator would be fully compressed to solid.

B. Shop Drawings, Supplemental to Division 1 Requirements: 1. Concrete and steel details for all inertia bases. 2. Vibration isolation devices: Catalog cuts referencing isolator “type”, isolation efficiencies,

isolator deflections, and layout drawings for all pipes and ducts showing isolator location, sizes, deflection and dimensional data.

3. Reinforcing and template steels. 4. Quality assurance provisions.

C. Samples: 1. Provide one sample of each type of vibration isolator in use on the project.

D. Final Inspection Report: 1. Submit final inspection report as described in Item 3.4 of this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Responsibilities:

1. Determine vibration isolation sizes and locations. 2. Provide piping and equipment isolation systems as scheduled or specified. 3. Guarantee specified isolation system deflection. 4. Provide installation instructions and drawings. 5. Unless otherwise indicated in the Vibration Isolation Schedule, substitution of “internally

isolated” mechanical equipment in lieu of the specified isolation of this Section must be approved for individual equipment units, and is acceptable only if products provided strictly conform to these specifications.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. All vibration isolation products described in this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements specified herein, provide vibration isolation materials, bases and systems by one of the following or approved equal: 1. Kinetics Noise Control, In. 2. Mason Industries, Inc.


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0548-2

3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 4. Ventfabrics, Inc. 5. DuroDyne 6. Hardcast Carlisle 7. Proco Products

B. Where listed, references are to Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. (K.N.C.), Mason Industries, Inc. (M.I.I), Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. (V.M.C.I.), Ventfabrics, Inc. (V.I.), DuroDyne (D.D.), Hardcast Carlisle (H.C.), and Proco Products (P.P.).

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All vibration isolators shall have either known undeflected heights or other markings so that

after adjustment, when carrying their load, the deflection under load can be verified, thus determining that the load is within the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being provided according to the design.

B. All isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer and shall be linear over a deflection range 50% above the design deflection.

2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Type “A”: Spring isolators:

1. Minimum diameter of 0.8 of the loaded operating height. 2. Corrosion resistance where exposed to corrosive environment with: 3. Springs cadmium plated and neoprene coated. 4. Hardware cadmium plated. 5. All other metal parts hot dip galvanized. 6. Minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. 7. Leveling device. 8. 1/4" thick neoprene acoustical base pad. 9. Designed and installed so that ends of springs remain parallel. 10. Spring mounts with springs welded to housing are not acceptable. 11. Non-resonant with equipment forcing frequencies or support structure natural

frequencies. 12. One of the following:

a. Type SLF - M.I.I. b. Type AC - V.M.C.I. c. Type FDS - K.N.C

B. Type “B”: Spring isolators shall be the same as Type “A” except: 1. Where operating weight differs from installed weight, provide built-in adjustable limit stops

to prevent equipment rising when weight is removed. All restraining bolts shall have large rubber grommets to provide cushioning in the vertical and horizontal modes. The hole through the bushing shall be a minimum of 3/4" larger in diameter than the restraining bolt.

2. A minimum of one layer of 1/4" neoprene base pad at the bottom of the mount. 3. Tapped holes in top plate for bolting to equipment. 4. Capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during equipment erection. 5. One of the following:

a. Type SLR - M.I.I. b. Type AWRS - V.M.C.I. c. Type FLS - K.N.C.

C. Type “C”: Spring hanger rod isolators: 1. Spring element seated on a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup. 2. Steel retainer box encasing the spring and neoprene cup. 3. The neoprene cup shall incorporate a neoprene bushing projecting through the lower rod

hole of the steel retainer box to prevent steel-to-steel contact.


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0548-3

4. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole size large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the hole and short- circuiting the spring.

5. One of the following: a. Type 30 - M.I.I. b. Type SH - V.M.C.I. c. Type SH - K.N.C.

D. Elastomer Types - All elastomer isolators shall incorporate the following: 1. Bolt holes for bolting to equipment base. 2. Bottom steel plates for bolting to sub-base as required. 3. Unit type design molded in black oil-resistant neoprene. 4. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered. 5. Neoprene to be not greater than 50 durometer.

E. Type “D”: Double deflection elastomer mount: 1. Rated minimum deflection of 0.35". 2. One of the following:

a. Type ND - M.I.I. b. Type RD - V.M.C.I. c. Type RD - K.N.C.

F. Type “D-1”: Captive Neoprene Mount: 1. Captive neoprene elements shall be arranged in opposition within a steel or ductile iron

housing to provide positive restraint in all directions. 2. Neoprene elements shall prevent metal to metal contact during normal operation. 3. Molded unit type neoprene element with minimum deflection of 0.13". 4. One of the following:

a. Type BR - M.I.I. b. Type RSM - V.M.C.I. c. Type RQ - K.N.C.

G. Type “E”: Double deflection elastomer hanger rod isolators: 1. Steel retainer box encasing neoprene mounting. 2. Molded unit type neoprene element with minimum deflection of 0.20". 3. Neoprene element to incorporate a neoprene bushing projecting through steel retainer

box for the lower rod hole to prevent steel-to-steel contact. 4. Clearance between mounting hanger rod and steel retainer box. 5. One of the following:

a. Type HD - M.I.I. b. Type RHD - V.M.C.I. c. Type RH - K.N.C.

H. Type “F”: Pad type neoprene mountings: 1. 3/4" minimum thickness 2. 50 psi maximum loading. 3. 0.1" deflection per pad thickness. 4. 1/16" galvanized steel plate between multiple layers of pad thickness where necessary to

achieve scheduled deflection. 5. Suitable bearing plate to distribute load. 6. One of the following:

a. Type Super W - M.I.I. b. Type MaxiFlex - V.M.C.I. c. Type RSP - K.N.C.

I. Type “G”: Combination spring/elastomer hanger rod isolators: 1. Spring and neoprene isolator elements in a steel box retainer. 2. Characteristics of spring and neoprene as described in Type “C” and Type “E” isolators. 3. Factory pre-loading to 75% of rated load (for pre-compressed springs). 4. One of the following:

a. Type 30N - M.I.I.


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0548-4

b. Type RSH - V.M.C.I. c. Type SRH - K.N.C.

J. Type “H”: Thrust restraints: 1. Use on all fan heads and axial or centrifugal fans where the air thrust exceeds 10% of the

equipment weight. Manufacturer is responsible for making this determination. 2. The thrust restraint consists of a Type “A” isolator with the same deflection as specified in

the schedule for the mountings or hangers. 3. Spring element contained within a steel frame designed so it can be preset for thrust at

the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1/4" movement at start and stop.

4. Assembly furnished with one rod and angle brackets for attachment to both equipment and ductwork or the equipment and the structure.

5. Restraints attached at the centerline of thrust and symmetrically on either side of the unit. 6. One of the following:

a. Type WB - M.I.I. b. Type HTR - V.M.C.I. c. Type HSR - K.N.C.

K. Type “J”: All-directional piping anchors: 1. Mountings to consist of a telescoping arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated

by a minimum of 1/2" thick, heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck isolation pad. 2. Provide vertical restraints by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either

direction. 3. Allowable load on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 psi. 4. One of the following:

a. Type ADA - M.I.I. b. Type MDPA - V.M.C.I. c. Type KPA - K.N.C.

2.4 ROOFTOP SPRING CURBS

A. Curb mounted isolation base 1. Type “RSC-1”:

a. Integral spring and weather curb arrangement that fits under the equipment to be isolated and over the curb.

b. Top and bottom members constructed of extruded aluminum and connected by a flexible, water-proof neoprene membrane. The aluminum members seal against the curb with continuous closed cell neoprene sponge. The extruded aluminum top member shall overlap the bottom member to provide water runoff should the seals fail. Corners shall be mitered and welded.

c. Cadmium plated springs with a 1" deflection and 50% additional travel to solid. Spring diameters no less than 0.8 of the spring height at rated load.

d. Springs cadmium plated or epoxy powder coated with deflections as called out in the schedule and 50% additional travel to solid. Spring diameters of no less than 0.8 of the spring height at rated load. All spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers.

e. The system should incorporate two layers of staggered joint 5/8" drywall directly attached to the top of the roof structure within the curb surrounding the ducts. All interfaces should be caulked. In addition, 4" thick, 1.5 lb/ft3 density glass or mineral fiber shall cover the drywall surface under the unit and all sides of the plenum.

f. One of the following: i. Type RSC-dB - M.I.I. ii. Products by V.M.C.I. or K.N.C. that meet the requirements listed above.


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0548-5

2.5 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Type “B-1A”, Integral Structural Steel Bases: B. Reinforced as required to prevent base flexure at startup and misalignment of drive and driven

units. C. Fan bases complete with motor slide rails. D. Depth equal to 1/10 of the longest dimension of the base, not exceeding 14". E. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations. F. Isolators shall be Type “A”. G. One of the following:

1. Type WFSL - M.I.I. 2. Type SFB - K.N.C. 3. Type WFB - V.M.C.I.

H. Type “B-2A”, Concrete Inertia Bases I. Manufacturer to provide steel pouring forms for floating concrete bases. Bases for split case

pumps shall provide support for suction and discharge elbows. Bases for fans shall contain motor slide rails as required.

J. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing as required to prevent flexure, misalignment of drive and driven unit or stress transferal into equipment.

K. Forms shall be provided with steel templates to hold anchor bolt sleeves and anchor bolts while concrete is being placed.

L. Base depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base, but not less than 6". Base depth need not exceed 12" unless specifically requested.

M. Height saving brackets shall be employed to maintain 1" clearance from bottom of base to floor. N. Bases shall incorporate Type “A” isolators provided by vibration control supplier. O. Base ready for concrete pour; concrete weighing not less than 140 lbs per cubic foot by others. P. One of the following:

1. Type KSL,BMK - M.I.I. 2. Type CIB-H,CIB-L - K.N.C. 3. Type WPF - V.M.C.I

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Type “FC-1”, Neoprene Connectors for General Piping:

1. Size 1 1/2" and larger shall be twin sphere connector constructed of neoprene and Kevlar tire cord reinforcement. The raised face rubber flanges must encase solid steel rings to prevent pull out. Flexible cable is not acceptable.

2. Size less than 1 1/2" shall be a single sphere connector of neoprene and Kevlar tire cord fabric. Bead wires to prevent pull out acceptable for single sphere connectors less than 1 1/2".

3. Minimum ratings shall be 200 psi at 220°F with minimum safety factor of 3:1. 4. Size 12" and larger to employ control cables with end fittings isolated from anchor plates

by means of 1/2" bridge bearing neoprene washer bushings designed for a maximum 1000 psi.

5. Connector 1 1/2" and larger to be one of the following or equal: a. Type SFDEJ - M.I.I. b. Type VMT - V.M.C.I. c. Type FTC - K.N.C.

6. Connector less than 1 1/2" to be one of the following or equal: a. Type SFU - M.I.I. b. Type VMS - V.M.C.I. c. Type FC - K.N.C.

B. Type "FC-2”, Flexible Stainless Hoses: 1. Braided flexible metal hose to be installed in pairs to accept movement in all directions. 2. Pipe sizes less than 3" to be provided with male nipple fittings.


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0548-6

3. 3" and larger pipe size to be provided with fixed steel flanges. 4. Suitable for operating pressure with 4:1 minimum safety factor. 5. Minimum length for given diameter of pipe shall be (pipe diameter in inches x length in

inches): 1/2x9, 3/4x10, 1x11, 1 1/4x12, 1 1/2x13, 2x14, 2-1/2x18, 3x14, 4x15, 5x19, 6x20, 8"x22", 10x26, 12x28, 14x30, 16x32.

6. Connector to be one of the following or equal: a. Type BSS - M.I.I. b. Type BFMC - K.N.C. c. Type FF-6201 - P.P.

C. Type “FC-3”, Flexible Duct Connections to Fans: 1. 30 ounce wovenglass fiber coated with neoprene, sewn together at the edges and joints. 2. 6" long and held in place with 1" wide bands of 12 ga. galvanized steel bolted to duct and

to outlets and inlets of the units and fans with 1/8" stove bolts, 5" o.c. Metal connections 3" wide on either side of the flexible material, as provided by the manufacturer, may also be used.

3. Connector to be one of the following or equal: a. Ventglass - V.I. b. Insulflex - D.D. c. Neoprene - H.C.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine all work prepared by others to receive work of this Section and report problems or defects affecting installation to the General Contractor/Construction Manager for correction.

B. Inspect all components of the Work to insure no damage has occurred during shipment or storage.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install vibration isolation devices and systems in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions. B. Floor Mounted Equipment:

1. Housekeeping pads of thickness indicated on drawings or in specifications: a. Over entire floor area of supported equipment. b. Supporting all vibration isolation devices and bases. c. Keyed with hairpins as required to be integral with the structural slab. d. Increased to 8" thick for chillers.

2. Concrete per specification describing requirements C. General Equipment Isolation:

1. Provide 2" operating clearance between concrete inertia bases and housekeeping pad and 1" clearance between equipment or structural bases and housekeeping pad.

2. Isolation mounting deflection (minimum) as specified or scheduled on manufacturer’s certified drawings.

3. Position equipment, structural base and concrete bases on blocks or wedges at proper operating height.

4. Provide operating load conditions prior to transferring base isolator loads to springs and removing wedges.

5. Electrical conduit connections to isolated equipment shall be looped or installed with flexible conduit to allow free motion of isolated equipment.

6. Install equipment directly on isolation system. Support rails between the equipment and isolators should not be used.

7. Verify all installed isolators and mounting systems permit equipment motion in all directions.

8. Adjust or provide additional resilient restraints to limit startup equipment lateral motion to 1/4".


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0548-7

9. Prior to startup, clean out all foreign matter between bases and equipment. Verify that there are no isolation short circuits in the base or isolators.

10. No rigid connections between rotating or vibrating equipment and building structure shall be made that degrades the vibration isolation system herein specified.

11. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the “building”. Inform other trades following, such as plastering, drywall, electrical or sheet metal, to avoid any contact which would reduce the vibration isolation.

12. Bring to the Architect’s attention immediately, prior to installation, any conflicts with other trades which will result in unavoidable rigid contact with equipment or piping as described herein, due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the contractor’s expense.

13. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations which are deemed defective in workmanship or material as a result of project completion inspection or subsequent inspections due to owner complaints within a period of one year following acceptance.

D. Piping and Ductwork Isolation: 1. Use factory preloading for the first three hangers from all equipment containing rotating or

vibrating parts, such as pumps, AHUs, etc. and for all piping greater than 6" in diameter. The first four isolators from the equipment shall have the same static deflection of the isolator used for the equipment itself. Subsequent isolators shall have a static deflection of 1/2 that of connected equipment with a minimum of 1".

2. Isolate all water (hot and chilled), greater than 2" in diameter in mechanical rooms and outside of mechanical rooms within 50 feet of the mechanical room enclosure with Type “G” hanger rod isolators with a minimum static deflection of 1". Isolate same piping 2" in diameter or less with Type “E” hanger rod isolators with a minimum static deflections of 0.20".

3. Isolate all ductwork in mechanical rooms and outside of equipment rooms within 50 feet of mechanical room enclosure with Type “C” hanger rod isolators with 1" static deflection.

4. In locations where services are to receive vibration isolation but in-line equipment does not; provide appropriate flexible connectors or the same type of vibration isolation device as scheduled for the service.

5. Isolate piping where exposed to the exterior of the building and supported by the roof with Type “B” isolators with 1" minimum static deflection.

6. Expansion tanks, air separators, and other devices not containing rotating or vibrating parts but connected to vibration isolated services, must be provided with appropriate flexible connectors or isolation devices equal to those used on adjacent services.

7. Support water piping in shafts and floor supports entering shaft with Type “F” isolators (2 layers).

8. Type “J” all-directional piping anchors are required for the entire rise of all pipes that are connected to equipment containing rotating or vibrating parts and begin their rise within 50’ of the equipment.

9. Provide flexible connections “FC-1” at all connections of pipe to equipment containing rotating or vibrating parts, such as pumps, AHUs, etc.

10. Position isolators: a. Close to building structure. b. Between building structure and supplementary steel if required. c. Not to contact acoustic rated walls.

11. Where supporting from above is not feasible, isolate services/equipment from the floor with trapeze style supports. Use Type “B” isolators with 1" static deflection for mount style supports and Type “G” isolators with 1" minimum static deflection for hanger style supports. Supplementary steel to be sized for a maximum deflection of 0.08" at the center span.

12. Suspend isolators from rigid and massive support points. 13. Adjust as required all isolators to eliminate all contact of the isolated rod with the hanger

rod box retainer or short circuiting of the spring.


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0548-8

14. All wiring connections to transformers, motors, and other electrical equipment supported on vibration isolators shall be made with a minimum 36-inches long flexible conduit in a 360 degree loop. Flexible conduit and cable shall be capable of achieving a greater curvature than what is installed.

3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Check and adjust all isolators to insure there is no short circuiting such as: B. Hanger rods touching boxes. C. Hold-down bolts not released. D. Bolts touching springs. E. Springs and/or neoprene overloaded. F. Bottom neoprene pads short circuited by welding bottom plate to structure. G. Isolation device touching adjacent structures.

3.4 FINAL INSPECTION

A. On completion of installation of all vibration isolation devices herein specified, the local representative of the isolation materials manufacturer shall inspect the completed systems and report, in writing, any installation error, improperly selected isolation devices or other faults in the system that could affect the performance of the system. Contractor shall submit a report to the Architect, including the manufacturer’s representative’s final report, indicating all isolation reported as properly installed or requiring correction and include a report by the Contractor on steps taken to properly complete the isolation work.

B. The Acoustical Consultant will subsequently inspect the systems for conformance to specifications and for proper installation methods. Contractor shall replace or repair, at his expense, any isolation devices that deviate from the specifications, approved shop drawings, and manufacturer’s recommendations as a result of this inspection.

VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE

Equipment Type Tag Number Isolator Type Min. Static Deflection (in inches)

Air Handling Units - Internal Isolation

AHU-01, -02, -03, -04, -05, -06, -07, -08, -09, -10, -11 A, H 2.0

Air Handling Units - Casing Isolation

AHU-01, -02, -03, -04, -05, -06, -07, -08, -09, -10, -11 D, FC-1, FC-3 0.35

Curb Mounted Roof-Top Air Handling Units ERV-1, -2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -7 RSC-dB, FC-1, FC-3 2.0

Terminal Units Inlet ≥ 10” G, FC-2, FC-3 1.0

Split System - Indoor ACU-1B-6B, ACU-7B D-1, FC-1, FC-3 0.10

Split System - Outdoor ACU-1A-6A, ACU-7A B-1A, FC-2 1.0

Pumps-Inline Pipe-Supported In-Line Pumps N/A N/A

Pumps-Base Mounted PCHP-1, 2 B-2A, FC-1 1.0

Air-Cooled Chillers CH-1, 2, 3 B, FC-1 1.0

Boilers B-1, 2 F, FC-2 0.20

Transformers All D 0.35

Aldine Independent School District VIBRATION ISOLATIONJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 0548MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01JH- R16-0941.00

Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0548-9

Piping As described in Item 3.2.D. 1.0

Ductwork As described in Item 3.2.D. 1.0

ISOLATOR TYPES

A) Free-Standing SpringB) Free-Standing Spring with Vertical Limit RestraintC) Spring HangerD) Double Deflection Neoprene MountD-1) Captive Neoprene MountE) Double Deflection Neoprene HangerF) Neoprene PadG) Combination Spring/Neoprene HangerH) Thrust RestraintJ) All Directional Piping AnchorRSC) Curb Mounted Isolation BaseB-1A) Integral Structural Steel BaseB-2A) Concrete Inertia Base with Free-Standing SpringFC-1) Neoprene Piping Flexible ConnectionFC-2) Braided Piping Flexible ConnectionFC-3) Flexible Duct Connector

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District NOISE CONTROL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 0550 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 JH- R16-0941.00

Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0550-1

SECTION 23 0550 - NOISE CONTROL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL


A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. B. This section is supplementary to other sections of Division 23, except where conflict exists

between Section 230550 and other sections of Division 23, this Section 230550 shall govern.

1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Complete noise control systems for equipment, piping and ductwork including:

1. Acoustical performance of equipment systems and air distribution devices. 2. Sound attenuating units. 3. Duct lining. 4. Acoustic lagging. 5. Soundproofing of construction.

B. Noise evaluation of equipment specified elsewhere. C. Acoustical Performance:

1. It is the intent of this specification that noise levels from HVAC equipment (air-conditioning and/or ventilating equipment, ducts, grills, diffusers, mixing boxes, fan coil units, pumps, cooling towers, etc.) will not exceed the Noise Criteria Curves (NC) described in Paragraph 3 of this Section. Noise Criteria Curves establish a single-number rating for evaluating the acceptability of a sound pressure spectrum according to the average person’s hearing. Noise Criteria Curves and their related sound pressure equivalents for each frequency are described in the 2001 ASHRAE Handbook Fundamentals Volume.

2. These NC levels should be used as a guide in the event of product substitutions and shop drawing modifications. The NC levels shall also serve as a gauge by which the results of workmanship and care of installation will be judged from an acoustical standpoint, since a poor installation can lead to the generation of noise.

3. Noise Criteria for occupied spaces for this project shall be established as listed below. Rooms listed having a background noise level of NC 30 or lower are considered “sound critical spaces” and as such, walls, floors, and ceilings comprising each of these rooms shall be sealed to prevent sound transfer in accordance with the specifications and drawings.

Room Noise Criterion Music Halls 20 Library 25 Labs, Classrooms, & Learning Centers 30 Gymnasiums 35 Offices 35 Conference Rooms 35 Common Areas 40

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings, supplemental to Division 1 requirements: 1. Noise control enclosures and plenum. 2. Ductwall external sound proofing. 3. Product data and schedules:

a. Sound attenuators.


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0550-2

b. Duct lining. c. Acoustic lagging.

4. Air distribution devices (grilles, registers and diffusers). 5. VAV units, fan terminal units. 6. Fans, blowers, air-conditioning equipment, pumps.

B. Test Reports: Submit certified, independent acoustical test reports, not prior to 1975, from an accredited laboratory, member of NVLAP (National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program) for the following: 1. Sound Attenuators: Acoustical performance shall be established by ASTM E-477-96

procedures. Dynamic insertion loss, air generated noise and aerodynamic performance test results, both in positive and negative flow, with pressure drop ratings shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this Specification.

2. Duct Lining: Acoustical performance shall be established by ASTM C423-90 procedures. Sound absorption coefficients with Type “A” mounting per ASTM E795 shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this Specification.

3. Acoustic Lagging: Acoustical performance shall be established by ASTM E413 and E90 procedures. Insertion loss, transmission loss and STC data shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this Specification.

4. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers: Acoustical performance shall be established by ADC 1062GRD and ADC/ARI standard 885 procedures. Sound power data and NC value with correction factors used shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this Specification. (NC data only is not acceptable.)

5. VAV Boxes: Acoustical performance shall be established by ANSI/ARI 880-89 procedures. Sound power data and NC value with correction factors used shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this Specification. (Data presented in Sones is not acceptable.)

6. Condensing Units: Acoustical performance shall be established by CTI Code ATC-128 procedures. Sound pressure level data shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this Specification.

7. AC Units: Acoustical performance shall be established by AMCA Standard 350 procedures. Sound data shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this Specification. (Data presented in Sones or Bels is not acceptable.)

8. Indoor Packaged AHUs and Air Conditioning Equipment: Acoustical performance shall be established by AMCA Standard 330/ ASHRAE Standard 68, or ARI 260P procedures. Sound data shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this Specification. (Data presented in Sones or Bels is not acceptable.)

9. Air Cooled Chillers: Acoustical performance shall be established by ARI Standard 270 (<10 tons) or 370 (>10 tons) procedures. Sound power level data shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this Specification.


A. Manufacturers to have been in the production and installation of noise control products for a period of no less than five years.

B. Manufacturer to supervise installation of noise control systems where specified later in this section.

C. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, all work of this Section shall conform to the following Standard Specification requirements: 1. ADC 1062GRD-84 Test Code for Grilles, Registers and Diffusers 2. ADC 1062R4 Equipment Test Code for Air Terminal Boxes (VAV) 3. AMCA Standard 300-1996 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans 4. AMCA Standard 301-1990 Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory

Test Data


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0550-3

5. ANSI S12.2-1995 Criteria for Evaluating Room Noise 6. ANSI S12.34-1988 Engineering Method for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of

Noise Sources for Essentially Free-Field Conditions over a Reflecting Plane 7. ANSI/ARI 880-89P Air Terminals 8. ARI Standard 370-86 Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Equipment 9. ARI Standard 260 Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment 10. ARI Standard 270 Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment 11. ARI 890/ASHRAE 70-91 Rating of Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies 12. ARI Standard 885-90 Method for Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the

Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets 13. ARI Standard 575-94 Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Levels within Equipment

Rooms 14. ASHRAE Standard 68-86 / AMCA Standard 330-86 Method of Testing In-Duct Sound

Power Measurement Procedure for Fans 15. ASTM C423-90 A Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients

by the Reverberation Room Method 16. ASTM C1071-91 Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Mineral Fiber, Duct Lining Material) 17. ASTM E90-90 Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions 18. ASTM E413-87 Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class (STC) 19. ASTM E477-96 Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow

Performance of Duct Liner Materials 20. ASTM E795-92 Practices for Mounting Test Specimens during Sound Absorption Tests 21. ASTM E1222-90 Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Insertion Loss of Pipe

Lagging Systems 22. Sound Attenuators: Acoustical performance shall be established by ASTM E-477-96

procedures. Dynamic insertion loss, air generated noise and aerodynamic performance test results, both in positive and negative flow, with pressure drop ratings shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this Specification.

D. Addresses: 1. ADC Air Diffusion Council, Chicago, IL 312-372-9800 2. AMCA Air Movement and Control Association, Arlington Heights, IL 847-394-0150 3. ANSI American National Standards Institute, New York, NY 212-354-3300 4. ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute, Arlington, VA 703-524-8800 5. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers,

Atlanta, GA 404-636-8400 6. ASTM American Society for Testing of Materials, West Conshohocken, PA 610-832-

9500 PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sound Attenuators: 1. Vibro-Acoustics 2. Industrial Acoustics Company 3. DynaSonics 4. The AeroSonics Corporation

B. Duct Lining: 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation 2. Johns Manville Insulation Division 3. CertainTeed Corporation

C. Acoustic Lagging:


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0550-4

1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Childers Products Company 3. Sound Seal, Division of United Process, Inc. 4. The Proudfoot Company, Inc.

2.2 SOUND ATTENUATORS A. Duct silencers/sound traps/attenuators shall be installed according to the plans, specifications

and enclosed schedule. B. Outer shells of the silencer shall be of 22 gauge minimum galvanized steel, with inner faces of

24 gauge minimum perforated galvanized steel. All internal components shall be spot-welded in place with welds on centers not exceeding 4". Seams shall be lock formed, mastic filled and be airtight when subjected to a differential air pressure of 8" H2O. Leading and trailing edges of modules, when in multiple-configuration shall be filled with a bead of caulking and shall be provided with continuously taped nosing or continuous metallic nosing that is crimped or button punched. Filler material shall be of inorganic mineral or glass fiber under a minimum 5% compression, inert, vermin and moisture proof.

C. Combustion rating for the filler material shall equal or exceed the following when tested in conformance with ASTM E84, NFPA Standard 255 or UL No. 723: 1. Flame Spread Classification: 10 – 25 2. Fuel Contributed: 0 – 15 3. Smoke Development: 0 – 20

D. Acoustical performance shall be established by ASTM E-477 tests in an accredited laboratory. Dynamic insertion loss, air generated noise and aerodynamic performance test results, both in positive and negative flow, shall be supplied by the manufacturer with submittal drawings. All tests are to have been conducted in the same facility. The silencers provided and installed shall have interior configurations, namely splitter and air passage widths, which are identical to the approved test units.

E. Dynamic insertion loss and air generated noise performance under design air flow velocities shall be as scheduled herein.

F. DUCT SILENCER SCHEDULE:

Tag# Type* System Disch/Inlet Dimensions Airflow Face Vel. Static PD

SA01S1 RD-UHV-F2 AHU-01 Disch 28x16x60 6,055 1,946 0.10 SA01S2 RD-UHV-F2 AHU-01 Disch 28x16x60 6,600 2,121 0.12 SA01R1 GD-LV-6 AHU-01 Inlet 54x24 SA01R2 GD-LV-6 AHU-01 Inlet 54x24 SA02S1 RD-UHV-F7 AHU-02 Disch 34x16x60 7,885 2,087 0.13 SA02S2 RD-UHV-F3 AHU-02 Disch 26x16x36 5,665 1,961 0.12 SA02R1 GD-LV-6 AHU-02 Inlet 54x24 SA02R2 GD-LV-6 AHU-02 Inlet 54x24 SA03S1 RD-UHV-F2 AHU-03 Disch 28x16x60 7,545 2,425 0.16 SA03S2 RD-UHV-F7 AHU-03 Disch 34x20x60 9,780 2,071 0.13 SA03R1 GD-LV-6 AHU-03 Inlet TBD SA03R2 GD-LV-6 AHU-03 Inlet TBD SA05S CD-MV-F1 AHU-05 Disch 38ID x38 12,450 1,581 0.05 SA05R TBD AHU-05 Inlet TBD SA07S RD-UHV-F7 AHU-07 Disch 36x16x60 8,900 2,225 0.15 SA07R1 GD-LV-6 AHU-07 Inlet 48x18


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0550-5

SA07R2 GD-LV-6 AHU-07 Inlet 48x18 SA08R RD-MHV-F3 AHU-08 Inlet 52x20x36 4,000 554 0.02 SA09S CD-MV-F1 AHU-09 Disch 24IDx48 4,700 1,496 0.05 SA09R RED-MHV-F4 AHU-09 Inlet 48x48x60 4,700 294 0.02 SA10S1 RD-UHV-F2 AHU-10 Disch 28x16x60 5,830 1,874 0.11 SA10S2 RD-UHV-F2 AHU-10 Disch 28x16x60 6,750 2,170 0.13 SA10R1 GD-LV-6 AHU-10 Inlet 54x24 SA10R2 GD-LV-6 AHU-10 Inlet 54x24 SA11S1 RD-UHV-F1 AHU-11 Disch 30x16x60 7,775 2,333 0.14 SA11S2 RD-UHV-F2 AHU-11 Disch 28x16x60 5,775 1,856 0.09 SA11R1 GD-LV-6 AHU-11 Inlet 60x24 SA11R2 GD-LV-6 AHU-11 Inlet 60x24 SAV801 RD-MHV-F7 VAV-8.01 Disch 18x20x60 2,250 900 0.08 SAV802 RD-MHV-F7 VAV-8.02 Disch 18x20x60 2,250 900 0.08

*Type numbers are based, for identification purposes, on Vibro-Acoustics models.

G. DUCT SILENCER PERFORMANCE SCHEDULE: 1. The following minimum Dynamic Insertion Loss performance in decibels shall be

provided by each silencer when measured at the indicated face velocity for forward (+) or reverse (-) flow:

Type Airflow Direction

Octave band Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

RD-UHV-F2 + 3 5 11 19 19 17 14 GD-LV-6 - 4 5 6 9 12 14 16 RD-UHV-F7 + 5 4 10 20 28 23 19 RD-UHV-F3 + 2 4 7 12 11 10 8 CD-MV-F1 + 5 9 18 25 33 34 24 RD-MHV-F3 - 4 7 11 16 16 12 10 RED-MHV-F4 - 9 11 17 26 28 32 26

RD-UHV-F1 + 2 5 11 19 19 17 14 RD-MHV-F7 + 3 6 17 31 34 27 18

2. The Self or Regenerated Noise sound power levels in decibels re 10-12 watt shall not

exceed the following values (+3 dB) when measured at the indicated face velocity for forward (+) or reverse (-) flow:

Type Airflow Direction

Octave band Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

RD-UHV-F2 + 60 54 45 44 46 50 44 GD-LV-6 - RD-UHV-F7 + 60 55 46 43 46 49 42 RD-UHV-F3 + 56 44 35 34 36 38 29 CD-MV-F1 + 42 34 34 35 26 23 26 RD-MHV-F3 - 44 35 33 33 40 27 10


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0550-6

RED-MHV-F4 - 49 35 31 31 39 23 10

RD-UHV-F1 + 60 54 45 44 45 50 44 RD-MHV-F7 + 57 45 36 35 36 38 29

2.3 SOUND LININGS

A. Duct lining shall be roll form, 2" thick or as called out in the drawings. It shall be installed on all interior surfaces of sheet metal ductwork serving sound critical spaces and where shown on the drawings or specifications.

B. Duct lining shall be adhered by 100% covering of a fire retardant adhesive. The black acrylic face shall face the air stream. When width of duct exceeds 12" and also on sides when height exceeds 24", use non-ferrous mechanical fasteners in addition to 100% adhesive coverage. All transverse and longitudinal abutting edges of duct lining shall be sealed and lapped 3" with a heavy coat of adhesive, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Duct lining shall be fiberglass insulation with a surface acrylic EPA registered anti-microbial coating that will not support biological growth, and meets ASTM G21 and G22 specifications. This coating shall also guard against incursion of dust and dirt into the insulation. This coating shall be damage resistant, i.e., does not tear or abrade easily. Duct lining shall be capable of being cleaned per NAIMA Duct Cleaning Standards. Duct lining shall be black, 1.5 lb/ft3 density meeting the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B, FHC 25/50, and limited combustibility. Duct lining shall be suitable up to 5000 fpm. Duct lining and adhesives shall comply with ASTM E-84 and shall have a maximum flame spread rating of 25 and smoke rating of 50. Duct lining adhesive shall conform to ASTM C916 “Specifications for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation.” Fasteners shall comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Article S2.11.

D. Metal nosings shall be securely installed over transversely-oriented liner edges facing the air stream at forward discharge and at any point where lined duct is preceded by unlined duct. When velocities exceed 4000 FPM, use metal nosings on every leading edge. Nosing may be formed on duct or be channel or zee attached by screws, rivets or welds.

E. Duct lining shall conform to ASTM C1071 standard “Thermal and Acoustical Insulation” and have a 1.00 NRC for 2" thick when tested in accordance with ASTM C423 and E795 procedures mounting Type A.

2.4 ACOUSTIC LAGGING A. Where indicated on the drawings, the duct, pipe, or unit shall be wrapped with a minimum 2"

thick glass or mineral fiber blanket with a minimum 3.0 lb/ft3 density, and a mass loaded vinyl sheet covered with an aluminum foil jacket. Vinyl sheet shall have a nominal density of 1.0 lb/ft3 and shall be 0.10" thick. Jacket edges shall overlap by minimum of 6" and be supplied with velcro or peel off tape to secure jacket around duct/pipe. Complete system shall provide a minimum STC-23 as measured in an independent accredited acoustical laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90 and E413. Insertion Loss (IL) data indicating an IL value of 25 at 500 Hz shall also be submitted.

2.5 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be as specified elsewhere. Sound power and NC data shall

be submitted as described in Section 1.4 of this Specification. Submittal may be rejected if sound power data is more than 3 dB higher in the 63 Hz octave band or 2 dB higher in any other octave band and NC is more than 1 NC higher when compared against the sound data of the specified product as indicated on the schedule.


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0550-7

2.6 VAV BOXES

A. VAV boxes shall be as specified elsewhere. Sound power data shall be submitted as described in Section 1.4 of this Specification. Submittal may be rejected if sound power data is more than 3 dB higher in the 63 Hz octave band or 2 dB higher in any other octave band when compared against the sound data of the specified product as indicated on the schedule. In general, if unit is positioned over the ceiling of a room, then that unit selection shall be made so that radiated and duct-borne sound power levels do not increase that room’s specified NC level.

2.7 AC UNITS A. AC units shall be as specified elsewhere. Sound power data shall be submitted as described in

Section 1.4 of this Specification. Submittal may be rejected if sound power level data is more than 2 dB higher in the 63 Hz octave band or 1 dB higher in any other octave band when compared against the sound data of the specified product as indicated on the schedule. In general, if unit is positioned over the ceiling of a room, then that unit selection shall be made so that radiated and duct-borne sound power levels do not increase that room’s specified NC level.

2.8 INDOOR PACKAGED AHU’S, AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT A. Indoor packaged air handling units and air-conditioning equipment shall be as specified

elsewhere. Sound power data shall be submitted as described in Section 1.4 of this Specification. Provide units with the following maximum sound power levels in dB, re 10-12 W (D=Discharge, I=Ducted Inlet, R=Casing Radiated):

Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)

Tag# D/I/R 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

AHU-01 D 85 87 94 88 86 82 82 I 80 81 88 81 79 78 76 R 81 79 79 79 76 61 55

AHU-02 D 80 81 83 86 82 92 91 I 79 75 79 77 77 87 81 R 81 76 86 77 78 63 61

AHU-03 D I

R

AHU-05 D 92 92 91 91 91 88 86 I 89 87 84 81 82 82 79 R 82 80 76 69 75 63 52

AHU-07 D 88 89 88 88 87 84 82 I 84 82 80 77 78 78 74

R 80 77 73 67 69 58 50

AHU-08 D 77 78 79 72 69 69 65 I 77 76 84 76 72 74 69 R 79 77 82 76 69 57 53

AHU-09 D 77 77 78 71 69 68 65 I 81 77 85 76 72 73 69


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0550-8

R 80 73 83 74 69 57 53

AHU-10 D 84 87 93 86 84 81 80 I 80 81 88 81 79 78 76 R 81 79 79 79 76 61 55

AHU-11 D 80 81 83 86 82 92 91 I 79 75 79 77 77 87 81 R 81 76 86 77 78 63 61

B. Submittal may be rejected if sound power level data is more than 2 dB higher in the 63 Hz

octave band or 1 dB higher in any other octave band when compared against the specified unit.

2.9 AIR-COOLED CHILLERS A. Chillers shall be as specified elsewhere. Sound power level data shall be submitted as

described in Section 1.4 of this Specification. Provide units with the following maximum sound power levels, dB, re 10-12 W:

Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)

Tag# % Load 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 CH-1, 2, 3 100 80 77 81 93 94 93 88

B. Submittal may be rejected if sound power level data is more than 2 dB higher in the 63 Hz

octave band or 1 dB higher in any other octave band when compared against the specified unit.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 SOUNDPROOFING OF CONSTRUCTION A. Required for penetrations of ductwork, pipes, and conduits through walls, floors and ceilings of

mechanical rooms and sound-critical spaces as called out in Acoustical Performance Section 1.2 of this Specification, as well as those walls, floors, and ceilings indicated on the drawings.

B. The Contractor shall ensure that the sound control performance of structures be maintained in accordance with the drawings and specifications. All penetrations shall be installed in a manner that results in complete air tightness through structure. If a condition occurs where penetration of the structure by a duct, pipe, conduit, etc., is not shown clearly on the drawings (or described in the specifications), the Contractor shall ask immediately for clarification of the method necessary to install the particular item.

C. Penetrations of single-wythe masonry and concrete constructions 1. Ductwork

a. Install a metal sleeve at the penetration. Size the sleeve to allow for 1" thick sheet insulation and normal duct clearances. Line the sleeve with 1" thick elastomeric closed cell neoprene sheet insulation, 1.5 PCF fiberglass insulation, or mineral wool.

b. Install duct through lined sleeve and seal airtight with acoustical sealant or fire-rated acoustical sealant if partition is fire-rated.

c. Do not rigidly secure duct to wall with angles. 2. Pipe/conduit diameter = 1" or larger

a. Install a metal sleeve at the penetration. Size the sleeve to allow for 1/2" thick pipe insulation and normal pipe clearances. Line the sleeve with 1/2" thick elastomeric closed cell neoprene pipe insulation, 1.5 PCF fiberglass insulation, or mineral wool.


Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0550-9

b. Install pipe/conduit through lined sleeve and seal airtight with acoustical sealant or fire-rated acoustical sealant if partition is fire-rated.

c. Do not rigidly secure pipe/conduit to wall with angles. 3. Pipe/conduit diameter < 1"

a. Wrap pipe/conduit with 1/2" thick elastomeric closed cell neoprene pipe insulation, 1.5 PCF fiberglass insulation, or mineral wool. Extend wrapping a minimum of 2" beyond the width of the partition on either side.

b. Grout tightly to the neoprene pipe insulation on the pipe/conduit. c. Trim neoprene pipe insulation to the width of the partition, and seal airtight with

acoustical sealant or fire-rated acoustical sealant if partition is fire-rated. D. Penetrations of single stud drywall constructions

1. Ductwork a. Wrap duct with 1" thick elastomeric closed cell neoprene sheet insulation, 1.5 PCF

fiberglass insulation or mineral wool. Extend sheet insulation a minimum of 2-inches beyond the width of the partition on either side.

b. Install drywall tight to the sheet insulation. c. Trim sheet insulation to the width of the partition, and seal airtight with acoustical

sealant or fire-rated acoustical sealant if partition is fire-rated. 2. Pipe/conduit diameter = 1" or larger

a. Wrap with 1/2" thick elastomeric closed cell neoprene pipe insulation, 1.5 PCF fiberglass insulation or mineral wool. Extend wrapping a minimum of 2-inches beyond the width of the partition on either side.

b. Install a metal pipe sleeve around the neoprene insulation. c. Install the drywall around the sleeve and spackle tightly to full thickness of partition. d. Trim pipe insulation and sleeve to the width of the partition, and seal airtight with

acoustical sealant or fire-rated acoustical sealant if partition is fire-rated. 3. Pipe/conduit diameter < 1"

a. Wrap with 1/2" thick closed cell neoprene pipe insulation, 1.5 PCF fiberglass insulation or mineral wool. Extend wrapping a minimum of 2-inches beyond the width of the partition on either side.

b. Install the drywall tight to the neoprene pipe wrap. c. Trim neoprene insulation to the width of the partition, and seal airtight with

acoustical sealant or fire-rated acoustical sealant if partition is fire-rated. E. Multiple duct/pipe/conduit penetrations

1. Where a series of duct, conduits or pipes are penetrating the wall/floor/ceiling, each duct/conduit/pipe shall be separated by minimum 4" in all directions.

2. Multiple duct/pipe/conduit penetrations at one location (i.e., one large opening for a series of pipe runs) are not recommended.

F. Penetrations double stud drywall and/or combination constructions 1. Use same techniques described above EXCEPT do not bridge the two studs or wythes

with solid members such as sleeves or stud frames. Each sleeve or frame must be completely separate for each individual wythe or stud.

3.2 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

A. Subsequent to equipment installation, the installation will be surveyed visually for conformance to specified installation, materials and workmanship by the Acoustical Consultant and Mechanical Engineer. This review will take place following receipt of an air-balancing report, and prior to final acceptance of the installation. All parts of the installation will be reviewed for conformance to this specification including vibration isolation devices, duct connections (and leaks thereof), and sealing of all partition penetrations. The background sound levels due to equipment noise may be measured in occupied spaces by the Acoustical Consultant where noise is considered objectionable.

Aldine Independent School District NOISE CONTROL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMSJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 0550MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01JH- R16-0941.00

Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 23 0550-10

B. If the results of the visual survey indicate non-conformance with the specifications or if theresults of any acoustical measurements indicate non-conformance with the specified NC levels,as described in Section 1.2.C of this specification, due to improper installation, poorworkmanship or unapproved substitutions or shop drawings, it shall be the responsibility of thecontractor to correct, at his own expense, such deficiencies by methods that shall be approvedby the Mechanical Engineer prior to incorporation.

C. After corrections have been made, further acoustical tests shall be performed at contractor’s expense for verification of conformance to specified NC levels.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District TEST AND BALANCE Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 05 93 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 93-1

SECTION 23 05 93 TEST AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL





A. Contractor shall complete the HVAC systems installation and ensure it is operating in the specified manner in a timely manner so the third party Testing and Balancing Contractor may complete his work prior to substantial completion.

B. Provide all instruments and equipment required to pre-balance the system. All instruments shall be in accurate calibration, and shall be calibrated in ranges that will be expected.

1.3 DESIGN CONDITIONS

A. The air conditioning systems have been designed and the equipment selected to perform as follows:

Summer Conditions Indoor Temperatures 75° F DB 60% RH Outdoor Temperatures 95° F DB 80° F WB Winter Conditions Indoor Temperatures 75° F DB Outdoor Temperatures 20° F DB


2.1 GENERAL

A. The HVAC contractor shall clean and adjust all systems as described in paragraph 2.2.

B. The testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) of the air conditioning systems and related equipment for the Owner will be performed by an impartial, technical TAB firm selected and employed by the Owner as described in paragraph 2.3.

2.2 HVAC

A. BOILER INSTALLATION:

01 GENERAL: Before initial firing, the manufacturer's representative shall certify that the installation is safe for firing.

02 OPERATIONAL TEST: Check operation and proper sequencing of all operating


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 93-2

and safety controls and devices. Check pressure relief valve for opening at proper pressure. Make Orsat flue gas analysis and adjust firing for proper air-gas mixture.

03 BOILER LICENSE: Contractor shall provide completed boiler installation report and temporary boiler operating permit on forms downloaded from: http://www.license.state.tx.us/boilers/blrforms.htm.

B. HVAC CONTRACTOR’S SCOPE OF WORK

01 The contractor shall operate the systems for the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion including final adjustments, balancing and readiness for Owner’s TAB firm.

02 The HVAC Contractor shall provide and coordinate services of qualified personnel and equipment suppliers as required to correct repair or replace all deficient items or conditions found during the testing, adjusting and balancing period.

03 The HVAC Contractor shall make any changes in the sheaves, belts, dampers, valves and pump impellers required by the TAB firm to balance the system, at no additional cost to the Owner.

04 Contract completion schedules shall provide sufficient time to permit the completion of TAB firm’s services prior to Owner occupancy.

05 The Drawings and Specifications have indicated valves, dampers and miscellaneous adjusting devices for the purpose of adjustment to obtain optimum operating conditions. Should any such device not be readily accessible, the contractor shall provide access as requested by the TAB firm. Any malfunction encountered by TAB personnel and reported to the contractor or to the inspector shall be immediately corrected by the contractor so the balancing work can proceed.

06 The TAB firm will not have a contractual relationship with this contractor but will be responsible to the Inspector and Owner for the satisfactory execution of the TAB work. The contractor shall allow sufficient funds in the project cost estimate and bid proposal to provide all work which may be required in the TAB phases as defined herein and as may be necessary for the completion of the TAB work as defined by the TAB firm.

C. RELATED WORK

01 The contractor shall have the building and air conditioning systems in complete operational readiness and shall perform all other items as described herein to assist the TAB company in performing the balancing, testing and adjusting of the HVAC systems.

02 For the air distribution systems, the contractor shall complete and verify the following:

a. Verify installation for conformity to design.

b. All supply, return and exhaust ducts shall be completed. All volume, splitter, extractor and fire dampers properly located and functional. Dampers shall provide tight closure and full opening, smooth and free operation.

c. All supply, return, exhaust, transfer grilles, registers, diffusers and terminal units installed, leak tested and operational.

d. Air handling units and ductwork shall be sealed to eliminate excessive by-bass or leakage of air.

e. All air handling units and fans shall be operating and verified for freedom


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 93-3

from vibration, proper fan rotation and belt tension. Starter overload heater elements shall be properly sized, and clean filters installed.

03 For the water circulation systems, the contractor shall complete the following:

a. Check and verify pump alignment and rotation.

b. Water systems shall be cleaned and treated and all strainers cleaned for normal operation. Water circulating systems shall be full and free of air; all vents installed at high points of systems

c. Check each motor amperage and voltage to insure readings do not exceed nameplate rating.

d. Verify electrical overload heater elements to be of proper size and ratings.

e. Check and set operating temperatures of heat exchangers to design requirements.

04 For the automatic controls system, the contractor shall complete the following:

a. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements, a point-to-point check of all DDC and computer controls has been completed and that all controls are functional.

b. All controlling instruments calibrated and set for design conditions.

05 The contractor and the suppliers of the equipment installed shall all cooperate with the TAB firm to provide all necessary data on the design and proper application of the system components and shall furnish all labor and material required to eliminate any deficiencies or mal-performance. Furnish a list of all motors with nameplate data and size of overload heater installed with motor amperage during operation.

06 During the balancing the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Control Manufacturer using data submitted by the TAB firm. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of three successive eight hour days, in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total

variation shall not exceed 2° F from the preset medium temperature during the entire temperature survey period.

07 In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required

to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2° F within each separately controlled space, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained.

08 The contractor shall assist the TAB firm in performing three inspections approximately 30 days apart within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct any unusual condition.

09 The contractor shall assist the TAB firm in performing inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the system components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space.

D. STORAGE

01 The contractor shall provide the TAB firm a secure area of ample size, conveniently located for storage of tools, equipment and other items as required.

E. NOTIFICATION


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 93-4

01 Systems shall be complete and in operational readiness prior to notifying the Owner that the project is ready for the services of the TAB firm and the contractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner that such a condition exists.

02 Should the Owner be so notified and the TAB work commence and the systems are found to not be in readiness or a dispute occurs as to the readiness of the systems, the contractor shall request an inspection be made by the Owner. This inspection shall establish to the satisfaction of the represented parties whether or not the systems meet the basic requirements for TAB services. Should the inspection reveal the notification to have been premature, all costs of the inspection and work previously accomplished by the TAB firm shall be paid for by the contractor. Furthermore, such items as are not ready for TAB services shall again be re-tested. Complete, operational readiness, prior to commencement of TAB services, shall include the work described in RELATED WORK above.

2.3 HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. The testing, adjusting and balancing of the air conditioning systems will be performed by an impartial technical firm whose operations are limited only to the field of professional TAB. The TAB work shall be done under the direct supervision of a qualified engineer employed by the TAB company. Work shall be in accordance with procedures and techniques as outlined in the ASHRAE Systems Handbook in Chapter 57 on TAB and procedural standards for TAB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

B. The TAB firm shall be responsible for inspecting, adjusting, balancing and tabulating the data on the performance of fans, all dampers in the duct systems, all air distribution devices and the flow of water through all coils. The Mechanical Subcontractor, the various subcontractors involved and the suppliers of the equipment installed shall all cooperate with the TAB firm to provide all necessary data on the design and proper application of the system components and shall furnish all labor and material required to eliminate any deficiencies or mal-performance.

C. Professional firms desiring to submit proposals for the performance of professional services for testing and balancing of HVAC systems for projects shall submit the necessary brochures, history of the firm, qualifications of personnel and other pertinent information to the Owner.

D. Professional firms submitting such information on its qualifications and personnel shall keep the information current by submittal of supplemental data a minimum of once every six months or when professional or technical personnel who shall perform the work may change. The Owner shall review the qualified professional firms, with current qualifications submitted, which may be available to perform this work and request proposals, from time to time, for new projects.

E. Each professional firm warrants by the submittal of its personnel qualifications, that such personnel shall be used in the performance of the work. In the event of personnel change, the professional firm submitting a proposal shall submit the complete qualifications and experience record of new personnel. The Owner, upon acceptance of the proposal, expects the work to be performed by the personnel whose experience is so described.

F. QUALIFICATIONS OF THE FIRM

01 The firm shall be one which is licensed to do professional services of this specified type in the State of Texas and as a minimum, have one professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas, with current registration, to perform such professional services.

02 The firm shall have a minimum of one year operation under its current firm name.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 93-5

03 The firm shall be capable of performing the services specified at the location of the facility described within the time specified, preparing and submitting the detailed report of the actual field work performed and following up the basic work as may be required.

G. DOCUMENTS

01 The Owner will provide plans, specifications and change orders to the TAB firm.

02 The Owner will provide approved submittal data on equipment installed.

03 The Owner will transmit one copy of the following “Records for Owner” to the TAB firm for review and comment:

a. “As-Installed” Drawings b. Approved Fixture Brochures, Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams c. Shop Drawings d. Instructions e. Valve Charts

H. RESPONSIBILITY OF THE TAB FIRM

01 The TAB personnel shall check, adjust and balance the components of the air conditioning system which will result in optimum noise, temperature and air flow conditions in the conditioned spaces of the building while the equipment for the system is operating economically. This is intended to be accomplished after the system components are installed and operating as provided for in the contract documents, which is the responsibility of the project contractor.

02 The tests shall demonstrate the specified capacities and operation of all equipment and materials comprising the systems. Such tests shall be made as are deemed necessary by the Architect to indicate the fulfillment of the contract. The TAB firm shall then make available to the Engineer such instruments and technicians as are required for spot checks of the systems.

03 The TAB firm will not instruct nor direct the contractor in any of the work. Any proposed changes or revisions in the work shall be submitted to the Architect in writing. The Architect will process the proposal as appropriate.

I. BALANCING SERVICES

01 The TAB firm, Architect and Owner will inspect the installation of heating and cooling pipe systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems. The inspection of the work will cover that part relating to proper arrangement and adequate provisions for the testing and balancing. The inspections shall be performed periodically as the work progresses.

02 Upon formal notification of completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment by the contractor, TAB firm will balance, test and adjust the system components to obtain optimum condition in each conditioned space in the building.

03 The TAB firm shall be responsible for inspecting, balancing, adjusting, testing and compiling the data on the performance of fans, all dampers in the duct systems, all air distribution devices or heat exchangers, and the water flow through all coils.

04 The TAB firm will, fourteen days prior to Final Inspection, as requested by the Owner prepare seven copies of the completed Test and Balance Report. The report shall be complete with logs, data and records as required herein and all logs, data and records shall be typed, produced on white bond paper and spiral bound. The report shall be certified accurate and complete by a principle engineer


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 93-6

of the TAB firm. Transmit one copy directly to the Owner’s Representative and the remaining six copies to the Architect. The Architect will review and approve the report. Upon approval, two copies will be submitted to the Owner’s Representative and two copies transmitted to the Contractor.

J. REPORT: After balancing is complete and before calling for final observation, record and submit for record, the following data:

01 For Each Chilling Unit:

a. Water temperature entering and leaving cooler. b. Water pressure entering and leaving cooler. c. Air temperature entering and leaving condenser. d. Pressure drop - flow curves for cooler with flow points marked. e. Motor nameplate F.L.A., actual amps and voltage. f. Compressor suction and discharge pressures.

02 For Each Pump:

a. Suction and discharge pressure readings at shut off. b. Suction and discharge pressure readings at final balance flow. c. Motor nameplate F.L.A., actual amps at rated flow, voltage and verify

rotation. d. Copy of pump curve, with final balance point marked.

03 Each Air Handling Unit:

a. Total supply, return and outside air CFM. b. Suction and discharge static pressure, total static pressure. c. Fan RPM measured by tachometer. Verify rotation. d. Motor nameplate F.L.A., actual amps and voltage. e. Entering and leaving air temperature for each coil at full water flow. f. Entering and leaving water temperature for each water coil at full flow. g. Coil water pressure drop with point marked on flow curve at full flow. h. CFM of each outlet served by unit.

04 Each VAV or CVT Box:

a. Total supply CFM in full cooling. b. CFM of each outlet served by unit when in full cooling. c. Entering and leaving air temperature for heating coil at full water flow. d. Entering and leaving water temperature for heating coil at full water flow.

05 Each Supply and Exhaust Fan:

a. Suction and discharge static pressure, total static pressure and total CFM. b. Fan RPM measured by tachometer. Verify rotation. c. Motor nameplate F.L.A., actual amps and voltage. d. CFM of each outlet served by fan.

06 Each Boiler:

a. Safety inspection authority approval certificate. b. Orsat flue gas analysis report. c. Operating pressure and temperature. d. Safety control setting points.

07 Each Condensing Unit:

a. Ambient air temperature and condenser discharge temperature. b. Motor nameplate F.L.A., actual amps and voltage. c. Suction and discharge pressures and temperatures.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 05 93-7

d. Verification that moisture indicator shows dry refrigerant.e. Settings of all operating and safety control.

08 Each Rooftop Unit:

a. Fan data as for fans above.b. Entering and leaving air temperature for cooling and heating.c. Suction and discharge pressures and temperatures.d. Verification that dry eye sight glass shows full charge of dry refrigerant.e. Settings of all operating and safety controls.

09 Each Electric Duct Heater:

a. Verification that the high limit disconnects unit.b. Verification that the airflow switch disconnects unit.c. Verification that the interlocks are operating.d. Verification that all stages operate correctly

10 For each data value that cannot be balanced to meet scheduled design value:

a. List the cause of the discrepancy between the actual data and the designvalue.

b. List corrective action that must be taken to meet design value.c. Note that “Not Operating” is not an acceptable entry into the Testing and

Balancing report. If a piece of equipment is not operating during the testingand balancing process, TAB firm must contact the Mechanical Contractor.Mechanical Contractor will repair system as required. TAB firm will thentest and balance the system as specified.

K. REPORT APPROVAL

01 After report is submitted and reviewed by Engineer, Test and Balance Contractor shall meet with the Engineer at the site to review balancing problems and perform a random check of data values listed in report. Contractor shall bring all necessary testing and balancing equipment to site necessary to measure values.

L. AFTER OWNER OCCUPANCY:

01 After Owner has occupied and is using the building, make three additional inspections of the system during the one-year warranty period (at times directed by Owner) to:

a. Correct any Owner observed temperature imbalances.b. Architect for each trip. List in the letter corrections made.

02 At the season opposite that of startup, inspect and verify correct operation of all systems. Make adjustments as required.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District HVAC INSULATION Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 07 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 07 00-1

SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Install all insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications.

B. Insulation materials manufactured by the following list of companies will be acceptable provided their materials conform to these specifications: Armstrong, CertainTeed, Knauf, Koolphen, Manville and Owens-Corning.

C. Flame Spread and Smoke Requirements:

01 All jackets, adhesives, coatings, insulating materials and vapor barrier mastics for piping and equipment shall have a flame spread not higher than 25 and smoke developed rating not higher than 50.

02 All materials containers shall have a U. L. Label.

D. At each pipe support point, provide 10” long, formed 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal saddle. For piping 1½” and larger, install a hard section of Koolphen K phenolic foam pipe insulation the same length as the pipe saddle. Seal and finish to match adjoining insulation.

E. Install .020" thick aluminum jacket with minimum 2” overlap joint on all insulated piping exposed outside building. Install factory made aluminum covers on all elbows. Cut aluminum neatly to fit all tees, such that all insulation is covered by aluminum. Use waterproofing aluminum colored Foster 95-44 or Childers CP-76-1 sealer to seal all joints. Provide .020x3/4” aluminum bands not more than 12" on center for all jacketing. Install aluminum covers on insulated pipe inside that is exposed to view in finished areas including inside gymnasiums. Cover is not required in mechanical or AHU rooms.








2.1 CHILLED WATER PIPING

A. GENERAL: Insulate all chilled water piping, valves, fittings, air separators, tanks, filter feeders and other items subject to condensation. Insulate chiller connections to chiller barrel insulation so there is no break in the insulation of the system.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 07 00-2

B. PIPE:

01 MATERIALS: Molded Koolphen K or Insulphen phenolic foam pipe insulation, 3.7 pounds per cubic foot density, conductivity (k) not higher than .14 at 100° mean temperature difference with factory attached fire retardant, vapor barrier jacket. Insulation inside building above ceilings or 7 feet above floor in mechanical rooms may be 2.2 pound per cubic foot density.

02 EXECUTION: Install insulation over pipe and carefully connect self-sealing laps. Provide 3" butt strips at each joint between sections, sealed with Foster 85-75 or Childers CP-82 adhesive. Coat all vapor retarder film (ASJ) longitudinal and butt joints with Foster 30-80AF anti-fungal, vapor barrier coating to prevent moisture ingress. Coating permeance shall be 0.013 perms or less at 43 mil dry thickness as tested by ASTM E96 and meet ASTM D5590 with 0 growth rating. Apply Foster 95-50 or Childers CP-76 insulation joint sealant on all phenolic insulation longitudinal and butt joints to prevent moisture ingress.

C. VALVES, FITTINGS AND OTHER COMPONENTS:

01 MATERIALS: Pre-molded cover of same materials and thickness as pipe covering.

02 EXECUTION: Provide vapor barrier coating consisting of a tack coat of white Foster 30-80AF anti-fungal, vapor barrier coating with reinforcing mesh, finished with a 1/16" thick coating of Foster 30-80AF vapor barrier coating. Coating permeance shall be 0.013 perms or less at 43 mil dry thickness as tested by ASTM E96 and meet ASTM D5590 with 0 growth rating. Finish all joints and seams smooth and even. Reinforcing mesh shall be 10x10 Childers Chil Glas #10 or Foster Mast a Fab. This application shall provide a minimum dry film thickness of 37 mils.

D. KOOLPHEN INSULATION THICKNESS: 2”

2.2 BUILDING HEATING WATER PIPING

A. GENERAL: Insulate all hot water piping with factory molded, fiberglass pipe insulation with factory attached fire retardant jacket. Insulation shall be 3 pounds per cubic foot with conductivity (k) not higher than .25 at 100° mean temperature difference. Piping insulation outside shall be thicker.

B. THICKNESS: 1½” thick for pipes 1½” and smaller. 2” thick for larger pipes. Increase thickness by 1/2” if piping is outside.

C. INSTALLATION: Secure all laps and joints with staples at 4" on center. Provide 3" butt strips at each joint between sections.

D. FITTINGS: Insulate fittings with pre-molded cover of same materials and thickness as pipe covering.

2.3 CONDENSATE DRAINS

A. Insulate all condensate drain lines in same manner as specified for Heating Water Piping, except 1/2" thick. Exposed piping located close to the floor inside an equipment room, from an air handling unit to floor drain, need not be insulated.

2.4 LAP AND JOINT ATTACHMENT

A. Self-sealing type jackets will be acceptable provided the laps are sealed per the manufacturers recommendations.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 07 00-3

2.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. GENERAL: Insulate all refrigerant suction piping.

B. MATERIAL: 3/4" thick, closed cell foam insulation with a thermal conductivity (C value) of .27 at 75° F. Insulation shall have a maximum flame spread rating of 25 and a maximum smoke density rating of 50. Chemical composition of material shall not cause or accelerate corrosion or other deterioration of piping. Provide 1” thick insulation if pipe is 2½” or larger.

C. INSTALLATION: Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations using pre-glued slits and butt joints. Visually inspect joints and touchup as necessary with the manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Insulation without pre-glued factory slits shall be installed over piping during fabrication then glued together. Provide UV protective coating for insulation installed outside.

D. MANUFACTURER: Rubatex

2.6 CHILLED WATER PUMP

A. GENERAL: Insulate all cold surfaces as required to prevent condensation. Do not insulate pump until the chilled water system has been balanced.

B. MATERIALS: Fiberglass board with minimum 6 pounds per cubic foot density or 2" thick foamglass.

C. INSTALLATION: Cut and form to fit or foam in place. Fill any voids with flexible glass fiber insulation. Seal all joints with Foster 30-80AF. Coating permeance shall be 0.013 perms or less at 43 mil dry thickness as tested by ASTM E96 and meet ASTM D5590 with 0 growth rating. Apply tack coat white Foster 30-80AF vapor barrier coating and then a 1/16" thick finish coat of same material. This application shall provide a minimum dry film thickness of 37 mils

2.7 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM EXPANSION TANK, AIR SEPARATORS, STORAGE TANK AND

FILTER FEEDER

A. Insulate with 1" thick Koolphen K phenolic foam, or Rubatex closed cell foam insulation

with vapor barrier.

2.8 DUCT INSULATION

A. GENERAL: Insulate all supply air ducts, return air ducts through un-insulated spaces and outside air ductwork, including kitchen hood supply air ducts and dryer vent. Insulate exhaust ducts down stream of inline fan backdraft damper. Insulate backs of air devices where ceiling above is not used as a return plenum.

B. DUCTS INSIDE: 2” thick, 1 pound density (Type 100) fiberglass flexible duct insulation, with a conductivity (k) value not more than 0.27 at 75° mean temperature difference for an installed R value of 6 or higher. Insulation shall have a factory adhered reinforced foil faced flame resistant Kraft paper vapor barrier. Wrap around duct with minimum lap of 2 inches each way, staple with 1/2" outward clinch staples 2” on center, secure on bottom of duct with water based, fire retardant adhesive (Foster 85-60 or Childers CP-127). For ducts 24” to 30” wide, provide one row of pins on bottom of duct, 16” on center. For wider ducts provide one row on bottom of duct for each 16” of width. Trim pins flush with retainer disk. Seal all with tape with Foster 30-80AF vapor barrier coating. For ducts in mechanical rooms, reduce spacing to 12” on center for each 12” of dimension (all sides of duct). Seal joints and seams with 3" wide FSK foil tape, including termination of flex ducts, and coat


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 07 00-4

tape with Foster 30-80AF vapor barrier coating. Where insulation terminates at equipment (AHU, fan coil, VAV box, etc) and where insulation is custom fitted to transitions and elbows, add glass cloth strip adhered with anti-fungal Foster 30-80AF vapor barrier coating between equipment and insulation cover. Coating permeance shall be 0.013 perms or less at 43 mil dry thickness as tested by ASTM E96 and meet ASTM D5590 with 0 growth rating.

C. EXPOSED AREAS INSIDE: Add reinforcing mesh for exposed areas, tack coat with anti-fungal Foster 30-80AF vapor barrier coating, and finish with flood coat of Foster 30-80AF. Coating permeance shall be 0.013 perms or less at 43 mil dry thickness as tested by ASTM E96 and meet ASTM D5590 with 0 growth rating. Reinforcing mesh shall be 10x10 Childers Chil Glas #10 or Foster Mast a Fab. Ductwork inside mechanical and air handling unit rooms is not considered exposed ductwork.

D. DUCTS OUTSIDE: Externally insulate with a minimum of 2" thick urethane board sealed with Foster 30-65 or Childers CP-34 with embedded layer of reinforcing mesh to achieve an installed R value of 8. Coating permeance shall be 0.03 perms or less at 45 mil dry thickness as tested by ASTM E96. Apply Venture Clad jacketing.

E. DUCTS THROUGH NON FIREWALLS: Install reinforcing mesh on insulation for ducts passing through walls the same as for C. EXPOSED AREAS INSIDE. Mesh shall extend 6” beyond wall on either side of the wall.

2.9 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT

A. GENERAL: Insulate exhaust ducts serving kitchen hoods over ranges or other high heat producing equipment.

B. MATERIAL: Pyroscat FP Duct Wrap rated for 2300° F. 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap installed per manufacturer’s recommendations is also acceptable.

C. INSTALLATION: Insulate with two 2" layer. The first layer shall be un-faced. The second layer shall have a foil facing on the outside surface. Secure each layer to duct with 16 gage stainless steel wires at 9" on center. Apply 1" x 1" poultry mesh over finish layer, wired in place with 16 gage stainless steel wire at 12" on center. Separately insulate cleanout access doors to allow removal for inspection and cleaning duct without damaging insulation.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 09 23 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 23-1

SECTION 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS







A. DESCRIPTION: The Contractor shall provide a Direct Digital Control (DDC) System to monitor and control the HVAC systems in the facility. The monitoring of certain electrical and plumbing systems and equipment shall also be provided as noted in these specifications and associated control points listing.

B. MANUFACTURERS: The control system shall be manufactured by the following controls companies and be installed by their authorized local representative:

01 Automated Logic

02 Reliable Controls/Unify Environmental Systems

C. EQUIPMENT: All DDC Temperature Control Equipment shall be the product of the approved controls manufacturer. All control valves shall be by Barber Colman, Belimo, Bray, Honeywell, Johnson, Robertshaw or Siemens. Controls contractor shall provide surge suppression (TVSS) protection for their equipment.

D. WIRING: System shall have a dedicated control network and not rely on the building network other than an interface to allow viewing of the control system. The Electrical Contractor shall provide a 20A, 120-volt power circuit to a single point in each mechanical room. The Controls Contractor shall extend this circuit as necessary to perform the controls functions as specified. Interlock wiring between fire alarm system’s shut down relays and mechanical system starters, VFD’s and temperature controls devices shall be provided by the Temperature Controls Contractor. All low voltage control and interlock wiring shall be provided by the Controls Contractor. All wiring shall be run in conduit except plenum rated, low voltage wiring above accessible ceilings may be installed without conduit if supported near structure separate from other low voltage systems. The installation of wiring and conduit shall be per the NEC and any special requirements of the electrical sections of these specifications.

E. SUBMITTALS: Provide equipment information, complete wiring diagram, drawings showing equipment locations, sequences of operations and drawings of graphics to be provided. Submittals shall be electronic in pdf format. Refer to submittal requirements in the General HVAC Requirements Section.

F. WARRANTY: The temperature control system and its proper operation shall be


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 23-2

guaranteed for a period of one year after substantial completion and any control devices which prove to be defective during the guarantee period shall be repaired or replaced without cost to the Owner. After the initial warranty period, an additional twelve-month preventative maintenance contract shall be included in the base price of this Contract. This maintenance contract shall include quarterly preventive maintenance, all repair labor, parts and equipment. The system shall be warranted for parts and labor for a total of two years.

G. CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS: Provide three printed copies of the approved submittal with wiring diagrams, sequences, floor plans and graphics updated to the final installation configuration.

H. TRAINING: Provide 8 hours of instructions on system operation to Owner's personnel during the closeout period of the project. Additionally, the contractor shall supply the Owner with a training DVD that will instruct the Owner’s personnel on recommended, detailed, maintenance procedures and troubleshooting of their equipment. Provide an additional 48 hours of instructions over a 3-year period for but not limited to operate interface program, software programming, system diagnostics, hardware installation and repair. No session to be more than 4 hours long with no limit on attendees. Technical support for 3 years over the phone shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall be able to call and diagnose the system from his office.

PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL

01 The mechanical contractor shall receive, handle, mount and install all automatic temperature control valve bodies and linkages. All automatic control valves shall be furnished by the controls manufacture.

02 All control dampers shall be furnished by the control manufacturer and installed by the sheet metal contractor under the control manufacturer’s supervision.

B. NAMETAGS: Install a plastic tape label identification tag on each item of control equipment, to correlate with the name shown on schematic drawing.

C. SENSOR LOCATIONS: Locations in finished spaces shall be reviewed with the Architect before beginning any installation work. Mount all wall sensors as noted on the floor plans at 46" above finished floor.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. TEMPERATURE SENSORS

01 GENERAL: All sensors shall be thermistor type (10K at 77°F) with output over the scheduled temperature range.

02 ROOM SENSORS: Flush mounted within a wall box with aluminum cover. Sensing range shall be 45° to 96° F with an accuracy of ±.25° F. Mount at +46".

03 OUTDOOR AIR SENSORS: Waterproof with sunshield over sensing element. Sensing range shall be -30° to 130° F with an accuracy of ±1° F.

04 DUCT AIR SENSORS: Duct mounted junction box containing electronics and with 9" long sensing probe. Sensing range shall be 32° to 134° F with an accuracy of ±1/2° F.

05 WATER SENSORS: Immersion type, screwed into threaded, pipe weld-o-let.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 23-3

Chilled water and condenser water sensing range shall be 20° to 120° F with an accuracy of ±1/4° F. Heating water sensing range shall be 80° to 233° F with an accuracy of ±3/4° F.

B. VALVE AND DAMPER OPERATORS: Belimo, Delta, Siemens or one of the listed valve manufacturers.

C. DAMPERS: Shall be of the opposed blade type with the frame constructed of 16 gage galvanized sheet steel formed into channels, riveted and corner brackets added to maintain perfect alignment of the damper. In the closed position, all edges of blades must stop against other blades or a fixed stop, in a manner to provide tight shut-off. Provide synthetic elastomer seals on all edges of damper blades. Blades shall consist of two formed sheets spot welded together for extra strength. Square pins shall be used along with oil impregnated sintered bronze bearings. Leakage shall be less than 1/2% based on 2000 FPM approach velocity at 4" w.g. static. Submit certified test data for a typical damper, showing leakage characteristics.

D. TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVES: Three-way or straight through globe valves as indicated. Valves 2" and smaller shall have screwed bronze bodies. Valves 2½" and larger shall have flanged iron bodies. Size all valves for full flow and with a maximum pressure drop of 5 PSI unless specified otherwise. All straight through water valves shall have equal percentage characterized plugs and be capable of shutting off against a minimum of 60 psi. Straight through valves 1” and smaller may be equal percentage characterized ball valves.

E. FLOW SWITCH: Vapor tight, packless construction with all wetted parts made of brass and designed for mounting in pipe tee. Paddle to have removable segments to accommodate required pipe size and flow. Switching action: single pole, double throw with a minimum rating of 7 amps at 120 volts. Mount switch in horizontal pipe.

F. FREEZESTATS: Low temperature cutout thermostats shall have a 20-foot element with response to lowest temperature sensed by any 1-foot section.

G. ACTIVE FLOW DEVICES: Provide insertion type turbine or paddle wheel flow sensing device. Calibrate device for flow rate based on pipe size. Overall accuracy shall be ±3% of absolute flow. Install with ball type isolating valve for removal of sensor for servicing.

H. VAV BOX CONTROLLER: Digital control package with integral damper operator for mounting in box controller housing. Controllers shall be sent to the approved box manufacturer for factory installation.

I. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AND PRESSURE SENSORS. Sensors shall have a 4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions for field checking. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within ±2% of full scale.

J. HIGH STATIC LIMIT SWITCH: Switches shall be diaphragm operated with 3½" diaphragm to actuate a single pole double throw snap switch. Motion of the diaphragm shall be transmitted to the switch button by means of a direct mechanical linkage. It should include a 1.4 - 5.5" w.c. range pressure switch with manual reset snap switch.

K. STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: Provide a differential pressure transmitter with a 4-20 ma and 0-10VDC output.

Accuracy: ± 1% of range

Ranges: 5.0"

Operating temp range: 32°F to 125°F

L. WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of ±2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated pressure. Sensors


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 23-4

shall be diaphragm or bourbon tube design. Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range. Install across all pumps if possible.

M. AIR FLOW SWITCHES: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of ±1% of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific electrical application. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations. Install delta P air flow switch on air handling units and fan coil units.

N. CURRENT SENSING RELAYS. Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. The set point of the contact operation shall be field adjustable. Install on fans, cooling tower and vertical turbine pumps.

O. CONTROL RELAYS: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dust proof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices.

P. SOLID STATE RELAYS (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 150 V root mean square, or greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSR’s shall be 20°F-140°F. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relays.

Q. AIR FLOW MONITOR: Provide an AFM comprised of one or more insertion probes assemblies per duct location. The AFM shall feature microprocessor based electronics, low flow sensitivity, true averaging velocity and temperature compensated velocity output. The output signal shall be available in 0-5VDC or 4-20 mA. Provide multiple probes and an electronics panel to average the flow of 2 to 8 probes based on duct size. Sensor Accuracy = ± 2%, Operating Temperature Range –20 to 160 degrees Fahrenheit, Max Pressure Drop (delta P) = .005 in. WG @ 2,000 fpm in a 12 x 12 in. duct, Probe Material – Aluminum 6063 TS2.

R. MISCELLANEOUS: Provide and install all relays, switches, and all other necessary devices required for a complete and satisfactory operating system.

S. SMOKE DETECTORS: Detectors provided by the fire alarm subcontractor. Controls subcontractor shall wire the starter control circuit through the smoke detector auxiliary contact.

T. BACNET INTERFACE: Provide interface to WattStopper lighting control system for monitoring and control.

2.3 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

01 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY: The BAS Contractor shall be fully responsibility for the complete installation and proper operation of the Building Automation System equipment, sensors and controls devices. After the installation, the contractor shall be responsible for "debugging" and calibration of the BAS, including software for the duration of the warranty. All equipment shall be the latest standard design that complies with the specification. During the warranty period, Contractor shall monitor system from his office and provide assistance to Owner. Should software control schemes provide unsatisfactory operation, as determined by the Engineer during the warranty period, Contractor shall modify control schemes, set points, timing sequences or other software


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 23-5

features to provide satisfactory operation as a part of his warranty package.

02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE: The system shall possess fully modular architecture that permits the expansion of the system through the addition of field modules, sensors and actuators. Module communications to be through a local area network (LAN). The central site system shall be used only as an interface to the LAN.

03 SYSTEM INTERFACE: Operator interface to the control system shall be graphical accessed through the internet. Provide district wide site map with each school listed and shown. Individual school controls system shall be viewed by selecting that school. The various systems, settings and operating conditions shall be viewed/modified though the various controls screens for that school.

B. GRAPHIC CONSTRUCTION:

01 COLOR VALUE: Space temperature and its deviation from zone set point shall be displayed on a floor plan map by color. These colors shall represent a defined temperature value and be implemented by the same standard throughout the entire system, including all graphic displays and parameter pages. The central site shall be able to display graphically, in up to 64 different colors, the following system information:

a. General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks.

b. Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective set points. The colors shall be updated automatically without operator action. Set point adjustment and color band displays shall be operator definable. Floor plan maps shall also show the relative position of sensors and mechanical equipment. Each zone shall display the set point temperature and measured temperature.

c. Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components servicing any zone through the use of pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a current status of all I/O points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate locations on the graphic representation of the set point and measured value.

d. All system graphics shall come programmed and require no owner modification. Individual graphics shall be as minimum the following:

1) Complete chilled water piping system 2) Complete hot water piping system 3) Each chiller 4) Each air handling unit 5) Each VAV and CVT box 6) Main switchboard meter

02 INFORMATION ACCESS: The following information shall be selectable from a

menu available on various graphics:

Alarms Schedule graphs Message Schedule groups Module status Set points Programming parameters Trends Utilities

Programming, scheduling and set point changes shall be accessible for modification of each menu for the associated equipment. Operator shall be able


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 23-6

to automatically download changes to the appropriate program for the equipment being controlled. Operator shall be able to upload information from the field modules. In addition to having the ability to adjust set points on zones individually, the system shall allow the operator to make global set point changes that would take one command and automatically download it to the individual pieces of equipment and adjust their set points up or down by the operator defined deviation. A global command shall be able to be input that will automatically affect all installations connected to the network.

C. SPECIFIC GRAPHIC REQUIREMENTS

01 Data Format

Temperature Tenths xx.x ºF Percentage Units xx % Amps Units xx A Humidity Units xx % Air Quantity Units xxxx CFM GPM Units xxx GPM

02 Main School Screen

a. Provide an overview of the entire building with color coding of zones based on temperature relative to set point, with light gray indicating zone is off. Green shall be area within set point tolerance, and varying shades of light to darker blue for lower than set point, and varying shades of light to dark red for higher than set point.

b. Clicking on an area of the building will change to a more detailed graphic of that area.

c. Provide table listing outside air temperature and RH percentage, and status for Fire Alarm, Security Alarm, Emergency Generator and Air Conditioning Emergency Shutdown.

d. Provide button to click to go to equipment and mechanical systems graphics.

03 Detailed Area Graphics

a. Individual zones shall be color coded base on temperature relative to set point, with light gray indicating zone is off. Green shall be area within set point tolerance, and varying shades of light to darker blue for lower than set point, and varying shades of light to dark red for higher than set point.

b. Label zone by AHU, AHU and Zone or AHU and DD/VAV Box as applicable with zone temperature listed.

c. Clicking on zone shall transfer to applicable AHU or DD/VAV box. d. Provide button for each AHU serving this area that transfers to the AHU

graphic. e. Each piece of equipment shall be labeled and have a text indication

whether it is ON, OFF or FAILED. Additionally, equipment that is ON shall have some graphical indication of its status, either by color or animation. Status shall be based on equipment status sensors, not condition of the enabling point.

04 Main Mechanical Room

a. Provide graphic showing mechanical room fans, unit heaters and purge systems.

b. Each piece of equipment shall be labeled and have a text indication whether it is ON, OFF or FAILED. Additionally, equipment that is on shall have some graphical indication of its status, either by color or animation.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 23-7

Status shall be based on equipment status sensors, not condition of the enabling point.

c. Each data point shall be displayed adjacent to an appropriate graphical symbol located in the proper position in the system.

05 Main Equipment Graphic

a. Provide composite graphic for the chilled water/condenser water system at the central plant. The ON/OFF condition of each chiller, pump and cooling tower shall be a color coded element of the equipment: gray OFF, blue ON, red failed. Additionally, equipment that is on shall have some graphical indication of its status by animation. Status shall be based on equipment status sensors, not condition of the enabling point.

b. Provide composite graphic for the heating water system at the central plant. The ON/OFF condition of each boiler and pump shall be a color coded element of the equipment: gray OFF, blue ON, red failed.

c. Provide buttons for each AHU and RTU that will transfer to the associated graphic.

d. Provide buttons for chilled water and heating water systems that transfer to the associated graphic.

06 Chilled Water System Graphic

a. Provide graphic that shows the chilled water system including pumps and chillers. Chilled water shall be light blue for water returning to the chiller and dark blue for water supplied by the chillers.

b. Each piece of equipment shall be labeled and have a text indication whether it is ON, OFF or FAILED. Additionally, equipment that is on shall have some graphical indication of its status, either by color or animation. Status shall be based on equipment status sensors, not condition of the enabling point.

c. Each data point shall be displayed adjacent to an appropriate graphical symbol located in the proper position in the system. Include enable, status, alarm, run amps and % loaded for each chiller.

07 Heating Water System

a. Provide graphic that shows the heating water system including all pumps and boilers. Heating water shall be light red for return hot water and dark red for supply hot water.


c. Each data point shall be displayed adjacent to an appropriate graphical symbol located in the proper position in the system. Include enable, alarm and status of each piece of equipment.

08 Air Handling Unit, Rooftop Unit and Fan Coil Unit Graphic

a. Provide graphic that shows all coils, valves and dampers. Outside air and return air shall be shown.


c. Each data point shall be displayed adjacent to an appropriate graphical


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 23-8

symbol located in the proper position on the graphic. Include enable, alarm and status of each piece of equipment.

09 Fans and Unit Heaters

a. Equipment with local/room thermostat shall have graphic noting state of unit and associated space temperature.

b. Fans associated with a particular air handling unit shall be a part of the air handling unit graphic.

10 Main Switchboard Meter

a. Provide individual graphical display of all monitored information and include historical trend graph.

D. STAND-ALONE CONTROL UNIT (SCU):

01 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL: Each control unit shall be capable of full operation either as a completely independent unit or as a part of the building wide control system. All units shall contain the necessary equipment for direct interface to the sensors and actuators connected to it. Each control module shall be capable of stand-alone direct digital operation utilizing its own processor, memory, input/output, analog-to-digital conversion, clock (rechargeable battery backed for 30 days minimum) and voltage transient protection devices. No slave modules will be permitted.

02 MEMORY: The memory used in each module shall be non-volatile EEPROM type, which has read/write capability from the central site or local operator interface and does not lose its programs or operating data upon power failure. Each module shall have an automatic restart feature with sequencing after power failure and shall not require reloading at power up.

03 COMMUNICATION: To share global building data, such as outside air temperature, humidity and electric demand, modules shall be able to communicate with each other over a local area network (LAN). The system shall be capable of recognizing a failed module on the LAN and reporting the condition at the central site. If any module on the LAN fails or is powered down, it shall not inhibit the use of the LAN by other modules.

E. SCU FUNCTION:

01 CONTROL FORMS: All temperature control functions shall be executed within the SCU. Loop control shall be executed via direct digital control algorithms. The user shall be able to customize control strategies and sequences of control, and shall be able to define appropriate control loop. It shall be possible to fully create, modify or remove control algorithms within a specific unit while it is operating and performing other control functions. Input for these changes shall be made via the network form the central site computer or local operator interface.

02 ALARMS: Proof of equipment operating and alarm status shall be by positive feedback from the local control circuit as indicated on the Point List. The system shall have the capability of not only alarming abnormal OFF conditions of fans and pumps but shall also indicate abnormal ON condition of the same equipment. If a start command has not been issued from the central site and a piece of equipment is turned on, the central processor will alarm an abnormal ON. This abnormal ON shall also sound the audible alarm and display the alarm ON condition.

03 GLOBAL INFORMATION: The SCU's shall be able to share point information such that control sequences or control loops executed at one control unit may receive input signals from sensors connected to other SCU's within the network. If the network communication link fails or the other control units malfunction, the control


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 23-9

loop shall continue to function using the last value received.

04 EMS FUNCTIONS: Each SCU shall be capable of performing the following energy management routines as a minimum:

Chilled or Heating Water Reset Chiller Sequencing and Optimization, Lead/Lag Duty Cycling (Temperature compensated) Event Initiated Programs Graphic Trend Analysis Maintenance Management Peak Demand Limiting Source Optimization Start/Stop Time Optimization Supply Air Reset Time of Day Scheduling

The building operator shall be able to manually restore all system programs from the central site hard disk.

2.4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. Refer to Section 23 09 93.

2.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. The mechanical systems will not be declared substantially complete until the automatic temperature controls for that portion has been demonstrated to be complete and functioning as intended. Operation in manual mode is not acceptable. The temperature control system will be complete and functioning as intended when all of the space temperatures are maintained at plus or minus two degrees of set point.

B. Engineer shall have access to the control system graphics via the internet to review and evaluate control system operation.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR HVAC CONTROLS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 09 93 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 93-1

SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS






PART 2 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS


A. The energy management system shall monitor the building conditions 24 hours per day.

B. Systems with thermostats that control both heating and cooling shall be programmed to have an operator selectable dead band.

C. Chiller safety status point shall be wired so that the BAS recognizes all chiller panel alarms, chilled water proof of flow and condenser water proof of flow regardless of chiller staging.

D. Where air systems are designed to have economizer functions, provide an icon on the main building graphic that allows the operator to globally disable this function.

2.2 SYSTEM START/STOP

A. Each air handling unit or unitary equipment shall have an individual schedule of operation. If any equipment requires chilled water for cooling, chiller plant shall operate. If any equipment requires heating water for heating, heating water plant shall operate. System shall allow operator to selectively require more than one system to require cooling or heating for those systems to be energized.

2.3 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM

A. If one or more air handling units are on and requesting cooling, building pump is energized. The lead building pump shall ramp up until one cooling coil valve is 95% of full open and the remaining are less than 95%. If the lead pump cannot achieve sufficient pressure then the second building pump is started and operates at the same frequency as the first. Both pumps are adjusted together to condition where one valve is 95% open and the others are less open, and similarly the third pump. The lead/lag status of the building pumps shall be alternated weekly.

B. If the building pumps are started, one chilled water pump is started. If flow is determined based on differential pressure across the pump, flow switch and the starter auxiliary contact is made, the associated chiller is enabled. If all chiller safeties are satisfied, the chiller will


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 93-2

start and load up at the slowest available rate to maintain control of the leaving water set

point. Whenever the temperature in the chilled water de-coupling pipe is not 2° F cooler than building return water temperature, and additional chiller shall be started in the same sequence as the first. The chillers shall be constantly monitored for percent of capacity loading. If multiple chillers are operating at 40% or less and the chilled water supply temperature has been maintained for 30 minutes or more, the one chiller shall be stopped. Whenever a chiller is stopped, it shall ramp to zero capacity then stop. The associated pumps shall operate for two minutes after the chiller has stopped.

C. The EMS shall constantly monitor the operation of the chillers and pumps. If a chiller or pump should fail, an alarm shall be sent operator’s work station. The operator shall be able to override any sequence, set point, alarm or chiller/pump selection from the remote location.

D. The EMS shall compare de-coupler pipe water temperature and building supply water temperature to determine if deficit flow conditions exist.

E. The EMS shall calculate building tonnage based on system flow and supply/return water temperatures. Calculation shall be smoothed by time averaging.

2.4 HEATING WATER SYSTEM

A. If any air handling unit is on and requesting heat, system hot water pump is energized, associated boiler circulating pump is energized and boiler is enabled. Boiler output is modulated based on return water temperature to maintain system set point temperature. Should lead boiler not be capable of maintaining temperature, the second boiler shall be started and modulated with the lead boiler.

B. When the system pump is de-energized, the associated boiler shall also be de-energized and boiler circulating pump shall be de-energized after an additional five minutes.

C. If outside air temperature is less than 30°F, the heating water system shall start.

D. The EMS shall constantly monitor alarm contact provided with the boiler. If boiler should fail to fire, the lag boiler system shall be started and an alarm sent to the operator’s work station. Boiler lead/lag order shall alternate weekly.

2.5 VAV AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. Unit shall be controlled by DDC controller that shall receive start/stop signal from the central EMS. If the unit is scheduled to be on and cooling is required, fan shall start. Outside air damper or fan shall start/open to preset position. Chilled water valve shall

modulate to maintain 53°F supply air temperature. Associated VAV boxes shall be

enabled. If building temperature is less than 65°F, associated VAV boxes shall be enabled

and heat the building to above 65°F before starting AHU fan, energizing outside air fan or opening outside air damper, and enabling chilled water valve.

B. The control system shall monitor all the VAV box cold air damper positions and adjust the unit fan speed so that it is no faster than required to have one box at 95% open and all others less open. Duct pressure sensor located in duct shall limit fan speed through variable frequency drive to limit static pressure to 3.5” wc, and send alarm to the operator’s workstation.

C. Any time the outside air/return air mixed temperature falls below 35°F, supply fan shall be de-energized, chilled water valve opened, system chilled water pump energized, building heating water pump energized and outside air damper closed.

D. Outside air fan or damper shall close on loss of signal, loss of electric power or when AHU fan is off.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 93-3

E. Fan status shall be based on differential pressure sensors.

F. Fire alarm system shall disable fan through starter interlock when in alarm, and send alarm to the operator’s workstation.

G. Safety devices and circuits such as low limit thermostats, high limit thermostats, fire alarm contacts and high pressure cutout shall operate whether the starter is in Auto or Hand position.

H. Associated VAV boxes shall maintain zone setpoint temperatures by modulating cold air damper and sequencing on heating coil valve. Minimum setting of cold valve shall be adjustable with initial set point of 50%. Fan shall run constantly when box is enabled.

2.6 SINGLE ZONE FOUR PIPE UNITS

A. Unit shall be controlled by DDC controller that shall receive start/stop signal from the central EMS. Controller shall monitor cooling coil leaving air temperature and modulate chilled water valve to maintain leaving air temperature setpoint. Controller shall monitor space temperature and vary fan speed to minimum setting before opening heating valve to maintain space temperature.

B. Units with space humidistat, shall drive unit to full cooling and reheat coil shall modulate to maintain space temperature, when high humidity is sensed.

C. Fan status shall be based on differential pressure sensors.

D. Fire alarm system shall disable fan through starter interlock when in alarm.

E. Safety devices and circuits such as low limit thermostats, high limit thermostats, fire alarm contacts and high pressure cutout shall operate whether the starter is in Auto or Hand position.

2.7 OUTSIDE AIR PRETREATMENT UNITS

A. Unit shall be controlled by DDC controller that shall receive start/stop signal from the central EMS. Controller shall sequence preheat coil valve and chilled water coil valve to maintain leaving air temperature. If unit provides outside air to more than one mechanical room, unit shall have variable frequency drive on the fan. Zone air flow sensors shall modulate air zone dampers to maintain scheduled air flow. Variable frequency drive shall limit pressure in supply duct to 1.25” static pressure. Controller shall stop unit if entering

air temperature drops to 32°F or duct pressure exceeds 1.8” static pressure.

B. Fan status shall be based on differential pressure sensors.

C. Fire alarm system shall disable fan through starter interlock when in alarm.

D. Safety devices and circuits such as low limit thermostats, high limit thermostats, fire alarm contacts and high pressure cutout shall operate whether the starter is in Auto or Hand position.

2.8 SINGLE ZONE DX AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. Unit shall be controlled by DDC controller that shall receive start/stop signal from the central EMS. Controller shall monitor space temperature and cycle cooling in stages, and heating to maintain space temperature.

B. Fan status shall be based on differential pressure sensors.

C. Fire alarm system shall disable fan through starter interlock when in alarm, and send alarm to the operator’s workstation.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 93-4

D. Safety devices and circuits such as low limit thermostats, high limit thermostats, fire alarm contacts and high pressure cutout shall operate whether the starter is in Auto or Hand position.

2.9 ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT

A. Unit shall be controlled by field mounted DDC controller that shall receive start/stop signal from the central EMS base on own schedule.

2.10 FAN COIL UNITS

A. Unit shall be controlled by field mounted DDC controller that shall receive start/stop signal from the central EMS. Controller shall monitor space temperature and sequence modulate cooling and heating valves to maintain a space temperature of 74 F. Cooling coil valve shall drive to full open position on loss of control signal. Heating coil valve shall drive to the full closed position on loss of control signal.

2.11 UNIT HEATERS

A. Start/stop by schedule. DDC controller monitors space temperature and cycles unit to maintain space temperature.

2.12 EXHAUST FANS AND OUTSIDE AIR DAMPERS

A. Outside air dampers/fans are opened based on occupancy schedule and override condition. Fans with local switch shall operate only if switch is on and scheduled to be on.

2.13 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS

A. All electric duct heaters shall have control circuit interlocked through associated AHU starter auxiliary contact and be locked out if associated AHU is off. Heater stages shall cycle based on associated thermostat and scheduled setpoint.

2.14 LIGHTING CONTROL

A. Schedule exterior lighting by zone through the WattStopper lighting control panel.

B. Schedule interior lighting off sweep through the WattStopper lighting control panel.

2.15 ELECTRICAL SERVICE MONITORING (MAIN SWITCHBOARD METER)

A. The monitoring system shall provide readouts for:

01 Current-per-phase 02 Phase-to-neutral voltage 03 Phase-to-phase voltage 04 Neutral-to-ground voltage 05 Phase frequency 06 KVA/KW instantaneous load

B. The monitoring system shall have waveform capture and data logging capabilities including:

01 Harmonics 02 Unbalance 03 Flicker 04 Swell


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 93-5

05 Dip 06 Interruption

2.16 LOCAL OVERRIDE CONTROL

A. Provide four override key switches for off hour equipment operation. One or more AHU's and associated fans and dampers may be assigned to a key switch. Each time the momentary key switch is turned, the assigned equipment will be on for one hour, up to a maximum of four hours. Individual equipment may be assigned to more than one switch. Group switches together on one stainless steel plate with descriptive nameplate under each switch. All switches shall be keyed alike.

2.17 EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN

A. Provide an emergency shutdown switch in the administration area that stops all air conditioning equipment in an orderly fashion. This includes stopping exhaust fans and outside air units immediately. Other air handling units, chillers and equipment shall be shut down in an orderly manner so as to not damage the equipment. Once stopped, the system may only be restarted with a key operated switch located adjacent to the shutdown switch.

B. In the event that the main electrical service loses a phase, controls system shall command all three phase motors and equipment to turn off. (Only motors controlled by the EMS).

2.18 TEMPERATURE SET POINTS

Room Temperature 72° F Chilled Water Temperature 44° F Heating Water Temperature Reset Schedule VAV Air Unit Leaving Air Temperature 53° F Single Zone Cooling Coil Leaving Air Temperature 53° F Humidity Sensors 55% Duct Pressure Control Level 1.5” wg Duct Pressure Safety Limit 5.0” wg

2.19 POINT CONFIGURATION

EQUIPMENT CONTROL FORM CHILLER MANAGER PROGRAM: BUILDING CHW SUPPLY TEMP READING BUILDING CHW RETURN TEMP READING DE-COUPLER PIPE TEMP READING BUILDING FLOW FLOW READING TEMPERATURE HIGH LIMIT ALARM POINT TEMPERATURE LOW LIMIT ALARM POINT SYSTEM PRESSURE PRESSURE READING BYPASS VALVE MODULATING CONTROL EACH CHILLER: CHILLER RUN ENERGIZE CHILLED WATER PUMP RUN ENERGIZE CONDENSER WATER PUMP RUN ENERGIZE CHILLED WATER RESET MODULATING CONTROL CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMP READING EQUIPMENT FAILURE STATUS ALARM POINT CHILLED WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH LIMIT ALARM POINT


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 93-6

CHILLED WATER TEMPERATURE LOW LIMIT ALARM POINT CHILLED WATER PUMP STATUS DATA POINT CHILLER SAFETY STATUS DATA POINT CHILLER OPERATING LOAD DATA POINT RUN TIME REPORT POINT BOILER MANAGEMENT PROGRAM: HEATING WATER PUMP RUN ENERGIZE EACH BOILER MODULATING CONTROL BUILDING HEATING WATER SUPPLY TEMP READING BUILDING HEATING WATER RETURN TEMP READING TEMPERATURE HIGH LIMIT ALARM POINT TEMPERATURE LOW LIMIT ALARM POINT EACH OUTSIDE AIR PRETREATMENT SECTION: FAN RUN ENERGIZE OUTDOOR AIR DAMPER/FAN ENERGIZE CHILLED WATER VALVE MODULATING CONTROL HEATING WATER VALVE MODULATING CONTROL ZONE SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE TEMP READING ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE TEMP READING SMOKE DETECTOR/FIRESTAT ALARM POINT EQUIPMENT FAILURE STATUS ALARM POINT TEMPERATURE HIGH LIMIT ALARM POINT TEMPERATURE LOW LIMIT ALARM POINT FAN STATUS DATA POINT RUN TIME REPORT POINT EACH SINGLE ZONE AIR HANDLING UNIT: FAN RUN ENERGIZE OUTDOOR AIR DAMPER/FAN ENERGIZE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MODULATING CONTROL CHILLED WATER VALVE MODULATING CONTROL HEATING WATER VALVE MODULATING CONTROL ZONE TEMPERATURE TEMP READING CHILLED WATER COIL DISCHARGE AIR TEMP READING ZONE SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE TEMP READING ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE TEMP READING SPACE HUMIDITY HUMIDITY READING SMOKE DETECTOR/FIRESTAT ALARM POINT EQUIPMENT FAILURE STATUS ALARM POINT TEMPERATURE HIGH LIMIT ALARM POINT TEMPERATURE LOW LIMIT ALARM POINT FAN STATUS DATA POINT RUN TIME REPORT POINT EACH SINGLE ZONE AIR HANDLING UNIT (VAV UNIT): FAN RUN ENERGIZE OUTDOOR AIR DAMPER/FAN ENERGIZE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MODULATING CONTROL CHILLED WATER VALVE MODULATING CONTROL HEATING WATER VALVE MODULATING CONTROL DUCT STATIC PRESSURE PRESSURE READING ZONE SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE TEMP READING ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE TEMP READING


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 09 93-7

SMOKE DETECTOR/FIRESTAT ALARM POINT EQUIPMENT FAILURE STATUS ALARM POINT TEMPERATURE HIGH LIMIT ALARM POINT TEMPERATURE LOW LIMIT ALARM POINT FAN STATUS DATA POINT RUN TIME REPORT POINT

EACH VAV TERMINAL: FAN RUN ENERGIZE ZONE TEMPERATURE TEMP READING SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE TEMP READING PRIMARY AIR QUANTITY FLOW READING PRIMARY AIR MODULATING CONTROL HEATING COIL VALVE MODULATING CONTROL MAXIMUM PRIMARY AIR SETPOINT SETPOINT MINIMUM PRIMARY AIR SETPOINT SETPOINT

EACH ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT FANS RUN ENERGIZE EXHAUST AIR FROM BUILDING TEMP READING SUPPLY AIR TO THE BUILDING TEMP READING SUPPLY AIR QUANTITY CFM READING EXHAUST AIR QUANTITY CFM READING

EACH EXHAUST/SUPPLY FAN: FAN RUN ENERGIZE RUN TIME REPORT POINT

UNIT HEATER: START/STOP ENERGIZE ZONE TEMPERATURE TEMP READING

DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER: START/STOP ENERGIZE SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE TEMP READING RUN TIME REPORT POINT

MAIN SWITCHBOARD ELECTRICAL INFORMATION VARIOUS

MISCELLANEOUS: OUTDOOR AIR TEMP READING KITCHEN WALK-IN COOLER TEMP READING KITCHEN WALK-IN FREEZER TEMP READING EACH AHU MECHANICAL ROOM RETURN AIR HUMIDITY READING EACH AHU MECHANICAL ROOM RETURN AIR CO2 READING LIGHTING CONTROL BACNET TO WATTSTOPPER

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District HYDRONIC PIPING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 21 13 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 21 13-1

SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Construct all piping systems in accordance with applicable ASME Codes.

B. Piping shall be installed parallel to building coordinates with vertical drops. Piping in the vicinity of equipment shall be arranged to not interfere with access panels and maintenance space. Provide unions, flanges and shutoff valves to allow removal of the equipment and its subassemblies without having to remove excessive amounts of building piping and to minimize water drainage requirements. Provide a vent valve at the topmost part and a drain valve at the lowest part of all water piping systems. Bull head Tee arrangement is not acceptable.

C. All piping, fittings and valves shall be manufactured in the United States of America.

D. Provide pipe sleeves for all insulated piping passing through a wall and all piping passing through a floor above grade.







1.3 TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS

A. GENERAL: Test all piping systems to assure that they are absolutely leak free. Pipe to be insulated shall be proved leak free before pipe is concealed.

B. PRESSURE TEST METHOD: Use method suitable for type of piping system being tested. Pipes that will contain water shall be leak tested with water in the piping system. For pressure pipe, use a test pressure approximately 150% of maximum system working pressure but at a minimum pressure of 60 psig. The minimum test pressure for chilled water and heating water shall be 125 psig. Maintain pressure for 8 hours. During this test period, inspect all pipe fittings and accessories in the piping and eliminate all leaks. Contractor shall inform the Engineer’s representative when testing is to be perform so he may observe methods and results.



Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 21 13-2

1.4 PIPE WELDING

A. GENERAL: All welds shall be made using shielded arc process. Welding shall be performed by experienced and highly skilled workmen, holding current certification by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or currently certified under the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. Piping and fittings shall be welded and fabricated in accordance with ASME/ANSI the latest edition of Standard B31.9 for all systems.

B. APPEARANCE: The finished weld shall have no surface voids and present a raised bead at the joint. Wire brush joint for a finished appearance. Welds lacking penetration, containing excessive porosity of cracks or are found to be unacceptable for any reason, must be removed and replaced with an original quality weld as specified herein.


2.1 CHILLED AND BUILDING HEATING WATER PIPING

A. Schedule 40 black steel pipe and fittings, long radius ells, screwed, welded or Victaulic type mechanical couplings. Piping shall be of domestic manufacture and meet ASTM ERW A-53 Grade B. Provide a sufficient quantity of Victaulic flexible type mechanical couplings in straight pipe runs to compensate for expansion. All bolts, nuts and all thread used in the piping system and components shall be cadmium plated to resist rust. Pipe connections to fan coil units shall be approximately two feet of Type L copper with wrought copper solder fittings braised.

2.2 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING

A. Schedule 40 galvanized steel or Type "L" copper with solder wrought fittings brazed.

2.3 PRE-INSULATED PIPING

A. GENERAL: All chilled and heating water piping below grade, starting from 12" above grade shall be pre-insulated.

B. PIPE: Chilled water and building heating water piping shall be welded Schedule 40 black steel, meeting ASTM A-106, ASTM A-53, Grade B. All piping shall meet the requirements specified elsewhere in this section.

C. CORROSION PROTECTION: The exposed carrier pipe and fittings shall receive a heavy coat of asphalt mastic after installation and leak testing and before field insulation kits are installed.

D. INSULATION: Foamed in place polyurethane with a density of not less than 2.5 pounds

per cubic foot and a thickness of not less than 1.25" for a K factor of .14 at 55°F or .17 at

75°F and conform to HH-I-1751/4. Insulation at each end of each length of pipe shall be protected with an end seal bonded both to the carrier pipe and the outer jacket. Piping cuts made in the field must be provided with end seals equal to factory type. All piping insulation shall be labeled as “non-asbestos insulation” at point of access or use.

E. JACKET: Insulation shall be completely encased within a seamless, high density polyethylene (HDPE) jacket with a minimum wall thickness of .100 inches in accordance with ASTM D1248, Type 3, Class 3. Jacket shall be corrugated ribbed type with smooth interior and ribbed exterior. Jacket and insulation system shall comply with H-20 highway loading requirements.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 21 13-3

F. FITTINGS: Fittings and joints on straight runs shall be field insulated with pre-cut polyurethane half sections of the same thickness as the adjacent pipe, wired in place with all voids being eliminated. Vapor barrier jacketing material for fittings and joints shall be heat shrink material applied in the field per piping manufacturer's instructions.

G. INSTALLATION: Trench shall be 12” wider than the combined O.D of the piping system and depth as required to install piping 24” below grade to the top of the jacket. Backfilling shall be carefully done with a layer of clean washed sand, 6" thick, completely surrounding the buried pipes to meet H-20 loading. A manufacturer’s representative shall be present during critical periods of installation and testing, to verify that the installation is being made in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

H. TESTING: All piping shall be pressure tested for 150 psi for 48 hours prior to cover-up.

I. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Insul-pipe Systems, Inc., Perma-pipe, Ricwil Piping Systems, Rovanco and Thermacor.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING

A. GENERAL: Provide all required piping not specifically shown on the drawings but necessary for the proper operation of the systems. Piping materials, methods of installation, fittings, valves, etc., shall conform, in general, to that specified for similar piping systems. Particularly note the special drain lines required for condensing boilers.

B. MISCELLANEOUS DRAINS: Provide copper drain line to floor drain from automatic air vents, backflow preventers, relief valves and other equipment with automatic drains.

2.5 FITTINGS

A. SCREWED: Conform to ANSI Specification B16.3.

B. COPPER: Conform to ANSI Specification B16.22. T-drill fittings are not acceptable.

C. WELDED: Install elbow, transition, branch and weld-o-let lateral fittings in welded systems. Mitered or field fabricated fittings are not acceptable. Flanges shall be weld neck type for sizes 6” and larger pipe.

D. SPECIAL: Use long radius ells on all pumped lines.

2.6 GROOVED PIPING SYSTEM

A. GENERAL: The grooved coupling system may be used at contractor's option, except in all cases provide a sufficient quantity of Victaulic flexible type mechanical couplings in straight pipe runs to compensate for expansion.

B. PIPE: Use only those pipe materials allowed in the Specifications and approved by the coupling manufacturer for the application. Pipe grooves shall be machine cut for schedule 40 pipe.

C. COUPLINGS: Housings shall be ductile or malleable iron constructed to ASTM A-47 or A-536, or forged steel constructed to ASTM A-106. Coupling gaskets shall be EPDM Grade E for -30° F to 230° F service. Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 77 flexible couplings at first three joints from equipment. Elsewhere use Style 07 for rigid joints or Style 77 for flexible joints.

D. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Gustin Bacon, Grinnell Gruvlok and Victaulic

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 21 16 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 21 16-1

SECTION 23 21 16 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. All valves shall be manufactured in the United States of America.








2.1 VALVES

A. GENERAL: Provide shutoff/balancing valve for each water connection to equipment that is piped to the chilled or heating water systems. All pressures shown below are minimum working pressures. Provide memory stops for valves used for balancing service. Provide chain operators with guide for all valves 6" and larger, located higher than 8 feet located in the main mechanical room or boiler room. Loop chain with bottom 7 feet high. Provide close-off plugs or plates for all valves in dead end service or otherwise opening to the atmosphere (drains, manual vents, future extensions, etc.).

B. BALL VALVE FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: Provide for 2" and smaller pipe: 600 PSI WOG, bronze threaded, full port, Teflon seat, stainless steel trim, extension stem for insulation. Nibco T-585-70-66(-NS). Ball valves for strainer blow down and drains shall have hose end connection and attached cap. Nibco T-585-70-66-HC. Valves used for air venting may be non-full port type with chrome plated ball. Nibco T-580-70.

C. GATE VALVE FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: Provide for steel pipe 2½" and larger only: 125# iron body, bronze fitted, flanged, bolted bonnet, solid wedge, OS&Y. Nibco F-617-0.

D. PLUG VALVE FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: Bronze or iron body, screwed for 2" and smaller, flanged for 2½" and larger, eccentric plug with compressible resilient seal suitable for 250° F water service, permanently molded to plug face, permanently lubricated corrosion resistant bearing bushings, lever actuator. DeZurik Series 100 and 400

E. CHECK: 2" and under, 125# bronze body, bronze swing check with Teflon seat; 2½" and over 125# iron body, flanged, bronze trim. Use Duo-Check for pumped lines. Nibco T-413-Y, Nibco W-920-W or Mission "Duo-Check"

F. BUTTERFLY: 2½" and larger, 200# full lug ductile iron type body, stem seals, molded in


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 21 16-2

or renewable seat, aluminum bronze disc, 416 stainless steel stem, extended neck for insulated lines, notched top plate with handle for throttling. Valves 6" and larger and valves with chain operators, to have enclosed weatherproof gear operator. All valves certified suitable for dead end service with no downstream flange. Nibco LD-2000

G. MISCELLANEOUS VALVES: As indicated on the Drawings.

H. INSULATION PROVISIONS: Valves on insulated lines shall have stems extending through insulation. Plug valves shall have DeZurik 400 dry cap. All ball valves except heating water valves shall have Nibco Nibseal system installed.

I. INSTALLATION: Ball valves shall be installed such that handle for valve is positioned on the side of the pipe and is pulled down to close the valve.

J. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Crane, De Zurik, Hammond, Grinnell, Nibco and Stockham

2.2 STRAINERS

A. STRAINERS: Iron body, Y pattern basket type, line size with a 20 mesh Monel screen unless indicated otherwise. Size for a maximum of 2 PSIG pressure drop. Provide ball valve with hose end to blow-off on strainers. Chilled and hot water strainer baskets to have 1/16" perforations. Condenser water strainer baskets to have 1/8" perforations.

B. SUCTION DIFFUSERS: Flanged type with strainer area five times suction area, straightening vanes with length 2½ times suction diameter, magnetic insert, reducing flange as required and adjustable floor support. All internal parts shall be replaceable.

C. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Keckley and Taco

2.3 WATER SPECIALTIES

A. GENERAL: Provide all specialties necessary for proper operation of the water systems. Install manual air vents at all high points on chilled and hot water lines and automatic vents where shown. Install T&P relief valves in all closed water piping systems.

B. TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES: ASME labeled with try handle. Discharge pressure rating shall be approximately 10 PSI above normal maximum system operating pressure; except valves on hot water boilers to be rated at 30 PSI. Valve shall have a capacity not less than rated output of boiler.

C. CAPTIVE AIR EXPANSION TANKS: 125 PSI rated, captive air type with charging valve and replaceable bladder designed for 100% acceptance.

D. AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS: Bell & Gossett No. 107A high capacity vent, 150 psi rating, with shut-off cock. Install 1/2" copper tube overflow line extended to a suitable drain point.

E. MANUAL AIR VENTS: 1/2” ball valve with plug.

F. AIR SEPARATORS / AIR AND DIRT ELIMINATORS: Shall have tangential inlet and outlet connections, top tank fitting, PALL ring technology, drain/blow down valve and be constructed to ASME applicable codes for 125 PSIG working pressure. Taco Model 4900-AD

G. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Aurora, Bell & Gossett, Keckley, McDonnell-Miller, Taco, Thrush and Wood Industrial Products.

H. TEST PLUGS: Provide Pete's Plugs or Texas Fairfax test plugs at inlet and outlet of each pump, AHU water coil, strainer, control valve and chiller cooler and condenser bundle. Provide extension where piping is insulated. Provide two sets of temperature and pressure gages for use with the Pete's Plugs. Gages to be of appropriate scale for system


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 21 16-3

measurements.

I. GAGES: 4½" dial diameter, bottom connected, flangeless, moisture and dust proof case with blowout plug, screw rings and glass crystal. Movement shall be silicone dampened, bronze brushed rotary movement. Pressure range 0 to 150% of system working pressure. Provide brass “T” handle shut off cock for each gage with minimum rating same as gage. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ashcroft, Marsh, Marshalltown, Scientific, Trerice, Weiss or Weksler.

J. THERMOMETERS: Outdoor thermometers shall be cast brass or cast aluminum case with brass separable sockets (with extension neck for insulated piping); red reading non-Mercury type with 9" scale for maximum and minimum temperature to be encountered. Chilled and condenser water range to be 30° F to 130° F, 2° divisions. Hot water range shall be 30° F to 240° F, 2° F divisions. For thermometers at or below 6 feet high, install scale vertical. For thermometers above 6 feet high provide adjustable angle type. Install scale at 45° facing down for easy reading. Weiss Model 9VU35. Equal thermometers by American, Marshalltown, Scientific, Taylor, Trerice and Weksler are acceptable.

K. THERMOMETER WELLS: Weksler Test Wells, brass with 3½" stem, 2½" extension neck, and brass screw plug, or comparable models made by American, Marshalltown, Scientific, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District HYDRONIC PUMPS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 21 23 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 21 23-1

SECTION 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL







PART 2 - EQUIPMENT

2.1 END SUCTION WATER PUMPS

A. GENERAL: Pumps shall be base mounted with flexible coupling. End suction pumps shall be back pullout type with cast support from the casing.

B. CONSTRUCTION: Pumps shall be bronze fitted with iron or steel casing, casing wearing ring, shaft sleeve, drip proof motor, cast iron or steel base, coupling guard, grease fittings and mechanical shaft seals. Impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall not be larger than 85% of cutwater size. Motor to pump connection shall use Wood’s Dura-Flex coupling with 1.5 service factor suitable for variable speed drive applications.

C. VERTICAL INLINE PUMPS: Similar to above except provide split coupled, NEMA standard JM re-greaseable motor and factory installed vent line from the seal chamber to the pump suction to remove trapped air. Pump shall be designed to allow seal replacement without removing motor.

D. CAPACITY: Capacity as scheduled on Drawings. Include cost of re-trimming impeller if required to properly balance the system.

E. MOTOR: Construction and selection shall be non-overloading at selection point and at any point on the curve. Service factor may be used for meeting this requirement except at selection point. See Motors in Section 23 00 13.

F. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Armstrong, Aurora, Bell and Gossett and Taco.

2.2 HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASE PUMPS

A. GENERAL: The pumps shall be single stage double suction horizontally split design. The bearings and seals shall be serviceable without disturbing the piping connections. The capacities and characteristics shall be as called for in the plans/schedules.

B. CASING: Pump casing shall be constructed of ASTM A48, Class 30 cast iron. The pump casing/volute shall be rated for 300 psi working pressure. The pump flanges shall be drilled to match the piping standards of the job, either ANSI class 125 or ANSI class 250. The

Aldine Independent School District HYDRONIC PUMPS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 21 23 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 21 23-2

pump casing shall be drilled and tapped for gauge ports on both the suction and discharge connections and for a drain port at the bottom of the casing. The casing shall have an additional tapping on the discharge connection to allow for the installation of a seal flush line. The pump cover shall be drilled and tapped to accommodate a seal flush line which can be connected to the corresponding tapping on the discharge connection, or to an external source to facilitate cooling and flushing of the seal faces.

C. SIZE: See Schedule on the Drawings: Nozzle velocities shall not exceed 12 ft/sec.

D. VOLUTE: Pump volute shall be foot mounted. Overhung cantilevered designs are not acceptable.

E. IMPELLER: The impeller shall be ASTM B584-836/875 bronze and hydraulically balanced. The impeller shall be dynamically balanced to ANSI Grade G6.3 and shall be fitted to the shaft with a key.

F. SHAFT: The pump shall incorporate a dry shaft design to prevent the circulating fluid from contacting the shaft. The pump shaft shall be AISI 1045 carbon steel with field replaceable bronze SAE 660 shaft sleeve. The sleeve shall be fitted to the shaft via threading and key. The sleeves shall be threaded on the side abutting the impeller to allow for thermal expansion.

G. SHAFT SEALS: The pump shall be fitted with two mechanical seals, with EPT elastomers and Carbon/Ni-Resist faces, rated up to 250ºF. This seal must be capable of being flushed externally via a tapping in the pump cover adjacent to the seal cavity. Any pump used on an open system shall be furnished with a seal flush line and a Cuno / Purocell #900 replaceable cartridge filter or Kynar sediment separator with shut-off isolation valve installed in the seal flushing line. The filter shall have the ability to remove particles down to five microns in size.

H. PUMP BASE: All pumps to be provided with a fully welded, rigid structural steel base. The base shall include closed ends and top openings to allow for grouting. The base shall include an integral drain pan fabricated from steel with a minimum thickness of 0.1875” and shall contain an integral 3/4” drain connection.

I. MOTOR: The pump shall be flexibly coupled to a NEMA standard T frame motor. The coupler shall be suitable for across the line starting as well as variable speed conditions associated with variable frequency drives. The coupling shall be equal to a Woods Dura- Flex coupler. The coupling and shafts shall be covered by a metal guard. Pump shall be aligned upon receipt at job, during installation, and after system fill by contractor.

J. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Armstrong, Aurora, Bell and Gossett and Taco Model TA.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District REFRIGERANT PIPING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 23 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 23 00-1

SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Construct all piping systems in accordance with applicable ASME Codes.

B. Piping shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner parallel to building coordinates with vertical drops. Piping in the vicinity of equipment shall be arranged to not interfere with access panels and maintenance space.

C. All piping, fittings and valves shall be manufactured in the United States of America.








2.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. GENERAL: Submit shop drawing of piping system showing all traps, pipe sizes, and accessories. Drawing to be marked "Approved", and signed by an employee of the Application Engineering Department of the manufacturer of the equipment being served. Do not install piping until this drawing is submitted and approved.

B. MATERIALS:

01 PIPE: Type "L" copper ACR tubing.

02 FITTINGS: Wrought copper streamlined, long radius sweat fitting.

03 SOLDER: Sil-Fos, except on valves use solder recommended by valve Manufacturer. Make joints while pipe is under nitrogen purge to prevent formation of oxides inside piping.

C. ACCESSORIES: Install replaceable core type liquid line dryer-strainer sized for system capacity at 2 PSI pressure drop per ARI Standard 710-64, sight glass-moisture indicator, expansion valves, solenoid valves and charging fittings. Provide supports made for copper refrigerant piping.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED HYDRONIC SYSTEMS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 25 13 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 25 13-1

SECTION 23 25 13 WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 CLOSED SYSTEM WATER TREATMENT

A. GENERAL: Contractor shall clean and flush chilled and heating water systems. After cleaning, fill with clean, treated water per this specification.

B. EQUIPMENT: Provide Vector Industries Model FA 900 filter feeder with legs and stainless steel sock enclosure, drain valve, ball type shut-off valves, 50 micron filter and flow indicator and necessary accessories for the chilled and heating water systems. Unit for heating water system shall be suitable for 240° F water temperature. Pipe filter feeders across the system pumps. Flow rate through filter feeder shall be adjusted to equal 1% of system flow.

C. CLEANING METHOD AND WATER TREATMENT CHEMICALS:

01 General Procedure: The chilled and hot water systems shall be flushed and all debris, rags and foreign objects from construction shall be removed from equipment, traps, etc. System drains shall be located at low points and preferably as far from the fill point as practical. Drain valves shall be minimum 3/4” ball valves. Do not use hose bibbs as drain valves. When system is being cleaned and flushed, do not circulate water through coils, control valves or flow control valves. Install temporary by-pass hoses between isolating and balancing valves at coils to allow re-circulation. Install temporary spool pieces at control valve locations in mains during the flushing and cleaning process. Temporarily connect dead-end supply and return headers, even if not shown on the drawings, and provide terminal drains in bottom of pipe end caps or blind flanges. Strainers at coils only shall be removed until flushing is complete. Strainers at pumps shall remain in place to protect pumps and equipment. Clean strainers frequently during the circulation process. When flushing and cleaning is finished, complete piping connections. Remove temporary hoses and spool pieces, install strainers or strainer elements. When systems are refilled with clean water, circulate that water for 24 hours, then clean and re-install strainers or strainer elements.

02 Phase 1 - Initial Flushing of the System: Remove loose dirt, mill scale, weld heads,

Aldine Independent School District WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED HYDRONIC SYSTEMS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 25 13 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 25 13-2

rust and other deleterious substances without damage to system components. Open valves, drains, vents and strainers at all system levels during flushing procedures. Flush system until “potable water clear” and particles larger than 5 microns are removed. Dispose of water in an approved manner.

03 Phase 2 - Cleaning of the Piping System: Remove without chemical or mechanical damage to any system component, adherent dirt (organic soil), oil grease (hydrocarbons), welding and soldering flux, mill varnish, piping components, rust (iron oxide) and other deleterious substances not removed by initial flushing. A solution of Allegheny BC88 liquid piping cleaner shall be circulated in the system for a minimum of 48 hours according to a procedure recommended by the chemical company. Dosage: 5 gallons per 1000 gallons of system water. After circulating cleaner solution, drain system as fast as possible to remove suspended solids. Dispose of water in an approved manner.

04 Phase 3 - Refill system, and circulate clean water for a minimum 24 hours with a constant bleed off drain/refill rate of approximately 6 gpm to flush remaining solids. Operate valves to dislodge any debris in valve body. Flush system until “potable water clear” and particles larger than 5 microns are removed.

05 Submit status report upon completion of each phase of work on each system. Owner’s representative shall be present to observe cleaning of piping systems at each phase.

06 After ensuring the system water is clean, add Allegheny CST375 corrosion inhibitor through pot feeders to leave closed systems in proper pH condition. Leave system at 1 gallon per 1000 gallons of water concentration. Circulate water with all control valves open for 24 hours to ensure proper mixing.

07 The system water at final inspection will be certified in writing as to cleanliness and final treatment by the water treatment supplier to the Mechanical Contractor.

D. ACCEPTABLE WATER TREATMENT COMPANIES: Allegheny Southwest, Chem-Aqua, EWT, Garratt-Callahan, Nalco and Water Treatment Services

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 29 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 29 00-1

SECTION 23 29 00 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLER

A. GENERAL: Controller shall be a microprocessor controlled, adjustable frequency motor controller consisting of a sine-coded, pulse width modulated output inverter suitable for specified size and voltage motors listed on the Drawings. Unit shall be U. L. Listed as a complete package and comply with the applicable ANSI, IEEE and NEMA Standards as well as the National Electrical Code. Inverter shall be grounded and line, load, control and fire/safety wiring shall be installed in separate conduits.

B. FEATURES:

01 Two contactor style, three leg manual bypass contactors with H-O-A switch and lockable disconnect. Bypass section shall be in a separate enclosure from the inverter and circuited to allow operation with all power disconnected from the inverter section. Protective controls shall operate in both normal and by-pass modes.

02 NEMA 1, wall mounted enclosures except provide NEMA 12 enclosures in chiller or boiler rooms.

03 Digital keypad with LCD screen for entry of set points

04 Panel mounted start-stop control as well as 0-10 VDC and 4-20 ma interface to standard energy management systems.

05 Unit shall operate normally with input up to 30% over voltage and 35% under voltage

06 Inherent power factor correction to .95.

07 Field adjustable acceleration and deceleration times.

08 0-120 Hz controlled speed range with adjustable maximum and minimum stops. For direct drive motors set maximum speed per the equipment submittal requirements.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 29 00-2

09 Safe shutdown and immediate restart after a power outage.

10 3% input (line) reactors and DC Bus filtered chokes matched to motor size to reduce harmonics emitted to electrical system and limit voltage spikes to motor and drive.

11 MOV’s for transient voltage protection

12 Provide 115 volt control transformer to interface with vibration switches and other control devices.

C. PROTECTIVE CONTROLS (both automatic and bypass):

01 Overvoltage and undervoltage.

02 Ground fault.

03 Phase loss or failure.

D. NAMEPLATES: Identify each VFD with an engraved nameplate showing load served and the maximum horsepower rating.

E. STARTUP: A factory trained service technician shall startup and test each drive. Technician shall contact Engineer prior to startup to obtain special settings that may be required for primary pumps, cooling tower and other equipment. Technician shall also operate drive through the frequency range and note any frequencies that cause resonance with the associated equipment. If directed by the engineer, lockout or skip those frequencies.

F. SUBMITTALS: Provide complete information to confirm compliance. Also provide certified noise data showing that the drive does not exceed preferred “RC” as listed in 1995 ASHRAE HVAC Applications, Chapter 43 Sound and Vibration Control, Table 2 Criteria for Acceptable HVAC Noise in Unoccupied Rooms.

G. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES: ABB, Danfoss-Graham and Toshiba

2.2 MOTOR STARTERS

A. GENERAL: Provide an individual controller for each motor. Packaged type equipment such as rooftop units and chillers come with starters provided by the equipment manufacturer. Certain motors as noted on the Drawings require variable frequency drive. Equipment served by a motor control center have starters provided with the motor control center.

B. ENCLOSURES: Provide NEMA 1 for standard installations and NEMA 4X for installations outdoors and wet areas. Provide combination starter disconnect switch where shown on the drawings.

C. AUTOMATIC STARTERS: Each starter component shall be sized in accordance with NEMA Standards. The minimum size starter shall be #1. Each unit shall be provided with a manual reset, adjustable electronic current sensing relay that protects for over-current, unbalanced current and phase loss. Provide for auxiliary contacts, including at least one spare NO set, required for interlock wiring. Provide individual 120 volt control transformers in each enclosure sized to operate coil and equipment related control and safety devices. Provide HOA switch and red LED running light. For small motors, ensure the appropriate trip unit is provided in the Size 1 starter so the sensed wire does not have to be double looped through the sensing coil.

D. POWER FACTOR CORRECTING CAPACITORS: Certain motors as noted on the Drawings shall have starters with integral power correction capacitors, selected to ensure a .95 or better power factor for the motor circuit.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 29 00-3

E. NAMEPLATES: Identify each device with an engraved nameplate showing equipment served. Attach with two screws.

F. FINISH: Standard.

G. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Allen-Bradley, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Siemens and Square D

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 31 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 31 00-1

SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL







1.2 SHEET METAL SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit Shop Drawings for all ductwork, showing coordination with fire sprinkler piping, and mechanical, electrical, plumbing and structural components. The mechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire sprinkler contractors shall sign off on the final coordination drawings. Do not fabricate any sheet metal prior to receiving an approved shop drawing from the engineer. The shop drawing shall include a construction details booklet and a pdf’s of the coordination drawings and the booklet. Comments and approval will be noted on the pdf’s and returned. Contractor shall make copies of the approved shop drawing for his use in the field.

1.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK AND AIR DEVICES

A. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where fabrication and installation of the work of this section may properly commence.

B. Verify the installed location of all structural components, piping, conduit and equipment is consistent with the coordination drawing. Verify that all ductwork will fit the spaces indicated on the coordination drawing and make any necessary adjustments prior to fabrication or installation of any ductwork.

C. The exact location of all registers, grilles or ceiling outlets shall be verified by the Architect before roughing-in. Reference shall be made to the architect’s reflected ceiling plan for locating ceiling outlets.

D. Ducts shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.

1.4 CONNECTIONS TO LOUVERS

A. All connections to louvers shall be in a manner that will be watertight. Ductwork behind louver for a minimum of three feet shall have watertight soldered joints and shall be sloped to weep holes in bottom of louver. Duct shall be lapped over bottom louver blade where possible. Make connections to aluminum louvers with dielectric connections.

1.5 ADJUSTMENTS AND CORRECTIONS


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 31 00-2

A. Balance all systems of ductwork including exhaust systems to obtain the air quantities indicated for each inlet and outlet within ±10%. Air quantities shall be further adjusted as required to obtain uniform temperatures in the spaces.


2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. Furnish and install all supply, return, exhaust, outside air and other ductwork shown complete with splitters, extractors, dampers and other required devices. All ductwork, supports and bracing, shall be constructed of new grade, lock forming quality, G-60 or better galvanized steel sheets. All ductwork sheet metal shall be made in the United States of America.

B. Dimensions of duct work shown on Drawings are inside air stream dimensions. Allowances have not been made for internal duct insulation. Provide equivalent sized duct of different aspect ratio to accommodate ceiling cavity conditions.

C. Provide balancing OBD in each zone duct of multi-zone AHU's. Provide adjustable extractors with quadrant lock mechanism equal to Titus AG-45 at all supply outlet taps into trunk duct. Provide conical tap with damper and raised quadrant lock for flexible duct taps,

reference detail on the Drawings. Provide adjustable round elbows (0-90°) at ceiling devices connected with flex ducts to prevent collapse of the flex at connection unless Flexmaster self-supporting flex is installed.

D. Ductwork shall conform to current edition of SMACNA "Duct Manual and Sheet Metal Construction for Ventilating and Air Conditioning System" and the National Board of Fire Underwriters Pamphlet 90A, plus more stringent requirements of these Specifications. Adjust location of standing seams to clear structural members.

E. Duct connections to air handling units and fans shall match the outlet/inlet size, or as recommended by the equipment manufacture, including straight lengths of duct before transitions, to minimize system effect losses. Where duct adapters or damper trays are provided with roof fans, duct connections shall match size for a minimum of 36” before elbow or transition.

F. All duct transitions shall be gradual with a 15° maximum angle as measured from centerline of duct. This includes angled offset, mitered offset, eccentric transition and concentric

transition (2 x 15°).

G. Ductwork shall be constructed to operate at the design system pressure. Generally, ductwork shall be constructed for 2” static pressure. Ductwork downstream of VAV boxes, fan coil units and fans may be 1” static class ductwork. Primary ductwork from a variable air volume air handling unit shall be constructed in accordance with Section 2.2 Medium Pressure Ductwork.

H. Square turns shall be equipped with airfoil turning vanes built to SMACNA Standards. Provide radius turns for elbows less than 90°.

I. Support ductwork with 1" wide x 20 gage galvanized steel straps spaced 6'-0" maximum centers but not more than allowed by SMACNA. Connect strap to duct with two sheet metal screws on each side of duct and one on bottom. Exposed ducts shall be supported in a manner to provide a finished appearance.

J. Seal all duct joints, adjustable elbows, spin-in taps and any penetrations of the duct such as screws with Foster 32-19, Childers CP-146, Design Polymerics DP1010 or Hardcast IG601 Iron Grip installed full strength (no dilution). Ductwork subject to moisture (indoors)


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 31 00-3

and not required to be welded, shall be sealed with Foster 32-14 or Childers CP-140.

K. In areas noted to have round double wall ductwork, provide United McGill Acousti-K27. Outer duct shall be constructed of paintable, 18-gauge galvanized steel. Inner duct shall be perforated galvanized steel. Between the inner and outer ducts install 2” thick fiberglass insulation coated to inhibit growth of micro-biological organisms and to eliminate erosion of fibers.

L. The minimum distance between the CVT/VAV box and the first tap shall be 54”. The minimum distance between taps on the same side of the duct shall be 54”.

M. Sheet metal contractor shall install control system devices that are attached to ductwork. This includes control dampers and sensors.

N. Provide access doors for cleaning ductwork before and after coils, filters, fans and dampers. Locate doors so that the minimum numbers possible are used. Provide removable end caps on ducts.

2.2 MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. Furnish and install medium pressure round and oval ducts that connect VAV medium pressure AHU’s and their associated VAV/CVT boxes as indicated on the Drawings. All ducts shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings, and properly supported and hung from the building structure by trapeze hangers. The minimum size hanger rod shall be 3/8”. Completed duct system (taps and access panels installed) shall be tested at 5” water column at which pressure leakage shall not exceed 3/4 of 1% of the total designed CFM for the individual duct system being tested. All ductwork shall be externally insulated per the Specifications. All turning vanes shall be heavy gage, double thickness type.

B. Medium pressure round or oval duct shall be spiral lock seam duct as manufactured by Gowco, Graco or United Sheet Metal with matching factory made fittings and couplings.

All transitions shall be gradual with a 15° maximum angle with centerline of the duct. All joints and fittings shall be spot-welded and sealed.

C. Gauges of round medium pressure ducts shall be as follows:

3” thru 8” 26 gauge 9” thru 22” 24 gauge 24” thru 36” 22 gauge 38” thru 50” 20 gauge 52” thru 60” 18 gauge

D. Gauges of flat oval spiral ducts shall be 22 gauge up to 48” major axis and 20 gauge from 49” thru 74” major axis. Fittings shall be 20 gauge up to 36” major axis, 18 gauge for 37” thru 50” and 16 gauge for 51” and larger major axis. Centerline radius of elbows shall be 1½ duct diameters. Provide conical take-off’s where possible.

E. Fittings and couplings thru 36” shall be 22 gauge, 38” thru 60” shall be 20 gauge.

F. All square to round/oval transitions at air handling unit discharges shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel with all welded connections, and shall have flanged rectangular connection.

G. All joints in ducts and fittings shall be sealed with United Sheet Metal High Pressure Unigrip duct sealer, Childers CP-140 or Foster No. 32-14.

H. Connections to fan powered boxes from main duct to box extension shall be made with a two foot length of straight flexible connecting duct. This flexible duct shall be Flexible Tubing Corporation Thermaflex, insulated Type M-KC, U. L. approved. Provide a hard, straight section of round duct at VAV box connections with length 1½ times duct diameter. Connect inner liner to spin-in, VAV box, round rigid duct or air device with stainless steel,


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 31 00-4

adjustable bands (hose clamps). Secure outer cover with nylon wire tie strap.

I. Duct work supports shall consist of unistrut with 3/8” thick or heavier all thread rods attached to structure. Provide double nuts and cut all tread so no more than 1” extends beyond nut.

J. Access panels shall be Nailor Industries Model 0800-M1 insulated access panels with camlocks and safety chain.

2.3 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK

A. GENERAL: Make connections to all hoods and extend ductwork to exhaust blowers. Securely fasten and support ducts at every change of direction. Supports or fasteners shall not penetrate any duct or plenum. Systems shall be installed to maintain not less than 1500 feet per minute velocity. Discharge air outlets shall be at least 40" above roof and at least 24" above any intake opening with 10 feet.

B. DUCT CONSTRUCTION: Install ductwork without forming dips or traps and slope not less than 1" per foot downward toward hood. Provide cleanout openings at each change in direction. Cleanout openings shall be equipped with tight fitting doors, same thickness as duct, equipped with latching to make grease tight. Doors shall be operable and removable without the use of a tool.

C. COOKING HOOD EXHAUST DUCT: Duct material shall be black steel, minimum 16 gage, with grease tight, continuous external welded joints.

D. DISHWASHER HOOD EXHAUST DUCT: Duct material shall be 18 gauge, Type 316L stainless steel, watertight construction with continuous external welded joints.

2.4 SHOWER EXHAUST DUCTWORK

A. Duct material shall be 18 gauge, Type 316L stainless steel, watertight construction with external welded joints, from intake grilles to exhaust fan. Slope duct to drain through ceiling grilles when fan is off.

2.5 FUME HOOD DUCTWORK AND OTHER DUCTWORK NOTED TO BE STAINLESS STEEL

A. Duct material shall be 18 gauge, Type 316L stainless steel, watertight construction with external welded joints.

2.6 DUCTWORK FOR OUTSIDE AIR HOODS AND FANS

A. Where hoods or fans are shown open to mechanical room, shop and similar locations, provide a short length of duct to allow installation of OBD and/or motorized control damper. Duct dimension shall be roof curb opening size or larger if required by damper size.

2.7 PLENUMS AND BLANK-OFF PLATES

A. Provide plenums at louvers, air handling units, fan coil units and other equipment where return air or outside air ducts are shown to connect. Provide plenums for the mounting fans to louvers. Provide full or partial blank-off plates on return air openings as necessary for properly balancing of system supply air, outside air and return air flows or to cover openings where air transfer is not desired. Plenums shall be 12” unless noted to be larger.

B. Construct plenums with galvanized steel framing members and galvanized sheet steel, cross broken or rigidly braced with galvanized angles. Gages and bracing shall conform to SMACNA recommendations for ductwork of like size. Openings for fans, access doors, etc., shall be framed with galvanized steel angles.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 31 00-5

C. Where access doors are shown, provide hinged doors with #202 Ventlok latch.

2.8 DRYER EXHAUST DUCTWORK

A. Provide snap lock, round galvanized sheetmetal with taped, slip-fit joints. Minimum 26 gage. Eliminate edges and sheetmetal screws that could catch lint. Use duct tape or pop-rivets on all seams and joints.

B. Install flexible connections of fire resistant material with spiral inner liner wire, stainless steel clamps between unit and exhaust duct.

C. Provide residential style dampered and hooded wall outlet for discharges through walls. Roof discharge cap shall have baffled outlet, without bird screen similar to Penn Pul-Air.

2.9 SCREENS

A. Furnish and install screen on all duct and fan openings which lead to or are outdoors. Screens shall be No. 16 gage, galvanized steel 1/2" mesh bolted into removable galvanized steel frame. Install screens over return air openings between floors.

2.10 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS

A. GENERAL: Duct and return air opening penetrations of floors and fire rated walls shall have fire dampers installed per their listing.

B. MATERIALS: Gage of sleeves shall be as required by the conditions of U. L. listing, but not less than the gage of duct. Minimum 18 gage. Install 1½" x 1½" x 1/8" angles around duct on both sides of wall or floor penetration.

C. WATER BARRIER: Build 3" high by 3" wide concrete "dam" around duct or return air penetrations of mechanical room floors above grade. Floor return air openings without sound attenuator attached shall be covered with 1" x 1/8" welded steel bar grating supported by 2" x 2" x 1/4" angles attached to slab with 3/4" round drilled anchors, 24" on center.

2.11 SADDLES

A. Provide sheet metal protective saddles at all pipe supports for insulated piping. Refer to Insulation Section.

2.12 DRAIN PANS

A. GENERAL: Provide drain pan under fan coil units, air handling units, water heaters and other equipment subject to water leakage not mounted on concrete floor in mechanical room.

B. CONSTRUCTION: 16-gauge, 304/316 stainless steel suitably stiffened, with minimum 2" perimeter lip and all joints soldered watertight. Provide connection and overflow drain to suitable location.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 33 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 33 00-1

SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 DAMPERS

A. GENERAL: Provide dampers where shown on Drawings and as necessary to control air flow in all supply and outside air ducts. Provide multi-blade volume dampers in all zone ducts of multi-zone air handling units. Provide access doors in sheetrock ceilings to all access to damper operators.

B. SPLITTER DAMPERS: Shall be constructed of single thickness, 16-gauge galvanized steel, hinged at leaving edge and founded at entering edge, securely riveted or welded to a square operating rod. The length of the splitter damper blade shall be 1½ times the width of the split in the main duct, but not less than 12".

C. VOLUME DAMPERS: Factory constructed of 16 gage galvanized steel for frame and blades. Blades shall not exceed 48" in length or 6" in width, and shall be of the opposed interlocking type. The blades shall be supported on 1/2" diameter rust-proofed axles. Axle bearings shall be self-lubricating ferrule type.

D. FLEX TAP CONNECTIONS: Taps on rectangular low pressure ducts for flexible connections to diffusers shall be 22 gauge, round conical taps with adjustable single blade damper. Damper rod shall be continuous though tap with blade mechanically attached. Provide bearings at each end, and quadrant lock operator with wingnut and 2” standoff bracket for insulation. Refer to detail on the drawings for additional construction details.

E. DAMPER ADJUSTING DEVICES: Each splitter or volume damper shall be fitted with an adjusting device extending beyond external duct insulation.

01 ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS: Ventlok #641 regulators attached directly to duct and location marked in ceiling as approved.

02 NON-ACCESSIBLE CEILING: Regulators exposed. Ventlok #666 rods and #607 end bearings.

2.2 FIRE DAMPERS


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 33 00-2

A. GENERAL: Install fire dampers in all duct penetrations and return air openings in fire rated walls, ceilings, floors and chases. Provide fire damper at each sidewall register or grille. Provide additional fire dampers where specified by local building codes and also where shown on drawings.

B. DUCT DAMPERS: Construction shall conform to requirements of NFPA Pamphlet No. 90A with recommended steel sleeves and fusible links. Dampers shall be U. L. labeled. Fire dampers shall be shutter type providing minimum restriction to air flow. Provide Type B for ducts passing through walls. Provide thinline Type A dampers at sidewall registers. Select damper thickness to fit within the thickness of the wall with OBD's or other specified devices. Dampers located in medium pressure ducts shall be compatible with this construction including the specified maximum leakage rate. Install dampers in accordance with conditions of their U. L. listing.

C. CEILING DAMPERS: Air devices in U. L. fire rated ceilings shall have compatible U. L. classified ceiling dampers with volume adjustment mechanism and extension collar equal to Ruskin CFD-A. Install complete system including thermal blanket on back of air device in accordance with the U. L. listing.

D. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Greenheck, Nailor, Pottoroff, Ruskin and Safe-Air

2.3 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. GENERAL: Dampers shall be 1½ hour fire rated under U. L. Standard 555S. Dampers shall be normally closed with a leakage rate of no more than 10 CFM per square foot at 1" static pressure (Class II). Install in accordance with the U. L. Listing including duct sleeve. Damper blades shall be airfoil type for low pressure drop and low noise when in the open position.

B. OPERATOR: Damper operator shall respond to remote signals to open and close, and shall fail in the closed position. Damper operator shall be 120 volts unless noted otherwise. Provide micro-switches to signal full open and full closed positions.

C. COMBINATION DAMPERS: Dampers noted to be combination smoke and fire shall have fusible link assembly to close damper on elevated temperature.

D. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Smoke dampers shall be Nailor Model 1211. Combination dampers shall be Nailor Model 1221. Equivalent dampers by Greenheck, Pottoroff, Ruskin and Safe-Air are acceptable.

2.4 ACCESS DOORS TO FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. GENERAL: Provide double wall galvanized steel, insulated access door in duct for inspection and service to fire damper and fusible link. Minimum size shall be 16"x16" with four cam latches unless limited by duct size. Access doors in stainless steel ducts shall be constructed of stainless steel.

B. CONSTRUCTION: Construct access door airtight and conform to recommendations of NFPA and SMACNA.

C. INSTALLATION: Opening of access panel shall be within 12” of the damper to allow resetting of the actuator.

2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT

A. GENERAL: Flexible duct shall be U. L. Listed 181 Class I air duct with fiberglass/aluminum foil inner liner, fiberglass insulation with a C=.23, bi-directional reinforced metalized vapor barrier outer jacket and 6" w.c. pressure rating. The insulating value shall be meet the International Energy Code, minimum R=6.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 33 00-3

B. INSTALLATION: The maximum length between duct and air device shall be six feet. The maximum length between duct and single or double duct mixing box shall be three feet. Connect inner liner to duct tap, VAV box, round rigid duct or air device with stainless steel, adjustable bands (hose clamps). Secure outer cover with nylon wire tie strap. Tape edges of outer cover to adjacent insulation or duct with FSK foil tape to present a finished appearance.

C. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES: Flexmaster Type 3M or Thermaflex M-KE

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN AHU, VAV BOX OR FAN AND DUCTWORK

A. CONSTRUCTION: Flexible connections shall be made from neoprene coated, woven glass fiber material, 30 ounces per square yard.

B. INSTALLATION: Installed air tight with at least 1" slack to ensure that no vibration is transmitted from fan to ductwork. Air handling units with fans that are internally isolated from the housing do not require flexible connections

2.7 ACOUSTICAL LINER

A. GENERAL: Provide 1" thick acoustical lining in return air ducts and return air plenums. Do not install in any supply air duct or kitchen return air duct.

B. MATERIAL: Owens-Corning "Aeroflex Duct Liner" or equivalent by CertainTeed; 1½ pound per cubic foot density, neoprene faced, "K" value not more than .27 at 75° F mean temperature difference.

C. INSTALLATION: Adhere liner, with coated side toward air stream, to all interior sides of duct with 100% coverage of Foster 85-11. Further secure the liner with mechanical fasteners on maximum 12" centers. All edges and fasteners shall be coated with one brush coat of Foster 30-35.

D. PLENUMS: Plenum interiors exposed to view through louvers and grilles shall be lined and have pins painted flat black.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District HVAC FANS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 34 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 34 00-1

SECTION 23 34 00 HVAC FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL







PART 2 - EQUIPMENT

2.1 ROOF FANS AND VENTS

A. GENERAL: Fans shall bear the AMCA seal of certified ratings for air and sound performance. Fans and their accessories shall be a prewired assembly from the factory for single point connection by the electrical subcontractor.

B. DESIGN: Fans shall be low silhouette type with removable top for easy access. Housings shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum. Kitchen fans shall have grease trough, discharge air vertically from a minimum of 40 inches above roof and be mounted on 18" high curb per NFPA 96, and shall be U. L. 762 Listed up to 400 F. Power assemblies shall be completely removable as a unit for ease of service. Fans for fume hoods and prep rooms shall have acid resistant coating and explosion-proof construction.

C. DRIVE: Belt drive with heavy cast iron sheaves, adjustable drive sheave and adjustable motor plate. Centrifugal fans shall have motor out of the air stream, cooled by outside air.

D. FAN: Centrifugal fans shall have aluminum, backward curved, non-overloading wheel. Propeller fans shall be of heavy aluminum construction with a minimum of five blades set in a smooth venturi orifice.

E. ROOF CURBS: Mount on insulated, welded prefabricated aluminum roof curb (galvanized steel if on steel decking) with integral cant strip. Curbs shall be designed to mount fan level on sloped roof and be compatible with roof construction specified under the Architectural Sections of the Specifications. Provide duct adapter matched to supply air fans selected. Securely attach fans and hoods to curb with two bolts on each side. Bolt fan curb to structure.

F. KITCHEN HOOD FANS: Fans shown to have both a supply and exhaust fan mounted on a common curb shall have separate electrical connections and associated disconnect switches for each fan. Starters will be remote mounted and are not a part of the fan assembly. Outside air intake duct shall be sufficiently long to provide 10 feet separation between exhaust and intake even if installed perpendicular to rather than inline with the fan curb.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 34 00-2

G. ACCESSORIES: All fans shall have built-in thermal overloads, disconnect switch and bird screen. Backdraft dampers shall be aluminum construction with nylon bushings. Provide additional accessories as noted on the Drawings.

H. HOODS: Provide roof intakes and relief hoods of similar construction, features and installation as fans.

I. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Acme, Cook, Greenheck, Penn-Barry, S&P and Twin City

2.2 WALL FANS, PROPELLER

A. GENERAL: Propeller type, horizontal fan shaft, direct or belt driven, as indicated in schedule on Drawings. Fan blades shall be air-foil shape designed for high efficiency and low noise level. Blades shall be cast with or welded to hub. Bearings shall have lubrication fittings. Unit shall have baked enamel paint finish. Fans and their accessories shall be a prewired assembly from the factory for single point connection by the electrical subcontractor.

B. MOTOR: Totally enclosed, continuous duty, ball bearing type. Single phase motors shall be permanent split capacitor type with built-in overload protection.

C. DRIVE: Belt drive units to have pillow block ball bearings, cast iron sheaves keyed to the shaft, belts rated at 120% of maximum BHP. Motor sheave shall be adjustable pitch type.

D. FAN PANEL: Minimum 16 gage steel construction with deep spun orifice and tubular bearing and motor supports welded into one rigid unit for maximum stability on belt drive units. Direct drive units 20" and smaller may have combination safety guard and motor support of cadmium plated welded wire with vibration isolators for fastening to fan panel on units 20" and smaller.

E. WALL BOX & GUARD: Belt drive units and direct drive units larger than 20" to be mounted in minimum 16 gage galvanized steel wall box with cadmium plated welded wire guard which shall be easily removed for servicing and shall comply with OSHA Standards. Drive side of fan shall face the safety guard for easy access and serviceability. Shutter shall be mounted a minimum of 7" from fan blade for 24"-30" units and 13" for 36"-72" units.

F. BACKDRAFT DAMPERS:

01 FOR EXHAUST FANS: Automatic type with rigid extruded aluminum frame, aluminum blades, aluminum shafts with nylon bushings, vinyl weather strips and counterbalances for easier opening. All shutters larger than 33" shall have rigid "T" section center member and double tie rods.

02 FOR SUPPLY FANS: Motor operated shutter of same construction with time delay relay to start fan motor after shutter is open.

G. GUARDS: Constructed of 1" x 1" mesh heavy gage, enamel coated welded wire or stainless steel.

H. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Acme, Cook, Greenheck, Penn-Barry, S&P and Twin City

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS FANS

A. GENERAL: All fans shall be AMCA rated for air and sound. Each fan shall have fan blade and drive guards, disconnect switch and mounting isolators where applicable. Belt drive fans shall have adjustable motor base plates and adjustable cast iron drives sized for 150% of motor horsepower. Dampers shall be aluminum construction with stainless steel shafts and Teflon bushings. Fans and their accessories shall be a prewired assembly from the


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 34 00-3

factory for single point connection by the electrical subcontractor.

B. INLINE FANS: Direct or belt drive as noted with fan wheel and motor assembly mounted on hinged side access panel. Fan wheel shall be aluminum backward inclined, non-overloading centrifugal type with matching deep venturi cone. Interior of housing shall be fiberglass insulated for sound attenuation. Provide automatic backdraft damper and fan installation hardware for application shown.

C. FLY FAN: Unit shall have totally enclosed cabinet complete with wall mounting bracket, suitable for outdoor installation. Intake grille shall be adjustable for air quantity control. Discharge nozzles shall provide air pattern adjustment. Direct drive motor shall be resilient mounted and drive twin squirrel cage blower wheels. Unit shall provide a minimum of 1600 FPM at three feet from floor and conform with USDA Specifications. Provide door switch for automatic operation. Mars Model 48CH.

D. CEILING CABINET FANS: Fan designed for quiet operation suitable for ceiling mounting with integral white steel intake grille. Direct drive squirrel cage fan resiliently mounted. Provide solid state speed controller, backdraft damper, fire damper and internal fiberglass sound insulation.

E. UTILITY VENT SETS: Belt drive with inlet and discharge configuration as shown on the drawings. Fan wheel shall be backward inclined or airfoil type statically and dynamically balanced. Bearings shall be pillow block type with grease fittings and selected for 200,000 hour operation. Complete fan shall be phosphatized and painted with two coats of epoxy paint. Provide belt guard if mounted inside building, weatherproof cover if outside, drain connection, vibration isolators and inlet and outlet guards if not ducted.

F. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Acme, Cook, Greenheck, Penn-Barry, S&P and Twin City

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District AIR TERMINAL UNITS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 36 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 36 00-1

SECTION 23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 FAN POWERED MIXING BOX

A. GENERAL: Mixing box shall be pressure independent with up to 5” of inlet static pressure, single input box with built-in sound attenuator and constant volume fan. Fan shall operate at greater than 760 RPM. Boxes shall have the scheduled air flow at a maximum of .3" static pressure differential and an NC rating of 30 or less. Sound performance ratings shall be ARI certified. Provide recirculated air filter and hanger bracket with rubber isolator for hanger rods.

B. CONSTRUCTION: The assembly casing shall be constructed of 22 gage galvanized steel, internally lined with 3/4” closed cell, cleanable insulation.

C. CONTROLS: Air terminal unit shall have DDC controller supplied by the temperature controls contractor and mounted by the box manufacturer at its factory. Box supplier shall include cost of controller mounting in his bid. Unit shall be provided with electronic damper actuator, multi-point center averaging type velocity sensor, fan contactor, disconnect switch and minimum 50 VA 277V/24V control transformer (120V/24V if box is 120V). Inlet air sensor chamber shall contain straightening vanes or be of required length to obtain accurate readings.

D. CONTROL DAMPERS: Damper blades shall have a maximum leakage of 2% at 3" static pressure. Units shall have normally open dampers shipped in the full open position.

E. MOTORS: Air terminal unit shall include ICM motor and associated factory installed/set automatic adjusting controller with manual set point adjustment, with manual setpoint adjustment.

F. HEATING COIL: Hot water heating coil shall be minimum two row, copper tube, aluminum fin construction. Electric heaters shall be constructed per Electric Duct Heater Specification.

G. NON-SCHEDULED BOXES: Since the various brands of VAV boxes vary widely in size and shape, acceptable manufacturers who are not the brand specified on the Drawings shall ensure that their equipment will fit the available space prior to submitting a bid to the

Aldine Independent School District AIR TERMINAL UNITS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 36 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 36 00-2

contractor.

H. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Nailor, Price and Titus

2.2 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOX

A. GENERAL: Box shall be a pressure independent, single input box and built-in sound attenuator. Maximum casing leakage shall be 2 percent at 3” inlet pressure. Boxes shall have the schedule air flow at a maximum of .5" static pressure differential and an NC rating of 25 or less.

B. CONSTRUCTION: The assembly casing shall be constructed of 20 gage galvanized steel, internally lined with 1½", 1½ pound density fiberglass insulation meeting NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements. Attenuator section shall have 2” thick insulation. Input connection shall be round or oval stub connections for flexible ducts. Outlet connections shall have S and Drive connection for sheet metal duct connection.

C. CONTROLS: Input shall be electronic operated. Damper shall position damper to normally open. Damper operator, control cards and transformers shall be provided by controls supplier, installed by box manufacturer. Controller shall maintain scheduled air flow within 5 percent, with static pressure variation between .5” to 2.0” w.g. Air flow sensor shall be aluminum, multi-point cross flow center averaging sensor with external taps for air flow readings with corresponding chart/label mounted on the box.

D. DAMPER: Damper blades shall be extruded aluminum or 20 gauge galvanized steel keyed to shaft and have a maximum leakage of 2% at 3" static pressure.

E. HEATING COIL: Hot water heating coil shall be minimum two row, copper tube, aluminum fin construction.

F. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Krueger, Metalaire, Nailor, Price and Titus

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 37 13 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 37 13-1

SECTION 23 37 13 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 AIR DEVICES

A. Furnish and install louvers, supply, return and exhaust registers, grilles and outlets shown on the Drawings.

B. All devices shall be all aluminum construction and shall have white finish. Aluminized type corrosion resistant steel with finish having a five year warranty against the formation of visible rust will also be acceptable. Devices in U. L. fire rated ceilings shall be of aluminized steel construction with white finish, suitable for U. L. classification.

C. All supply outlets shall be equipped with opposed blade volume dampers. Provide Titus Model D-75 for supply diffusers.

D. The air distribution equipment supplier shall guarantee that each supply, return and exhaust device shall be of the proper design and size to pass the indicated quantity of air into or out of the space involved, with maximum diffusion and without objectionable noise, excessive friction or objectionable air movement at the occupied level.

E. Registers, grilles and outlets shall be of manufacture, type and capacity as shown on the schedule of the Drawings. Similar devices of other manufacture may be submitted for approval for those items for which a reasonable close substitute is available. Devices must be similar in appearance and their style must be acceptable to the Architect.

F. If devices other than those shown are proposed, the values for their face velocities, neck velocities and noise levels, DBA or NC, shall not exceed these values for the devices scheduled on the Drawings.

G. Ceiling outlets shall be of a type compatible with the ceiling in which they are installed and shall have removable core with overlapping cone design to prevent vertical downward projection of air.

H. Contractor shall check the Architectural Drawings and verify the type of ceiling shown in the various areas to determine the proper type of outlet for the ceiling used.

I. Air devices in U. L. fire rated ceilings shall have compatible U. L. classified ceiling dampers

Aldine Independent School District AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 37 13 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 37 13-2

with volume adjustment mechanism and have U. L. approved fireproofing on device. Dampers connected to flexible ducts shall also have extension collar feature equal to Ruskin CFD-A. Sidewall registers shall have thinline fire damper. Fire proofing devices shall contain no friable or fibrous material in the air stream.

J. Air diffusers not required to have fireproofing on the back of the diffuser shall be factory insulated suitable for return air plenum installation.

K. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Krueger, Metalaire, Nailor, Price and Titus.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District DUCT SOX Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 37 16 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 Section 23 37 16-1

SECTION 23 37 16 DUCT SOX

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 DUCTSOX FABRIC AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

A. Provide DuctSox air distribution as shown on the Drawings.

B. DuctSox shall be standard round shape with high-throw air distribution system with internal flow control devices to ensure proper distribution for this application.

C. Provide metal to fabric adapter, and fabric elbows, tees and offsets to form the duct layout shown.

D. Fabric shall be air permeable, Sedona-Xm FR polyester twill with anti-microbial treatment.

E. Standard color selected by Architect.

F. Provide cable suspension system with nylon snap clips.

G. Manufacturer shall provide computer analysis of their proposed duct system showing proper air distribution for the specific application on this project.

H. Acceptable Manufacturers: DuctSox and Prihoda

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 41 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 41 00-1

SECTION 23 41 00 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 AIR FILTERS

A. GENERAL: Provide multiple sets of air filters for all supply air handling equipment for use during construction. During construction provide an additional pre-filter consisting roll filter media installed across the air intake of the air handling unit. Replace overlay filter media and filters during construction as necessary to protect coils. Install a set of new filters prior to Testing and Balancing of the system. Provide a final set of new filters at Substantial Completion for Owners use and installation when necessary.

B. FILTER MEDIA: 2" thick, Farr Type 30-30 MERV 13 efficiency, pleated, disposable type filter

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 51 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 51 00-1

SECTION 23 51 00 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 FLUE VENTS

A. GENERAL: Required for all gas fired equipment.

B. LARGE WATER HEATER AND BOILER FLUE PIPE: U. L. Listed, pressure rated, double pipe with, .025” thick stainless steel inner jacket and a minimum of two-inch-thick fiberglass insulation between pipes to limit surface temperature to 130° F. AMPCO IVS2 or Metalbestos Type IPS2

C. FURNACE FLUE PIPE: Double pipe galvanized steel with .035” thick stainless steel inner liner and air space between inner and outer pipes. Metalbestos Model DF.

D. CAPS: Galvanized steel, Breidert (or similar Acme or Triangle) Type L on stack extension above flashing base. Bottom plate of cap shall be higher than any parapet wall within 10 feet and in no case less than four feet above the roof. Provide ventilated roof thimble at roof penetration.

E. CLEARANCES: Maintain adequate clearance from combustible materials to prevent fire hazard. Provide thimble for pipe passing through combustible materials.

F. SLEEVES: Provide airtight sleeves around all vents passing through ceiling cavity or plenum spaces to prevent flue gases from escaping into cavity space.

G. ACCESSORIES: Provide support brackets and collars, rain entrainment section with 1” drain, rain collars and other accessories for a complete system installation. Equipment that recommends installation of a barometric damper, provide damper installed in a “T” section near the equipment flue connection.

H. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Heat Fab, Metalbestos, Metal Fab and Pro-Tech Systems

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District HEATING BOILERS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 52 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 52 00-1

SECTION 23 52 00 HEATING BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL







1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. PRODUCT DATA: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties and accessories for each model indicated.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, and method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Refer to Section 23 00 00 for additional shop drawing requirements

C. WIRING DIAGRAMS: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and Field-Installed wiring.

D. MAINTENANCE DATA: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include parts list, maintenance guide, and wiring diagrams for each boiler.


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

01 The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

02 Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

B. ASME Compliance: Boilers shall bear ASME "H" stamp and be National-Board listed.

C. FM Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of FM.

D. IRI Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of IRI.

E. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation.

F. CSD-1

G. SCAQMD Rule 1146.2 for low NOx equipment.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. GENERAL WARRANTY: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 52 00-2

the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. Installing contractor shall provide one year of warranty parts and labor. Manufacturer shall provide five year parts and labor warranty from the date of substantial completion.

B. SPECIAL WARRANTY: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor for the heat exchanger.

C. WARRANTY PERIOD: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion on the heat exchanger. Warranty shall be non-prorated and not limited to thermal shock. Provide additional 21-year thermal shock warranty on heat exchanger.


2.1 MODULATING COPPER FINNED TUBE BOILERS

A. DESIGN: Boilers shall be CSA design certified as a non-condensing boiler. Boilers shall be designed for a minimum of 5:1 continuous turn down with constant CO2 over the turndown range. The boiler shall operate with natural gas or propane and have a CSA certified input rating as noted on the drawings, and a thermal efficiency rating of 88% at rated input. The boiler shall be symmetrically air-fuel coupled such that changes in combustion air flow or flue flows affect the BTUH input without affecting combustion quality. The boiler will automatically adjust input for altitude and temperature induced changes in air density. The boiler will use a proven pilot interrupted spark ignition system. The boiler shall use a UL approved flame safeguard ignition control system using UV detection flame sensing. Hot surface ignition will not be accepted. The design shall provide for silent burner ignition and operation. The burner shall be premix radial type and fire in a 360-degree vertical pattern. Boiler shall be able to vent a horizontal distance of 60 equivalent feet.

B. SERVICE ACCESS: The boilers shall be provided with stainless steel jacket panels, minimum 16 gauge, with push button fasteners for easily accessing all serviceable components. Sheet metal screws may not be used in the securing of jacket panels to the boiler. The boilers shall not be manufactured with large enclosures, which are difficult to remove and reinstall. All accesses must seal completely as not to disrupt the sealed combustion process. All components must be accessible and able to adjust with the removal of a single cover or cabinet component.

C. INDICATING LIGHTS: Each boiler shall include a diagnostic control panel with a full text display indicating the condition of all interlocks and the BTUH input percentage. Access to the controls shall be through a swing access door leaving diagnostic panel intact and not disrupted.

D. MANUFACTURERS: RBI (a Mestek Company) is the basis of the design. Listed acceptable manufacturers shall be subject to compliance with requirements. Provide boilers by one of the following:

01 RBI Futura III

02 Patterson Kelly Thermific

03 Camus

04 Or Approved Equal

E. COMPONENTS

01 COMBUSTION CHAMBER: The combustion chamber shall be constructed of


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 52 00-3

minimum 16-gauge stainless steel only. An access door shall be provided for ease of service and inspection of the heat exchanger.

02 HEAT EXCHANGER: The heat exchanger shall be inspected and bear the ASME Section IV seal of approval. The heat exchanger shall be a four-pass heat exchanger with a maximum working pressure of 160 psi. The heat exchanger’s vertical design shall provide equal amounts of heat transfer throughout the entire heating surface. Heat exchanger shall have cupro-nickel tubes with an integral finned tube of 7/8” ID, .064” minimum wall thickness, 7 fins per inch, with a fin height of 3/8”. Each end of the water tubes shall be strength rolled into the header. The heat exchanger shall be gasket-less. Each individual tube can be re-rolled without the disturbance of the surrounding tubes. A pressure relief valve of 75 psi shall be equipped with the boiler and be factory mounted. The headers shall be of bronze construction only; cast iron is not acceptable.

03 JACKETS: Stainless Steel.

04 GAS BURNER: Metal fiber mat premix burner shall fire to provide equal distribution of heat throughout the entire heat exchanger. Burner composition shall be Fecralloy. The burner shall be easily removed for maintenance without the disruption of any other major component of the boiler. Ignition electrodes shall be removed for inspection and proper alignment without removing the burner. A window view port shall be provided for visual inspection of the boiler flame during firing.

05 IGNITION COMPONENTS: The ignition hardware shall consist of Alumina ceramic insulated ignition electrodes and UV sensing tube permanently arranged to ensure proper ignition electrode and UV alignment. Hot surface ignition systems will not be accepted.

06 RATED CAPACITY: The boiler shall be capable of operating at rated capacity with pressures as low as 2” W.C. at the inlet to the burner pressure regulator.

07 EFFICIENCY: The burner shall be capable of 88.3% efficiency without exceeding a NOx reading above 10 ppm.

08 ACCESSORIES: The burner and gas train shall be provided with the following trim and features:

a. Burner Firing: Full modulation with 4:1 turndown @ Continuous CO2

b. Burner Ignition: Intermittent spark

c. Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishing flame,prevent opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow onignition failure, and allow gas valve to open.

d. Flue-Gas Collector: Enclosed combustion chamber with integral combustion-air blower and single venting connection.

e. Gas Train: Lubricated manual gas valves (2), main gas valve (motorized),‘B’ valve, pilot gas pressure regulator, and automatic pilot gas valve. Allcomponents to be factory mounted.

f. Safety Devices: Air-flow switch and blocked flue detection switch. Allsafeties to be factory mounted.

F. BOILER TRIM

01 SAFETY-RELIEF VALVE: ASME rated, factory set to protect boiler and piping as per schedule/drawings.

02 GAUGE: Combination water pressure and temperature shipped factory installed.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 52 00-4

LCD inlet/outlet temperature gauges to be an integral part of the front boiler control panel to allow for consistent easy monitoring of temperatures factory mounted and wired.

03 FLOW SWITCH: Prevent burner operation when water falls below a safe level. Flow switch shall be factory mounted and wired. Provision for installation of a low water cut off shall be provided.

04 OPERATING CONTROLS: Boiler shall be provided with a Honeywell RM7895A series digital flame safe guard with digital display. The flame safe guard shall be capable of both pre and post purge cycles.

05 OPERATING TEMPERATURE CONTROL: Shall be a digital controller adjustable from 120 to 212 degrees F. Control shall be factory mounted and sense the inlet and outlet temperature of the boiler through resistance sensors.

06 HIGH LIMIT: Temperature control with automatic-reset limits boiler water temperature in series with the operating control. High Limit shall be factory mounted and sense the outlet temperature of the boiler through a dry well.

07 CIRCULATING PUMP: Provide Wilo High Efficiency ECM pump with variable speed drive controlled by 0-10V signal module. Pump shall modulate to maintain constant temperature rise across full firing rate of the boiler. Pump provided with 4-year manufacturer’s warranty.

08 MIXING VALVE: Provide AMOT Thermostatic Mixing Valve to limit return water temperature for non-condensing operation.

09 PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING STANDARD TRIM:

a. Full Digital Text Display for all Boiler Series of Operation and Failures

b. Variable Frequency Drive and Combustion Air Fan

c. Temperature/Pressure Gauge

d. Low Air Pressure Switch

e. Manual Reset High Limit

f. Air inlet filter

10 PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING JOB SPECIFIC TRIM AND FEATURES:

a. Diagnostic Keyboard Display for RM7800 series control

b. FM or IRI controls and Gas Train

G. MOTORS

01 BOILER BLOWER MOTOR: Open drip-proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation. Blower motor shall be externally mounted for ease of service. There shall be no requirement to remove covers or gas train components to remove the blower motor. Blower Motor shall not exceed 3/4 HP and not require more than 12 amps at 120 volts.

H. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

01 Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV. Boilers shall be test fired in the factory with a report attached permanently to the exterior cabinet of the boiler for field reference.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District WATER CHILLERS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 64 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 64 00-1

SECTION 23 64 00 WATER CHILLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL







1.2 TRAINING

A. Chiller manufacturer shall provide two days of training for two Owner representatives at the Owner’s facility.

B. This training will be hands-on and classroom type training which will pertain to the purchased equipment. The training shall be a combination of classroom and hands-on training that will give the trainees the ability to completely tear down and overhaul the purchased equipment.


2.1 AIR COOLED ROTARY CHILLER

A. GENERAL: Unit shall be an ARI certified packaged air cooled chiller with two or more screw compressors (scroll for smaller sizes) suitable for outdoor installation. Unit shall have two completely independent refrigeration circuits utilizing R-134a refrigerant. Provide accessories for a complete system including starters, disconnecting circuit breakers, control voltage transformer, controls system and electronic expansion valve. All cold surfaces shall be insulated to prevent condensation. Unit shall be fully charged with refrigerant and oil. Provide security wire guards around the compressor area.

B. COMPRESSOR: Screw type with refrigerant cooled motor. Provide a forced feed lubrication system with oil sump, oil charging valve, hermetically sealed motor driven pump, oil filter, thermostatically controlled heater and crankcase heater. Compressor system shall allow continuously variable capacity from 100% down to 15%, with automatic stopping and restart when load is below 15%. Motor shall have a power factor of 0.9 or greater and have internal electronic overheating protection. Compressor shall have sound reduction enclosures and sound deadening wraps on discharge piping.

C. EVAPORATOR: Evaporator shall consist of a shell with replaceable internal finned tubes, constructed, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels. Shell shall be fully insulated to prevent condensation. Provide factory installed heat tape with thermostat to protect the evaporator from freezing at ambient temperatures


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 64 00-2

down to -20°F.

D. CONDENSER COIL: Condenser coils shall be copper tubing with .0055” thick aluminum fins. Coil shall be coated to resist corrosion.

E. CONDENSER FANS: Fans shall be ultra-quiet propeller design with direct drive motors. Provide fan guards.

F. CONTROL SYSTEM: All controls shall be housed in weather-tight enclosure with full opening access door and external lockable operator handle. All controls, including sensors, shall be factory mounted and tested prior to shipment. Control system shall include the following:

01 Unit start-stop switch and operating signal light with provision for automatic start-stop.

02 Internal controls to maintain leaving water temperature.

03 Motor current controller with maximum load selector switch for 40% to 100% full load current to permit manual control of power demand.

04 Digital readout panel indicating condenser, evaporator, lubricating oil and purge pressures, voltage, amps.

05 Protective controls with low evaporator temperature, high condenser pressure, high motor temperature, loss of refrigerant charge and low oil pressure, factory wired to independently stop compressor motor. Each fault type to have associated indicator and manual reset.

06 Anti-recycle timer to limit starting to once every 15 minute or as recommended by manufacturers. Mount in either control panel or starter.

07 System shall be microprocessor based and designed to accept start-stop, demand limiting and temperature reset signals from a remote controller or energy management system using dry contact closures and 4-20 ma signals.

08 Microprocessor control shall de-energize unit if there is a momentary interruption of power, or loss of power that would damage the machine. Unit shall automatically restart when power is available and anti-cycle timer has counted down.

09 Provide a powered 120 volt, ground fault, duplex convenience outlet

10 Provide an interface unit to allow the building energy management system to monitor and control the chiller operation.

G. STARTER: Unit mounted, X-L type, with overload protection in all three legs, single phasing and low voltage protection.

H. ISOLATORS: Provide factory supplied minimum 3” load point specific, color coded, encased neoprene isolators matched to the specific chiller supplied. Provide a minimum of four isolators per side evenly distributed around the perimeter of the unit.

I. SOUND RATINGS: Emitted sound pressure shall note exceed 67 dBA as measured from the ends of the unit and 70 dBA at 30 feet from the sides of the unit.

J. INSPECTION AND TEST: Upon completion of installation, an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the chilling unit shall inspect the installation and certify that the unit ready for operation. He shall supervise the starting and observe the operation and performance of the equipment.

K. WARRANTY: Provide a one year warranty (parts and labor) for total unit. Provide a four year extended warranty (second through fifth year) on the motor-compressor-drive assembly for parts and labor, including refrigerant. All replacement parts shall be newly manufactured. For each chiller provide factory certificates listing chiller model, serial


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 64 00-3

number and warranty information in the close out documents.

L. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Carrier, McQuay, Trane and York

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 72 23 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 72 23-1

SECTION 23 72 23 AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL







1.2 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION

A. Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV) shall be a packaged unit as manufactured by RenewAire and shall transfer both sensible and latent energy using static plate core technology.


A. The energy recovery cores used in these products shall be third party Certified by AHRI under its Standard 1060 for Energy Recovery Ventilators. AHRI published certifications shall confirm manufacturer’s published performance for airflow, static pressure, temperature and total effectiveness, purge air (OACF) and exhaust air leakage (EATR). Products that are not currently AHRI Certified will not be accepted. OACF shall be no more than 1.02 and EATR shall be at 0% against balanced airflow.

B. Manufacturer shall be able to provide evidence of independent testing of the core by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), verifying a maximum flame spread index (FSI) of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index (SDI) of 50 thereby meeting NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B requirements for materials in a compartment handling air intended for circulation through a duct system. The method of test shall be UL Standard 723.

C. Unit shall be ETL-Listed to comply with UL1812 Standard for Ducted Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers, and with CSA Standard C22.2 No. 113-12 Fans and Ventilators. Units intended for “Outdoor Use” shall be listed using the specific ETL requirements for rain penetration, corrosion protection and seal durability and shall be so labeled.

D. The ERV core shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a period of ten years from the date of purchase. The balance-of-unit shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a period of two years from the date of purchase.

PART 2 – PERFORMANCE


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 72 23-2

2.1 ENERGY TRANSFER

A. The ERV shall be capable of transferring both sensible and latent energy between airstreams. Latent energy transfer shall be accomplished by direct water vapor transfer from one air stream to the other, without exposing transfer media in succeeding cycles directly to the exhaust air and then to the fresh air.

2.2 PASSIVE FROST CONTROL

A. The ERV core shall perform without condensing or frosting under normal operating conditions (defined as outside temperatures above -10°F and inside relative humidity below 40%). Occasional more extreme conditions shall not affect the usual function, performance or durability of the core. No condensate drains will be allowed.

2.3 CONTINUOUS VENTILATION

A. Unit shall have the capacity to operate continuously without the need for bypass, recirculation, pre-heaters, or defrost cycles under normal operating conditions.

2.4 POSITIVE AIRSTREAM SEPARATION

A. Water vapor transfer shall be through molecular transport by hydroscopic resin and shall not be accomplished by “porous plate” mechanisms. Exhaust and fresh airstreams shall travel at all times in separate passages, and airstreams shall not mix. No metal separators or metal core material shall be acceptable.

2.5 LAMINAR AIR FLOW

A. Airflow through the ERV core shall be laminar over the products entire operating airflow range, avoiding deposition of particulates on the interior of the energy exchange plate material.

PART 3 - PRODUCT

3.1 CONSTRUCTION

A. The energy recovery component shall be of fixed-plate cross-flow construction, with no moving parts.

B. No condensate drain pans or drains shall be allowed and unit shall be capable of operating in both winter and summer conditions without generating condensate.

C. The unit case shall be constructed of G90 galvanized, 20-gauge steel, with lapped corners and zinc-plated screw fasteners. The unit roof shall be one piece or have watertight standing seam joints and shall overlap wall panels and doors in order to positively shed water.

D. The unit interior floor shall be constructed of G90 galvanized, 20 gauge steel.

E. Access doors shall provide easy access to blowers, ERV cores, and filters. Doors shall have an airtight compression seal using closed cell foam gaskets rated for outdoor exposure. Pressure taps, with captive plugs, shall be provided allowing cross-core pressure measurement allowing for accurate airflow measurement.

F. Weatherhoods shall be screened to exclude birds and animals. Inlet weatherhoods shall be sized to maintain inlet velocities below 500 fpm, and equipped with rain excluder baffles.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 72 23-3

G. Case walls and doors shall be insulated with 1 inch, 4 pound density, foil/scrim faced, high-density fiberglass board insulation, providing a cleanable surface and eliminating the possibility of exposing the fresh air to glass fibers, and with minimum R-value of 4.3 (hr·ft2·°F/BTU).

H. The ERV cores shall be protected by a MERV-8 rated, 2" nominal, pleated, disposable filter in both airstreams. 4" MERV-8 or 2" or 4" MERV-13 filters offered as accessories.

I. Unit shall have single-point power connection and a single-point 24 VAC contactor control connection.

J. Blower motors shall be Premium Efficiency, EISA compliant for energy efficiency. The blower motors shall be totally enclosed (TEFC) and shall be supplied with factory installed motor starters or FVD’s, and shall be available factory-wired for either 208-230V or 460V three-phase power supply.

K. Blowers shall be quiet running, forward curve type and be belt driven. Blower bearing L10 lifetime rating shall exceed 250,000 hours. Belt drive motors shall be provided with adjustable pulleys and motor mounts allowing for blower speed adjustment, proper motor shaft orientation and proper belt tensioning.

L. Blower-motor assemblies shall be mounted on a free-standing plate system with four-point neoprene vibration isolation. Rated maximum deflection not less than 0.25 inch.

M. The unit electrical box shall include a factory installed, non-fused disconnect switch and a 24 VAC, Class II transformer/relay package.

3.2 OPTIONS

A. Provide unit and duct connection orientation per project schedule.

B. Provide double wall construction with 20 -gauge galvanized steel liner.

C. Provide motor horsepower as specified in project schedule. Refer to motor specification.

D. Provide MERV-13 filters for final installation after construction phase.

E. Provide 14 inch high, roof curb

F. Provide factory installed VFD’s as specified in project schedule. Refer to VFD specification.

G. Provide factory installed spring vibration isolators under the motor/blower assemblies. Rated maximum deflection not less than 1.0 inch.

PART 4 - INSTALLATION

4.1 UNIT LOCATION AND PLACEMENT

A. Locate, orient, and connect ductwork per AMCA, ASHRAE, and SMACNA guidelines. Provide service clearances as indicated on the plans. Locate units distant from sound critical occupancies.

B. Install a structurally sound, weathertight, level and properly insulated roof curb with nailers, curb gasket and tie-downs to meet local wind load requirements.

C. Ensure roof decking penetrations inside curb are properly positioned and sized for ducts. Seal all penetrations and gaps between ducts and decking with appropriate fire, weather and acoustic sealant system.

D. Install fiberglass batt insulation over the decking inside the curb. Insulation thickness to be


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 72 23-4

determined by local thermal requirements.

E. Use proper rigging, including spreader bars, for safe lifting and placement.


A. Provide spring type vibration rails or curb to match the specific unit corner weights.

B. Provide flexible duct connections at unit duct flanges.

C. Select the “no blower vibration isolator option” if unit is to be spring –mounted.

4.3 DUCT DESIGN

A. All ductwork shall be designed, constructed, supported and sealed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and pressure classifications.

B. Ductwork shall be installed to the curb duct adapters before unit is set in place.

C. Both the return and the supply ducts shall be thermally insulated at levels appropriate to the local climate, as prescribed in ASHRAE 90.1, from the unit through the curb and continuous until at least the first elbow or tee. A continuous vapor barrier shall also be provided on warm surface of the insulation.

4.4 SOUND CONTROL

A. To control sound associated with the two blower outlets:

01 Provide straight, gradual transition ductwork for a minimum of 2-1/2 duct diameters downstream from the blower outlet for air velocities of less than 2,500 feet per minute.

02 Provide continuous acoustic insulation treatment of the duct until after the first elbow or tee.

03 Provide engineered sound attenuation ductwork to meet noise criteria (NC) requirements.

4.5 TEST AND BALANCING

A. Test and Balancing may not begin until 100% of the installation is complete and fully functional.

B. Follow National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) air test and balance procedures specific to energy recovery devices. Provide balancing reports to owner's representatives.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 73 13 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 73 13-1

SECTION 23 73 13 INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. CABINETS: Cabinet shall be of double wall construction with encapsulated 2” thick insulation in both fan and coil sections to prevent unit sweating. The interior liner shall be 20 gauge galvanized with no exposed insulation. Sections and panels shall be bolted together with insulating gasket to prevent sweating at the joints. Exterior wall panels shall be removable and constructed of 16 gage or heavier sheet steel, or have internal structural members to prevent damage to unit due to maintenance personnel standing on unit. Exterior of the unit shall be primed with rust inhibiting primer and painted with two heavy coats of enamel paint. Exterior panels of unit may be galvanized finish if unit is located in mechanical room or above ceiling. A rigid, welded framework shall support the panels, coils and fan. The condensate rain pans shall be insulated, double wall type of 16 gage Type 304 stainless steel, sloped for positive drainage and extend a minimum of 12” beyond the coil. Provide drain pan for all coils, including heating coils. Provide minimum 12 gauge rails or channels on bottom of unit to insure bottom plates do not contact floor or concrete pad. Coordinate drain location with mechanical room layout. Units with down discharge or return from below shall have a 3” high “water dam” around duct openings to prevent water from leaking through openings. All units shall be pre-assembled and balanced at the factory, and then shipped to the site in that condition.

B. ARRANGEMENT AND COMPONENTS: Units shall be horizontal or vertical as shown on the Drawings. Provide face and bypass dampers, coil sequence or other item that are shown on the drawings or described in the temperature controls sequence. Unless noted otherwise, heating coils shall be in the reheat position. Provide resistance plate in hot deck of multizone units without heating coil. Where face and bypass dampers are specified, the bypass shall be internal to the unit with short cooling coil. Where outside air is shown connecting directly to the unit, provide manual return air damper to set return air/outside air ratio.

C. FANS: Single wheel, airfoil DWDI Class II fan operating below first critical speed, and selected for high operating efficiency and low noise generation. Fans for VAV air handling units shall be selected so that their peak efficiency is as close as possible to the 100% output point of the system without generating aerodynamic stall at 50% output. Fan shall have a solid steel fan shaft mounted on grease lubricated ball bearings having a 200,000

Aldine Independent School District INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 73 13 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 73 13-2

hour average life. The fan/drive/motor assembly shall be internally mounted and factory isolated from the enclosing cabinet with 2” minimum deflection spring isolators and flexible connection to unit housing. Select spring isolators under conditions present when operating at 50% of full output. Provide extended grease lines to exterior of unit or grouped inside at access panel at the drive side of the fan assembly.

D. DRIVE: Provide adjustable motor mount, V-belt drive with Browning or Gates adjustable motor sheave rated at 175% BHP. Drive shall have a minimum of two individual belts. Add static pressure for filter resistance and unit coil, damper, casing and conversion losses to scheduled external static pressure to select motor size. Motor shall not overload if system static pressure drops 1/4" at selected RPM. See Motors Section for motor requirements. Provide alternate size sheaves if required to meet air flow requirements as determined by the Test and Balance Contractor or Engineer.

E. ACCESS DOORS: Provide hinged, double wall, insulated and gasketed access doors with Ventlock 260 or equal handles on both inside and outside of casing. Provide 18” wide access door in side of unit at drain pan connection to observe and clean drain pan. Provide access doors on both sides of the unit at the upstream side of the coils, filters and motor/fan assembly.

F. WATER COILS: Coils shall be 5/8”, .020” thick wall copper tube, .008” thick aluminum fin with belled collars, tested at 300 PSI with ARI certified ratings. Coils in outside air pre-treatment section shall have a flexible polymer e-coating (ElectroFin). Coil connections shall be counterflow with supply at the very bottom and outlet at the very top of the coil. Coils shall be drainable, non-trapping circuits. Coil casings shall be stainless steel. Headers shall have drain and vent connections extended to the outside of the unit casing. Mount coils on tracks for easy removal without requiring disassembly of the air handling unit. Install rubber grommets at all pipe penetrations of the cabinet.

G. REFRIGERANT COILS: Coils shall be seamless copper tubing with mechanically bonded aluminum plate fins, designed to conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15. Coils for two stage systems shall have non-interleaved coil (top and bottom split).

H. ZONE AND BYPASS DAMPERS: Dampers shall be gasketed with a maximum leakage of 7 CFM per square foot with a 1" differential pressure.

I. FILTERS: Provide filter rack for 2" thick filters, maximum velocity 350 FPM. See specification section for Air Filters.

J. NAMEPLATE: Provide a factory installed aluminum nameplate, permanently mounted with the following information: Unit ID as indicated on the contract drawings, Model Number, Serial Number, Sales Order Number and Date of Manufacture.

K. SUBMITTAL: Provide a 1/4" scale drawing of each AHU room showing proposed unit placement with dashed-in access space required. Clearly indicate drive location, coil piping connections and condensate drain connection. Provide side elevation drawing indicating fan placement, rotation and discharge air opening, showing proper coordination of arrangement with the specified ductwork. Submittal shall include fan curve with efficiency and horsepower curves, and noise generated by octave. For VAV units, submit fan curves for operation at 50% and 100% of full output, while maintaining constant static pressure. All submittals shall be prepared by the Salesman that calls on the Engineer from the successful manufacturer.

L. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Carrier, Haakon, McQuay, Temtrol, Trane and York

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District OUTDOOR PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 74 13 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 74 13-1

SECTION 23 74 13 OUTDOOR PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. CABINETS: The unit shall be designed to be curb mounted outside on the roof. Cabinet shall be of double wall construction with encapsulated 2” thick insulation in both fan and coil sections to prevent unit sweating. The interior liner shall be 20 gauge galvanized with no exposed insulation. Sections and panels shall be bolted together with insulating gasket to prevent sweating at the joints. Exterior wall panels shall be removable and constructed of 16 gage or heavier sheet steel, or have internal structural. Exterior of the unit shall be primed with rust inhibiting primer and painted with two heavy coats of enamel paint. A rigid, welded framework shall support the coils and fan. The condensate drain pans shall be insulated, double wall type constructed of 16 gage Type 304 stainless steel, sloped for positive drainage, and extend a minimum of 12” beyond the coil. Provide a drain pan for all coils, including heating coils. Units shall be down discharge and return from below with a 3” high “water dam” around duct openings to prevent water from leaking through openings. All units shall be pre-assembled and balanced at the factory, and then shipped to the site in that condition.

B. ARRANGEMENT AND COMPONENTS: Provide face and bypass dampers, coil sequence or other item that are shown on the drawings or described in the temperature controls sequence. Unless noted otherwise, heating coils shall be in the reheat position. Where face and bypass dampers are specified, the bypass shall be internal to the unit with short cooling coil. Provide motorized outside air/return air damper.

C. FANS: Single wheel, airfoil DWDI Class II fan operating below first critical speed, and selected for high operating efficiency and low noise generation. Fans for VAV air handling units shall be selected so that their peak efficiency is as close as possible to the 100% output point of the system without generating aerodynamic stall at 50% output. Fan shall have a solid steel fan shaft mounted on grease lubricated ball bearings having a 200,000 hour average life. The fan/drive/motor assembly shall be internally mounted and factory isolated from the enclosing cabinet with 2” minimum deflection spring isolators and flexible connection to unit housing. Select spring isolators under conditions present when operating at 50% of full output. Provide extended grease lines to exterior of unit or grouped

Aldine Independent School District OUTDOOR PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 74 13 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 74 13-2

inside at access panel at the drive side of the fan assembly.

D. DRIVE: Provide adjustable motor mount, V-belt drive with Browning or Gates adjustable motor sheave rated at 175% BHP. Drive shall have a minimum of two individual belts. Add static pressure for filter resistance and unit coil, damper, casing and conversion losses to scheduled external static pressure to select motor size. Motor shall not overload if system

static pressure drops 1/4" at selected RPM. See Motors Section for motor requirements. Provide alternate size sheaves if required to meet air flow requirements as determined by the Test and Balance Contractor or Engineer.

E. ACCESS DOORS: Provide hinged, double wall, insulated and gasketed access doors with Ventlock 260 or equal handles, on both inside and outside of casing. Provide 18” wide access door in side of unit at drain pan connection to observe and clean drain pan. Provide access doors on both sides of the unit at the upstream side of the coils and motor/fan assembly.

F. WATER COILS: Coils shall be 5/8”, .020” thick wall copper tube, .008” thick aluminum fin with belled collars, tested at 300 PSI with ARI certified ratings. Coils in outside air pre-treatment section shall have a flexible polymer e-coating (ElectroFin). Coil connections shall be counterflow with supply at the very bottom and outlet at the very top of the coil. Coils shall be drainable with non-trapping circuits. Coil casings shall be stainless steel. Headers shall have drain and vent connections extended to the outside of the unit casing. Mount coils on tracks for easy removal without requiring disassembly of the air handling unit. Install rubber grommets at all pipe penetrations of the cabinet.

G. REFRIGERANT COILS: Coils shall be seamless copper tubing with mechanically bonded aluminum plate fins, designed to conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15. Coils for two stage systems shall have non-interleaved coil (top and bottom split).

H. ZONE AND BYPASS DAMPERS: Dampers shall be gasketed with a maximum leakage of 7 CFM per square foot with a 1" differential pressure.

I. FILTERS: Provide filter rack for 2" thick filters, maximum velocity 350 FPM. See specification section for Air Filters.

J. NAMEPLATE: Provide a factory installed aluminum nameplate, permanently mounted with the following information: Unit ID as indicated on the contract drawings, Model Number, Serial Number, Sales Order Number and Date of Manufacture.

K. SUBMITTAL: Clearly indicate drive location, coil piping connections and condensate drain connection. Provide side elevation drawing indicating fan placement, rotation and discharge air opening, showing proper coordination of arrangement with the specified ductwork. Submittal shall include fan curve with efficiency and horsepower curves, and noise generated by octave. For VAV units, submit fan curves for operation at 50% and 100% of full output, while maintaining constant static pressure. All submittals shall be prepared by the Salesman that calls on the Engineer from the successful manufacturer.

L. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Carrier, Haakon, McQuay, Temtrol, Trane and York

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District DECENTRALIZED UNITARY EQUIPMENT Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 81 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 81 00-1

SECTION 23 81 00 DECENTRALIZED UNITARY HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL







1.2 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Each piece of equipment shall have a stainless steel nameplate with engraved or stamped 1/32" deep markings identifying manufacturer, model number, serial number, voltage, phase, amperage, refrigerant type, etc. as applicable. Attach to equipment with a minimum of two stainless steel fasteners.


2.1 DUCT FREE SPLIT SYSTEM

A. GENERAL: System shall consist of outdoor condensing unit connected to one or more duct free, wall or ceiling mounted fan coil units. System shall be designed to operate as a unit complete with microprocessor control system.

B. AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT

01 HOUSING: Cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with baked-enamel finish. Provide access panels for ease of service.

02 COMPRESSOR: Fully hermetic reciprocating or scroll type operating with R-410A or Puron refrigerant. Unit shall have internal protection for over temperature and over current. Provide crankcase heater. Refrigeration system shall have gage ports, service valves, accumulator, filter dryer and pressure relief. Heat pump units shall have reversing valve and heating mode metering device.

03 CONDENSER FAN: Direct drive propeller type with internally protected, totally enclosed motor.

04 CONTROLS AND SAFETIES: Unit shall have time delay restart, automatic restart on power failure, safety lockout, high and low pressure safeties.

C. EVAPORATOR UNIT

01 GENERAL: Indoor, ceiling or wall mounted, direct expansion fan coil unit complete with electric controls, microprocessor control system and integral temperature sensing.

Aldine Independent School District DECENTRALIZED UNITARY EQUIPMENT Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 23 81 00 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 23 81 00-2

02 WALL UNIT FAN UNIT: Direct drive tangential blower with automatic motor-driven vertical air sweep. Fan motor shall be three speed.

03 CEILING UNIT FAN UNIT: EMC motor driven fan with radial discharge louvers and center return. Provide automated air flow options to control air flow direction and fan speed.

04 COIL: Copper tube aluminum fin with refrigerant metering device. Provide condensate drain pan and drip pan under headers. Provide float switch and condensate pump. Insulated refrigerant and condensate drain piping shall connect to the back of the unit so piping is concealed.

05 CONTROLS: Shall be microprocessor-based and control space temperature, determine optimum fan speed and run self-diagnostics. Provide remote wireless controller for programming and temperature adjustment. Unit shall also be controllable directly from the building energy management system with varying schedule and temperature set points.

06 FILTERS: Provide factory supplied, permanent cleanable type filters with rack.

D. REFRIGERANT LINES: Provide factory supplied refrigerant lines connected to the back of the evaporator unit so lines are concealed.

E. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Carrier, LG, Mitsubishi, Sanyo and Trane.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTSJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 00 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 00 00-1

SECTION 26 00 00 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. The General Electrical Requirements as specified in Sections 26, apply to the work specified in this Section.

C. Equipment shall meet applicable requirements include in the NEC, UL, NEMA and ANSI Standards and be so labeled.


A. Provide all supervision, labor, equipment and materials required for the installation of complete and operating electrical systems in the building. Pay all fees and obtain all permits related to construction activities and utility service installation.

1.3 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. GENERAL: Drawings and Specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work described in either of them, will be work required under this contract. Should any work required by the drawings and specifications be in violation of any Federal, State, County or City laws, ordinance or regulation, those laws and regulations shall prevail, and shall be complied with by the Contractor as a part of this work with no extra compensation.

B. EQUIPMENT AND DEVICE LOCATION: The drawings indicate approximate locations of the various items of electrical systems. These items are shown approximately to scale and attempt to show how these items should be integrated with building construction. Locate all the various items by on-the-job measurements, conformance with Contract Documents and cooperation with other trades. Refer to Architectural Drawings that may locate devices relative to casework or devices provided by other contractors. The drawings are schematic in nature and are not intended to show exact locations of conduit, but rather to indicate distribution, circuitry and control.

C. CEILING DEVICES: All light fixtures, speakers and other ceiling devices shall be located to conform to the ceiling grid system as shown on the Architect’s reflected ceiling plan. Examine all drawings to become familiar with this requirement. In no case should fixture locations be determined by scaling drawings. Lighting fixtures in mechanical spaces are shown in their approximate location only. Do not install light fixtures until mechanical piping and ductwork is installed. At that time install lights in a location to provide best lighting.

D. MINOR RELOCATION: In certain instances, the Architect may require minor relocation of outlets, switches, etc. of up to five (5) feet. If Contractor is informed of necessary relocation before work is begun on this portion of the job, no extra compensation will be allowed.

1.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL MATERIALS

A. U. L. LABEL: All materials must be new and of good quality and shall bear the stamp of approval of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (U. L.). Equipment and materials shall be


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 00 00-2

used and installed consistent with the U. L. testing and U. L. requirements.

B. MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES: Provide all parts and accessories necessary for a complete installation for the systems and equipment specified.

C. HAZARDOUS MATERIAL: All materials shall be certified to not contain any asbestos, PCB's or other material banned by the Environmental Protection Agency.


A. COORDINATION: The Contractor shall cooperate with other trades on the job and make installations in the proper sequence during the construction of the buildings, and he shall notify the Architect well in advance of construction of all interference of his work with that of other trades and of building construction. This notification shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibilities to coordinate his work with the total project. Where various items of equipment and materials are specified and scheduled, the purpose is to define the general type and quality level, not to set forth the exact trim required to fit the various types of ceiling, wall or floor finishes. Provide materials which will fit properly the types of finishes actually installed.


C. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION: Do not deliver equipment to jobsite until it is actually needed for installation. Protect equipment from damage due to construction activities and the weather. Equipment allowed to stand in weather will be rejected and Contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment at no cost to Owner.

1.6 ALTERNATES

A. Determine the scope of each specified alternate proposal by carefully reading all Divisions of the Documents. The Bid Form contains information explaining the extent of the construction to be performed under a specific alternate. Alternate proposals, which are not predominantly electrical in scope, are described in other Divisions of these Documents.

1.7 CODES

A. All materials and their installation shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, local building codes and the National Safety Code. Nothing in the plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to the most stringent of the codes. Particular attention shall be paid to the U. L. codes for fireproofing of conduit, electrical devices and light fixtures that are part of or pass through fire rated ceilings, walls and floors.


A. The Contractor shall be familiar with the Drawings and Specifications and shall have examined the premises and understand the conditions under which he will be obligated to operate in performing the contract. No allowance shall be made consequently for any error through negligence in this regard.

1.9 ELECTRICAL SERVICE

A. GENERAL: Obtain (during the bidding period) from the Power Company all required information to provide a complete electrical service installation as shown on the


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 00 00-3

Drawings.

B. SERVICE: The service characteristics are 480Y/277V, 3 phase, 4 wire. The Power Company is CenterPoint Energy.

C. SERVICE ENTRANCE: Provide service rack, pad for pad mounted transformer, cable tap box, protective bollards or other special construction as required by the Power Company. Refer to Power Company standards.

D. FEES: Refer to Architectural Sections for requirements.

1.10 TEMPORARY SERVICE

A. Provide a temporary electrical service for construction power. Size and voltage as required for construction activities as specified by the General Contractor. Construction site distribution shall be overhead and comply with NEC and OSHA Standards. Pay all fees and installation costs charged by the Power Company for temporary service for construction power.

1.11 GUARANTEE

A. All materials, apparatus and equipment furnished and installed under this Section of these Specifications shall be new and free from any defects when accepted by the Owner and shall be guaranteed in writing for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner.

1.12 SUBMITTALS


B. The purpose of these submittals is to attempt to aid the contractor in such a manner that improper or unacceptable materials are not delivered to or installed on the job. Shop drawings shall be approved before installation of the material under consideration. Approval of these submittals shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. All materials and equipment shall be subject to final acceptance by the Engineer at completion of construction.

C. Equipment and material submittals must show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with contract documents as follows:

01 Proper sizes and capacities.

02 That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service.

D. Catalog data must be clearly marked to indicate the item or model number being submitted and must include all specified accessories. All information on a catalog sheet not pertaining to the item being submitted must be marked out.

E. All submittals shall include a table of contents listing all items in that specific submittal. All submittals on the project need not be submitted in PDF. The front sheet of each copy of the submittal shall have the following typed information:


02 General Contractor's name, address, project manager's name and telephone number.

03 Submitting Sub-contractor's name, address, project manager's name and


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 00 00-4

telephone number.

04 Supplier's company name, address, salesman's name and telephone number.

F. For any item to be installed in or on a finished surface (such as tee bar acoustical ceiling, plaster wall), Contractor certifies by making the submittal that he has checked all applicable contract Documents and that the item submitted is compatible with the surface finish on which it is to be installed.

G. Submit shop drawings and/or brochures for:

Switchboards Panelboards TransformersCircuit Breakers Disconnect Switches Time ClocksLight Fixtures Theatrical Lighting System Wiring DevicesPhase Loss Monitors Low Voltage Controls Surge Protection Devices Lighting Controls PMT Service Entrance

Local Sound System

Fire Alarm System

H. If a submittal is returned to the Contractor marked “Rejected” or “Revise and Resubmit”, only one (1) additional submittal will be permitted without the Contractor incurring charges for the additional re-submittals. SEG shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for any expense in connection with any necessary submission in addition to the two (2) submissions allowed. Contractor will be billed by SEG at a rate of $125/hr for these occurrences.

1.13 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The names of manufacturer and model numbers have been used in the Contract Documents to establish types of equipment and standards of quality and are intended to be the Basis of Bid. No attempt has been made to determine if each manufacturer listed for a particular item of equipment will produce material that will comply with all requirements. If only one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment (except lighting fixtures), the specified manufacturer will be the only acceptable one. Where more than one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment, only one of these manufacturers will be considered for approval. Where only one manufacturer is mentioned with the phrase "or approved equal", Contractor may submit an alternate manufacturer as outlined in Special Conditions and this Article. If a submittal contains sufficient information to prove compliance with the Contract Documents, then that submittal will be acceptable.

01 ALTERNATE LIGHT FIXTURES: Alternate light fixtures may be submitted but a substitute fixture must be equal from the standpoint of materials, construction and performance. Request for substitution must be accompanied by complete data and descriptive sheets during the bidding period as described in these documents.

B. All other brands, including any additional names which may be listed as “Alternates” or “Approved Equal” must conform with the specifications, size, accessories, etc. of the first named brand and be subject to Paragraph D and E of this Article. Alternate equipment must be equal from the standpoint of materials, construction and performance. Request for substitution must be accompanied by complete data and descriptive sheets during the bidding period as described in Paragraph D and E of this Article.

01 Submitted on Bidder’s letterhead attached to Proposal Form with individual deductive amounts stipulated and the documentation required in Paragraph E-


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 00 00-5

03.02 All savings for Owners selection of deductive amounts by acceptance of alternate

or substituted items are to be paid to the Owner.

C. All equipment within common group or category (e.g. switchgear, lighting fixtures, fire alarm, etc.) shall be same manufacturer.

D. Proposed Substitutions/Approved Equals:

01 Submitted no less than 14 calendar days prior to bid date.02 Submit proposed substitutions with catalog data and/or manufacturer’s shop

details indicating all modifications required to conform with specified brand. Include all relevant items necessary to make a determination of equal status or submittal shall be deemed incomplete and rejected.

03 If submittal contains sufficient information to prove compliance with the Contract Documents, then that alternate submittal will be acceptable. Approved submittals for bidding purposes only will be published by addenda.

E. Substitutions with prior approval:

01 Submitted on Bidder’s letterhead attached to Proposal Form with individual additive/deductive amounts stipulated and the documentation required in Paragraph B-2.

02 Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all substitution proposals before execution of Contract.

03 Provide all design/engineering services required to make adjustments in space, systems, utilities, etc. and pay all additional costs of utilities, construction or professional services that may be incurred due to the acceptance of any substitution.

1.14 FOUNDATIONS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. GENERAL: Provide all foundations and supports.

B. CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PADS: 4" high concrete pad to be provided under Division 3, for all floor mounted equipment. Concrete pads shall be sized for the equipment to be supplied. Pad shall exceed base dimensions by approximately 4" all around. Reinforce pads with 6" x 6" woven wire mesh and #4 bar around perimeter. Tool pad to form chamfered edge. Coordinate sizes and locations with the General Contractor.

C. OUTDOOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Provide structural pad to support pad mounted transformers, outdoor switchgear and generators. Provide galvanized pipe or angle iron structure to support weatherheads, meters, and outdoor protective devices and disconnect switches. Provide bollards to protect equipment installed in traffic areas.

D. INSIDE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Securely attach panels to block walls with concrete bolts. When attaching to sheetrock or other less substantial walls, provide blocking and unistrut cross supports to securely attach panel to structural members. Where panels are required to be freestanding provide angle iron support structure bolted to floor and building structure.

E. VIBRATION ISOLATION: Install dry type transformers on four waffle pad type isolators.

1.15 NOISE

A. Eliminate any abnormal noises which are not considered by the Architect to be an inherent part of the systems as designed. Abnormal buzzing in equipment components will not be acceptable.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 00 00-6

1.16 TESTING BY CONTRACTOR

A. GENERAL: All wiring, instruments, apparatus and equipment shall be tested for continuity, ground and short circuits before the circuits are energized. For 120 Volts circuits, the neutral/s may require disconnecting. A complete record of all testing shall be submitted to Owner at completion.

B. GROUND TESTING: The resistance of the grounding system to ground shall not exceed 3 ohms for water pipe ground or 6 ohms for driven ground rods. If tests indicate a higher value, additional ground rods shall be installed to reduce the resistance to a value of 6 ohms or less. Whenever connection is required to an existing ground conductor, tests shall be made before connection to ensure that the existing ground conductor is unbroken and continuous. Testing shall be in accordance with generally accepted practice.

C. INSULATION TESTING: Test all electrical equipment bussing, underground feeders and feeders 1/0 and larger at 85% of rated insulation value. Insulation tests shall be made with a 500 volt "Megger" as manufactured by James G. Biddle Company or equal. Test one conductor at a time with other two grounded. Attempt to raise voltage to maximum in one minute. Do not exceed 2 MA. Polarization Index (amps ratio - 1 minute/10 minutes) to be at least 3 unless approved otherwise.

D. INFRARED SCANNING: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear and splice in cables/conductors No. 3 AWG or larger. Remove box and equipment covers so switchgear interiors and splices are accessible to the portable scanner.

01 Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice no more than eleven (11) months after date of Substantial Completion or one (1) month before the end of the warranty period whichever is sooner.

02 Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values and produce a thermal image of the tested location. Provide calibration record for device.

03 Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies locations/equipment checked and that describes scanning results. Include images generated by thermal scanner, notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

E. GROUND PENETRATING RADAR: Where concrete flooring or paving must be cut to install MEP systems, contractor shall take measures to prevent damaging existing underground services. Contractor shall utilize ground penetrating radar and electrical circuit tracing equipment in the area to be excavated to determine the existence of underground services. When saw cutting, limit the depth of the cut to less than the thickness of the concrete. Breakout the concrete manually with special care in areas of possible underground services.

F. ADDITIONAL TESTING: The Contractor shall make such other tests as may be or become necessary to assure satisfactory operation of each unit device or equipment.


A. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: Obtain a set of project drawings and keep these at jobsite during construction. During the course of construction, mark on these prints any changes which are made, noting particularly locations for those items which will need to be located for servicing. At completion of job, mark each sheet "As-Built Drawings", date and deliver to Architect.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 00 00-7

B. OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS: Provide the following periods of instruction to the Owner's designated personnel upon completion of the system's installation at a time mutually acceptable. Provide additional training as noted in individual equipment specifications.

01 Electrical Systems: 4 Hours

02 Network Lighting Controls 2 Hours On-Site Staff, 4 Hours Maintenance

03 Theatrical Lighting 2 Hours On-Site Staff, 2 Hours Maintenance

04 Local Sound Systems: 2 Hours On-Site Staff, 4 Hours Maintenance

05 Fire Alarm System: 4 Hours

C. CLOSEOUT MANUALS: At completion of job, furnish three copies of spare parts lists, operating instructions, product cutsheets, test results, manufacturer’s studies/settings/reports and as-builts for all equipment furnished under this Division. These lists and instructions shall be published by the manufacturer of the equipment. Bind in 3-ring binders with project name. Provide a CD with a digital copy of complete closeout manual with each binder.

1.18 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. GENERAL: Heights are measured to centerline from the finished floor. Where devices are located in block walls Architect may require height to be adjusted so junction box is in a desired relationship with the mortar joint. Device must still be mounted within the acceptable height range for ADA.

B. DEVICE:

Light switch 46"Receptacle 18"Receptacle at counter 7" above countertop or horizontally in backsplash

Coordinate with architectural drawings, do not mount in tackboards, markerboards, etc.

Data outlet 18”Telephone outlet 18"Telephone outlet at counter 7" above countertop

Coordinate with architectural drawings, do not mount in tackboards, markerboards, etc.

Wall telephone 46" (or as shown on the Arch/Tech Drawings)Wall exit light Bottom 4" above door frame or 96"Fire alarm pull station 46"Fire alarm notification device 82" or on ceilingWall TV outlet 18”Outdoor bells or speakers 10’-0” (or as shown on the Architectural Drawings)Wall Pack Lights 14’-0” (or as shown on the Architectural Drawings)

1.19 ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS

A. GENERAL: Contractor shall request inspections to review any and all electrical installations. Inspections shall include but not be limited to: system tests, grounding tests, underground installations prior to backfill, rough-in installations, wall cover inspections, above ceiling inspections, final inspection.

B. GOVERNMENTAL INSPECTIONS: Contractor shall test and demonstrate systems, allow for Engineer and Owner inspections, and correct all punch list items before arranging for inspections from the Fire Marshall or other final “Certificate of Occupancy” inspection requirements. This will require that the contractor complete systems in a


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 00 00-8

timely manner to meet construction schedules.

C. Contractor shall provide a MINIMUM of 48 hour notice prior to requested inspection time, no exceptions.

D. INSPECTION REPORTS: After each inspection, SEG will generate an inspection report and distribute promptly. The Contractor will then be given 7 working days from date of report to address all deficiencies listed on the report. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall verify that all items on each inspection report have been addressed by their subcontractors in this time period. Once verified the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall sign-off on each deficiency listed on the report and return the signed-off copy of the inspection report to SEG via e-mail. After the signed-off report is returned to SEG, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall request a re-inspection by SEG to close the report. If after 7 working days no re-inspection is requested by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR to close a report, SEG reserves the right to re-inspect whenever our schedule allows, with these re-inspections still being subject to Paragraph F below.

E. TEST REJECTIONS AND RE-INSPECTIONS: If a test is rejected or a re-inspection of an issued SEG Inspection Report is found to NOT be completely addressed, only ONE (1) additional inspection will be permitted without the Contractor incurring charges for each additional inspection required. SEG shall be reimbursed $1000 by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR for expenses in connection with EACH inspection in addition to the two (2) inspections allowed.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICALJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 05 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 05 00-1

SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL







1.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. All electrical work dealing with electrical circuits or power requirements of 110 volts or higher shall be performed by a licensed journeyman electrician supervised by an on-site master electrician.

B. All cables not installed in conduit shall be plenum rated.

C. All conductors and cable shall be properly labeled at both ends and at any intermediate splice.

D. All low voltage cables shall be installed in continuous length without splice.

E. All plenum rated cables shall be supported from and near structure with nylon straps or D-rings. Do not weave through joists for support. All exposed cabling, and cabling above inaccessible ceilings shall be installed in raceway.

F. Install conduit sleeves with protective grommets for all wall penetrations for plenum rated cables.

G. Seal all sleeve and conduit penetrations of walls with grout or hardening caulk, suitable for wall material, to mechanically attach sleeves to the wall. Provide fire rated sealant at fire rated walls.

H. In areas of remodeling, remove all conduit and wire that is not to be reused.

I. Provide grounding bushings for all connections at concentric and eccentric knockouts, and where reducing washers are used.

J. All junction boxes and other devices above ceiling that may require maintenance shall be located within 18” of the ceiling.

K. Where light fixture switches are shown together, they shall be installed in a common junction box and faceplate.

L. Where receptacles and/or data outlets are shown grouped, install close together. Provide Caddy TSGB16, RBS16 or equal mounting bar for sheetrock walls to accomplish this.

M. All exterior junction boxes in the ground shall be concrete type with traffic rated tops.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 05 00-2

N. All junction and pull boxes shall be marked noting electrical circuits contained. Additionally, boxes containing emergency or exit circuits shall have housing painted red. Boxes containing normal high voltage circuits shall have housing painted yellow. Boxes containing normal low voltage circuits shall have housing painted blue. Do not paint the covers.

O. Where concrete flooring or paving must be cut to install MEP systems, contractor shall take measures to prevent damaging existing underground services. Contractor shall utilize ground penetrating radar and electrical circuit tracing equipment in the area to be excavated to determine the existence of underground services. When saw cutting, limit the depth of the cut to less than the thickness of the concrete. Breakout the concrete manually with special care in areas of possible underground services.


2.1 RACEWAY SYSTEMS

A. REQUIRED: Complete raceway systems for all wiring. This includes, but is not limited to feeders, branch circuit wiring, low voltage lighting controls, temperature controls wiring, data cabling, video cabling, sound systems wiring, security systems wiring and fire alarm system wiring. Generally auxiliary system and controls wiring is plenum rated so conduit system would consist of junction boxes and conduit in walls, above inaccessible ceilings and sleeves through walls. Control and interlock wiring shall be provided under the Mechanical Section. Refer to technology drawings for conduit sizes and locations for technology and security systems.

B. RACEWAY CAPACITY: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine the correct sizes of all types of raceway, to be installed, as instructed in the NEC and all applicable Codes. Runs of underground conduit longer than 80 feet shall be one size larger than NEC requirement, 4" maximum.

C. INSTALLATION:

01 LOCATION: Conceal all raceway systems in ceilings, walls and floors, except feeders serving equipment in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, and in such other areas as indicated where conduit may be exposed. Keep at least 8" away from any heat producing items. Do not install conduit below grade or in floor slabs unless there is no other way to conceal conduit. Equipment feeders in mechanical rooms or mechanical yards shall be run above grade. Major feeders from switchboard to distribution panels containing 4/0 or larger wire may be run underground. Do not install conduit on roof unless specifically shown to be on the roof or authorized in writing by the Engineer. All junction and pull boxes above accessible ceilings shall be mounted so that the access panel is no higher than 18” above the ceiling.

02 ROUTING: Conduit shall be installed parallel to building coordinates, except for underground feeders from panel to panel may be installed in the most direct manner. Install all horizontal conduit at structure unless mounted to a wall.

03 EXPOSED RACEWAY: Run parallel to walls, ceiling or structural members, in a manner to present a neat appearance. Before installation, explain to the Inspector the proposed method of routing and obtain his approval. Hold all horizontal conduit at ceiling or structure, unless mounted on wall.

04 SUPPORT: Provide adequate and sturdy support for all parts of raceway system. Conduit concealed in walls or slabs may be supported with wire hangers, provided they are of heavy gage and spaced to give adequate strength. Exposed conduit must be supported with materials specifically made for this


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 05 00-3

purpose; do not use wire hangers. Do not attach any parts of raceway system to air conditioning ducts or ceiling systems. Wiring above ceiling without conduit shall be supported from structure or wall with J hooks or other manufactured devices designed for this service. Unless described by detail on the drawings, provide Tolco Pipe Pier Supports four feet on center to support conduit on the roof. Select for proper weight loading.

05 CONTINUITY: Make all joints and connections in a manner which will insure mechanical strength and electrical continuity. Use double locknuts and insulated bushings for rigid conduit, and insulated type connectors for EMT conduit 1” and larger for connections to boxes. Use insulated grounding bushings wherever connection is subject to vibration or moisture, such as near mechanical equipment, when internal ground wire is installed, and when concentric or eccentric knockouts are encountered, as well as where reducing washers are used.

06 PULL BOX LOCATIONS: As required by the National Electrical Code and utility provider requirements.

07 EXPANSION FITTINGS: Install O. Z. or equal expansion fitting in each run of conduit which crosses building expansion joint, and in all runs longer than 200 feet.

08 CORROSION PROTECTION: For all non-coated metal raceway in contact with concrete or mortar, tape with 3M corrosion protective tape, or equal. Tape shall extend for approximately 6" before entering and after exiting concrete. Conduit through slabs at grade shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel.

09 PULL WIRE: Install nylon pull cord in all empty electrical power raceway systems.

10 OPENINGS: Keep all raceway openings closed in a manner to prevent entry of moisture and foreign materials until conductors are installed.

11 FIRE PROOFING: All power and telephone raceway components passing through or installed within U. L. fire rated walls, ceiling or floor structures shall be fireproofed in the manner prescribed by the U. L. Fire Resistive Index and local building codes. All penetrations shall be fireproofed with 3M Fire Barrier CP25WB caulk, moldable putty or FS-195 wrap/strip installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.

12 SEALING: All conduit, junction box, outlet box and other penetrations of the building envelop shall be sealed with non-hardening caulking or other non-hardening material as required by the International Energy Conservation Code.

D. MANUFACTURERS: All components of raceway systems must be made in U.S.A. and bear U. L. label.

2.2 CONDUIT

A. CONDUIT TYPES

01 RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL – Threaded fittings

02 PVC COATED RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL - All PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall comply with UL 6 and NEMA No. RN-1 standards and meet ASTM D870 and ASTM D2247 testing requirements. Provide PVC coated couplings, fittings and pulling elbows matching the installed conduit.

a. Plasti-Bond REDH2OT with ETL Verified PVC-001 label


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 05 00-4

b. Perma-Cote with ETL Verified PVC-001 label

c. KorKap with ETL Verified PVC-001 label

d. Or approved equal with ETL Verified PVC-001 label.

03 PVC CONDUIT – Schedule 80

04 EMT – Steel conduit

a. Provide steel compression fittings.

b. Provide insulated throat watertight fittings where conduit is exposed to dampness inside building.

05 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT – Greenfield, galvanized steel conduit for field installation of conductors (maximum 24”)

06 LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT – SealTite Type UA galvanized steel conduit with PVC waterproof coating for field installation of conductors (maximum 24” long except light fixtures up to 72”)

07 MC CABLE – Flexible steel conduit with factory installed, stranded, color coded copper conductors, green insulated ground wire and polypropylene sheath/tape. Conduit exterior shall be color coded for contained conductors. Provide full size aluminum bonding/grounding conductor and additional Green Grounding wire. AFC MC Tuff

08 SURFACE RACEWAY – Wiremold steel raceway, ivory finished and mechanically connected to walls or casework. Type based on application. (only allowed where specifically noted on the drawings)

09 CABLE TRAYS – Cooper B-Line 36 Series aluminum, ladder type cable tray with 9” rung spacing. Width based on application. Support per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. TYPE OF CONDUIT FOR VARIOUS LOCATIONS:

01 UNDERGROUND: Rigid galvanized steel or Schedule 80 PVC.

a. Conduit in contact with concrete shall be PVC coated, rigid galvanized steel. Install PVC coated, rigid galvanized steel, long radius elbows where conduit turns up to grade including straight length section to a minimum of 6” above grade/concrete slab or extended to panel connection.

b. Encase underground conduit not under building slab in a 3" red concrete envelope located a minimum of 24" below finished grade to top of envelope (48" if above 600 volts) with detectable tracer tape installed on top of red concrete. Where more than one conduit is installed in the same trench, provide manufactured conduit support spacers to organize conduit and ensure proper concrete encasement. Notify Inspector for inspection of duct bank at least 24 hours prior to concrete placement.

c. Conduit, except service entrance ductbank, below building slab does not require concrete encasement.

d. Conduit for telephone, data, etc. does not require concrete encasement.

e. Conduit 1” and smaller under the building slab may be run just under the concrete. Larger conduit shall be minimum 24” below finished floor.

f. Provide detectable tracer tape located 6” above underground conduits with identifying markings and colored per APWA color-code:


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 05 00-5

1) Electrical Power Red

2) Low Voltage Orange

02 IN POURED CONCRETE WALLS: PVC coated, rigid galvanized steel or Schedule 80 PVC. Install PVC coated rigid steel fittings on PVC conduit prior to conduit exiting concrete.

03 IN MASONRY WALLS: Galvanized steel EMT with steel, watertight compression fittings.

04 EXPOSED OUTSIDE OF BUILDING: Rigid galvanized steel. For conduit in mechanical courtyard within 50 feet of a cooling tower provide PVC coated, rigid galvanized steel conduit and fittings. Do not use EMT, IC or PVC conduit.

05 INSIDE OF BUILDING IN CEILING CAVITIES, IN EXPOSED FLOOR OR ROOF STRUCTURE AREAS, OR IN DRY WALL TYPE CONSTRUCTION: Galvanized steel EMT or rigid galvanized steel.

06 EXPOSED ON EXISTING MASONRY OR PLASTER WALLS IN FINISHED AREAS (only where specifically noted on the Drawings): Wiremold V500 metallic raceway, ivory finish, complete with various boxes, devices, offsets and transitions. For data systems provide Wiremold 2000 Series or larger consistent with cabling requirements, ivory finish, metal raceway with various devices, offsets and transitions. Provide Wiremold 4000 two compartment if both data and power wiring are installed together. All raceway shall be mechanically fastened to walls or cabinets. No tapes or glues allowed.

07 IN CONCRETE SLABS: Do not install conduit in concrete slabs.

08 SWIMMING POOL AREA AND EQUIPMENT ROOM WHERE POOL WATER IS PRESENT: PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit and coated fittings.

09 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT CONNECTIONS: Use only for connection to lights, motors and transformers from rigid conduit system. Do not loop flexible conduit between light fixtures or receptacles. Provide liquid tight construction and fittings in wet, damp or outside areas. Connections to mechanical equipment in main mechanical or boiler room, and kitchen equipment shall be in liquid tight. Do not install liquid tight flex inside an air handling unit room. Minimum length shall be 18”. Maximum length shall be three feet except light fixture whips may be up to six feet.

10 LIGHT FIXTURE WHIPS: MC cable not to exceed six feet in length.

C. MINIMUM CONDUIT SIZE: 3/4"

D. FITTINGS:

01 RIGID CONDUIT: All rigid galvanized steel conduit shall have threaded fittings with insulated bushings.

02 EMT CONDUIT: Provide insulated bushings for all EMT conduit 1" or larger or housing #6 or larger wires.

03 GROUNDING: Provide fitting with grounding lug where conduit attaches to a painted box (disconnect switch, starter, transformer case, etc.), conduit attaches to a box through a knockout which has an associated larger knockout or a reducing washer is used, or conduit contains a feeder from switchgear to switchgear or between switchgear and transformer.

04 TELEPHONE AND DATA CONDUIT: Provide protective bushing on the end of telephone, data, sound system or other conduit stubbed into the ceiling cavity.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 05 00-6

E. SPARE CONDUIT: Provide five empty 3/4” conduit from all recessed electrical panels to above the nearest accessible ceiling.

F. LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS: Low voltage conductors may be run in accessible ceilings without conduit. Provide conduit sleeve with protective end fittings through all walls and floors where raceway system is not installed. All exposed conductors shall be in conduit. All splices shall be in supported junction boxes. Low voltage conductors installed without conduit shall be independently supported on ring hangers, and plenum rated. Low voltage conductors for audio and data wiring shall be stranded unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.

2.3 PULL BOXES

A. REQUIRED: Pull boxes, junction boxes, wiring troughs and cabinets wherever required for proper installation of various electrical systems.

B. CONSTRUCTION: Made of code gage steel with sides formed and welded, screw covers unless shown to have hinged doors. Hinged doors to be same as furnished on panel boards, with same locking device. Knockouts shall be factory made or formed in field with a cutting tool which will provide a clean, symmetrically cut hole. Do not gang boxes or use extension rings to increase capacity. Boxes outside shall be steel NEMA 3 Type.

2.4 OUTLET BOXES

A. REQUIRED: For all switches, light fixtures, receptacles and the various other outlets shown.

B. CONSTRUCTION: Galvanized steel, one-piece construction, in all cases suitable for intended use. Provide "gang" boxes where devices are shown grouped. Use hot dipped galvanized cast iron for floors or exterior locations. Boxes outside shall be steel NEMA 3 Type.

C. TYPES FOR VARIOUS LOCATION:

01 CEILINGS: 4" square, 2-1/8" deep.

02 DRY WALLS: Standard galvanized switchbox, gangable for multiple switches or receptacles. Provide 4" square, 2-1/8" deep galvanized switch box (1900) where additional volume is required for wiring. Provide shallow boxes where necessary. Provide tab or Caddy bar to align box with studs.

03 MASONRY WALLS: Galvanized switch boxes designed especially for masonry installations. Depths of boxes must be properly coordinated for each specific installation. Box shall be installed within 1/8” of surface of block.

04 FLOOR: Watertight, adjustable, cast iron.

05 SURFACE MOUNTED: Boxes surface mounted on walls or floor shall be Bell, cast aluminum box with appropriate plate and threaded hubs.

06 BACK-TO-BACK OUTLETS: Outlets shown back-to-back on the drawings are to be installed with a minimum of 6" of lateral separation between outlets for minimum sound transmission. "Through-the-wall" type boxes are not permitted.

07 SPECIAL: Boxes for A/V outlets shall have minimum 1-1.25” and 1-1” knockouts/lugs, Hubbell HBL260, HBL263 or equal.

D. MOUNTING PLATES: Boxes mounted in drywall construction shall have extension plates matched to wall thickness so the box can be mounted flush with the metal stud and the wiring device mounts flush with the wall.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 05 00-7

E. CASEWORK COORDINATION: Outlets above counters shall be mounted vertically just above the back splash unless noted to be in the back splash. Outlets below counter shall be mounted in the knee space. Refer to casework drawings. Outlets shown together shall be mounted close together, not on adjacent studs. Provide appropriate mounting hardware to support between studs.

2.5 CONDUCTORS

A. REQUIRED: A complete system of conductors in all raceway systems except where shown otherwise. No conductors are to be installed in telephone conduit. Emergency or exit circuitry shall be installed in a separate raceway system.

B. BUILDING WIRE: 600 Volt, stranded, soft drawn annealed copper, 98% conductivity, continuous from outlet to outlet. Minimum wire size #12 except remote control wire may be #14. All wires shall be color coded with same color connected to same ungrounded phase throughout the installation.

01 All wire shall be type THHN, THW-2 or THWN-2 (wet rated for 90 C) except where raceways or cables are exposed to direct sunlight on or above roofs which shall be type XHHW-2 insulated conductors.

C. BURIED GROUND WIRE: Conductors used to interconnect ground rods of a grounding triad or supplemental ground loop shall be minimum #2, bare, tinned, solid copper wire. Connect this wire to rod with short length of same wire, thermo-welded to loop and rod.

D. MANUFACTURERS: Collier, General Cable, General Electric, Simplex, Triangle and Southwire Co.

E. CONNECTORS: Make all connections on #10 and smaller wire with Code approved solderless pressure type insulated connectors; Ideal Wingnut. Solderless lugs must be used for all terminations.

F. TEST: After installation of all conductors, and before final acceptance, make such tests as are required to determine proper functioning of all circuits. Furnish all necessary instruments required to make such tests and correct any deficiencies found.

2.6 CONNECTIONS TO MOTORS, EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES

A. POWER WIRING: Make wiring connections to all mechanical, plumbing and other equipment being installed as a part of this Contract. In addition, make connections to Owner furnished equipment as shown.

B. CONTROL WIRING: Control and interlock wiring for HVAC Systems will be provided by the Mechanical Contractor. Motorized dampers of the same voltage as the associated fan shall be wired by the electrical contractor when the damper is in close proximity to the fan. Under this section provide a 20 amp, 120 volt circuit to the control panel in each mechanical room from the local low voltage panel.

C. CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT: Make connection to each motor and other equipment subject to vibration with not less than 18" nor more than 24” of flexible conduit. All horizontal runs of conduit (not strapped to walls) must be kept above 7 feet high, with a vertical drop to equipment. Conduit blocking walk and service space is not acceptable and will require relocation. Conduit on and adjacent to equipment must be located to allow free access to all removable panels for equipment service. Wire adjacent to heat producing equipment, such as boilers and electric heaters, must be of a type approved for this use.

D. CONNECTIONS TO TRANSFORMERS: Install not less than 18" nor more than 24” of flexible conduit at each connection to floor mounted transformers.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 05 00-8

E. CONNECTIONS TO RECEPTACLES: All multiple devices on a circuit such as receptacles shall be back wired with pigtail so device does not provide continuity path.

2.7 CIRCUITRY

A. The intent of the drawings is to indicate schematically the circuitry required.

B. 20 amp, single phase branch circuits serving lighting and general receptacles may be grouped in a single raceway provided a neutral conductor is installed for each circuit requiring a neutral. Do not install more than four current carrying conductors in a conduit except nine #12 or #10 conductors may be installed in 3/4" or larger conduit. Segregate data processing circuits and stage dimming circuits from other types of circuits. Do not install 480/277 volt conductors in the same conduit with 208/120 volt conductors.

C. The work performed in grouping conductors in a single raceway shall comply with all applicable articles in the latest edition of the NEC and Local Codes which shall include, but shall not be limited to, ampacity de-rating of conductors and maximum capacities of raceways.

2.8 POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING

A. 480/277 VOLT SYSTEM: Conductors shall have insulation of the proper color as listed below:

Phase A - Brown

Phase B - Purple

Phase C - Yellow

Neutral - Natural Gray

Ground - Green

Isolated Ground - Green w/yellow stripe

B. 208Y/120 VOLT SYSTEMS: Conductors shall have insulation of the proper color as listed below:

Phase A - Black

Phase B - Red

Phase C - Blue

Neutral - White

Ground - Green


C. 240/120 VOLT DELTA SYSTEMS

Phase A - Black

Phase B - Orange (high leg of delta)

Phase C - Blue

Neutral - White w/colored stripe

Ground - Green


D. Contractor may use colored tape marking for size 8 and larger phase and neutral


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 05 00-9

conductors, and size 4 and larger ground conductors.

E. Switch legs are to be color coded the same as the un-switched phase, i.e., all wiring from lighting control panels and contactors shall retain the phase color.

2.9 GROUNDING

A. GENERAL: Permanently and securely ground the mechanical and plumbing equipment and piping systems, conduit system, panel boards and all other components of the electrical system installed or connected by the Sub-contractor. Follow NEC and building code requirements.

B. CIRCUIT GROUNDS:

01 Provide a green ground wire sized per the NEC for every circuit.

02 Provide an additional green w/ yellow strip isolated ground wire for all computer and isolated ground circuits. Refer to drawings.

C. EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES: Make firm ground to raceway system. For equipment connected with flexible conduit or sealtite shall have the specified ground wire installed inside conduit. Do not install on the outside of the conduit. Where enclosure is painted, remove paint where ground lugs are installed.

D. TRANSFORMERS: Each transformer shall have its enclosure and secondary neutral terminal (except when a neutral terminal does not exist) bonded to the building steel and local, driven ground rod.

E. SYSTEM GROUND: Ground system neutral in service entrance equipment to the building steel and three 3/4" x 10 foot, copperclad, driven ground rods. Install ground rods outside in an equilateral triangle pattern, 10 feet on a side, with rod tops 12” below grade. Connect ground wire from rod to rod in a complete loop then extend to service equipment. Use cadweld connections below grade. Refer to drawings.

F. GROUND WIRE CONDUIT: Conduit containing a service or transformer grounding wire shall be grounded at each end to the grounding wire. Use conduit grounding fitting at ground rods.

G. TELEPHONE GROUND: Install a #6 ground wire from the telephone board to ground rod at the telephone board and connect to building service.

H. SOUND SYSTEM GROUND: Install a #6 ground wire from the amplifier equipment to the ground bar in the Service Entrance Equipment.

I. DATA SYSTEM GROUND: Install 3” x XX” x 1/4” thick copper grounding bar in the MC room, of sufficient length for entire system grounding. Drill and tap five 3/8” holes in the copper bar. Mount on wall with standoff isolators. Extend #3/0 ground wire from ground bar to the service entrance ground bar in the main switchboard. Install similar grounding bar in each data room and and provide telecommunications grounding system between all data closets per ANSI/TIA-607-B requirements with minimum #3/0 ground wire. All telecommunications ground wires shall be continuous between closet ground bars. Extend #3/0 in MC/MDF and #6 in each IC/IDF room ground bar to local steel structure.

J. ELECTROMAGNETIC SHIELDING: In rooms painted with EMI shielding paint provide grounding system between the painted walls and the local ground bar. These areas include MDF and IDF rooms. Provide Ground-Connection-Set ESK manufactured by Less-EMF Inc. Kit consists of a plate mounted to the wall, with a continuous Conductive Tape extending from the ground bar and attached each wall completely around the room. The mounting plate shall be electrically connected to the room ground bar with the included cable. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for complete details of the installation.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 05 00-10

2.10 SIGNS AND NAMEPLATES

A. Provide all signs/labels as required by local codes and authority having jurisdiction.

B. Provide and engraved nameplate for each panel, switchboard, transformer, disconnect switch and starter stating the name as listed on the drawings (or load serviced), equipment voltage and where its power is derived. Provide short circuit label on all new switchboards and panelboards.

C. Refer to individual equipment specifications for additional labels required.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District NOISE CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 0550 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 JH- R16-0941.00

Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 26 0550-1

SECTION 26 0550 - NOISE CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL


A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION A. All penetrations of sound-rated walls, floors and ceilings in sound-critical spaces shall be

specially sealed in accordance with the requirements as outlined below. Refer to Noise Control Section of Division 23, paragraph 1.2.C for listing of sound critical spaces and their acoustical performance requirements.

B. Refer to the Vibration Isolation Schedule, Section 230548, for vibration isolation requirements of electrical items.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES

A. Fluorescent and metal halide light fixtures for sound-critical spaces as described in Noise Control Section of Division 23, shall incorporate electronic ballasts as described below or have remotely located ballasts. The fixture should not incorporate thin, lightweight aluminum baffle fins, which tend to vibrate sympathetically with certain musical pitches. Fixture should be submitted to Acoustical Consultant for review.

2.2 DRIVERS AND STEP-DOWN TRANSFORMERS A. Noise generating electrical equipment such as drivers for LED fixtures and step-down

transformers must be located outside the geometric volume of sound sensitive spaces. Locations in spaces adjacent to the sound critical spaces must be scheduled for this type of equipment.

2.3 ELECTRONIC BALLASTS A. Electronic ballasts shall be used with all fluorescent lighting fixtures in sound-critical spaces as

described in Noise Control Section of Division 23. B. The electronic ballast shall be approved and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Ballasts

shall comply with all applicable state and federal efficiency standards. Ballasts shall comply with FCC and NEMA limits governing electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference and shall not interfere with operation of other normal electrical equipment.

C. Ballasts shall not produce any audible noise, be Class “A” rated for sound and have a total harmonic distortion of 10 percent or less. Ballasts shall be rapid start.

D. Ballasts shall carry a minimum three-year warranty, including labor allowance. E. Manufacturer shall provide certified test data for sound pressure level (dBA) of the submitted

ballast. In addition, contractor shall deliver to the Acoustical Consultant a sample for acoustical testing and approval. This sample shall consist of a 2' x 4' luminaire with 10% THD rapid start electronic ballast, cord and plug for 120 Volt operation. Contractor shall resubmit additional samples until approval is received from Acoustical Consultant.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL OUTLET/RECEPTACLE

A. There shall be a separation of 24" between centerlines of outlet boxes or receptacles set into opposite sides of the wall. Conduit connecting such boxes shall be flexible and shall provide 6" slack per 24" of run.

Aldine Independent School District NOISE CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 0550 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 JH- R16-0941.00

Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 26 0550-2

B. In a double wall, boxes in opposite sides of the wall shall be located 24" on center, minimum. Effectively, this means that boxes on the same side of the wall will be 48" apart if there is a box between them on the other side of the wall.

C. The boxes shall be treated to reduce sound transmission. All unused knock-out holes shall be plugged with knock-out caps. The openings or cutouts in the walls to receive the boxes/receptacles shall be made no more than 1/4" oversize to allow a 1/8" gap all around. The flanges shall be perimeter sealed with acoustical caulking, prior to the boxes/receptacles being inserted.

D. Conduit in double walls of sound critical spaces shall home run to a point outside of the partition before connecting to cable and conduit connecting boxes on the other side. Conduit may thread through the studs on its own side but shall under no circumstances interface with the stud on the other side of the wall.

E. Outlets installed in gypsum board only partitions in noise critical spaces as defined in the Noise Control specification, will require that the outlet be wrapped on five sides with an acoustical pad. The pad is a polybutene-butyl material with a self-adhesive backing. This material will help reduce sound transmission through walls. Acceptable manufacturer is Lowry’s Outlet Box Pads, by Harry A. Lowry & Associates, Sun Valley, CA 818-768-4661.

3.2 SOUNDPROOFING OF CONSTRUCTION A. Required for penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings of ductwork pipes and conduits in

sound critical spaces as called out in Noise Control Specification Section 230550, Acoustical Performance Section 1.2.

B. The Contractor shall ensure that the sound control performance of structures be maintained in accordance with the drawings and specifications. All penetrations shall be installed in a manner that results in complete air tightness through structure. If a condition occurs where penetration of the structure by a pipe, conduit, etc., is not shown clearly on the drawings (or described in the specifications), the Contractor shall ask immediately for clarification of the method necessary to install the particular item.

C. Penetrations of Single-Wythe Masonry and Concrete Constructions: 1. Pipe/Conduit diameter = 1" or larger:

a. Install a metal sleeve at the penetration. Size the sleeve to allow for 1/2" thick pipe insulation and normal pipe clearances. Line the sleeve with 1/2" thick elastomeric closed cell neoprene pipe insulation, 1.5 PCF fiberglass insulation or mineral wool.

b. Install pipe/conduit through lined sleeve and seal airtight with acoustical sealant or fire-rated acoustical sealant if partition is fire-rated.

c. Do not rigidly secure pipe/conduit to wall with angles. 2. Pipe/conduit diameter < 1":

a. Wrap pipe/conduit with 1/2" thick elastomeric closed cell neoprene pipe insulation, 1.5 PCF fiberglass insulation or mineral wool. Extend wrapping a minimum of 2 inches beyond the width of the partition on either side.

b. Grout tightly to the neoprene pipe insulation on the pipe/conduit. c. Trim neoprene pipe insulation to the width of the partition, and seal airtight with

acoustical sealant or fire-rated acoustical sealant if partition is fire-rated. D. Penetrations of Single Stud Drywall Constructions:

1. Pipe/Conduit diameter = 1" or larger: a. Wrap with 1/2" thick elastomeric closed cell neoprene pipe insulation, 1.5 PCF

fiberglass insulation or mineral wool. Extend wrapping a minimum of 2 inches beyond the width of the partition on either side.

b. Install a metal pipe sleeve around the neoprene insulation. c. Install the drywall around the sleeve and spackle tightly to full thickness of partition. d. Trim pipe insulation and sleeve to the width of the partition, and seal airtight with

acoustical sealant or fire-rated acoustical sealant if partition is fire-rated. 2. Pipe/conduit diameter < 1":

Aldine Independent School District NOISE CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 0550MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01JH- R16-0941.00

Bid Issue – 2/03/2017 26 0550-3

a. Wrap with 1/2" thick closed cell neoprene pipe insulation, 1.5 PCF fiberglassinsulation or mineral wool. Extend wrapping a minimum of 2 inches beyond thewidth of the partition on either side.

b. Install the drywall tight to the neoprene pipe wrap.c. Trim neoprene insulation to the width of the partition, and seal airtight with

acoustical sealant or fire-rated acoustical sealant if partition is fire-rated.E. Multiple Pipe/Conduit Penetrations:

1. Where a series of conduits or pipes are penetrating the wall/floor/ceiling, eachduct/conduit/pipe shall be separated by minimum 4-inches in all directions.

2. Multiple pipe/conduit penetrations at one location, i.e., one large opening for a series ofruns, are not recommended.

F. Penetrations of Double Stud Drywall and/or Combination Constructions:1. Use same techniques described above EXCEPT do not bridge the two studs or wythes

with solid members such as sleeves or stud frames. Each sleeve or frame must be foreach individual wythe or stud.

3.3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATIONA. Subsequent to equipment installation, the installation will be surveyed visually for conformance

to specified installation, materials and workmanship by the Acoustical Consultant andMechanical Engineer. All parts of the installation will be reviewed for conformance to thisspecification including vibration isolation devices and sealing of all partition penetrations.

B. If the results of the visual survey indicate non-conformance with the specifications or if theresults of any acoustical measurements indicate non-conformance with the specified NC levels,as described in Section 1.2.C of the Noise Control specification section, due to improperinstallation, poor workmanship or unapproved substitutions or shop drawings, it shall be theresponsibility of the contractor to correct, at his own expense, such deficiencies by methodsthat shall be approved by the Mechanical Engineer prior to incorporation.

C. After corrections have been made, further acoustical tests shall be performed at contractor’s expense for verification of conformance to specified NC levels.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLSJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 09 43MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-1

SECTION 26 09 43 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL








A. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all of the trades covered in other sections of the specification to provide a complete and operable system.

B. Extent of lighting control system work is indicated by drawings and by the requirements of this section. It shall include low voltage switching system with lighting automation relay boxes, associated low voltage switches; fully programmable panel intelligence cards; factory services.

C. Contractor shall provide all quantities for system including but not limited to relays, relay panels, switches, switch plates and plate configuration, wire lengths for both data and switches.

D. Provide complete lighting control system to control all interior lights.

E. All local switching shall be low voltage control type, with one or more switches controlling the lighting in each room.

F. A coordination meeting between the General Contractor, Electrical subcontractor, and the Supplier of the Generator and ATS system shall occur prior to formal submittal.

G. Contractor shall demonstrate the complete successful operation of system including off site connectivity, emergency transfer, web access, sports lighting and security/site lighting control a minimum of 30 days prior to contract schedule completion date.

H. The lighting controls contractor shall provide the control interface with the local lighting control equipment to tie to the building automation system (BAS). Coordinate with controls contractor for interface type prior to ordering.

I. Interlock lighting control system with other systems as follows:

01 Interlock with fire alarm to enable all lighting upon activation.

02 Interlock with security system:

a. Enable partial lighting when system is first disarmed.

1) Enable 50% of common areas, kitchen, custodial, gang restroom, fine arts, gym, locker room, admin and other areas that may need to be used at times other than student hours.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-2

2) Enable the remaining lights one (1) hour before students arrive until one (1) hour after they leave.

b. Lighting shall be disabled upon arming of the system. Confirm with Owner for time delay between security system arming and lights out.

c. All lighting shall be enabled upon intruder activation.

d. The intent is to have three inputs from the security system: armed, disarmed and activated.

J. Provide override switches:

01 Shall be a programmable input to the lighting control system.

02 Locate one in custodian office.

03 Locate on in principal’s office.

04 Shall be adjustable in time duration.

05 Provide “exterior lighting” override switch in the main electrical room.

06 Master override switches shall have engraved wall plates.

1.3 INTRODUCTION

A. The work covered in this section is subject to all of the requirements in the General Conditions of the Specifications. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all of the trades covered in other sections of the specification to provide a complete and operable system. Contractor shall provide to the manufacturer all quantities for system including but not limited to relays, relay panels, switches, switch plates and plate configuration, wire lengths for both data and switches. Contractor shall demonstrate to ALDINE ISD, the complete successful operation of system including off site connectivity, emergency transfer, web access, sports lighting and security/site lighting control a minimum of 30 days prior to contract schedule completion date. Installing electrical contractor shall replace any failed warranty material during warranty period of one year.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Extent of lighting control system work is indicated by drawings and by the requirements of this section. It is defined to include, but not by way of limitation:

01 Digital Room Controllers – Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three relays controllers with integral current thyristor, 0-10 volt control for ballasts (if applicable) and single relay application-specific plug load controllers.

02 Digital Occupancy Sensors – Self-configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications.

03 Digital Switches – Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton switches, dimmers, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications.

04 Digital Photosensors – Single-zone closed loop and multi-zone open loop daylighting sensors with two-way active infrared (IR) communications can provide switching or dimming control for daylight harvesting.

05 Configuration Tools – Minimum of (2) handheld remotes for room configuration provides two way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device / room from up to 30 feet away. Unit to have Organic LED display, simple pushbutton interface, and


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-3

allow send and receive of room variables and store of occupancy sensor settings. Computer software also customizes room settings.

06 Minimum of two (2) handheld remotes for personal control – One-button dimming, two-button on/off, or five-button scene remotes provide control using infrared communications. Remote may be configured in the field to control selected loads or scenes without special tools.

07 Digital Lighting Management (DLM) local network – Free topology, plug-in wiring system (Cat 5e) for power and data to room devices.

08 Network Bridge – provides BACnet MS/TP-compliant digital networked communication between rooms, panels and the Segment Manager or building automation system (BAS).

09 Segment Manager – provides web browser-based user interface for system control, scheduling, power monitoring, room device parameter administration and reporting.

10 Emergency Lighting Control Unit (ELCU) – allows a standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building


A. Component Pre-testing: All components and assemblies are to be factory pre-tested and burned in prior to installation.

B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to electrical wiring work.

C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to types of electrical equipment and enclosures.

D. UL Approvals: Remote panels are to be UL listed under UL 916 Energy Management Equipment.

E. FCC Emissions: All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC emissions Standards specified in Part 15 Subpart J for Class A application.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data on lighting control system and components including shop drawings, detailed point to point wiring diagrams, and floor plans showing occupancy and daylighting sensor locations. Provide typical mounting details for occupancy and daylighting sensors for this application.

1.7 MANUFACTURERS

A. This specification basis of design is Lighting Integrator Complete Control products from Watt Stopper/Legrand, Santa Clara, CA. Contact The Edwin Jones Company 713-572-4000.

01 Equal by Acuity nLight controls shall also be acceptable. Contact Lesco Lighting Controls 713-923-7781.

B. Substitutions may be proposed during the bidding process as outlined in the General Electrical Section.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-4

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 LIGHTING CONTROL PANELSA. Provide lighting control panels in the locations and capacities as indicated on the plans

and schedules. Each panel shall be of modular construction and consist of the components listed

B. Enclosure/Tub shall be NEMA 1, sized to accept an interior with 1-8 relays, 1-24 relays and 6 four-pole contactors, or 1-48 relays and 6 four-pole contactors.

C. Cover shall be configured for surface or flush wall mounting of the panel as indicated on the plans. The panel cover shall have a hinged and lockable door with restricted access to line voltage section of the panel.

D. Interior assembly shall be supplied as a factory assembled component specifically designed and listed for field installation. The interior construction shall provide total isolation of high voltage (Class 1) wiring from low voltage (Class 2) wiring within the assembled panel. The interior assembly shall include intelligence boards, power supply, DIN rails for mounting optional Class 2 control devices, and individually replaceable latching type relays. The panel interiors shall include the following features:

01 Removable, plug-in terminal blocks with screwless connections for all low voltage terminations.

02 Individual terminal block, override pushbutton, and LED status light for each relay.

03 Direct wired switch inputs associated with each relay and group channel shall support two-wire, momentary or maintained contact switches.

04 Digital inputs (four RJ-45 jacks) shall support 1-, 2-, 3-, 4-, and 8-button digital switches, digital IO modules capable of receiving 0-5V or 0-10V analog photocell inputs, digital IO modules capable of receiving momentary or maintained contact closure inputs, digital photocell modules, and digital occupancy sensors.

05 True relay state shall be indicated by the on-board LED and shall be available to external control devices and systems via BACnet.

06 Automatically sequenced operation of relays to reduce impact on the electrical distribution system when large loads are controlled simultaneously.

07 Group, channel, and pattern control of relays shall be provided through a simple keypad interface from a handheld IR programmer. Any group of relays can be associated with a channel for direct on/off control or pattern (scene) control via a simple programming sequence using the relay and channel override pushbuttons and LED displays for channels 1-9 or a handheld IR programmer for channels 1-99.

08 Relay group status for each channel shall be provided through red LED indicators for groups 1-9 and via BACnet for groups 1-99. Solid red indicates that the last group action called for an ON state and relays in the group are on or in a mixed state.

09 Single-pole latching relays with modular plug-in design. Relays shall provide the following ratings and features:

a. Electrical:

1) 30 amp ballast at 277V2) 20 amp ballast at 347V3) 20 amp tungsten at 120V


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-5

4) 30 amp resistive at 347V5) 1.5 HP motor at 120V6) 14,000 amp short circuit current rating (SCCR) at 347V7) Relays shall be specifically UL listed for control of plug loads

b. Mechanical:

1) Individually replaceable, ½” KO mounting with removable Class 2 wire harness.

2) Actuator on relay housing provides manual override and visual status indication, accessible from Class 2 section of panel.

3) Dual line and load terminals each support two #14 #12 solid or stranded conductors.

4) Tested to 300,000 mechanical on/off cycles.

c. Isolated low voltage contacts provide for true relay status feedback and pilot light indication.

E. Power supply shall be a multi-voltage transformer assembly with rated power to supply all electronics, occupancy sensors, switches, pilot lights, and photocells as necessary to meet the project requirements. Power supply to have internal over-current protection with automatic reset and metal oxide varistor protection.

F. Lighting control panels shall be WattStopper model LMCP8, LMCP24 or LMCP48 as shown on the plans.

2.2 SINGLE / DUAL RELAY WALL SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Type PW: Manual-ON, Automatic-OFF passive infrared (PIR) wall switch occupancy sensor Furnish the Company’s model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square-foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; WattStopper PW-100, PW-200, PW-103, PW-203, PW-301, PW-302, WS-301.

B. Type UW: Manual-ON, Automatic-OFF ultrasonic wall switch occupancy sensor with Furnish the Company’s model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square-foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; WattStopper UW-100, UW-200.

C. Type DW: Manual-ON, Automatic-OFF dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic) wall switch occupancy sensor Furnish the Company’s model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square-foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; WattStopper DW-100, DW-200, DW-103, DW-203, DSW-100, DSW-200, DW-103, DW-203, DSW-301, DSW-302.

D. Type LMDW: Automatic-ON, Automatic-OFF dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic) wall switch occupancy sensor Furnish the Company’s model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square-foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; WattStopper LMDW-101, LMDW-102.

E. Reference drawings for number, location and switch types.

2.3 DIGITAL WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR SYSTEM

A. Wall or ceiling mounted (to suit installation) passive infrared (PIR), ultrasonic or dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. Furnish the Company’s system which accommodates the square-foot coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors and


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-6

accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters. Passive infrared only sensors shall not be used for classroom applications.

B. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following:

01 Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables:

a. Sensitivity – 0-100% in 10% increments b. Time delay – 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments c. Test mode – Five second time delayd. Detection technology – PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation

and/or re-activation.e. Walk-through modef. Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight

enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network.

02 One or two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network.

03 Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.

04 Device Status LEDs including:

a. PIR Detectionb. Ultrasonic detectionc. Configuration moded. Load binding

05 Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools.

06 Manual override of controlled loads.

C. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.

D. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.

E. All devices shall be hard wired. No wireless devices shall be permitted.

F. WattStopper product numbers: LMPX, LMDX, LMPC, LMUC, LMDC

G. Reference drawings for number, location and device types.

2.4 DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES

A. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configuration; available in white, light almond, ivory, grey and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening. Wall switches shall include the following features:

01 Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls.

02 Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons and/or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall.

03 Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.

04 Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-7

a. Bi-level LEDb. Dim locator level indicates power to switchc. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active

05 Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps.

B. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.

C. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required to achieve multi-way switching.

D. The following switch attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

01 Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa).

02 Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only.

03 Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.

04 Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours.

05 Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.

06 Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependent; each button may be bound to multiple loads.

E. WattStopper product numbers: LMSW-101, LMSW-102, LMSW-103, LMSW-104, LMSW-105, LMSW-108, LMDM-101.

F. Reference drawings for number, location and switch types.

2.5 ROOM CONTROLLERS

A. Room Controllers automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room Controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers will be simple to install and will not have, dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration. The control units will include the following features:

01 Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room.

02 Simple replacement – Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup.

03 Device Status LEDs to indicate:

a. Data transmissionb. Device has powerc. Status for each loadd. Configuration status

04 Quick installation features including:

a. Standard junction box mountingb. Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable

05 Plenum rated


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-8

06 Manual override and LED indication for each load

07 Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz)

08 Zero cross circuitry for each load.

B. On/Off/Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include:

01 Real time current monitoring

02 One, two or three relay configuration

03 Efficient 250 mA switching power supply

04 Four RJ-45 DLM local network ports.

05 One 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible ballasts and LED drivers.

06 The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

a. Establish preset level for each load from 0-100%b. Set high and low trim for each loadc. Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours

07 Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy-based control of plug loads within the space.

a. One relay configuration onlyb. Automatic-ON/OFF configuration

08 WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-211, LRMC-212, LRMC-213, LMRC-221, LMRC-222, LMPL-201

2.6 DIGITAL PHOTOSENSORS

A. Digital photosensors work with room controllers to provide automatic switching or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller. Closed loop photosensors measure the ambient light in the space and control a single lighting zone. Open loop photosensors measure incoming daylight in the space, and are capable of controlling up to three lighting zones. Photosensors shall be interchangeable without the need for rewiring.

B. Digital photosensors include the following features:

01 An internal photodiode that measures only within the visible spectrum, and has a response curve that closely matches the photopic curve. The photodiode shall not measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than 5% for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers.

02 Sensor light level range shall be from 1-10,000 footcandles (fc).

03 The capability of switching one-third, one-half or all lighting ON and OFF, or raising or lowering lighting levels, for each controlled zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s) and load binding to room controller(s).

04 For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide a deadband or a separation between the “ON Setpoint” and the “OFF Setpoint” that will prevent the lights from cycling after they turn off.

05 For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide the option, when the daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-9

user-selectable minimum level.

06 Optional programmable wall switch override to allow occupants to reduce lighting level to increase energy savings or, if permitted by system administrator, raise and lower lighting levels for a selected period of time or cycle of occupancy.

07 Infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a handheld configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool, and for communication with personal remote controls.

08 Red configuration LED that blinks to indicate data transmission.

09 Blue status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding.

10 Recessed switch to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF.

11 One RJ-45 port for connection to DLM local network.

12 An adjustable head and a mounting bracket to accommodate multiple mounting methods and building materials. The photosensor may be mounted on a ceiling tile, skylight light well, suspended lighting fixture or backbox.

C. Closed loop digital photosensors include the following additional features:

01 An internal photodiode that measures light in a 100 degree angle, cutting off the unwanted light from bright sources outside of this cone.

02 Automatic self-calibration, initiated from the photosensor, a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software.

03 Automatically establishes setpoints following self-calibration.

04 A sliding setpoint control algorithm for dimming daylight harvesting with a “Day Setpoint” and the “Night Setpoint” to prevent the lights from cycling.

05 WattStopper Product Number: LMLS-400.

D. Open loop digital photosensors include the following additional features:

01 An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60 degree angle cutting off the unwanted light from the interior of the room.

02 Automatically establishes setpoints following calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software.

03 A proportional control algorithm for dimming daylight harvesting with a “Setpoint” to be maintained during operation.

04 WattStopper Product Number: LMLS-500.

E. Reference drawings for number, location and switch types.

2.7 ROOM NETWORK (DLM Local Network)

A. The DLM local network is a free topology lighting control physical connection and communication protocol designed to control a small area of a building. Digital room devices connect to the network using CAT 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors which provide both data and power to room devices. Features of the DLM local network include:

01 Plug n’ Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached.

02 Simple replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-10

without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup.

03 Push n’ Learn configuration to change the automatic configuration, including binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital devices in the local network.

04 Two-way infrared communications for control by handheld remotes, and configuration by a handheld tool including adjusting load parameters, sensor configuration and binding, within a line of sight of up to 30 feet from a sensor, wall switch or IR receiver.

2.8 BACnet® BASED DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS

The lighting control panel shall support digital communications to facilitate the extension of control to include interoperation with building automation systems and other intelligent field devices. Digital communications shall be RS485 master/slave token passing-based using the BACnet® protocol.

A. The panel shall have provision for an individual BACnet device ID. The device ID description property shall be writable via the network to allow unique identification of the lighting control panel on the network.

B. The panel shall support MS/TP MAC addresses in the range of 0-127 and baud rates of 9600k, 38400k, 76800k, and 115.2k bits per second.

C. Lighting control relays shall be controllable as binary output objects in the instance range of 1-64. The state of each relay shall be readable and writable by the BAS via the object present value property.

D. Lighting control relays shall report their true on/off state as binary input objects in the instance range of -64.

E. The 99 channel groups associated with the panel shall be represented by binary value objects in the instance range of 201-299. The occupancy state of each channel group shall be readable and writable by the BAS via the object present value property. Commanding 1 to a channel group will put all relays associated with the channel into the normal hours mode. Commanding 0 or NULL shall put the relays into the afterhours mode.

F. Setup and commissioning of the panel shall not require manufacturer-specific software or a computer. All configuration of the lighting control panel shall be performed using standard BACnet objects or via the handheld IR programming remote. Provide BACnet objects for panel setup and control as follows:

01 Binary output objects in the instance range of 1-64 (one per relay) for on/off control of relays.

02 Binary value objects in the instance range of 1-99 (one per channel) for normal hours/after hours schedule control.

03 Binary input objects in the instance range of 1-64 (one per relay) for reading true on/off state of the relays.

04 Analog value objects in the instance range of 1-64 (one per relay) shall assign relays to channel groups in the range of 1 - 99.

05 Analog value objects in the instance range of 101-199 (one per channel group) shall assign a blink warn time value to each channel. A value of 5 shall activate the blink warn feature for the channel and set a 5-minute grace time period. A value of 250 shall activate the sweep feature for the channel and enable the use of sweep type automatic wall switches.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-11

06 Analog value objects in the instance range of 201-299 (one per channel) shall assign an after-hours time delay value to the channel in the range of 1-240 minutes.

07 Multi-state value objects in the instance range of 1-99 (one per channel) shall provide the state of the relays assigned to the channel. Valid states shall be ALL ON, MIXED, BLINK, and ALL OFF.

G. The description property for all objects shall be writable via the network and shall be saved in non-volatile memory within the panel.

H. The BO and BV 1-99 objects shall support BACnet priority array with a relinquish default of off and after hours respectively. Prioritized writes to the channel BV objects shall propagate prioritized control to each member relay in a way analogous to the BACnet Channel object described in addendum aa. (http://www.bacnet.org/Addenda/Add-135-2010aa.pdf)

I. Panel-aggregate control of relay Force Off at priority 2 shall be available via a single BV5 object. Force On at priority 1 shall be available via a single BV4 object.

J. Lockout of all digital switch buttons connected to a given panel shall be command-able via a single BV2 object. The lock status of any connected switch station shall be represented as BV101-196.

K. Lighting control accessory devices connected to the panel shall be represented via BACnet objects including but not limited to the following:

01 Digital occupancy sensor detection states shall be readable as BI objects ranging from BI1-96.

02 Digital occupancy sensor configuration parameters shall each be accessible as BACnet objects when applicable to a given product.

a. Occupancy sensor time delay in minutes shall be writeable via AV101-196.

b. Occupancy sensor passive infrared (PIR) sensitivity percentage shall be writeable via AV201-296.

c. Occupancy sensor ultrasonic (US) sensitivity percentage shall be writeable via AV301-396.

03 Digital switch buttons shall be readable and writeable as BI objects ranging from BI101 – 9608.

04 Digital daylight sensors foot-candle readings shall be readable as follows:

a. Analog 0-5V/0-10V sensors connected to a digital input module shall be represented as AI1-96.

b. Digital closed loop sensors shall be represented as AI4001-4096.c. Digital open loop sensors shall be represented as AI5001-5096.d. Digital dual loop sensors shall be represented as follows:

1) The upward facing open loop sensor shall be represented as AI6001-6096.

2) The downward facing closed loop sensor shall be represented as AI6101-6196.

05 Digital daylight sensor configuration shall be exposed as BACnet objects as follows:

a. Digital closed loop sensors shall be represented as follows:

1) Daylight Sensor Day Setpoint (ftcd) AV4201-4296.2) Daylight Sensor Night Setpoint (ftcd) AV4301-4396.3) Daylight Sensor Off Setpoint Delay (minutes) AV4401-4496.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-12

4) Daylight Sensor On Setpoint (ftcd) AV4501-4596.5) Daylight Sensor Off Setpoint (ftcd) AV4601-4696.

2.9 USER INTERFACE

Each lighting control panel system shall be supplied with at least (1) handheld IR remote programming interface consisting of a keypad and associated OLED display screen. The user interface shall allow setup, configuration, and diagnostics of the panel without the need for software or connection of a computer. The user interface shall have the following functions as a minimum:

A. Set network parameters including panel device ID, MS/TP MAC address, baud rate and max master range.

B. Relay Group creation of up to 99 groups. Group creation shall result in programming of all seven key relay parameters for member relays. The seven parameters are as follows: After-hours Override Time Delay, Normal Hours Override Time Delay, Action on Transition to Normal Hours, Action on Transition to After Hours, Sensor Action During Normal Hours, Sensor Action During After Hours, Blink-Warn Time for After Hours.

C. Program up to 254 separate scheduled events. Events shall occur on seven day intervals with each day selectable as active or inactive, and shall be configurable as to whether the event is active on holidays. Holidays are also defined through the User Interface.

D. Program up to 32 separate Dark/Light events. Events shall have a selectable source as either calculated Astro with delay, or a digital IO module with an integral 0-5V or 0-10V analog photocell. Dark/Light events shall occur on seven day intervals with each day selectable as active or inactive, and shall be configurable as to whether the event is active on holidays.

E. Button binding of digital switches to groups shall be accessible via the handheld IR remote and accomplished from the digital switch station.

F. Programming of panel location information shall be accomplished by the handheld IR remote and include at a minimum LAT, LON, DST zone, and an approximate city/state location.

G. An additional handheld IR remote may optionally be specified to be permanently mounted to the panel interior via a retractable anti-theft lanyard to allow for convenient programming of the panel while assuring that the handheld programmer is always present at that panel. An unlimited number of handheld IR remotes may also be purchased for facilities staff as seen fit by the end user’s representative.

2.10 CONFIGURATIONS TOOLS

A. A configuration tool facilitates optional customization of DLM local networks, and is used to set up open loop daylighting sensors. A wireless configuration tool features infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface.

B. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include:

01 Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range of approximately 30 feet.

02 High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-driven operation.

03 Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors, room controllers and buttons on digital wall switches.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-13

04 Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors.

05 Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting.

06 Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during auto-commissioning, and input light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting controls.

C. WattStopper Product Numbers: LMCT-100, LMCI-100/LMCS-100

2.11 NETWORK BRIDGE

A. The network bridge connects a DLM local network to a BACnet-compliant network for communication between rooms, panels and a segment manager or BAS. Each local network shall include a network bridge component to provide a connection to the local network room devices. The network bridge shall use industry standard BACnet MS/TP network communication. Closed or proprietary network communication shall not be acceptable.

01 The network bridge may be incorporated directly into the room controller hardware (LMRC-3xx Room Controllers) or be provided as a separate module connected on the local network through an available RJ-45 port.

02 Provide Plug n’ Go operation to automatically discover all room devices connected to the local network and make all device parameters visible to the segment manager via the segment network. No commissioning shall be required for set up of the network bridge on the local network.

03 The network bridge shall automatically create standard BACnet objects for selected room device parameters to allow any BACnet-compliant BAS to include lighting control and power monitoring features as provided by the DLM room devices on each local network. Standard BACnet objects shall be provided as follows:

a. Read/write the normal or after hours schedule state for the room

b. Read the detection state of the occupancy sensor

c. Read/write the On/Off state of loads

d. Read/write the dimmed light level of loads

e. Read the button states of switches

f. Read total current in amps, and total power in watts through the room controller

g. Read/write occupancy sensor time delay, PIR sensitivity and ultrasonic sensitivity settings

h. Activate a preset scene for the room

i. Read/write daylight sensor fade time and say and night setpoints

j. Read the current light level, in footcandles, from interior and exterior photosensors and photocells

k. Set daylight sensor operating mode

l. Read/write wall switch lock status

04 WattStopper product numbers: LMBC-300


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-14

2.12 SEGMENT MANAGER

A. The Digital Lighting Management system shall include at least one segment manager to manage network communication. It shall serve up a graphical user interface via a standard web browser. Each segment manager shall have support for one, two or three segment networks as required and allow for control of a maximum of 40 local networks (rooms) and/or lighting control panels per segment network.

B. Operational features of the Segment Manager shall include the following:

01 Connection to PC or LAN via standard Ethernet TCP/IP.

02 Easy to learn and use graphical user interface, compatible with Internet Explorer 8, or equal browser.

03 Log in security capable of restricting some users to view-only or other limited operations.

04 Automatic discovery of all DLM devices on the segment network(s). Commissioning beyond activation of the discovery function shall not be required.

05 After discovery, all rooms and panels shall be presented in a standard navigation tree format. Selecting a device from the tree will allow the device settings and operational parameters to be viewed and changed by the user.

06 Ability to view and modify room device operational parameters. It shall be possible to set device parameters independently for normal hours and after hours operation.

07 Ability to set up schedules for rooms and panels. Schedules shall automatically set controlled zones or areas to either a normal hours or after hours mode of operation.

08 Ability to group rooms and loads for common control by schedules, switches or network commands.

09 Ability to monitor connected load current and display power consumption for areas equipped with room controllers incorporating the integral current monitoring feature.

10 Provide seamless integration with the BAS via BACnet IP. Provide export table with available parameters.

2.13 REALTIME COLOR GRAPHICS SOFTWARE

A. System Description

01 Color graphics software, WinControl Graphics, shall allow a user to monitor and control the low voltage relays through a graphical color interface. The system will allow the user to create drawings through a graphics generator provided with the system. The system will control the room controllers in a real-time environment; i.e. all system changes will be communicated immediately through the color graphic screens.

02 The application will provide a visual representation of the floor plan, drawn to scale, with each fixture displayed on screen. Fixtures can automatically indicate the relay controlling them on screen. The software will include “fly overs” which will display fixture information when the mouse pointer is over a defined object on the screen.

03 The software will fully integrate with the base software; all system databases


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-15

including wiring documentation and system runtime information will be available to the graphic software.

04 The software shall be based upon Microsoft’s Component Object Model (COM) and shall support Active-X technology for integration.

05 The software shall include color graphic screens created by a factory authorized representative. These screens will be provided based on the owner's requested illustrations.

B. Graphic Screen Generation

01 Contractor shall provide CAD floor plans to the manufacturer for generation of graphic screens.

02 As-Built relay panel and reflected ceiling documentation must be provided to the manufacturer before graphic screen development can begin.

03 Graphical User Interface shall include but not be limited to:

a. DISTRICT WIDE HOME SCREEN

1) Links to all existing WattStopper Schools in the District.

b. School Home Screen

1) School Rendering2) Day / Time3) Schedule for that day4) Exterior FC reading5) Current Lighting Watts per sq. ft.6) Plug Load Watts per sq. ft.

c. Quick Access System Tree

1) Links2) 365 Day Scheduler

d. Site Plan

1) All exterior lighting shown on / off.

e. Screens Per Floor

1) For navigation and showing lighting on / off.

f. Detail Screen Per Architectural Area

1) Room Occupancy (room shaded green)2) Lighting States (3 zones with override)3) Real Time Wattage for Lighting4) Real Time Wattage for Plug Load5) Real Time Photocell Foot-Candle Reading (if applicable)

g. Alarms

h. Reports


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-16

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall provide to the manufacturer all quantities for system including but not limited to relays, room controllers, relay panels, plug load controllers, switches, sensors and wire lengths and configurations for both network and device cable at least 1 week before bid.

B. When using wire for connections other than the DLM local network (Cat 5e with RJ-45 connectors), provide detailed point to point wiring diagrams for every termination. Provide wire specifications and wire colors to simplify contactor termination requirements

C. All MSTP network and Cat 5e low voltage wiring must have “WattStopper” printed on the wire jacket. Any cable substitutions shall be removed and replaced at the contractor’s expense.

D. All MSTP network terminations shall utilize wire ferrules for terminations and MSTP network manufacturer’s instructions. Any network deficiencies shall be repaired at the contractor’s expense.

E. Electrical contractor must provide a detailed as-built plan in CAD showing MSTP network cable routing and network bridge serial numbers to the manufacturer at least 2 weeks prior to factory commissioning Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions unless otherwise indicated.

F. Electrical contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the following onsite coordination meetings through the duration of the project. Attendance shall be required for the GC, EC, representative from MEP firm, BAS Integrator and lighting control rep.

01 Pre-Installation- After submittals have been approved and material has arrived onsite and before installation of any devices begins. Review lighting control layout plans, required as-built information and MSTP Terminations.

02 Pre-Factory startup- Electrical contractor must have all lighting control devices installed, wired and tested at least 30 days prior to substantial completion deadline. At this coordination meeting the electrical contractor shall walk the site with attendees and go room by room to ensure they are ready for factory technician to start the system programming. Electrical contractor shall have his as built documentation of the system completed for this meeting.

03 Move in: 30 days prior to owner move in all parties shall meet onsite to review completed system. At this time all installation and factory programming shall be completed.

G. The installing electrical contractor shall complete, prior to request of WattStopper factory start up and site commissioning, complete installation of all relay panels, their respective loads landed and confirmed operations, switches installed, and confirmed operational, and the entire data network shall be pulled from all panels to the designated IT room as indicated on plans.

H. The installing contractor shall, prior to request of WattStopper factory start up and site commissioning, request a site visit by the local authorized WattStopper rep to assist in identification of any open ended issues, thereby eliminating potential for delays and system commission interruptions. The pre commissioning meeting shall include the Engineer, the Architect, the local rep (Edwin Jones Co.), the Aldine ISD project manager, the Aldine ISD energy manager, the electrical contractor and the general contractor

I. Upon confirmation of progress by local factory authorities, the installing electrical contractor will complete the startup request form found in the WattStopper submittals,


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-17

including any relay/circuit, and switching changes from the contract documents. This is essential to facilitate substantial completion.

J. The installing electrical contractor shall clearly label all low voltage wiring inside the relay controllers. Labels shall be typed and indicate what they are connected to (switch, occupancy sensor, etc..) and what room they are connected to. Labels shall be Panduit Permanent Labels or Brother Cable Labels. The room # shall include both the architectural plan room numbers as well as the room numbers to be shown on the signage.

K. All low voltage wiring inside the relay controllers must be clean and organized. Wire nuts are not acceptable, only compression fittings.

L. Low voltage wire shall be terminated so the wire jackets match the color coding on the termination blocks.

M. Attic stock. Electrical contractor shall provide the following spare parts package to be installed as directed by the owner/engineer. The quantities listed are for each school. Unused items shall be turned over to the owner within thirty (30) days of substantial completion of the project. Unused material is to be ordered separately when commissioning is scheduled in order to ensure the longest warranty period possible.

01 Three Relay Room Controllers (3)

02 Occupancy Sensors (3 of each type)

03 Low Voltage Switches (3 of each type)

04 Daylight Harvesting Photocells (5)

3.2 SUPPORT SERVICES

A. System Start Up and Commissioning

01 Manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized technician to confirm proper installation and operation of all lighting control system components. The startup requirement is intended to verify:

a. That all occupancy and daylighting sensors are located, installed, andadjusted as intended by the factory and the contract documents.

b. The occupancy sensors and daylighting sensors are operating within themanufacturers specifications.

c. The sensors and room controllers interact as a complete and operationalsystem to meet the design intent.

02 Manufacturer to provide a written statement verifying that the system meets the above requirements.

03 The electrical contractor shall request factory commissioning by submitting a startup request form at least (2) weeks before startup is required.

04 Electrical contractor must schedule lighting control factory start-up to begin at least four (4) weeks prior to substantial completion deadline.

05 Lighting control technician shall issue daily reports notifying of the project status, open issues, challenges, etc. at the end of each day he/she is onsite commissioning the system. Reports shall be sent directly to EC, GC and Architect/Engineer.

06 At the completion of the first visit of the lighting control technician, all parties shall meet onsite to walk the project and evaluate any open issues. At this meeting


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 09 43-18

the schedule for owner training shall be determined.

07 The electrical contractor shall provide at least (1) journeyman electrician, familiar with the installation of the system, dedicated to assisting the factory start-up technician for the entire duration of the commissioning process.

B. System Training

01 Manufacturer shall provide factory authorized technician to train owner personnel in the operation, programming and maintenance of the lighting control system including all occupancy sensors and daylighting controls.

a. Provide a minimum of 2 hours training to on-site staff.

b. Provide a minimum of 4 hours to Owner’s maintenance staff.

02 Owner operation memo- Lighting control manufacturer shall prepare an operational memo for owner to distribute informing building occupants of the operation of their lighting control system. Memo shall explain the following but not limited to: auto on/ vs manual on, occupancy sensors, daylight harvesting, plug load control, after hours time delays.

C. System Programming

01 Manufacturer shall provide system programming including:

a. Wiring documentation.

b. Switch operation.

c. Occupancy sensors.

d. Photocells

02 Verification of a complete and working system including MSTP network status

03 Provide computer generated documentation on the commissioning of the system including a room by room description of:

a. Sensor Parameters, time delays, sensitivities and daylighting setpoints.

b. Sequence of operation (e.g. manual on, auto off, etc.)

c. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.)

D. Re-Commissioning

01 After 90 days from occupancy the factory authorized representative and electrical contractor shall re-calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements. Provide a detailed report to the Architect/Owner of all re-commissioning activity and changes.

E. Warranty

01 Provide a five (5) year complete manufacturer’s warranty on all products to be free of manufacturers’ defects.

02 System warranty shall be for one (1) year of complete maintenance coverage after final acceptance of the system and include all material and labor to provide consistent peak performance of the system. Post-warranty maintenance shall be available on contract or call basis.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District TRANSFORMERSJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 22 13MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 22 13-1

SECTION 26 22 13 TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL







PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 STANDARD DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS

A. GENERAL: Provide U. L. labeled, plated copper or aluminum wound, two winding type units, NEMA 3R construction suitable for location installed. Provide NEMA 3R construction for all transformers installed under piping. Refer to Drawings for ratings. All products shall be manufactured in North America and shall meet or exceed latest DOE standards.

B. TEMPERATURE RISE: Design shall use 220° C insulation and operate with a maximum temperature rise of 150° C above a 40° C ambient.

C. TAPS: High voltage windings shall be provided with two 2½% taps FCAN and four 2½% taps FCBN.

D. NOISE: The manufacturer shall properly isolate the core and coil from the enclosure with vibration isolation pads in order to minimize the transmission of vibration and noise. Noise levels shall not be more than NEMA and ANSI Standards.

E. Identification: Install lamacoid nameplate with 5/16" letters on front face showing transformer name and voltage. Attach with mastic and two screws. Coordinate to give same name as shown on drawings. Example:

Transformer XL 45 KVA, K=13

480V-208Y/120 Volts, 3 Phase, 4 Wire

F. MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Acme, Hammond, Siemens and Square D.

2.1 ADJUSTABLE BREAKERS

A. LARGE TRANSFORMERS: Provide adjustable type breakers for overcurrent protection of all low voltage transformers 112.5kVA and larger.

B. COORDINATION STUDY: Provide an electrical coordination study to determine settings of adjustable circuit breakers to match equipment served. Include revised setting of adjustable circuit breakers during the warranty period required to eliminate nuisance

Aldine Independent School District TRANSFORMERSJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 22 13MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 22 13-2

tripping. Provide copy of the coordination study with closeout documents.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDSJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 24 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 24 00-1

SECTION 26 24 00 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 SWITCHBOARDS

A. GENERAL: Universal building type switchboard fabricated in accordance with NEMA standards. Switchboards and circuit breakers shall be listed for use with 75° C wiring. All products shall be manufactured in the United States.

B. CABINETS: All switchboards 1600 amp and larger shall be totally enclosed free standing circuit breaker type switchboards as shown on the electrical drawings. The switchboard framework shall be formed code gauge steel, rigidly welded and bolted together to support all cover plates, bussing and component devices during shipment and installation. Each switchboard section shall have an open bottom and removable top, front and side plate. All circuit breaker connections shall be front accessible. The paint finish shall be gray enamel over a rust-inhibiting phosphate primer.

C. BUSSING: The switchboard bussing shall be silver plated copper and of sufficient cross-sectional area to continuously conduct rated full load current with a maximum average temperature rise of 65° C, above an ambient temperature of 40°C. The main horizontal buss bars between sections shall be located on the back of the switchboard to permit a maximum of available conduit area. The horizontal main buss bar supports, connections, and joints are to be bolted with grade 5 carriage bolts and Belleville washers to be free of required periodic maintenance. Drill buss bars for future extension both directions. Provide a full length ground buss in each cubicle.

D. SHORT CIRCUIT RATING: Each switchboard, as a complete unit, shall be given a single integrated equipment rating by the manufacturer. The integrated equipment short-circuit rating shall certify that all equipment is capable of withstanding the stresses of a fault equal to that of the least overcurrent protective device contained therein. Such rating shall be established by actual tests by the manufacturer on similar equipment construction as the subject switchboard. Busses shall be braced for a minimum of 50,000 amps symmetrical at 480V.

E. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the circuit


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 24 00-2

breaker handle taking a position between ON and OFF. All circuit breakers shall have an interrupting rating as shown on the drawings. Circuit breakers through 600A shall be Square D I-Limiter type. Circuit breakers 1000A and larger shall be Square D Type SE with LSG trip. Manufacturer shall provide system coordination study with recommended settings to ensure downstream circuit breakers will operate before distribution breakers. Provide study after main feeder length information is provided by the electrical contractor.

F. INSTRUMENTATION: Provide Shark 200 fully featured power and energy monitoring system sensing the entire switchboard. General Electric EPM6000 or equivalent by listed manufacturers will also be acceptable. Also provide an analog volt/ammeter independent of the electronic meter.

01 The display shall be mounted no lower than 45” nor higher than 72” above the concrete pad.

02 The monitoring system shall provide readouts for:

a. Current-per-phase

b. Phase-to-neutral voltage

c. Phase-to-phase voltage

d. Neutral-to-ground voltage

e. Phase frequency

f. KVA/KW instantaneous load

03 The monitoring system shall have waveform capture and data logging capabilities including:

a. Harmonics

b. Unbalance

c. Flicker

d. Swell

e. Dip

f. Interruption

04 System shall store historical information of these values for the past thirty days.

05 System shall have optical port for downloading information to a computer as well as having a method of connecting a remote computer for real time monitoring system.

06 The monitoring system shall be integrated into the existing building energy management system and shall provide all of the above monitoring and readout features directly through the building energy management system including waveform capture and historical logging.

07 The electrical contractor shall set up a meeting with the Engineer, Owner and Controls Contractor to review the desired metering programming and integration.

08 Factory representative shall set up meter per the Engineer’s direction and include two site visits during the warranty period (as needed) to assist in analyzing power quality problems.

G. SUPPRESSORS: Provide Square D Model SP3650 lighting surge suppresser with capacitor. Provide Square D Model IMA240 TVSS (rated for 240kA) with dry contacts and surge counter. Equipment shall be mounted in the switchboard.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 24 00-3

H. ARC ENERGY REDUCTION EQUIPMENT: Provide an energy-reducing maintenance (RELT) switch with local status indicator with all switchgear containing circuit breakers rated for or where the highest continuous current trip setting can be adjusted to 1200A or higher per NEC requirements. All documentation on the design, installation and operation of the RELT switch shall be included in O&M documentation.

I. NAME TAGS:

01 Identify each device, space and meter with an engraved lamacoid nameplate (5/16" high letters) showing equipment served and trip setting or space size. Attach nameplates with mastic and two sheetmetal screws.

02 Provide a master nameplate on switchboard in the following format. Replace the below information to match the project design.

Switchboard MSB

480Y/277V, 3, 4W

Main Buss: 2000 amps braced for xx,xxx amps symmetrical

Available Short Circuit Current: xxxxx amps

Date Installed:

03 Identification of ungrounded conductors: Provide permanent label indicating the color coding of phase conductors based on voltage as noted below:

480/277 Volt Switchboard

Phase A - Brown

Phase B - Purple

Phase C - Yellow

J. SIGNS

If there is an emergency generator installed provide the following signs at the main service switchboard:

AN EMERGENCY GENERATOR IS INSTALLED

AT THIS SITE.

WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD

EXISTS IF GROUNDING ELECTRODE

CONDUCTOR OR BONDING JUMPER

CONNECTION IN THIS EQUIPMENT

IS REMOVED WHILE ALTERNATE

SOURCE IS ENERGIZED.

K. COORDINATION STUDY: Provide an electrical short circuit coordination study to determine settings of adjustable circuit breakers and selections/ratings of non-adjustable circuit breakers, including downstream circuit breakers in other panels. Include revised setting of adjustable circuit breakers during the warranty period required to eliminate


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 24 00-4

nuisance tripping.

L. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Siemens and Square D.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELS

A. GENERAL: Provide for panels 600 amps and larger. Construction in accordance with NEMA standards. Panels and circuit breakers shall be listed for use with 75° C wiring. All products shall be manufactured in the United States.

B. CABINETS: Panelboard assembly shall be safety dead front type, enclosed in a code gauge steel cabinet with removable endwalls. Fronts shall be of code gauge, full-finished steel with rust-inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish. Provide locking door with front hinged trim to box with full length piano hinge and quarter turn fasteners, unless panel is located in a mechanical room. Provide the largest cabinet available for the ampacity panel schedules.

C. BUSSING: Buss structure and main lugs shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or buss bar not to exceed 50 degrees C rise above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories Standard UL 67. Busses shall be tin silver plated copper braced for the scheduled fault current (50,000 amperes minimum). Bussing shall accept the largest circuit breaker available for the ampacity scheduled even though only smaller size CB's are listed. Where space only is shown, bussing shall allow any combination of 1, 2 and 3 pole circuit breakers of various frame sizes.

D. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Circuit breakers shall bolt in or have Square D I-Line plug on construction. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between ON and OFF. Trip ratings of the circuit breaker shall be as shown on the panelboard schedule. All spaces shown shall include all buss connectors and any other provisions necessary for future breaker additions. Minimum 18,000 amperes interrupting capacity for circuit breakers 100A and larger.

E. SURGE SUPPRESSION: Panels noted to have TVSS surge suppression shall include TVSS mounted inside panel. See Section 2.4 for specification.

F. NAMEPLATES

01 Factory Nameplate: Provide information per industry standards but shall include voltage, phase, buss amperage and short circuit rating.

02 Field Nameplate: Provide lamacoid nameplate with 5/16" letters on front face showing panel name and amperage rating. Attach with mastic and two screws. Coordinate to give same name as shown on panelboard schedule. If used as main service panel provide short circuit available and rating information.

Panel DA 800A MCB

480Y/277V, 3, 4WFed from Switchboard MSB

03 Circuit Nameplate: For each circuit provide a lamacoid nameplate indicating load served and circuit breaker size. For spaces indicate maximum size circuit breaker that can be installed. Examples:

Panel HA 225A/3P

400A/3P Space

04 Identification of ungrounded conductors: Provide permanent label indicating the


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 24 00-5

color coding of phase conductors based on voltage as noted below:

480/277 Volt Panel

Phase A - Brown

Phase B - Purple

Phase C - Yellow

208Y/120 Volt Panel

Phase A - Black

Phase B - Red

Phase C - Blue

120/240 Volt Panel

Phase A - Black


Phase C - Blue

G. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Siemens and Square D.

2.3 LIGHTING PANELS

A. GENERAL: Provide for panels 400 amps and smaller. Circuit breaker type; Square D Type NQOD for 120/208-240 Volts, NF for 277/480 Volts. Construction shall comply with NEMA and U. L. Standards. Panels and circuit breakers shall be listed for use with 75° C wiring. Mount panel with top of can at 72" above finished floor. All products shall be manufactured in the United States.

B. CABINETS: Safety dead front type with front hinged trim to box with full length piano hinge and quarter turn fasteners; box made of code gage galvanized steel; provide wire bending space per NEC Table 373-6; door-in-door construction with both inner door and outer door with flush type lock and latch, all keyed alike.

C. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Plug in for 120/208-240 Volts, bolt in for 277/480 Volts; quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic trip; automatic tripping indicated by handle at midpoint position; multi-pole breakers to have common trip (handle ties are not acceptable). Minimum interrupting ratings shall be 14,000 Amps symmetrical at 277/480 Volts and 10,000 Amps symmetrical at 120/208-240 Volts. All main circuit breakers shall be rated 22,000 Amps minimum and be vertically mounted. Ratings as scheduled on drawings. Square D I-line construction with plug on breakers is acceptable for 277/480 Volts. Install circuit breakers in same order as shown on the drawings. Where spaces are noted, provide buss connectors and all other provisions necessary to add future breakers of any size and number of poles up to 100 amp and three poles.

D. BUSSING: Tin plated copper sized in accordance with NEMA temperature rise standards and installed completely throughout panel for installation of future breakers where schedule shows space only. Lugs U. L. rated for Cu/Al terminations. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings, buss bracing shall be 22,000 Amps symmetrical. Panels with 24 or more circuits shall have a minimum of 225 Amp bussing. Provide a ground bar in the Service Entrance Equipment and in each electrical panel having a branch circuit ground wire.

E. SURGE SUPPRESSION: Panels noted to have TVSS surge suppression shall include TVSS mounted inside panel. See TVSS section within this specification for more information. The surge suppress device shall not use any of the scheduled spaces. Provide additional bussing and larger can to accommodate the surge suppression device.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 24 00-6

F. DIRECTORY: Complete at end of job, typewritten, stating equipment or rooms served by circuit. Type even circuits on right side of card, odd on left side.

G. FINISH: Gray enamel over rust inhibiting treatment after fabrication and before assembly. After installation, and before acceptance by the Owner, assembly shall be painted with a rust inhibiting paint (color selected by Architect). Recessed cans may have galvanized finish.

H. NAMEPLATES

01 Factory Nameplate: Provide information per industry standards but shall include voltage, phase, buss amperage and short circuit rating.

02 Circuit Number Labels: All circuits and spaces shall be clearly labeled on the panel deadfront with the typed circuit number labeling provided by the switchgear manufacturer. Circuit numbers shall be attached adjacent to each circuit breaker and space on the panel, even circuits on right side, odd on left.

03 Field Nameplate: Provide lamacoid nameplate with 5/16" letters on front face showing panel name, voltage and amperage rating. Attach with mastic and two screws. Coordinate to give same name as shown on panelboard schedule.

Panel HA 225 MCB

480Y/277V, 3, 4W

Fed from Panel DA

04 Identification of ungrounded conductors: Provide permanent label indicating the color coding of phase conductors based on voltage as noted below:

480Y/277 Volt Panel

Phase A - Brown

Phase B - Purple

Phase C - Yellow

208Y/120 Volt Panel

Phase A - Black

Phase B - Red

Phase C - Blue

120/240 Volt Panel

Phase A - Black


Phase C - Blue

I. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Siemens and Square D.

2.4 SWITCHGEAR TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR (TVSS/SPD)

A. GENERAL: Provide TVSS equipment for electrical panels and equipment as noted on the Drawings. Unless noted to be mounted in the protected panel, TVSS shall be installed in NEMA 1 housing and mounted adjacent to the equipment to be protected. Connect TVSS to three pole circuit breaker in the panel with wiring as short and straight as possible.

B. DISPLAY: Provide digital transient counter with battery backup.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 24 00-7

C. SUPPRESSION MODES: System shall provide suppression of L-L, L-N, L-G and N-G transients.

D. RESPONSE TIME: 1 nanosecond or less.

E. EMI/RFI ATTENUATION: 38 dB or better.

F. WARRANTY: 10 year, non-prorated replacement.

G. TVSS RATING:

01 Panels smaller than 400 amps: 100 kAmps per phase

02 Panels 400 amps up to 800 amps: 160 kAmps per phase

03 Panels larger than 800 amps: 240 kAmps per phase

H. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Siemens and Square D, Current Technology and Liebert.

2.5 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER

A. GENERAL: The unit shall consist of one or more enclosed sections joined together to form a rigid, freestanding assembly meeting U. L. Standard UL-845. The enclosure shall be constructed in accordance with NEMA Standards for Type 1. Equipment and circuit breakers shall be listed for use with 75° C wiring.

B. ARRANGEMENT: The unit shall consist of vertical sections of individual motor starter compartments. A horizontal wireway shall be provided in the top of each vertical section and shall be arranged to provide full length continuity throughout the entire assembly. A vertical wire trough shall extend from bottom to top horizontal wireway of each vertical section. All wireways shall be totally isolated from the buss bars. Vertical sections shall be designed to accommodate plug-on units in front of board construction. A front accessible main lug compartment shall be provided at top of board.

C. BUSS BARS: A full size, continuous main buss shall extend horizontally through all vertical sections and be designed for future extension. Bars shall be plated copper, sized for ampacity scheduled. Each vertical section shall contain a full length buss, size based on the sum of all circuit breaker nameplates, including spaces that will be attached to buss. Provide a full length ground bar with vertical and horizontal bussing. Bar size shall be 20% or greater of the power buss size, 100 amp minimum. All buss bars shall be silver plated copper sized for 1000 amps per square inch maximum. Buss bracing shall be as scheduled.

D. PROTECTIVE DEVICES: Provide molded case circuit breakers for all starter and branch feeder units rated for 35,000 amp interrupting. Provide push to test feature and the ability to lock unit ON and OFF. Provide phase failure relay to de-energize starters on loss of a phase.

E. CONTROLLERS: Each controller shall be installed in an individual compartment with hinged door held closed with captive screws. The front mounted disconnect shall be interlocked with the door. Provide interlock override mechanism. The protective device shall be a magnetic circuit breaker. Each starter component shall be sized in accordance with NEMA Standards, unless specifically indicated otherwise on drawings. The minimum size starter shall be #1. Each unit shall be provided with a manual reset, adjustable electronic current sensing relay that protects for over-current, unbalanced current and phase loss. For small motors, provide the appropriate trip unit in the Size 1 starter. Provide interlocks described in the Mechanical Control Drawings and Specifications. Provide a spare NO auxiliary contact, individual 120 volt control transformer in each starter compartment, door mounted HOA switch and red LED running light.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 24 00-8

F. SURGE SUPPRESSION: Panels noted to have TVSS surge suppression shall include TVSS mounted inside panel. See Section 2.4 for specification.

G. WIRING: The control center wiring shall be NEMA Class 1B.

H. NAMEPLATES: Provide engraved lamacoid nameplate for each starter, stating load served, circuit breaker size and motor horsepower. Each space shall be marked with the name "space", maximum circuit breaker size and maximum motor horsepower. Provide master nameplate stating control center name, voltage, amperage and short circuit rating. All nameplates shall be attached with mastic and two sheetmetal screws. Provide label indicating wiring color coding.

I. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Siemens and Square D or approved equal.

2.6 NAMEPLATES

J. In addition to the nameplate specified with the various equipment, provide the following engraved lamacoid nameplate with 5/16" high letters on each lighting panel, distribution panel and transformer:

CAUTION

DO NOT ADD OR MODIFY CIRCUITS WHILE ENERGIZED

THIS PANEL IS POWERED FROM PANEL DA.

Replace PANEL with TRANSFORMER as appropriate. Replace PANEL DA with the actual device as shown on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District WIRING DEVICESJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 27 26MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 27 26-1

SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 WIRING DEVICES

A. GENERAL: All devices must be suitable for use intended, and have voltage and current ratings adequate for loads served. All devices shall have terminals designed for use with stranded wire. All receptacles shall have a grounded pole and green painted grounding screw. Grounded receptacles shall ground lug internally connected to mounting tabs. Wall outlets shall be installed with the ground pin down. Devices installed in or served through fire rated structures shall be fireproofed in a manner compatible with the U. L. fire rating.

B. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Catalog numbers listed below are Hubbell or Legrand (Pass & Seymour), unless indicated otherwise. Equivalent items made by Arrow-Hart, Bryant and Leviton will be acceptable provided they meet specification requirements. All devices shall be ivory color unless noted otherwise. Devices on a generator shall be red. Computer/isolated ground outlets shall be orange.

C. WALL SWITCHES: (20 Amp/277 Volt) HBL1221

D. KEYED SWITCHES: (20 Amp/277 Volt) HBL1221L (Hubbell only) with 1209 key with each switch.

E. MOMENTARY KEYED SWITCHES: (20 Amp/277 Volt) HBL1557L (Hubbell only) with 1209 key with each switch.

F. MOTOR RATED SWITCH WITH PILOT LIGHT: (20 amp, 277V) P&S PS20AC1-RPL7, (20 amp, 120/277V, Double Pole) P&S PS20AC2-RPL, (30 Amp, 120/277V, Double Pole) P&S PS30AC2-RPL. Switch shall have minimum rating of upstream overcurrent protection.

G. CONVENIENCE OUTLETS: (20 amp/125v/3 wire) Legrand TR5362. (Heavy-Duty, Tamper-Resistant) (Red if on generator)

H. COMPUTER OUTLETS: (20 amp/125v/3 wire) Legrand TRIG5362 (Heavy-Duty, Tamper-Resistant & Isolated Ground, Orange Color). (Red if on generator)


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 27 26-2

I. GFI OUTLET: (20 amp/125v/3 wire) (Heavy-Duty, Tamper-Resistant, LED Indicators, Auto Self-Test).

01 Hubbell GFTRST20I or Legrand 2097TR-I

02 GFI outlets in the kitchen shall be P&S 2097TRWR-I only.

03 GFI outlets at the exterior of the building or damp/wet locations shall be weather-resistant, Hubbell GFTWRST20I or Legrand 2097TRWR-I

J. ISOLATED GROUND GFI OUTLETS: (20 amp/125v/3 wire), Legrand 2097IGTR-O or Hubbell GFTWRST20IG (Tamper Resistant, Orange Color, Isolated Ground, Auto Self-Test, GFI).

K. CONVENIENCE OUTLET WITH USB CHARGING PORTS: (20 amp/125v/3wire), Hubbell USB20X2I (Tamper Resistant, 2-USB Type 2.0 Ports, 3.8 Amp, 5 Volt DC)

L. SPECIAL DEVICES: Refer to Drawings, all devices shall be specification grade. Provide matching cord and cap.

M. PLATES: Provide Type 302/304 smooth stainless steel plates for all devices; provide combination and/or gangable plates where adjacently located multi-outlet assemblies are indicated on drawings which shall include multi-switch installations. Plates for surface mounted switch or outlet boxes shall be Sierra galvanized steel handy box plates (H series). Mounting screws shall be stainless steel. Jumbo plates are not acceptable.

N. OUTDOOR COVERS: Electrical devices noted “WP” installed under canopies or other areas not subject to direct rainfall shall have aluminum self-closing covers that are rated for wet location with cover closed, Hubbell RW5xxxx Series. Devices subject to direct rainfall shall have Hubbell WPxxx Series aluminum cover rated for wet location with cord connected to device.

O. INTERIOR FLOOR OUTLETS: For standard receptacles mounted in floors provide Wiremold 880 OMNI floor boxes. Provide cast iron, on-grade style for ground level floors, and fire rated steel type for above grade floors. Provide cover with hinged access openings. For furniture feed floor outlets provide Wiremold EFBFF-OG floor boxes. Provide matching heavy duty hinged metal floor cover and ring to match floor material listed on Architectural Floor Finish Schedule Equal by Hubbell shall be acceptable.

Floor receptacles or telephone outlets served through U. L. fire rated floor structures shall use Hubbell SystemOne Recessed Poke-Thru assembly with cover. Floor receptacles at grade level shall be installed in Hubbell SystemOne CFB6G30RCR 6-gang adjustable box with cover. Provide matching device plate for power receptacles and low voltage devices. Provide blank inserts for unused spaces. Provide dividers to maintain separation between different services. Provide matching heavy duty hinged metal floor cover and ring to match floor material listed on Architectural Floor Finish Schedule. Color and cover shape shall be selected by Architect.

P. EXTERIOR IN-USE FLOOR BOXES: Single service, 2-gang, nonmetallic, flush in-grade ground box. UL listed to UL50E Type 6P and IP68 requirements while in use. Tested to UL2996 for use in the ground in all weather conditions. Cover assembly and ground box body shall be by same manufacturer to maintain UL listings. Tamper-resistant, locking cover assembly. Interlock boxes at same location. Box and cover assembly finish shall be selected by Architect.

01 20A, 120V Cover Assembly: NEMA 6P rated wiring enclosure with two (2) pre-wired NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacles. UL50E type 6P & IP68 rating in outdoor locations.

02 30A, 120V Cover Assembly: NEMA 6P rated wiring enclosure with one (1) pre-wired NEMA L5-30R corrosion resistant receptacles. UL50E type 6P & IP68


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 27 26-3

rating in outdoor locations.

03 Low Voltage Cover Assembly: Able to accept up to 12 communication ports or 8 AV devices. Cabling and termination by installing contractor. UL50E type 4X & IP65 rating in outdoor locations.

Q. DIMMERS:

01 Provide single pole and 3-way operation as indicated.

02 Stand Alone Line Voltage Slide Dimmer: Legrand HAD-703, Pass & Seymour Titan Series, Philips Sunrise Series, Leviton Renoir II Series or equal. Provide dimmer switch matching controlled fixture type and 150% of load served.

03 Stand Alone 0-10V Slide Dimmer: Legrand Radiant Series, Philips Sunrise Series, Leviton Renoir II Series or equal. Provide dimmer switch matching controlled fixture type and 150% of load served.

R. TELE-POWER POLE: Ivory steel, two compartment pole with two duplex outlets, two modular telephone jacks and "mouse hole" grommet. Wiremold 30TP-4V

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICESJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 28 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 28 00-1

SECTION 26 28 00 LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 FUSED AND SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. GENERAL: Provide a safety disconnect switch for each motor, motor starter, electric duct heater and other equipment required by the NEC. Provide fusible where shown. Switches shall be listed for use with 75 C wiring. All products shall be manufactured in the United States.

B. TYPE: Heavy duty switch sized for load served; non-fusible where used purely as disconnect device. Fused switches shall accommodate Class RK1 fuses. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for switches inside, and NEMA 3R for switches outside unless noted to be NEMA 4X stainless steel on the Drawings. Switches located in the kitchen area shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel. Provide combination starter disconnect switch where shown on the drawings. Disconnect switches for motors controlled by variable frequency drives shall have auxiliary “early break” contact to turn off VFD when motor is disconnected.

C. FUSES: See section on fuses.

D. NAMEPLATE: Provide each device with an engraved nameplate showing load served.

E. MANUFACTURERS: General Electric Type TH, Siemens and Square D.

2.2 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. TYPE: Single or multi-pole circuit breaker suitable for the short circuit requirements as listed on the Drawings. Mount in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure to match application.

B. NAMEPLATE: Provide each device with an engraved nameplate showing load served.

C. MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Siemens and Square D.

2.3 FUSES

A. GENERAL: Provide fuses for all fused switches noted on the Drawings.

Aldine Independent School District LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICESJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 28 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 28 00-2

B. TYPE: Fuses to 600 amps shall be low peak, dual element, time delay fuses – LPS Class RK1. Larger fuses shall Limitron KTU Class L fuses.

C. SPARES: Provide 10% spare fuses of each size, minimum of three per size. Install in cabinet in main mechanical room.

D. MANUFACTURERS: Bussman.

2.4 PHASE LOSS MONITOR

A. Provide a Time Mark Series 18 monitor for each motor one horsepower and larger not controlled by a variable speed drive. Wire into starter control circuit to de-energize motor on phase loss, phase reversal or low voltage. Unit automatically resets after fault conditions are corrected, after adjustable time delay. Do not provide for chiller or DX compressor motors. Adjust trip level to 20% below motor voltage and trip delay to mid-scale. Re-adjust set points at the Engineer’s direction should frequent, nuisance tripping occur.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLERSJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 29 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602


SECTION 26 29 00 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 PHASE LOSS MONITOR

A. Motor starters not in motor control centers are provided under Division 23.

B. For each motor starter, provide and install a Time Mark Series 18 monitor. Wire into starter control circuit to de-energize motor on phase loss, phase reversal or low voltage. Unit automatically resets after fault conditions are corrected, after adjustable time delay. Do not provide for chiller or DX compressor motors, or motors controlled by a VFD. Adjust trip level to 20% below motor voltage and trip delay to mid-scale. Re-adjust set points at the Engineer’s direction should frequent, nuisance tripping occurs.

2.2 CONTACTORS

A. GENERAL: Contactors shall have poles and rating consistent with the load being served but shall have a minimum of three poles, 30 amps (20 amps tungsten) per pole at 600 volts. The load may consist of all types of ballast and tungsten lighting, resistance and motor loads. Contactors for lighting control shall be provided with a minimum of two (2) spare poles for future use.

B. CONTACTS: The unit shall have 100% rated double-break, silver-cadmium-oxide power contacts, field convertible from N.O. to N.C. and vice-versa and with clearly visible N.O. and N.C. contact-status indicators.

C. CONTROL: The unit shall be electrically held installed in a NEMA 1 enclosure. Provide 120 volt coil. Provide controls transformer with input and output fusing if circuit controlled is not 120 volt. Provide HOA switch to allow manual control of lights. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure for exterior locations or as indicated on the drawings.

D. LABELING: List circuits controlled inside enclosure. Provide contactor nameplate.

E. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Siemens and Square D.

Aldine Independent School District LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLERSJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 29 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602


2.3 TIME CLOCKS

A. GENERAL: Contacts shall have poles and rating consistent with the load being served but shall have a minimum of two circuits, 20 amps per circuit at 277 volts. The load may consist of all types of ballasts, resistance and motor loads. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure in wet locations.

B. Mechanical Time Clock: Two circuit, seven day operation with spring wound carry over feature. Intermatic Model T51211BC for photocell lighting control and T7000B Series for other uses.

C. Electronic Time Clock: Two circuit, seven day operation with battery backup. Intermatic Model ET1715CR.

D. Astronomical Time Clock: Two circuit, seven day operation with battery backup. Intermatic Model ET8215C

E. Water Heater Time Clock: Electronic programmable timer with battery backup. Intermatic EH10 with 2T2926A enclosure.

2.4 TIMER SWITCH

A. Spring Wound Auto Off timer with no hold feature. Provide Intermatic FF60MC 60 minute timer unless scheduled to be a different time cycle.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICESJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 43 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 43 00-1

SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 EXTERNAL TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR (TVSS/SPD)

A. GENERAL: Provide SPD equipment for electrical panels and equipment as noted on the Drawings. Some equipment may be noted to have SPD integral to panel or switchboard.

B. INSTALLATION: External SPD shall be installed in NEMA 4 housing and mounted adjacent to the equipment to be protected. Connect SPD to three pole circuit breaker in the panel with wiring as short and straight as possible. The terms TVSS and SPD shall be used interchangeably where they appear in these documents.

C. DISPLAY: Provide digital transient counter with battery backup.

D. SUPPRESSION MODES: System shall provide suppression of L-L, L-N, L-G and N-G transients.

E. RESPONSE TIME: 1 nanosecond or less.

F. EMI/RFI ATTENUATION: 38 dB or better.

G. WARRANTY: 10 year, non-prorated replacement.

H. SPD RATING:

01 Panels smaller than 400 amps: 100 kAmps per phase

02 Panels 400 amps up to 800 amps: 160 kAmps per phase

03 Panels larger than 800 amps: 240 kAmps per phase

I. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Siemens and Square D, Current Technology and Liebert.

2.2 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR (SPD)

A. EQUIPMENT PROTECTED: Install for fire alarm panel, security panel, access control panel and CCTV panel branch circuits, including all sub panels and power supplies.

Aldine Independent School District SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICESJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 43 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 43 00-2

B. INSTALLATION: Install device in junction box surface mounted in mechanical rooms or above accessible ceiling if equipment is not in mechanical room. The branch circuit shall terminate on the SPD then subfeed the equipment. The wire between the device and the equipment shall be approximately three to five feet long.

C. SPD MODEL: Ditek Model DTK-120SR surge suppressor

2.3 TELEPHONE LINE TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR (SPD)

A. GENERAL: Install for telephone connections to fire alarm and security alarm dialers.

B. SPD MODEL: Ditek Model DTK-MRJ31XSCP-WP

2.4 LOW VOLTAGE CABLING TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR (SPD)

A. GENERAL: Provide surge protectors to protect low voltage cabling at all locations where it enters and exits a building.

B. SPD MODEL: Ditek 2MHLP Series. Provide model matching voltage of cabling to be protected.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District INTERIOR LIGHTINGJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 51 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 51 00-1

SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 LIGHT FIXTURES

A. GENERAL: Provide all fixtures as shown, completely wired and securely attached to supports. Include all necessary accessories including heavy duty, chrome plated wire guards on high bay and indirect fixtures, and over exit lights located in the gymnasium. Fixture models scheduled are to show general type of fixtures required. Furnish mounting design and trim to fit type of ceiling and finish on which fixture is to be installed. Fixture shall be designed to operate satisfactorily where installed including the required fire proofing. All lens doors shall securely attach to the housing with spring operated latches to prevent release due to vibration or gravity.

B. PAINT: All 2x4 or similar fixture housings shall have a complete coverage of white enamel or baked polyester powder finish with 85% minimum reflectivity.

C. PLASTIC REFRACTORS/DIFFUSERS: Material shall be light-stable 100% virgin acrylic with a nominal thickness of .125”.

D. LED FIXTURES: LED lamps shall be 4000K color temperature with a minimum CRI of 80 and shall come standard with 0-10V dimming and a five year warranty on LED boards and drivers. All LED fixtures shall be DesignLights Consortium (DLC) or EnergyStar certified. Models shall have a minimum projected life of 50,000 hours at 70% lumen output using IESNA LM-79, LM-80 and TM-21 standards.

E. BALLASTS: Ballasts in or serving exterior fixtures shall be cold weather rated. All ballasts shall be certified as CEE qualifying ballasts. Ballasts shall be warranted for four years from date of substantial completion of the project. Ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance, Motorola or Magnetek.

F. EMERGENCY POWER PACKS: Emergency battery packs/drivers shall be high output, self-contained, and mounted internal to fixture. Units shall be long life nickel cadmium sized for 90 minute operation with a 120/277 volt solid state charger and automatic transfer switch.

01 Unit shall provide a minimum nominal 1400 lumen output from the specified LED or fluorescent lamps.

Aldine Independent School District INTERIOR LIGHTINGJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 51 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 51 00-2

02 Units for fluorescent fixtures shall power a minimum of two lamps per fixture.

03 Units for exterior fixtures shall be wet and cold weather rated.

04 Emergi-lite, Iota, Bodine or approved equal.

G. FIRE PROTECTION: Provide fixture fire protection as required by U. L. Fire Resistive Index for the type ceiling to be installed. Provide additional fireproofing as required by the local building code. Protection is specified under the Ceiling Section of these Specifications.

H. SUPPORT: Securely support fixtures to prevent the fixture from falling. Lay-in fixtures shall be supported per the ceiling fire rating as specified by the Architect. Surface and pendant fluorescent fixtures shall be supported with two supports per four foot section. Provide caddy clips for recessed fixtures. Pendants for indirect light fixtures shall be securely attached to structure or Unistruts across joists using threaded connections. High bay fixtures shall have manufacturer supplied quick disconnect mounting hardware and safety cable.

I. SPARE PARTS AND ATTIC STOCK:

01 Provide the following spare devices for each school:

a. Emergency power packs Five (5)

b. Exit Signs to be installed as single or double sided Three (3)

02 Electrical contractor shall include in his bid the cost to provide and install the additional spare parts and associated wiring as directed by the owner/engineer. All devices not used during construction shall be turned over to the Owner at the time of job completion.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 55 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-1

SECTION 26 55 00 THEATRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL






E. Theatrical Lighting Rigging section 26 55 10.

F. Provide Shop Drawings per Section 26 00 00.

1.2 INTENT

A. The intent of this specification is to define parameters for furnishing and installing a complete and working new dimming and control system. Performance deviations will not be accepted. One company shall be responsible for installing or coordinating the install of all aspects of the stage equipment. Work under this section shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, transportation services, supervision, etc., necessary to complete installation of new stage equipment

B. All work must be done in compliance with the National Electric Code and applicable local codes.

C. Contractor is responsible for providing a complete and working system. All items needed for a complete and working system meeting the design intent of the plans and specifications are to be included, even if not specifically listed.

1.3 APPROVED EQUIPMENT

A. Dimming, Controls, Fixtures, and Motorized Hoist equipment: Approved manufacturer: Electronic Theatre Controls: 800-688-4116

1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Specific items of equipment are listed by trade names. The Owner has determined that these are the particular items desired by the Owner for quality and to ensure compatibility across the school district. It is neither the purpose nor intent of these documents to eliminate competitive bids. In order to allow proper and fair comparison of pricing, each contractor is required to submit his base bid price on the specified equipment.

B. A contractor may submit an alternate bid based on equipment different from that specified only if that Contractor has received prior approval in writing from the Owner at least 10 days prior to bid. Accompanying each request shall be a letter specifically detailing each substitution including catalog data, specifications, operative samples, technical information, drawings, performance and test data, and complete descriptive and functional information to assist in a fair evaluation. Substitution requests shall be


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-2

submitted for each component of the lighting and rigging system and shall be evaluated separately. Requests shall also include a detailed line by line specification compliance letter. Any deviations from the specifications or drawings shall be listed and explained. Failure to submit any substitution for prior approval or not providing sufficient data for evaluation shall require the exact item specified to be furnished. Approval will be granted by Addenda Only.

C. Owner's approval of a substitution for bid purposes will not relieve the contractor from the responsibility of meeting all specification criteria. If an approval of a substitution is granted, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for any and all changes such substitution shall require.


A. To ensure a complete uniform installation and single point of responsibility for system design and warranty, one manufacturer shall provide all dimming, rigging, control system and fixture components. Mixing of equipment brands will not be accepted.

B. Manufacturer shall provide local on-site service for the system for a period of two years from date of acceptance by the Owner. This person or firm must be regularly engaged in the service of dimmers. A salesperson or sales agent without dedicated service personnel does not meet this requirement.

C. This specification details specific operational and functional needs of the owner. Deviations from the performance requirements will not be accepted from any supplier. Contractor assumes the responsibility of removing any non-complying material discovered during the warranty period and replacing it with specification compliant equipment.

D. Due to the specialty nature of theatrical lighting equipment, a Theatrical Systems Contractor shall provide the theatrical dimming, rigging, and control equipment to the Project Electrical Contractor, as well as providing support and coordination services to ensure a complete working system.

E. The Theatrical Systems Contractor shall be an authorized dealer of the specified manufacturers and have been actively engaged in the sales, installation, repair and maintenance of theatrical lighting equipment for no less than ten full (10) years. Evidence of experience for projects of similar size and scope shall be submitted if requested. This evidence shall include a reference list for a minimum of five projects including: job name, contact name and phone number, scope and contract value.

F. The Theatrical Systems Contractor shall be an authorized service center for repair and support of the specified dimming products with a dedicated ETC Certified service technician available for local support.

G. The Theatrical Systems Contractor shall provide personnel with ETCP Rigging Certification for the installation of all overhead rigging components.

1.6 SERVICES

A. Services of qualified project manager, representing the manufacturer, and employed full time in the sales and service of control systems, shall be provided during the installation period to answer questions and review the installation.

B. Services of a qualified technician, representing the manufacturer, and employed full time in the service of control systems, shall be provided for one visit upon 21 days notice. This technician shall terminate all low voltage control wiring, inspect the installation, energize the system, and program the architectural control system. He shall also instruct the


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-3

owner in proper operation and maintenance of the system.

C. During the warranty period, the manufacturer shall provide a toll-free 24-hour-per-day number for telephone technical support and service request.

1.7 ARCHITECTURAL CONTROLS

A. Architectural control system shall include a high-resolution color touchscreen to provide the owner a contextual visual basis for lighting control without requiring specialized training or orientation for operators.

B. Preprogram Touchscreen LCD Station with (8) preset recalls that provide general stage control suitable for a variety of school events. Coordinate needed scenarios with school principal. Include as a minimum: Worklights, Rehearsal, Speaking Event, and Performance Event. Touchscreen shall include a color picker, a visual color wheel, for selecting colors on the LED fixtures. Touchscreen station shall include pages for adjusting individual lighting zones and recording into user-defined presets. Recording ability shall be password protected. Touchscreen controls without a color picker that has hue/saturation inputs for selecting LED fixture colors shall not be acceptable.

C. Within 6 months, if requested by owner, contractor shall schedule a return visit to make adjustments to the programming of the LCD Touchscreen Station and give follow-up training of equipment, if needed. Contractor shall not be responsible for regular maintenance such as lamp burnout and fixture refocus, but shall list any deficiencies found and provide a written report of any maintenance needed or deficiencies found

1.8 DRAWINGS

A. Dimming System Manufacturer shall provide .pdf electronic files for submittals, including system risers, rack schedules, and manufacturer cut sheets for all equipment.

B. Dimming System Manufacturer shall provide .pdf electronic files for Operation & Maintenance Manuals, to include Operation Manuals for all supplied equipment.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. The dimming manufacturer shall provide a two (2) year warranty on the entire lighting system from date of acceptance.

B. The dimming manufacturer shall provide an eight (8) year warranty on the dimmer rack and modules, excluding control electronics.

1.10 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section includes the following lighting control system equipment

01 Dimmers

02 Controls

03 Distribution

04 Motorized Hoist

05 Lighting instruments, lamps, and associated portable equipment

B. Work under this section shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, transportation services, supervision, etc., necessary to complete the installation of new stage equipment as detailed in these specifications and accompanying documents.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-4

C. The Theatrical Systems Contractor shall be responsible for the following:

01 Provide all dimming, control, distribution, fixtures, and hoist equipment as detailed and required in these specifications and associated drawings

02 Provide shop drawings indicating system layout, control wiring, physical mounting locations, and mounting techniques of all equipment

03 Furnish and install fixed hanging positions over stage, and motorized hoist front of house upon structure provided by the general contractor or structural contractor.

04 Install pipe mounted circuit boxes and raceways as required

05 Provide Factory Authorized Service Technician to perform system commissioning, low voltage terminations, installation of control plates, system programming, and minimum 2 hours training to on-site staff and 2 hours training to Owner’s maintenance representatives.

06 Provide emergency bypass equipment as detailed. Coordinate with EC for emergency wiring needs, and fully test all emergency operation scenarios. Report any emergency operation deficiencies to the electrical contractor and the general contractor.

07 The System Contractor shall employ only fully trained stage riggers and mechanics, for the erection of the stage equipment. The stage riggers shall be completely familiar with the type of equipment to be installed. A competent job superintendent shall be on the job at all times when work is in progress. The job superintendent must be ETCP certified in theatre rigging. A copy of the certification must be furnished to the General Contractor prior to the start of the installation.

D. The Project Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the following, with performance requirements as specified in other Division 26 specifications:

01 Installation of all dimming and control racks and equipment, including mounting of racks on walls, power feeds as required, and installation of custom back boxes.

02 Provision and installation of all standard back boxes

03 Provision and installation of all 120v distribution circuits, and all 120/208v feeder circuits for the theatrical lighting system

04 Terminating of all 120v and 120/208v power and distribution circuits, both in the dimmer cabinet, and at the circuit distribution.

05 Provision and installation of all conduit, junction boxes, electrical wire ways, and cable trays as required for the lighting systems, including low voltage control systems.

06 Pulling all high and low voltage cable into conduit

07 Clean all racks, panels, and boxes of dirt, dust, and debris, re-assemble all equipment, and replace all panels, covers, and screws prior to time of system factory energization and training

08 Coordination with the Theatrical Contractor on all aspects of the rigging and electrical installation and low voltage cable runs. Follow all manufacturer submittal plans and installation recommendations. Actively facilitate coordination with the General Contractor and Structural Engineer for all structural attachment needs. Schedule adequate time at the end of the job for Theatrical Systems Contractor to commission the system before turnover to the owner.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-5

09 At time of System Commissioning, Project Electrical Contractor is responsible for providing access to all low voltage termination points for termination and testing to the Service Technician. This includes lifts, ladders and personnel required to reach any position the Service Technician needs access to. Electrical Contractor shall also provide personnel as needed to the Service Technician for troubleshooting and any needed wiring changes, terminations, or testing. This person shall be made available whenever the service technician is on the job site.

10 Electrical Contractor is responsible for advance scheduling with the Theatrical Systems Contractor. Theatrical Systems Contractor shall be given at least 21 days notice of request for system startup. Electrical Contractor is responsible for having all equipment installed and wiring pulled & terminated prior to the arrival of the Theatrical Systems Contractor Service Technician for commissioning. If the jobsite is not ready when the Theatrical Systems Contractor has been scheduled to arrive, and additional trip(s) are necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall pay necessary additional trip charges .

E. All components necessary to make the system a complete and working lighting system shall be provided.

F. Verify site conditions and system layout during the project approval process, coordinating with other trades as required.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING FOR THE SYSTEM:

A. 1 DRD6 Unison Dimming Rack

B. 6 R20 Dual 20A Relay Modules (12 switched circuits)

C. 1 ETC P-ACP: Paradigm Architectural Control Processor

D. 1 ETC P-SPM: Paradigm Station Power Module

E. 1 Pathway 4813 series installation RDM DMX repeater.

F. 2 Data Control Station: DMX Input, flush mounted

G. 2 Data Control Station: DMX Output, pipe mounted with backbox and U-bolt kit

H. 1 P-LCD Color Touchscreen LCD Station

I. 1 ETC Colorsource 20 Control Console

J. 1 50’ DMX Control Cable

K. 10 ETC 1 circuit outlet box, twistlock connector, and U-bolt hardware.

L. 10 ETC Colorsource Spot Ellipsoidals 26 degree EDLT w/ Pipe clamp, powercon twistlock connector, DMX Cable, safety cable, and 4 color integrated LED light engine.

M. 10 ETC Colorsource PAR Fixtures, complete with yoke, c-clamp, medium and wide flood lenses. Power lead with standard twistlock connector, DMX cable, and 4 color integrated LED light engine


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-6

2.2 DIMMER RACK

A. The dimmer rack shall be the Unison DRD Series dimmer rack as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.

B. Unison DRD dimmer rack and associated dimmer modules shall include an eight year warranty on parts and workmanship. Control Processor is under a two year warranty.

C. The dimmer rack shall be a surface mounted, dead front switchboard, constructed of 18-guage formed steel panels with a hinged, lockable full-height door containing an integral electrostatic air filter. Filter shall be removable for easy cleaning. The rack door shall have an opening to allow limited access to the control module face panel.

D. All rack components shall be properly treated and finished. Exterior surfaces shall be finished in fine textured, scratch-resistant, powder-based epoxy paint. Top, bottom, and side knockouts shall facilitate conduit entry.

E. The fully digital dimmer rack shall have six or twelve dimmer module spaces and one control module and station power module.

F. Dimmer racks shall be designed to allow easy insertion and removal of dimmer and control modules. Supports shall be provided for precise alignment of modules into power and signal connector blocks. With modules removed, racks shall provide clear front access to all load, neutral and control wire terminations.

G. Contact Closure - Dimmer rack shall have 4 configurable dry contact closure inputs and 4 outputs. One input to be utilized to take signal from fire alarm system and force lighting loads to full on in case of emergency.

H. Dimmer racks shall be available in 100, 120, 230 and 277 volt, 3 phase, main lug configurations. 120 volt rack enclosures shall be field configurable for single phase operation without the need for additional components

I. Dimmer racks shall be supplied pre-wired by the manufacturer. The contractor shall be required to provide input feed, load, and control wiring.

J. External Processing enclosures shall be designed to support the wire terminations for AC (single phase), Echelon link power, 24Vdc, configurable DMX512A (In or Out), DMX512A Output, RS232 Serial In/Out ,Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 5/5e, 4x Contact Closure In, and 4x Contact Closure Out

K. All dimmer rack control wire connections shall be terminated via factory provided connectors.

L. Standard Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR) shall be 22,000 at 100-277 Volt. Higher SCCR ratings, up to 100,000 SCCR, shall be possible when used with an AX series Auxiliary Rack Enclosure.

M. The rack enclosure shall support voltage regulation including, minimum and maximum scale voltages with offsets

N. Rack enclosure shall support a UL924 listed contact input for emergency lighting control bypass. Emergency lighting input shall support load shedding

O. With an ETC Dimmer Doubler, it shall be possible to split the output of a single dimmer into two separate signals. Both outputs shall be transmitted along the same set of wires from the dimmer modules to the Dimmer Doubler to provide individual levels for Source Four fixtures using a 77v lamp. ETC control consoles (or any other type of console equipped with an electronic patch and DMX protocol) shall enable each Dimmer Doubled output of a dimmer to be patched to an individual control channel, increasing the number of available dimming control circuits.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-7

2.3 DIMMER MODULES

A. The dimmer modules shall be the Unison dimmer modules as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.,

B. Each dimmer module shall contain up to two single-pole circuit breakers, a solid-state switching module, associated toroidal filters, and power and control connectors.

C. Modules shall be keyed so that dimmer modules of different capacity shall not be interchangeable

D. Dimmer modules shall include toroidal filters to reduce the rate of current rise time resulting from switching the SCRs.. Modules shall offer 350 or 500 uS. filter rise times. All dimmers shall maintain their published rise time and/or fall time regardless of duty cycle or rack temperatures.

E. Power efficiency for standard dimmers shall be at least 97 percent at full load with a no-load loss of 3V RMS. The dimmer shall accept hot patching of a cold incandescent load up to the full rated capacity of the dimmer.

F. Dimmer modules shall be fully plug-in and factory wired. Dimmer modules shall consist of a heavy duty, die-cast aluminum chassis with integral face panel. No tools shall be required for module removal and insertion. Dimmer modules shall be UL Recognized

G. Available selected 120v dimmer modules include:

01 D15: Dual 15A Dimmer Module – 350ms

02 D20: Dual 20A Dimmer Module – 350ms

03 D15E: Dual 15A Dimmer Module – 500ms

04 D20E: Dual 20A Dimmer Module – 500ms

05 D15F: Single 15A 2 wire Dimmer Module

06 D20F: Single 20A 2 wire Dimmer Module

07 D15FB: Single 15A Emergency Constant Dimmer Module

08 D20FB: Single 20A Emergency Constant Dimmer Module

09 R15: Dual 15A Relay Module

10 R20: Dual 20A Relay Module

11 CC15: Dual 15A Constant Current Module

12 CC20: Dual 20A Constant Current Module

13 ELV10: Dual 10A Electronic Low Voltage Dimmer Module

14 AFM: Air Flow Module

H. Available 277v dimmer modules options include:

01 AD15: Dual 15A Dimmer Module

02 AD15F: Single 15A 2 wire Dimmer Module

03 AD15FB: Single 15A Emergency Constant Dimmer Module

04 AR15: Dual 15A Relay Module

05 ACC15: Dual 15A Constant Current Module

06 AD20: Dual 20A Dimmer Module

07 AD20F: Single 20A 2 wire Dimmer Module


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-8

08 8AD20FB: Single 20A Emergency Constant Dimmer Module

09 AR20: Dual 20A Relay Module

10 ACC20: Dual 20A Constant Current Module

11 AELV5: Dual 5A Electronic Low Voltage Dimmer Module

12 AFM: Air Flow Module

2.4 ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL PROCESSOR

A. The Architectural Control Processor shall be the Unison Paradigm P-ACP Series Control Processor as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.

B. The Architectural Control Processor (ACP) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series Dimming Enclosures and ERn Series Control Enclosures.

C. The processor shall utilize microprocessor based, solid state technology to provide multi-scene lighting and building control.

01 ACP shall support functions such as station programming, macro sequencing, electronic lockout, room combine and astronomical time clock events. ACP station processor shall allow configuration of the control system via the menus. See software section for additional system details.

02 When used in a dimming enclosure, the ACP shall allow access to dimming control menus including the status screen, dimming configuration screen, backup menu, test menu and configuration menu.

D. One ACP shall be rated to drive 1024 channels of control, 1024 zones, 64 rooms, 512 presets, 62 button or button/fader stations and 6 Touchscreen Stations

E. ACP module electronics shall be convection cooled.

F. The ACP shall provide front-panel RJ45 jack, Secure Digital (SD) card slot, and Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port for configuration and data exchange.

G. Architectural Lighting System configuration and program information shall be stored in flash memory, which does not require battery backup.

H. The ACP shall be contained in a plug-in assembly and require no discrete wiring connections; all wiring shall be terminated into Dimming or Control Enclosure.

I. The ACP shall support the following communications:

01 Echelon LinkPower

02 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af compliant Ethernet networking with TCP/IP, ESTA BSR E1.17 Advanced Control Networks (ACN) and ESTA BSR E1.31 (sACN) Protocols

03 EIA-232 serial protocol

04 ESTA DMX512A, configurable as input or output ports

05 Dry contact closure inputs

06 Dry contact closure outputs, rated at 1A@30VDC

2.5 ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL STATIONS

J. Function: The Unison Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Preset/Fader, Color Touchscreen, IR or Astronomical time clock


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-9

controls.

K. System macros (sequences) shall be programmable via Light Designer system software.

01 Macro sequence steps shall include preset selection, wall status change, station property change (template), zone property change, timed delay, jump to macro, and stop macro.

02 Macro sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or Light Designer software.

L. System time clock events shall be programmable via Light Designer system software, or via the dimmer rack processor front panel controls.

01 Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day types include: any day, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. System shall support programming of additional custom or special day types.

02 Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day or periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using daylight savings time.

M. Station (Preset/Fader, Touchscreen, or IR) control components shall be designed to operate standard default or custom system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via Light Designer, the Windows-based configuration program.

01 Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation, record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, cue light, or room join/separate.

02 Optional fader functions include manual master control, individual zone control, fade rate control or preset master control.

03 Stations (Preset/Fader, LCD and IR) shall allow programming of station and component electronic lockout levels via Light Designer

N. 7” Touchscreen stations shall be 7”, WVGA (800x480) 24-bit color LCD touchscreen, fully configurable via Control Designer software.

01 Station finish shall be black/natural.

02 Station shall support up to 30 standard or custom graphical control pages with individual zone control, preset record and selection functions, room combine controls, custom function activation, and multi-level electronic lockout.

03 Configurations are loaded via SD card or USB key

04 Station shall contain a “color picker” screen, for end users to have the ability to quickly choose a color for color changing fixtures from all available colors using a simple graphic-based approach. Systems where only a certain number of preset colors are available to the end user are not acceptable.

05 Multi-level user lockouts with pin codes shall be available to grant various levels of access (as desired by owner) to playback, direct control, or recording functionality.

O. Paradigm Button and Button/Fader Stations shall operate using up to sixteen programmable faders and twelve programmable buttons.

01 All button/fader stations shall be available with white, cream, ivory, gray or black faceplates, fader knobs, and buttons.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-10

02 Stations shall have indicators lights at each button or fader. Indicators shall be comprised of red, green and blue LED's. Indicator color and state (steady On, Blink, Off) shall be configured in software, and shall operate relative to the button or fader it is associated with.

03 All faceplates shall be designed for flush or surface mounting.

04 Station faceplates shall be constructed of ABS plastic and shall use no visible means of attachment. Faceplates shall be indelibly marked for each button or fader function.

P. Electrical

01 Unison control station wiring shall be an Echelon® Link power network.

02 Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or factory approved equivalent, and one #14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit).

03 Touchscreen and Interface stations shall also require (2) #16 AWG stranded wires for 24Vdc operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free.

04 Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run or any combination of these.

2.6 DATA PLUG-IN STATIONS

A. Provide Data Plug in stations as indicated.

B. General

01 The Plug-in Stations shall consist of the appropriate connectors required for the functional intent of the system. These stations shall be available with DMX input or output, Remote Focus Unit, Network, or architectural control connectors. Custom control connectors shall be available.

C. Connector Options

01 The following standard components shall be available for Plug-in Stations:

a. 5-Pin male XLR connectors for DMX inputb. 5-Pin female XLR connectors for DMX outputc. 6-Pin female XLR connectors for RFU and ETCLink connectionsd. RJ45 connectors for Network connections - Twisted Pair e. 6-Pin female DIN connectors for Unison connectionsf. DB9 female serial connector for architectural control from a computer

02 Custom combinations and custom control connections shall be available.

D. Physical

01 Station faceplates shall be .80” aluminum, finished in fine texture, scratch-resistant black powder coat. Silk-screened graphics shall be white.

02 The station panel shall mount into an industry standard back box, depending on size and quantity of connectors. A terminal block shall be supplied for contractor terminations.

2.7 DISTRIBUTION

A. Connectors shall be available as 20A, 50A and 100A grounded stage pin, 20A twist lock and 20A “U” ground (dual rated “T-slot”); other connectors shall be available as specified.

B. Pigtails shall be three-wire type “SOW” rubber jacketed cable sized for the maximum


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-11

circuit ampacity.

C. Pigtails with 20 amp stage pin connectors shall be terminated using 12 gauge 4 way indent crimp (with inspection window) type where the wire is inserted and crimped directly in the socket.

D. Terminations for pigtail connectors shall utilize feed- through terminals individually labeled with corresponding circuit numbers. Terminals that place a screw directly on the wire are not acceptable.

E. Outlet and pigtail boxes shall be supplied with appropriate brackets and hardware for mounting as shown on the drawings

F. A low voltage distribution system shall be available to incorporate DMX, Ethernet or other protocols as specified in the power distribution box. A voltage barrier shall be used to separate the low voltage wiring for the electrical circuits.

G. Power distribution equipment shall be listed by a nationally recognized test lab (nrtl).

H. Outlet and pigtail boxes shall be 6.25” H x 3.3” D and fabricated from 18 gauge galvanized steel and finished in black fine-texture powder coat paint. Covers shall be fabricated from 16-gauge galvanized steel

I. Outlet and pigtail boxes shall be available in any length specified in increments of 3-inches with a maximum length of up to 3-feet.

J. Pigtails and outlets shall be spaced on 18” centers, or as otherwise specified.

K. Outlets shall be mounted on individual 3” panels.

L. Circuits shall be labeled with 1.25” lettering.

M. Wiring devices shall be UL Laboratories Listed.

2.8 DMX REPEATER

A. The eDIN DMX/RDM Repeater Module shall permit star-wiring and repeating of DMX512 and RDM signals over the connected DMX cabling.

B. The Module shall fully isolate and protect DMX transmitters and receivers, and RDM controllers and responders from high common mode voltages, ground loop currents and other potentially damaging or disrupting electrical faults.

C. The Module shall have one input port, one pass-thru port and four output ports. All ports shall be bi-directional.

D. There shall be no in-line processing of the input signal, to ensure that all output signals are exact duplicates of the input signal with no processing delays.

E. The Module shall be designed to mount on standard 35mm DIN rail.

F. LED indicators shall be provided for Power, Data-In and CPU status, as well as for DMX/RDM activity on each of the four output ports.

G. The Module shall be capable of regenerating four (4) exact duplicates of the original source input signal. Each regenerated output signal shall have the same characteristics and capabilities of the input signal.

H. Each output shall be capable of driving up to 32 DMX/RDM responding devices over a maximum 300-meter (1000-ft.) length of cable.

I. One (1) DMX/RDM pass-thru port shall be provided. The pass-thru port shall be active, i.e. electrically repeated.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-12

J. The Module itself shall act as an RDM responder.

K. It shall be possible to field-update the module firmware via the DMX/RDM input port.

L. Multiple modules, up to the RDM-specified limitation of four (4), may be cascaded (looped) on the same DMX/RDM input data line using the pass-thru port or any output port.

M. All DMX/RDM input and output ports shall be capable of withstanding short-term application of up to 250V without damage to internal components.

N. Port protection shall be self-healing, rated for 250V. Replaceable fuses shall not be acceptable.

O. The DMX input port shall provide 1500-volt optical isolation between the input signal wiring and output signal wiring.

P. DMX output ports shall be fully optically isolated from each other.

Q. The DMX/RDM Repeater module shall be designed to snap on to 35mm DIN rail without the use of tools.

R. The ambient operating temperature shall be -10° to 50°C (14° to 122°F).

S. The operating humidity shall be 5% - 95% non-condensing.

T. The DMX/RDM Repeater Module shall meet the requirements of USITT DMX512 (1990), ANSI E1.11 DMX512-A and ANSI E1.20 RDM.

U. The DMX/RDM Repeater Module shall be compliant with the EU RoHS (2002/95/EC) directive.

V. The DMX/RDM Repeater Module shall conform to all FCC and CE requirements.

W. The DMX/RDM Repeater Module shall be a Class 2 Low Voltage device.

2.9 PORTABLE THEATRICAL CONSOLE

A. The lighting control console shall be a microprocessor-based system specifically designed to provide complete intensity and color control of LED stage lighting systems. The console shall be the Colorsource 20 as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.

B. The system shall provide control of a maximum of 20 LED fixtures on 512 DMX512 controlled addresses.

C. Physical features shall include:

01 A 7” integrated multi-touch display

02 4 configurable faders

03 20 dedicated faders

04 5 configurable softkeys for common commands

D. Controls shall include:

01 On board help functions and tutorial videos

02 Cue list record and playback functions

03 Non-intensity parameter control

04 Color, intensity, and parameter effects

05 5RDM discovery and configuration


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-13

06 Playback toy for live busking

E. 10 playback pages (200 total)

F. Color picker and other intuitive color controls shall be purpose built into the console controls to facilitate easy management of color changing LED fixtures.

2.10 COLOR MIXING LIGHT EMITTING DIODE PROFILE

A. The fixture shall be a color-mixing high-intensity LED illuminator with DMX control of intensity and color. The fixture shall be a ColorSource Spot as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. or approved equal.

B. All LED fixtures shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility

C. The fixture shall be UL 1573 listed for stage and studio use

D. The fixture shall comply with the USITT DMX-512A standard

E. The unit shall be constructed of rugged, die cast aluminum, free of burrs and pits.

F. The following shall be provided:

01 Lens secured with silicone shock mounts

02 Shutter assembly shall allow for +/-25 rotation

03 20 gauge stainless steel shutters

04 Interchangeable lens tubes for different field angles with Teflon guides for smooth tube movement

05 Sturdy integral die cast gel frame holders with two accessory slots, and a top-mounted, quick release gel frame retainer

06 Rugged steel yoke with two mounting positions allowing 300+ rotation of the fixture within the yoke

07 Positive locking, hand operated yoke clutch

08 Slot with sliding cover for motorized pattern devices or optional iris

G. The housing shall have a rugged black powder coat finish

01 White or silver/gray powder coat finishes shall be available as color options

02 Other powder coat color options shall be available on request

H. Power supply, cooling and electronics shall be integral to each unit.

I. The unit shall ship with:

01 Theatrical-style hanging yoke as standard

02 5’ cable with Neutrik PowerCon™ to choice of connector as standard

03 Gate diffuser

04 A-size pattern holder

J. J. Available options shall include but not be limited to:

01 Bare-end, Stage-Pin or Twist-lock type-equipped power leads

02 PowerCon to PowerCon cables for fixture power linking

03 Smooth Wash Diffuser for overlapping beams of light from multiple fixtures

K. The light beam should have a 2-to-1 center-to-edge drop-off ratio


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-14

L. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to:

01 Low gate and beam temperature

02 Sharp imaging through a three-plane shutter design

M. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to:

01 5, 10, 14, 19, 26, 36, 50, 70 and 90 degree field angles

02 High-quality pattern imaging

03 Sharp shutter cuts without halation

04 Shutter warping and burnout in normal use shall be unacceptable

05 Adjustable hard and soft beam edges

N. 19, 26, 36, and 50 degree units shall have optional lens tubes available for precision, high-contrast imaging.

O. The fixture shall be ETL and cETL LISTED and/or CE rated, and shall be so labeled when delivered to the job site.

P. The fixture shall be ETL LISTED to the UL1573 standard for stage and studio use

Q. The fixture shall be rated for IP-20 dry location use.

R. The fixture shall utilize advanced thermal management systems to maintain LED life to an average of 70% intensity after 20,000 hours of use

S. The fixture shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0°C (32°F) minimum, to 40° C (104°F) maximum ambient temperature.

T. The fixture shall be equipped with a 100V to 240V 50/60Hz internal power supply

U. The fixture shall support power in and thru operation

01 Power in shall be via Neutrik® PowerCon™ input connector

02 Power thru shall be via Neutrik ® PowerCon ™ output connector

03 Fixture power wiring and accessory power cables shall be rated to support linking of multiple fixtures up to the capacity of a 15A breaker

V. Fixtures shall have droop compensation to prevent thermal shift of color or intensity

W. Power supply outputs shall have self-resetting current-limiting protection

X. Fixture shall be calibrated at factory for achieve consistent color and intensity output between fixtures built at different times and/or from different LED lots or bins

01 Calibration data shall be stored on the control card as a permanent part of on-board operating system

02 All arrays, including replacement arrays shall be calibrated to the same standard to insure consistency

03 Fixtures not offering LED calibration shall not be acceptable

Y. The fixture shall utilize a minimum of 60 LED emitters

Z. The fixture shall utilize a selective mix of Red, Green, Blue and Lime emitters

AA. The LED system shall use 15-bit nonlinear scaling techniques for high-resolution dimming; Dimming curve shall be optimized for smooth dimming over longer timed fades.

BB. LED control shall be compatible with broadcast equipment in the following ways:


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-15

01 PWM control of LED levels shall be imperceptible to video cameras and related equipment

02 PWM shall be capable of being set via RDM to 25,000hz

CC. The fixture shall be USITT DMX 512A-compatible via In and Thru 5-pin XLR connectors or RJ45 connectors

DD. The fixture shall be compatible with the ANSI RDM E1.20 standard

01 All fixture functions shall accessible via RDM protocol for modification from suitably equipped control console

02 Temperature sensors within the luminaire shall be viewable in real time via RDM

03 Fixtures not offering RDM compatibility, feature set access or temperature monitoring via RDM shall not be compatible

EE. The fixture shall be equipped with a 7-segment display and a three-button user-interface

FF. The fixture shall be controlled via RGB data input

01 5-channel footprint (IRGBS)

GG. A variable-rate strobe channel shall be provided

HH. The fixture shall offer stand-alone functionality eliminating the need for a console

01 Fixture shall ship with 12 preset colors accessible as a stand-alone feature

02 Fixture shall ship with 5 sequences accessible as a stand-alone feature

03 Each color and sequence can be modified by the end user via RDM

04 Fixtures can be linked together with standard DMX cables and controlled from designated master fixture

05 Fixtures in a stand-alone state shall restore to the settings present prior to power cycling, eliminating the need for reprogramming

06 Fixtures without stand-alone operation features described above shall not be acceptable.

2.11 COLOR MIXING LIGHT EMITTING DIODE WASH FIXTURE

A. The fixture shall be a color-mixing high-intensity LED illuminator with DMX control of intensity and color. The fixture shall be a ColorSource Par as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. or approved equal.

B. All LED fixtures shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility

C. The fixture shall be UL 1573 listed for stage and studio use

D. The fixture shall comply with the USITT DMX-512 A standard

E. The fixture shall be contained in a rugged all-metal die-cast housing, free of burrs and pits.

F. The housing shall have a rugged black powdercoat finish as standard. White and silver/gray shall be available as color options

G. Power supply, cooling and electronics shall be integral to each unit.

H. Fixture housing shall provide two easy-access slots for secondary lenses and other accessories. Slots shall be equipped with locking retaining clip

I. The unit shall ship with: Theatrical-style hanging yoke as standard. 5’ power lead with


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-16

Edison connector as standard

J. Available options shall include but not be limited to:

01 Floor stand conversion Kit

02 Bare-end, Stage-Pin or Twist-lock type-equipped power leads

03 PowerCon to PowerCon cables for fixture power linking

04 Multiple secondary lens options to include multiple angles in the following patterns: Linear, Round, Oblong

K. Light output shall be via a round aperture. Aperture and accessory slots shall accommodate standard 7.5” accessories such as used in other similar-sized fixtures

01 Accessories available as options shall include but not be limited to: Gel/diffusion frames, Top hats, Barndoors, Egg crate louvers, Concentric ring louvers, Multiple secondary lensing options

L. The fixture shall be UL and cUL LISTED and/or CE rated, and shall be so labeled when delivered to the job site. The fixture shall be UL LISTED to the UL1573 standard for stage and studio use. The fixture shall be rated for IP-20 dry location use.

M. The fixture shall be cooled with a variable speed fan.

N. The fixture shall utilize advanced thermal management systems to maintain LED life to an average of 70% intensity after 20,000 hours of use

01 Thermal management shall include multiple temperature sensors within the housing to include: The LED array and The control board

O. The fixture shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0°C (32°F) minimum, to 40° C (104°F) maximum ambient temperature.

P. The fixture shall be equipped with 100V to 240V 50/60 Hz internal power supply

Q. The fixture shall support power in and thru operation

01 Power in shall be via Neutrik® PowerCon™ input connector

02 Power thru shall be via Neutrik ® PowerCon ™ output connector

03 Fixture power wiring and accessory power cables shall be rated to support linking of multiple fixtures up to the capacity of a 15A breaker

R. Power supply outputs shall have self-resetting current limiting protection

S. Power supply shall have power factor correction

T. Manufacturer of LED emitters shall utilize an advanced production LED binning process to maintain color consistency.

U. LED emitters should be rated for nominal 20,000 hour LED life to 70% intensity

V. All LED fixtures (100% of each lot) shall undergo a minimum three-hour burn-in test during manufacturing.

W. Fixture shall be calibrated at factory for achieve consistent color between fixtures built at different times and/or from different LED lots or bins

01 Calibration data shall be stored in the fixture as a permanent part of on-board operating system

02 All arrays, including replacement arrays shall be calibrated to the same standard to insure consistency


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-17

03 Fixtures not offering LED calibration shall not be acceptable

X. The fixture shall utilize an minimum of 40 LED emitters. These emitters shall be made up of Red, Green, Blue and Lime

Y. The LED system shall use 15-bit nonlinear scaling techniques for high-resolution dimming.

Z. The dimming curve shall be optimized for smooth dimming over longer timed fades.

AA. LED control shall be compatible with broadcast equipment in the following ways:

01 PWM control of LED levels shall be imperceptible to video cameras and related equipment

02 PWM rates shall be adjustable by the user via RDM to avoid any visible interference to video cameras and related equipment

BB. The fixture shall be USITT DMX 512A-compatible via In and Thru 5-pin XLR connectors

CC. The fixture shall be compatible with the ANSI RDM E1.20 standard

01 All fixture functions shall accessible via RDM protocol for modification from suitably equipped control console

02 Temperature sensors within the luminaire shall be viewable in real time via RDM

03 Fixtures not offering RDM compatibility, feature set access or temperature monitoring via RDM shall not be compatible

DD. The fixture shall be equipped with a 7-segment display for easy-to-read status and control and The fixture shall be equipped with a three-button user-interface

EE. The fixture shall offer RGB control

FF. The fixture shall operate in Regulated mode for droop compensation

GG. The fixture shall offer stand-alone functionality eliminating the need for a console

01 Fixture shall ship with 12 preset colors accessible as a stand-alone feature

02 Fixture shall ship with 5 Sequences accessible as a stand-alone feature

03 Each color and sequence can be modified by the end user

04 Fixtures can be linked together with standard DMX cables and controlled from designated master fixture

05 Fixtures in a stand-alone state shall restore to the settings present prior to power cycling, eliminating the need for reprogramming

06 Fixtures without stand-alone operation features described in a, b, c, d, and e shall not be acceptable.

PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install all new equipment and rewire existing equipment, all in compliance with national and local electrical codes. Auxiliary equipment required making this installation comply with codes, even if not listed in the specification, is the responsibility of the bidder and must be included in the bid price.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 00-18

B. All wiring shall be done in a craftsman-like manner. When conductors must be spliced to extend length, it shall be done with a terminal strip or suitable type compression fittings.

C. Equipment shall be kept clear of all metal shavings, wire scraps, and miscellaneous trash. Any abandoned holes in the floor shall be patched.

D. Any existing conduit emanating from the floor shall be dressed in such a manner as to eliminate any trip hazard. Conduits shall be re-routed or terminated into wire-ways to insure a neat installation.

E. All equipment shall be installed in compliance with applicable local and national codes. It shall also be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Prior to initial energizing, a factory certified technician shall inspect the system and any errors shall be corrected.

F. Pipes positions shall be rigidly fixed, and conduit shall be flexible, following the hanging points. Conduit shall not obstruct the pipe: it shall be possible to add additional portable fixtures anywhere on the pipe position without obstruction.

G. Provide all lighting fixtures and accessories as indicated or required. All portable fixtures shall be unboxed, lamped, hung on pipe positions, tested, and focused for an even stage wash. Safety cables shall be installed around fixture yoke and pipe position. Data cables shall be installed to connect all fixtures to DMX as needed, with excess cable tied neatly to pipe.

H. Portable lighting console and cables shall be tested and provided for the system Energization and training and then turned over to the owner.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District THEATRICAL RIGGING SYSTEMJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 55 10MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-1

SECTION 26 55 10 THEATRICAL RIGGING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL






E. Theatrical Lighting section 26 55 00.

F. Provide Shop Drawings per Section 26 00 00.

1.2 GOVERNING CLAUSE

A. For the sake of brevity, these specifications shall omit phrases such as "Contractor shall furnish and install", "unless otherwise indicated or specified", etc., but these phrases are nevertheless implied. Mention of materials and operations requires the Contractor to furnish and install such materials and perform such operations completely to the satisfaction of the owner’s representative.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. One company shall be responsible for the installation of all aspects of the stage rigging equipment. Work under this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, transportation services, supervision, etc., necessary to complete installation of the stage rigging equipment as well as any other items as herein listed, all as described in these specifications, as illustrated on the accompanying drawings; or as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Work includes the following: MOTORIZED RIGGING

1.4 APPROVED EQUIPMENT

A. Dimming, Controls, Fixtures, and Motorized Hoist equipment: Approved manufacturer: Electronic Theatre Controls: 800-688-4116

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. Specific items of equipment are specified by trade names. It has been determined by the systems designer that these are the particular items desired by the Owner and establish a standard of quality, equipment function and/or process. It is not the purpose or intent of these documents to eliminate competitive bids. In order to allow proper and fair comparison of pricing, contractors are required to submit their base bid price on the specified equipment. A contractor may submit an alternate bid based on equipment different from that specified only if that Contractor has received prior approval in writing from the Architect at least 10 days prior to bid. Accompanying each request shall be a letter specifically detailing each substitution including catalog data, specifications,


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-2

operative samples, technical information, drawings, performance and test data, and complete descriptive and functional information to assist in a fair evaluation. Failure to submit any substitution for prior approval or not providing sufficient data for evaluation shall require the exact item specified to be furnished. Architect's approval of a substitution for bid purposes will not relieve the contractor from the responsibility of meeting all specification criteria. If an approval of a substitution is granted, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for any and all changes (wiring, power, distribution, support structure, etc.) such substitution shall require.

1.6 DEFECTIVE OR NON-APPROVED MATERIALS

A. Should any equipment be found defective, not meeting specifications, or that which has not been approved in writing by the Owner shall, upon discovery (including any time within the period of the guarantee), be replaced with the specified equipment or material at no additional cost.

1.7 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all of the work that is performed under this contract, including all materials, and workmanship, for a period of three (3) years from the date of full acceptance of the work in accordance with the following conditions.

B. Warranty shall be in effect on materials and equipment for three years from the date of system commissioning under the following conditions:

01 Maintaining the warranty in effect requires annual inspection of the system by a factory trained and certified contractor. Continuing annual inspection is strongly encouraged.

02 The three year warranty is contingent upon annual inspection at the end of the first and second years of service. The end user is responsible for making arrangements for each inspection with the contractor identified on the Hoist Controller or a factory certified inspector/installer.

03 In the event annual inspection is not requested and performed at the end of the first or second year of service, the warranty shall become void at the end of that year of service.

04 Each warranty inspection report must be sent to the factory by the inspecting contractor within 10 days of completing the inspection.

C. Nothing in this guarantee shall cause repair or replacement by the Contractor where negligence, neglect or improper operation by the Owner has caused the failure of any equipment installed under this contract.

1.8 DISCREPANCIES

A. All equipment shall be sized to fit properly. The exact measurements are the responsibility of the Contractor. If there are discrepancies in the specifications, the Contractor shall ask for a clarification from the Architect. If no clarification is requested, the Architect's judgment shall rule.

1.9 THEATRICAL SYSTEMS CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall utilize a Theatrical Systems Contractor to coordinate and assist in the installation of all aspects of the motorized rigging equipment as specified in this section. This shall include but not be limited to all motorized rigging and miscellaneous equipment.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-3

B. The Theatrical Systems Contractor shall have been in business under the same name for five (5) full years preceding the date of this bid doing work similar to the type specified. References must be provided if requested. ETCP certification in theatre rigging is required by the lead installer or project manager of the System Integrator to receive approval to bid. Verification of this certification must be provided if requested.

C. The Bid letter shall include a statement that all major items of equipment shall be bid and supplied as specified, or shall contain details of all proposed substitute equipment for review by the Owners Representative. Substitute equipment items to include specifications, parts numbers, and details of interconnection to proposed system. The decision of the Engineer as to the acceptability of substitute equipment shall be final.

D. The System Integrator shall employ only fully trained stage riggers and mechanics, for the erection of the stage equipment. The stage riggers shall be completely familiar with the type of equipment to be installed. A competent job superintendent shall be on the job at all times when work is in progress. The job superintendent must be ETCP certified in theatre rigging. A copy of the certification must be furnished to the General Contractor prior to the start of the installation.

1.10 ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS

A. For the purposes of establishing a standard of quality desired on this project, the rigging hardware products of Electronic Theatre Controls of Middleton, Wisconsin are specified.

B. All other companies must receive prior approval to bid this project. Please refer to the section regarding substitutions.

1.11 DOCUMENTATION

A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Shop drawings and equipment data sheets shall be submitted to the Architect under general provisions. Approval of submitted equipment shall be obtained prior to equipment purchase or fabrication. If shop drawings are rejected, correct and resubmit in the manner specified. All shop drawing information shall be submitted at the same time; no partial submittal shall be accepted. Drawings shall indicate complete details, dimensions, product types and locations of all equipment, clearances required, guides, cables, sets, Contractor fabricated equipment, and all other details required to completely describe the work to be performed. Submittals drawings shall be presented at a scale not less than 1/4" for equipment layouts and ½" = 1'-0" for equipment details, mounting and other details. Each sheet shall allow space for approval stamps and have the name of the project, the contractors and/or the supplier's name, address telephone number, and the date submitted. Submit the following items for Architect's approval, prior to fabrication:

01 Stage plan view

02 Stage side section view

03 Gridiron layout indicating all stage equipment.

04 Electrical riser diagrams indicating the necessary power and control wiring for all rigging equipment and systems.

05 Plan and elevation views indicating all power, motor and control hardware locations and layout.

06 Provide full dimensions for panel layouts with finishes and materials for all custom panels.

07 Details of installation and erection, including adjoining conditions and necessary clearances.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-4

08 Indication by arrow and boxed caption of each variation from contract drawing and specifications, except those indicated as acceptable in specifications or on drawings.

B. RECORD DRAWINGS AND DATA: Submit in accordance with General Provisions. Within 30 days of final test and completion of the installation, submit the following:

01 Three (3) complete sets of "as built and approved" drawings showing systems and elements as installed, including field modifications and adjustments.

02 Three (3) sets of maintenance data including a list indicating replacement parts lists for all items of equipment, wiring diagrams, control diagrams, any and all keys for cabinets, racks, key operated switches etc. and complete operation manuals.

03 Three (3) Certificates of Guarantee

C. INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL: This contractor or his representative, fully knowledgeable and qualified in systems operation, shall provide minimum 2 hours training to on-site staff and 2 hours training to Owner’s maintenance representatives on the use and operation of this System. Designated instruction times shall be arranged through the Architect and may be during the same sessions as the theatrical lighting instruction.

D. PERMITS: Obtain all permits necessary for the execution of any work pertaining to the installation, and conform in all trades with all applicable local codes and national codes. Obtain all permits necessary for operation of any equipment by the Owner.

E. CLEAN UP: It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to remove all debris from the building or site caused by his operations to a common trash point or receptacle on the job site, as determined by the General Contractor.

PART TWO - THEATRICAL RIGGING EQUIPMENT

2.1 GENERAL STANDARDS

A. A. Each hoist shall be fully tested under full rated load throughout its full travel distance with all its liftlines terminated to the hoist before the hoist is shipped from the manufacturer. Testing shall include:

01 Hoist operation

02 Hoist/motor speed

03 Liftline terminations under load

04 Braking and stopping under load

05 Load cell functions

06 Slack line detection

07 Position sensing

08 Hoist noise

B. Only hoists that successfully pass pre-shipment testing shall be sent to any job site. A record of testing and its results shall be available for review at the manufacturers facility for at least one year after testing.

C. All equipment items shall be new and conform to applicable provisions of Underwriters'


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-5

Laboratories (UL), American Standards Association (ASA), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Life Safety Code 01, National Electric Code (NEC) and PLASA.

01 Where acceptable equipment items are specified by catalog number only, device shall meet all published manufacturer's specifications. Where quantities or sizes are not given, refer to drawings. Where two or more products are listed, contractor may use either, at his discretion. Equipment shall not be substituted without specific written approval by the Architect under the substitution paragraphs of these specifications.

02 All pipe battens shall be fabricated from 1.5" Schedule 40 pipe.

03 All turnbuckles and cable clips shall be drop forged.

04 All turnbuckles and clips, tracks, chains and other items of incidental hardware shall be furnished plated or painted. Wire rope shall be galvanized. Fasteners, chain, and other miscellaneous hardware shall be either cadmium or zinc plated.

05 All materials used in this project shall be new, unused and of the latest design. Refurbished materials are not permitted.

06 In order to establish minimum standards of safety, a minimum factor of 8 shall be required for all equipment and hardware used on this project. In addition, the following factors shall be used:

Cables and fittings 10 Design FactorCable bending ratio 26 times diameter Max. fleet angle 2 degreesSteel 1/5 of yieldBearings Two times required load at full for 2000 hours

2.2 HOISTS

A. Hoists shall be purpose-designed and fabricated for overhead lifting of theatre lights, equipment, curtains and scenic elements, whether used on stage, in the auditorium or other places of public assembly where people shall move beneath the suspended or moving load. The systems shall incorporate mechanical, electrical and safety features that shall be inherent to this equipment; they shall provide an engineered, efficient device for overhead lifting. The mechanical, electrical and safety features of this hoisting and control system shall establish the standard of quality, performance and safety by which hoisting systems of other manufacture shall be evaluated.

B. Each wire rope liftline shall adhere to a design factor of 10:1 with an ultimate strength of 4200 pounds. All load path components between the building structure and the batten shall exceed the breaking strength of the wire rope. The motor brake shall be rated at least at 125% of the motor torque.

C. Standard configured hoists shall be capable of supporting a live load suspended from the batten as follows:

01 Stage Electric 30 fpm 650 pound capacity in standard configuration. Powerhead shall measure 16” high x 16” w x 47 1/2” long and weigh 395 pounds

D. The standard general purpose hoist shall consist of the following major components: 1) Powerhead, 2) compression tube with beam clamps, loft blocks, liftline and liftline terminations, Right Angle Cable Adjuster (RACA) and 3) pipe batten.

E. The standard stage electric hoist shall consist of the following major components: 1) Powerhead, 2) Compression Tube with beam clamps, cable management system, loft blocks, liftline and liftline terminations Right Angle Cable Adjuster (RACA), 3) pipe batten


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-6

and power/control distribution strip

F. The hoist shall include the following features:

01 A Powerhead containing the following elements: the gearmotor, motor brake, load brake, limit switches operating electronics, load sensor, slack line detector, absolute position sensors, cable drum assembly, and wire rope.

02 A Compression Tube that prevents hoist system lateral forces from transferring to the building. Hoists or hoisting systems that impose a lateral load on the building shall not be acceptable.

03 The hoist shall incorporate a built-in load cell.

04 The hoist shall incorporate a built-in slack line sensor.

05 The hoist shall include the emergency contactor built into the hoist.

G. The hoist shall be manufactured from UL Listed components and shall be UL Listed and tested as a complete system (not just UL listed parts).

2.3 POWERHEAD

A. The Powerhead shall be a fully enclosed, powder coated sheet metal housing that shall prevent contact with moving and electrical parts and shall provide protection against dirt, dust and debris.

B. For setup and maintenance, the following functions shall be available from the Powerhead: power and operating switches, address setting knobs, limit switch setting knobs, limit switch override button, indicators for power, status and communication. Each of these functions shall be clearly labeled.

2.4 GEARMOTOR AND MOTOR BRAKE

A. The gearmotor and motor brake shall be an integral unit from a single manufacturer. It shall operate on 208 Volt or 60 Hz, 3 phase current for fixed speed units.

B. The motor brake shall be integral to the gearmotor and shall be capable of holding 125% of the motor full load torque.

C. The motor brake shall be spring actuated to apply and hold braking force.

D. The motor brake shall be magnetically released and held open upon actuation.

2.5 LOAD BRAKE - FIXED SPEED HOISTS

A. The rotary disk load brake shall bring the moving load to a complete stop and shall hold the load in position in the event of a mechanical failure of the motor, motor brake or gearbox.

B. Noise from the load brake shall be minimally audible at any time in the operational cycle.

C. Normal hoist operation shall not be limited by heat or noise caused by the load brake.

D. The load brake shall be mechanically released when the load is moving in the up direction. The load brake shall be close when the hoist has stopped. The load brake shall always be engaged when the load has stopped moving either up or down. When lowering the load the load brake shall partially disengage to allow and control descent of the batten. The load brake shall remain closed in the absence of rotational torque on the gearbox.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-7

2.6 WIRE ROPE DRUM.

A. Shall wrap up to eight 3/16” diameter 7 x 19 galvanized aircraft (utility) wire rope liftlines up to 50’ long in a compact manner on the cable drum. They shall be managed by a wire rope (cable) keeper integral to the Powerhead. The drum design shall prevent wire rope from tangling or crossing over itself.

2.7 LIMIT SWITCH

A. A limit switch assembly shall be mounted within the Powerhead for hard “normal” and “ultimate” end of travel limits. Hard end of travel limits shall be set/adjusted at the time of installation aided by an indicator light visible on the bottom panel of the Powerhead cover. Any system that indicates that the limit has been set by audible or tactile means only shall not be acceptable.

2.8 LOAD SENSOR/LOAD PROFILING.

A. A load sensor shall be built into the Powerhead to create a profile of the actual load on the hoist as it travels through its normal cycle. The profile may be changed by “re-training” the profiling system whenever the suspended load is changed on the batten by activating a key-switch operated training cycle on the hoist controller. The load sensor shall continuously monitor the load when load sensing is turned on and prevent operation if loads outside the normal load profile are detected. Systems without active load profiling are not acceptable.

2.9 POSITION SENSOR

A. A position sensing system shall be built into the Powerhead to provide accurate position information. The system shall consist of two absolute sensor types that provide accurate position information for each batten at power-up of the system. Hoisting systems that require re-homing shall not be acceptable. Incremental encoders shall not be acceptable for position readout purposes.

2.10 SLACK LINE DETECTOR

A. The slack line detector shall be built into the Powerhead. When a slack line condition in excess of 7” develops in a liftline, the slack line detector shall remove power from the hoist. The batten shall be allowed to move only in the upward direction to remove the cause of the slack line fault. Systems without slack line detection shall not be acceptable.

2.11 LOCAL USER INTERFACE AT POWERHEAD

User interface at the Powerhead control panel at the rear of the hoist shall include:

A. Hoist Up/Down Control

B. Limit Switch override buttons (tool accessible)

C. Address switches

D. Status LED’s

2.12 INFORMATION STORAGE WITHIN POWERHEAD

A. Record of severe fault conditions with date and time stamp

B. Record of E-stops, overloads, moves and power cycles


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-8

C. Record of travel distance and peak loads since installation/inspection

2.13 COMPRESSION TUBE AND BEAM CLAMPS

A. The Compression Tube shall be a continuous channel of extruded aluminum engineered in conjunction with the beam clamps to neutralize rigging-generated lateral forces on the building.

B. The Compression Tube shall support the system loft blocks.

C. Compression Tube sections shall be joined into a continuous assembly by a pair of dedicated splicing plates at each tube joint.

D. The Compression Tube shall be installed only by means of dedicated beam clamps that allow the Compression Tube to snap into place and to fractionally move horizontally under load.

E. Beam clamps shall be capable of attaching to horizontal beams, joists, truss flanges or flat steel plates measuring from 3/8” thick up to 1” thick and from 4” wide up to 14” wide placed no more than 14’-0” apart. Beam clamps shall accommodate up to ½” vertical misalignment.

F. Hoist systems that do not neutralize hoist generated lateral forces on the building shall not be accepted for this project.

2.14 LOFT BLOCKS

A. Each loft block shall be an assembly of steel side plates, a wire rope idler, sheave, bearings, shaft locked against rotation and support hardware. Each loft block shall be inserted into the slot on the bottom of the Compression Tube. The blocks shall be positioned no closer than 4’-0” from each other, unless muled.

B. Loft block sheaves shall measure 5” in diameter and contain a pair of press fit sealed ball bearings. Liftlines shall travel in a groove shaped and sized for 3/16” diameter wire rope per the latest edition of the Wire Rope Users’ Manual as published by the Wire Rope Technical Board. The loft block sheave shall be concentric about the hub and shall be evenly balanced for ease of rotation.

C. An idler shall be incorporated into the top assembly of the loft block to guide and support liftlines as they pass the block.

D. Hoisting systems requiring the loft blocks to be mounted directly to the facility structure shall not be accepted for this project.

2.15 LIFTLINE TERMINATIONS

A. Each liftline shall be terminated in the Powerhead via a standard copper oval compression sleeve installed/crimped at the factory.

B. Liftlines shall be terminated at the load hanger with a low profile Right Angle Cable Adjuster (RACA)™, thimble and copper oval compression sleeve. The RACA and cable terminations at the batten shall be installed at the time of hoist installation.

C. Batten trim shall be adjustable up to 6” via the RACA.

D. Systems utilizing turnbuckles or chain to trim the batten shall not be accepted for this installation.

2.16 HANGERS


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-9

A. Raceway hangers shall be specially shaped flat bar that shall support the wire rope termination hardware and secure the raceway and the pipe batten.

2.17 CABLE MANAGEMENT FOR ELECTRICS

A. The load circuits and control wiring shall be fed to the distribution trough by a built-in cable management system that allows flat feeder cable to fold and store along the top of the connector strip.

B. At high trim, the entire system shall be stored in 30” of vertical space from the bottom of the mounting steel to the horizontal centerline of the batten. Cable management systems requiring greater vertical storage space shall not be acceptable for this project.

C. The cable management system shall be integral to the hoist system.

D. The cable management system shall be UL LISTED.

E. The flat cable shall meet the physical as well as thermal requirements of UL for 20 amp loads. Up to four flat cables may be fed from each end of the distribution system to provide power for 24 circuits from each end of the system for a maximum of 48 circuits total.

F. Each flat cable shall include one ground wire and one data cable plus an individually insulated hot and an individually insulated neutral conductor for each of six 120 Volt 20 Amp circuits.

G. The connector strip shall be built to the length specified with outlets or pigtails located as specified or as shown on the construction drawings. Outlets or plugs shall be 15 amp grounded pin connectors, 15 amp twistlock connectors, or 15 amp Edison plugs. The distro trough may also contain connectors for Ethernet and/or DMX connections.

H. Flat cable shall pass through a strain relief before entering a termination box at the designated end of the raceway. Within the raceway all wiring shall be attached at the factory to a terminal block. The flat cable, internal wiring and all components shall meet UL requirements and appropriate National Electrical Codes (NEC).

I. Cable management systems that utilize cable cradles, cable reels or locate feeder or data cables outside the off stage edges of the electrics batten shall not be acceptable for this project.

J. Hoisting systems utilizing cable management systems from third-party vendors shall be fully integrated into the hoisting system without additional structural changes or changes to the QuickTouch controller. Electrics lineset hoisting systems that do not fully integrate cable management in the hoisting system and controller shall not be acceptable for this installation. Cable management systems that are not UL LISTED shall not be accepted for this installation.

2.18 PIPE BATTEN

A. The pipe batten shall be 1½” schedule 40 grade A, seamless pipe fabricated in the largest possible lengths without splices. Battens of greater length shall be spliced by means of .120 x 1 9/16 dia DOM tube 18” long with 9” of tube inserted into each half of the splice. The tight fitting splice tube shall be held in place by a pair of 3/8 x 2 ½” grade 5 hex bolts on each side of the joint. The bolts shall pass through the pipe at an angle of 90° to each other. There shall be two bolts on each side of the joint spaced 1” and 8” from the joint. Alternatively, one pair of bolts on one side of the joint may be replaced with either plug welds or tight fitting steel rivets. Pipes shall be straight and painted flat black.

B. A safety-yellow batten cap shall be installed at each end of each pipe batten.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-10

C. The manufacturer shall provide up to four self-adhesive labels for each batten on which the rated batten load shall be written by the installer.

2.19 POWER AND CONTROL DISTRIBUTION (PCD)

A. Each hoist shall receive power and control via a pair of 8’-0” long jumper cables extending from the Powerhead to the source outlets. Receptacles shall be installed in a sheet metal junction box or trough with outlets. Each outlet shall be located no more than 6’-0” away from the rear face of each hoist.

B. Each Powerhead shall include a power cord hardwired to the hoist with an appropriately sized twistlock connector at the PCD end and a removable control cable with a circular 9 pin connector at each end. Inclusion of a 20 amp 3 phase breaker in the PCD is optional. The wiring and connectors shall be barriered between high and low voltage.

C. The power/distribution channel shall be UL LISTED for this application.

PART THREE - QUICKTOUCH FIXED SPEED CONTROL

3.1 GENERAL

A. The entire hoisting system shall be operated by a QuickTouch fixed speed controller or equal. It shall be purpose-designed and fabricated to manage and operate hoists specifically designed for overhead lifting. Each system shall incorporate mechanical, electrical and safety features that shall be inherent to this equipment and shall provide an engineered, efficient device to control the equipment. The mechanical, electrical and safety features of this control system shall establish the standard of quality, performance and safety by which hoisting systems of other manufacture shall be evaluated.

B. The Quicktouch Control System shall consist of a surface, flush or rack mounted primary control panel and up to three remote E-stop stations.

C. The hoisting system shall also include one Quicktouch Fixed Speed Remote control device with 30’ of flexible cable that may be attached to the system at the QuickTouch control panel.

D. D. The controller shall include the following features:

01 Key operated power switch

02 LCD display for feedback/operating information

03 Key operated hoist load profile training/enable switch

04 Latching hoist selection buttons with rear illuminated naming tabs

05 Rear illuminated hold-to-operate (deadman) up and down operation buttons

06 Dedicated E-stop button

07 Outlet for wired remote

08 Optional door

09 Optional rack mount kit

E. The control system shall only employ the QuickTouch controller, a power and control distribution infrastructure and the hoists. A System that requires separate drive cabinets or motor-starters shall not be acceptable.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-11

F. The controller shall be UL Listed and shall be fabricated from UL listed components.

3.2 ENCLOSURE

A. The back box and face panel shall be fabricated from 16ga powder coated sheet steel specially formed to provide support for installation as well as support for all components installed within the housing.

B. The Quicktouch face panel shall be printed with complete labeling information to identify the function of each of the buttons in the control station.

C. The face panel shall identify the system as a Quicktouch controller for stage rigging.

D. The face panel shall be shades of grey. The ring surrounding the E-stop button shall be safety yellow and shall be rear illuminated

E. The steel panel to which all switches are mounted shall be removable via screws in the surface located underneath the face panel film.

3.3 LCD SCREEN

A. The liquid crystal display shall be purpose designed to communicate all information in human readable text.

B. The screen shall be rear illuminated and shall be dimmable.

C. During system start up the screen shall show the progress of the hoists diagnostics self tests. Upon completion of the startup sequence the screen shall indicate that the system is “OK” or shall provide specific information should a fault be detected. Fault conditions shall be reported in human readable text. Systems that report fault conditions in a series of blinking lights shall not be acceptable for this installation.

D. When a hoist is selected the LCD screen shall readout the hoist name or number, its current position above the floor, the amount of weight suspended from the batten, the preset position that is recorded, as well as a bar graph scale that shows the current position of the hoist, top and bottom limits and the current weight suspended from the hoist.

3.4 HOIST SELECTION/OPERATION BUTTONS

A. There shall be rear illuminated hoist selection buttons. Buttons shall remain illuminated until de-selected.

B. Up to Two hoists may be selected to move at one time. When the up or down button is pushed and held, each hoist shall move to its next stop location. If the stop location is the adjustable preset, the hoist can be made to continue to travel in the selected direction by releasing and re-pressing the up or down hold-to-operate button until the next stop for the hoist(s) is reached.

C. A maximum of four hoists may move at one time and only in one direction at a time.

D. Although four hoists moving at one time is the factory default, it shall be possible to increase to eight or reduce to one the quantity of simultaneously moving hoists.

E. As a backup, there shall be dedicated hardware to detect and disable the system when the user attempts to move more than the configured maximum quantity of hoists.

F. All buttons shall fit neatly within each of the cover panel cutouts on the controller.

3.5 KEY SWITCHES


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-12

A. A key switch shall control power to the control system. The key must be in the lock and the key turned to the on position for the hoisting system to operate.

B. A separate key is required to turn on the load profiling system. That key must be in the lock and turned to the “ON” position for load profiling to function.

C. When load profiling is turned on the hoist shall know the amount of weight that is supposed to be supported by the batten at any location in the path of travel. Should the weight exceed or be reduced below the profiled weight by a preset value, the hoist shall stop operation until the fault is cleared.

3.6 SLACK LINE DETECTOR

A. A. The slack line detector is located in the Powerhead. When a slack line condition occurs, it shall cease hoist movement and result in a fault message on the LCD screen on the controller. Movement in the upward direction shall be possible to clear the fault. Systems without slack line detection are not acceptable.

3.7 E-STOP

A. The E-stop button on the Quicktouch controller shall be a mushroom button with a rear illuminated ring surrounding the button. During normal operation, the E-stop button shall be in the out position. An E-stop can be activated via this button by firmly pressing the button in. The button shall latch and immediately cause a class zero stop of all hoists in the system. The LCD screen shall report this as an E-stop fault. To continue system operation the E-stop button must be cleared by twisting the button to release the latch. Power to the control station must be cycled off/on to re-initiate the system. This action shall also initiate a self-test of the entire control system and contactors.

B. he illuminated ring around each E-stop button shall be dimmable. The status of the lighted ring shall provide additional information about the state of the system as follows:

01 Ring at low intensity: no hoist moving

02 Ring at high intensity: hoist(s) moving

03 Ring blinking: system in E-stop condition

C. Up to three remote E-stop stations may be connected to the system. Each additional E-stop station shall operate in the same way as the primary E-stop at the Quicktouch control panel.

3.8 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS

A. Upon energization, the control system shall perform an automatic series of diagnostic tests that assure that all system safety functions are working. Should an error in the safety functions be determined, the controller shall report back a fault condition in the LCD display window and shall identify the nature of the fault.

B. Monthly, the system automatically shall perform an additional series of diagnostic tests to determine if there are any problems with any portion of the hoist control system safety features. In the event of a problem, the controller shall report back a fault condition in the LCD display window and shall identify the nature of the fault.

C. Eleven months after a system inspection has been performed, the system shall remind the user to schedule full system maintenance/inspection. The reminder shall remain in the system with a count-down calendar until it is turned off by the factory authorized and trained inspector.

D. The installing contractor shall be able to leave contact information within the system.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-13

This information shall be displayed at power up and in the event of severe fault conditions.

3.9 REMOTE CONTROL PENDANT

A. An optional remote control pendant with 30’ long attached cable and plug shall be provided for the system. The remote control must be plugged to the Quicktouch control panel. When the remote control is plugged in the E-stop on the remote is active. Systems requiring “shunt plugs” to bypass an unplugged remote control connector shall not be acceptable.

B. The remote control provides up/down control for those hoists that have been preselected at the QuickTouch controller.

3.10 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

A. It shall be possible to commission basic functionality of the system without a laptop computer or additional software.

B. A trained installer shall commission the full system via a laptop computer connected via the built-in USB port in the controller. USB connectivity shall not require special USB drivers.

C. Commissioning software shall feature an inspection report generator that allows a step by step inspection of the control system. Upon completion, the system shall generate an inspection report in PDF format.

PART FOUR - INSTALLATION

4.1 GENERAL

A. Installation of this equipment shall only be performed by ETC approved and factory trained theatrical rigging installers. Installation shall be performed in a workmanlike manner and shall strictly adhere to the standards of these specifications and ETC’s installation requirements. Where necessary, the installer may make adjustments to accommodate unforeseen impediments to installation. The completed work must achieve all electrical, safety and appearance requirements as established in these specifications.

B. Work shall be performed in accordance with OSHA and local codes.

C. On site welding shall only be performed per AWS D1.1 standards and with advanced approval from the architect or Owner’s representative.

4.2 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES

The Theatrical Systems contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing:

A. Powerhead

B. Compression Tube, Compression Tube splices and Compression Tube beam clamps

C. Supplementary steel and/or mounting adapters for the hoisting systems, if required.

D. Loft blocks

E. Wire rope liftlines and terminations


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 55 10-14

F. On electrics linesets: Cable Management system for distribution raceways, including low-voltage, ground and data wiring

G. On electrics linesets: Factory prewired electrical termination boxes that are part of the cable management system.

H. On electrics linesets: Factory prewired distribution raceway mounted at the bottom of the wire rope on the stage electrics sets

I. Pipe batten attached to RACAs or Hanger Brackets

J. Batten end caps

K. Batten labels

L. Attachment of the prewired twistlock connector to the Power and Control Distribution outlet

M. Attachment of the prewired circular pin connector data wire to the mating outlet on the Powerhead and on the Power and Control Distribution box

N. Termination of the low voltage data wiring at the controller and at all power and control distribution boxes and at each E-stop station

O. Face plates for all Control Stations, E-stop Stations and Power and Control Distribution Boxes

P. Set limit switches

The ELECTRICAL contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing:

A. All pipe, wiring and termination providing line voltage to all the Power and Control Distribution boxes

B. All pipe and wiring connecting data lines between the first Power and Control Distribution Box and the Control station

C. Pipe and wiring connecting data lines between Control Station and first E-Stop Station

D. All pipe and wiring connecting data lines between all E-Stop Stations.

E. Back boxes for all Power and Control Distribution Boxes, the Control Stations and all E-Stop Stations.

F. All pipe and wiring and all terminations of line voltage of dimmed and non-dimmed circuits that terminate at the termination boxes mounted on/near the Compression Tube.

4.3 HOIST SCHEDULE

Location Hoist TypeFront of House Hoist P650E/PCM

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District EXTERIOR LIGHTINGJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 26 56 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 26 56 00-1

SECTION 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 LIGHT FIXTURES

A. GENERAL: Provide fixtures as shown and scheduled on the drawings, with all necessary accessories for a complete installation. Provide all lamps as scheduled.

B. LED FIXTURES: LED lamps shall be 4000K color temperature with a minimum CRI of 80 and shall come standard with 0-10V dimming and a five year warranty on LED boards and drivers. All LED fixtures shall be DesignLights Consortium (DLC) or EnergyStar certified. Models shall have a minimum projected life of 50,000 hours at 70% lumen output using IESNA LM-79, LM-80 and TM-21 standards.

C. BALLASTS: Ballasts shall be warranted for four years from date of substantial completion of the project. Ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance, Motorola or Magnetek.

D. LIGHT POLES: All poles shall be selected to support the scheduled fixtures and equipment per ASCE/SEI 7 minimum design loads or 120 MPH wind loading plus 1.3 gust factor, whichever is greater. Provide a reinforced concrete support base per the Drawing Details. Provide pole base cover to conceal lighting standard anchor bolts. Provide additional grouting as required/directed by the Owner/Engineer.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District COMMUNICATIONS OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 27 01 00 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 KMES-161061/161062

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 27 0100-1

SECTION 27 01 00 - COMMUNICATIONS OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's operation and maintenance of products furnished under Contract. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other sections of specifications.

B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems.

C. Submit 3 copies of complete manual in final form.

1.02 ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Thirty (30) days after receipt of reviewed submittals bearing the Architect / Engineer's stamp of acceptance (including re-submittals), submit for review 1 copy of the first draft of the Electrical Operating and Maintenance Manual. This copy shall contain as a minimum: 01. Table of Contents for each element 02. Contractor information 03. All shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data, bearing the Architect /

Engineer's stamp of acceptance. 04. All parts and maintenance manuals for items of equipment 05. Warranties (without starting dates) 06. Certifications that have been completed; submit forms and outlines of

certifications that have not been completed 07. Operating and maintenance procedures. 08. Form of Owner's Training Program Syllabus (including times and dates) 09. Control operations / equipment wiring diagrams 10. Coordination Drawings 11. Schedule of Speakers, Amplifiers, Sound Equipment, Etc. 12. Schedule of Handsets and other Peripheral Devices, Etc. 13. Schedule of Cable, Jacks, Outlets, Etc. 14. Other required operating and maintenance information that are complete. 15. Cable pathway layout drawings and station map

B. Copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days with comments for corrections.

C. Submit the (3) completed manuals in final form to the Architect / Engineer.

01. Prior to substantial completion for Owner's use after the Owner accepts facility maintenance.

02. Include all specified data, test reports, drawings, dated warranties, certificates, along with other materials and information.

D. The Architect / Engineer shall review the manuals for completeness within 15 days.

E. The Contractor shall be notified of any missing or omitted materials. The Manuals shall be

reworked by the Contractor, as required, in the office of the Architect / Engineer. The manuals will not be retransmitted.

F. Three complete manuals shall be delivered to the Owner prior to substantial completion.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 27 0100-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BINDERS

A. Commercial quality black, 3-ring binders with clear, durable, cleanable plastic covers.

B. Minimum ring size: 1". Maximum ring size: 3".

C. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings.

D. Label contents on spine and face of binder with full size insert. Label under plastic cover.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Form for Manuals: 01. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.

02. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11"

b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten.

03. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab and bind in text. b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

04. Provide flyleaf indexed tabs for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment.

05. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and Maintenance Instructions". List:

a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structures as applicable

c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.

06. Binder as specified

B. Content of Manual: 01. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic

order as outlined in the specifications. a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the

volume. c. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of:

i. Subcontractor or installer ii. Maintenance contractor as appropriate iii. Identify area of responsibility of each. iv. Local source of supply for parts and replacement

d. Identify each product-by-product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.

02. Product Data: a. Include those sheets pertinent to the specific product. b. Annotate each sheet to:


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 27 0100-3

i. Identify specific product or part installed. ii. Identify data applicable to installation. iii. Delete references to inapplicable information.

03. Drawings: a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate:

i. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems ii. Control and flow diagrams

b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation.

c. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

04. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different

procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.

05. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving:

i. Proper procedures in event of failure ii. Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds

06. Shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data as specified.

C. Sections for Equipment and Systems 01. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate:

a. Description of unit and component parts:

i. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.

ii. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. iii. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable

parts. b. Operating procedures:

i. Start up, break-in, routine / normal operating instructions ii. Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency

instructions iii. Special operating instructions

c. Maintenance procedures: i. Routine operations ii. Guide to trouble-shooting iii. Disassembly, repair and reassembly iv. Alignment, adjusting and checking v. Routine service based on operating hours

d. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. e. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.

f. Schedule of fuses g. Complete equipment field accessible wiring diagrams

h. Each Contractor's coordination drawings i. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 27 0100-4

02. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparentduring instruction of Owner's personnel.

03. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as outlined in respectivesections of specifications

04. Provide complete information for products specified in Division 27.05. Provide certificates of compliance as specified in each related section.06. Provide start up reports as specified in each related section.07. Provide signed receipts for spare parts and material.

08. Provide training report and certificates.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 27 05 00 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 KMES-161061/161062

Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-1

SECTION 27 05 00 - COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, applicable provisions of Division 01 General Requirements, and other provisions and requirements of the Contract Documents apply to work of Division 27 Communications.

B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 27, Communications.

C. The general provisions of the Contract and the requirements of the following Sections

apply to the Work specified in this Section. See Division 26 for related general and specific requirements.

1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All equipment and work performed shall comply with all of the current and applicable Codes, Rules, Ordinances, Regulations and Standards (including those not specifically listed in this Specification) as interpreted and enforced by the authorities having jurisdiction including:

01. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

02. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) - Local 03. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 04. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Communications Cables -

B694, B736, D4565, D4566, D4730, D4731, D4732 05. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) 06. Code of Federal Regulations - Title 47 07. Electronics Industries Association (EIA) Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic

Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices - EIA-455 Series

08. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) - Communications Act and FCC Rules

09. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) Federal Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces - FIPS PUB 175, FIPS PUB 176

10. The Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) Communications Cable Stands - P-47-434, S-56-434, S-80-576, S84-608, S-85-625, S-86-634, S-87-640, S-89-648, S-90-661, S-98-688, S-99-689, S-100-685

11. International Electro-technical Commission (IEC) 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Local Area

Networks/Metropolitan Networks Standards Collection - LAN/MAN 802 Series 13. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) (ISO/IEC) Premise Wiring

Core and LAN/MAN Core Equivalents-11801, 8802, 14763-1 14. International Telecommunication Union (ITU-T) Telecommunications

Standardization 15. National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Code - NFPA 70 16. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA) Standards of Installation 17. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Performance Standard for

Twisted Pair Premise Voice and Data Communications Cable-WC 63.1, WC 63.2, WC 66

18. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-2

19. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72, Life Safety Code NFPA 101

20. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE) 21. Local Accessibility Standards 22. Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA) (ANSI/TIA/EIA) Wiring and

Cabling Standards - 526, 568, 569, 570, 571, 598, 606, 607, 758, TSB 31-B, 63, 67, 72, 75 and 95

23. Uniform Building Code (UBC) 24. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) - 497A, 910, 1077, 1863, 1283, 1459, 1604,

1651, 1681, 1690, 1778, 1977

B. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos

NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations.

D. Obtain all permits required. 1.03 SUMMARY

A. Provide complete and working Communications Systems including equipment, conduit, wiring, material, labor and training as described in this Specification and the Drawings. The Communications Systems Drawings and Specifications are the sole property of the Architect and are not to be duplicated, scanned, loaned or in any way made available to persons not designated as authorized by the Architect. All Communications Systems plans and specifications are to be returned to the Architect following completion of bid.

1.04 SPACE REQUIREMENTS

A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this respect.

1.05 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other Divisions of these specifications to determine their requirements. Extend electrical services and final connections to all items requiring same.

B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously

study the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents.

C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open

ends of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them.

D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in

sufficient time to prevent delay in the work.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-3

E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to equipment furnished under other Division. Determine from the General Contractor / Construction Manager for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect / Engineer, the exact location of all items. The construction trades involved shall furnish all roughing-in drawings and wiring diagrams required for proper installation of the electrical work. 01. Make final connections to all communications equipment indicated on the

drawings, except as noted.

F. Request all Shop Drawings required in ample time to permit proper installation of all electrical provisions.

G. Extend services as indicated to the various items of equipment furnished by others.

Rough-in for the various items and make final connections ready for operation upon placing of the equipment.

1.06 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK

A. When the word "concealed" is defined as hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or above ceilings. "Exposed" is defined as open to view, in plain sight.

1.07 GUARANTEE

A. Guarantee work for a minimum of two years or as noted longer elsewhere from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or equipment shall be provided.

1.08 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer.

1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION

A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of work, and judged objectionable by the Owner, Architect, or Engineer, rectify such conditions at no additional cost to the Owner. If the item of equipment is judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart.


A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 27 are used to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit competition. Equipment of similar design, equal to that specified, manufactured by a named manufacturer shall be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before proposal due date. Submit complete design and performance data to the Architect. The Architect and Owner issue approvals of acceptable manufacturers as addenda to the Construction Proposal


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-4

Documents. 1.11 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS

A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities included within the scope of this work: 01. Obtained from utility maps and other substantially reliable sources. 02. Are offered separate from the Contract Documents as a general guide only

without guarantees to accuracy.

B. Examine the site and verify the location and elevation of all utilities and of their relation to the work. Existing utilities indicated on the site plans are for reference only and shall be field verified by the Contractor with the respective public or private utility.

1.12 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements.

B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to compare the scale of all electrical drawings with

the scale of the architectural drawings and make adjustments to all electrical drawings which have the incorrect drawing scale so that his material takeoffs are not in error due to an incorrectly labeled drawing scale and his proposal is complete.

1.13 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

A/V Audio/Visual

AWG American Wire Gauge

BCR Building Communications Room

CATV Cable Antenna Television

CCTV Closed Circuit Television

CMP Communications Media Plenum

CMR Communications Media Riser

dB Decibel

EMI Electromagnetic Interference

ER Equipment Room

FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel

FCR Floor Communications Room

Gbps Giga Bits Per Second

Hz Hertz

IC Intermediate Cross-connect

IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame

IM Information Management

IS Information Systems or Information Services (also see MIS)

IT Information Technology

Km Kilometer

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LED Light Emitting Diode

M Micron

MATV Master Antenna Television (A.K.A. Main Antenna Television)

Mbps Mega Bits Per Second

MC Main Cross-connect

MDF Main Distribution Frame

MHz Megahertz


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-5

MIS Management Information Systems or Services

NEXT Near-End Cross Talk

nm Nano-meter

OFN Optical Fiber Non-conductive

OFNP Optical Fiber Non-conductive Plenum

OFNR Optical Fiber Non-conductive Riser

OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer

PBX Private Branch Exchange

POS Point of Sale

PSELFEXT Power Sum Equal Level Far-End Cross Talk

PSNEXT Power Sum Near-End Cross Talk

SMATV Satellite Main Antenna Television

TC Telecommunications Closet (Now referred to as TR)

T.O. Telecommunications Outlet

TR Telecommunications Room (A.K.A. TC - Telecommunication Closet)

UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair Wire

Definitions: Administration Subsystem - Cable, connectors, cross-connect and inter-connect

hardware, patch cords, and other equipment that allows easy reconfiguration of the telecommunications system to accommodate personnel and floor plans changes.

Campus Backbone Subsystem - Connects telecommunications processing equipment in

different buildings on the same campus. Communications Cabling - Any fiber optic, copper, coaxial or other transmission media

used for transmitting or receiving communications systems data. Communications System - Communications Systems and associated wired or wireless

interconnection. Communications Drawings - All floor plans, elevations, details, schematics, block

diagrams, legends, tables, notes or attachments associated with any or all of the Communications Systems.

Distribution Cable - The telecommunications UTP wiring between the telecommunications

room and the outlet connectors. Equipment Subsystem - Telecommunications cable, connectors, support hardware,

blocks, and protective devices that serve to connect the network interface and the backbone subsystem through the administrative subsystem.

Horizontal Subsystem - Telecommunications cable, outlets and distribution cords that

extend the riser backbone from the administrative points in the TRs to work stations. Information Systems - Software systems including operating systems, programs, data

manipulation and management systems, control software and various forms of proprietary and off-the-shelf software.

Information Technology - The practical application of knowledge associated with designing,

installing and maintaining the equipment, hardware and infrastructure utilized for control,


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-6

distribution, or display of telecommunications, audio, video and data signals. Because computers are central to information management, computer departments within companies and universities are often called (IT Departments) and are responsible for MIS or IS personnel and services.

Low Voltage Wire - Wire or cable used for one or more systems that operate on 24 volts

or less. Low Voltage Wire is used to install and interconnect one or more of the Communications Systems. Low Voltage Wire includes patch cords, jumpers and all portions of cable or wire used to make the Communications Systems operational or for system communications.

Management Information Systems - A class of software that provides managers with tools

for organizing and evaluating their department. Typically, MIS systems are written in COBOL and run on mainframes or minicomputers. Within companies and large organizations, the department responsible for computer systems is sometime called the MIS department. Another name for MIS is Information Services (IS).

Multiplexer - A communications device that multiplexes (combines) several signals for

transmission over a single medium. A multiplexer is sometimes called a "mux". A demultiplexer is required to complete the process by separating multiplexed signals from a transmission line. Frequently a multiplexer and demultiplexer are combined into a single device capable of processing both outgoing and incoming signals.

Riser Backbone Subsystem - Telecommunications cable, splice enclosures, and

associated hardware that provide the main cable routes in a building. It interconnects building floors and larger areas of a single floor. It also interconnects administrative points in satellite TRs to the administrative points in the building main equipment room.

Station Cable - The wiring between the outlet connections and the work area equipment. Communications Systems - One or more of the following and associated equipment:

Data/Networking Systems, Telecommunications Systems, Paging / Intercom Systems, Clock/Control Systems, Master Antenna Television Systems, Cable Antenna Television Systems, Broadcast Video Systems, Audio/Visual Presentations Systems, Microwave/Wireless Systems.

Telecommunications - The transmission, emission or reception of signs, signals, images,

sound or intelligence of any nature by wire, radio, optical or other technical transmission system.

Work Area - Location of an employee or student and their data/telecommunications

equipment or devices. Work Area Subsystem - Station mounting cords, extension cords, connectors, adapters,

and interface units that provide physical and electrical connectivity between workstation equipment and the horizontal subsystem.

1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Equipment Standards: 01. System and all components shall be brand new stock from manufacturer. 02. All electronics shall be 100% solid state. 03. System and all components shall bear a UL Label.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-7

B. Contractor Qualifications:

At the time of Proposal, the Contractor shall: 01. Have manufactured, supplied or installed at least three (3) other systems of

similar size, complexity, and general operation as the systems described in these specifications. The Contractor shall furnish in writing to Architect proof of compliance with this paragraph at the time of proposal.

02. Hold all legally required Texas State Contractor's licenses necessary to accomplish the installation and activation of the described system at the facilities indicated. The Contractor shall submit copies of licenses to the Architect prior to the start of work

03. Hold all legally required state registrations to meet local requirements for submittal drawings.

04. Have a local office within fifty (50) miles of the project site staffed with factory trained technicians who have experience on systems of similar complexity and function as the systems described in these specifications. These technicians shall be fully capable of system engineering support, installation supervising, system start-up, and providing the Owner with training and service on both hardware and software for the systems specified.

05. Certify complete and total compliance with the provisions of these specifications by letter or submittal of the proposal response forms, signed by an officer of the corporation, or a principal if other ownership currently exists. In addition, the letter or forms shall include a complete listing of exceptions, if any.

1.15 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide SUBMITTALS according to Division 01 and the following.

B. Requirements: 01. Submit paragraph-by-paragraph specification review indicating compliance or

deviation with explanation. 02. Submit proof that all system components and cables are U.L. Listed. 03. An equipment list with names of manufacturers, model numbers, and technical

information on all equipment proposed. Clearly mark exact model number proposed to be installed.

04. Product technical information sheets for each principal components in the proposed system, including cable, wire, terminal marking, and wire marking material.

05. Certification from the manufacturer stating that the system Contractor is an authorized distributor or installer of the proposed system when such certifications exist.

06. A statement listing every technical and operational parameter wherein the submitted equipment varies from that which was originally specified. If the submitter fails to list a particular variance and his submittal is accepted, but is subsequently deemed to be unsatisfactory because of the unlisted variance, the submitter shall replace or modify such equipment at once and without cost to the Owner.

1.16 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. The Contractor shall have visited the site and familiarized himself with all existing conditions prior to submitting his proposal and shall be prepared to carry out the work within the existing limitations. Failure or neglect to do so shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities not entitle him to additional compensation for work overlooked and not


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-8

included in his proposal. B. The Contractor shall confirm the availability of the proper power source for each piece of

specified equipment, through site visits and Drawings as necessary. Where proper power does not exist, the Contractor shall provide the required power, circuits, outlets, conduits, and wire as specified under Division 26.

1.17 DATA ACCURACY

A. Absolute accuracy of information regarding existing conditions cannot be guaranteed. The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor and exact locations, distances, elevations, etc., shall be governed by actual field conditions. Where variations from the contract documents are required, such variations shall be approved by the Architect / Owner.

1.18 SECURITY

A. The Contractor is responsible for complying with all of the Owner's and facility security's requirements to prevent theft or damage to equipment, tools and materials. If any deviation from facility security requirements is necessary, approval for such deviation shall be coordinated with the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall not disclose any confidential information of the Owner. The

Contractor acknowledges that such action is highly injurious and can do damage to the Owner. The Contractor will agree to and comply with the standard policies and provisions of the Owner regarding outside Contractors and Consultants.

1.19 UTILITIES

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all temporary connection and cables, lighting, light stands and power. The facilities shall be used in accordance with all applicable regulations regarding operations, safety and fire hazards of the governmental Authorities Having Jurisdiction, provided they are not used in a wasteful manner.

1.20 PERMITS

A. All permits required for the specified performance and completion of the work shall be secured by the Contractor. These permits shall be presented and reviewed at the initial project progress meeting.

1.21 NOTIFICATION

A. The Contractor shall not shut off any existing systems. The Contractor shall give the Owner at least ten (10) calendar day’s notice of any requirements to shut off or interference with existing alarm, regulating, computer or other service systems. The Owner will arrange and execute any shutdown. All work such as splicing, connections, etc., necessary to establish or re-establish any system shall be completed by the Contractor in close coordination with the Owner.

1.22 INTERFERENCES WITH THE OWNER

A. Transportation and storage of materials at the facility, work involving the facility, and all other matters affecting the habitual use by the Owner of its buildings, shall be conducted so as to


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-9

cause the least possible interference, and at times and in a manner acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall make every effort to delivery equipment per the schedule required by the project.

1.23 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as-built" changes and diagrams of those portions of work in which actual construction is significantly at variance with the contract drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various major and minor feeders, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Record underground and underslab cables installed, dimensioning exact location and elevation of such installations.

B. At conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, electronic AutoCAD 2014 /

Revit CAD files of the original drawings and transfer as-built changes to these. Provide the following as-built documents including all contract drawings regardless of whether corrections were necessary and include in the transmittal: “2 sets of CDs and prints for Owner’s use, one set of CDs, prints, and mylars for Architect / Engineers Records”. Delivery of these as-built electronic, reproducible and prints is a condition of final acceptance. 01. 3 sets of electronic AutoCAD (2014 dwg) / Revit CAD drawing files, on CD-ROM

media, of each contract as-built drawing. 02. One reproducible Dayrex mylar film positive of each contract as-built drawing. 03. Three sets of blue or black-line prints of each contract as-built drawing.

C. As-Built Drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum:

01. Indicate all addendum changes to documents. 02. Remove Engineer’s Seal, name, address, and logo from drawings. 03. Mark documents AS-BUILT DRAWINGS. 04. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY: 05. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of

all conduit and cables, etc that were deviated from construction drawings. 06. Indicate exact location of all underground communications raceways, and

elevations. 07. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer. 08. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of Drawings and

specifications upon which all locations of equipment, devices, and all deviations and changes from the construction documents in the work shall be recorded.

09. Exact location of all communications equipment in building. Label panel schedules to indicate actual location.

10. Exact location of all communications equipment in and outside of the building. 11. Location, size and routing of all communications cables, conduits, equipment, etc.

shall be accurately and neatly shown to dimension. 12. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations. 13. Cloud all changes.

1.24 OPERATING TESTS

A. After all communications systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-10

the Architect / Engineer and Owner. Provide minimum 24-hour advance notice of scheduling of all tests. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems.

1.25 WARRANTY

A. All equipment shall be covered for the full manufacturers warranty period and systems shall be warranted by the Contractor for a period of two years commencing with the filing date of substantial completion. The Warranty shall cover all costs for warranty service, including parts, labor, prompt field service, pick-up, transportation, delivery, reinstallation, and retesting. A contract for service shall cover the period starting with the first expected activation of each system and shall continue without interruption to cover the period to the end of the two-year warranty as defined above. The end of the warranty period shall be handled such that a smooth transition to a maintenance agreement with the Owner shall be achieved with no lapse in coverage.

B. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

1.26 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION

A. It shall be the responsibility of the sub-contractor to consult the Architectural and Engineering drawings, details and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself as to the construction and all job related requirements. All construction trades shall cooperate with the General Contractor / Construction Manager job site superintendent and lay out work so that all piping, cables, pathways, raceways, and other items are placed in the walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so that there shall be no delay in the job.

1.27 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. General: Refer to Division 01 for general requirements on temporary facilities.

B. Temporary Wiring: Temporary power and lighting for construction purposes shall be provided under Division 26. Installation of temporary power shall be in accordance with NEC Article 305.

C. Temporary facilities, wire, lights and devices are the property of this Contractor and shall be removed at the completion of the Contract.

1.28 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Keys: Provide three (3) sets of all keys for system cabinets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. All materials listed in PART 2 - PRODUCTS of this Division Sections and on the Drawings shall be provided by the Contractor unless specifically excluded or modified in other portions of this Specification or Addendums.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-11

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. This project has a critical path, which must be closely followed in order to meet the completion date. The Contractor shall review the proposed schedule at the Award of Contract meeting and be prepared to staff his work force according to the schedule constraints presented at that time.

B. Aesthetics are an important consideration in this installation. All components shall be

installed so as to have aesthetically pleasing results as determined by the Owner and Architect. Actual locations of all visible components shall be coordinated in advance with the Owner and Architect.

C. Install, make fully operational and test the system as indicated on the Drawings and in the

Specifications. Where information is not available the worst-case condition must be assumed to ensure a complete, functional system.

D. Any interfacing with other systems shall be the Contractor's responsibility under this

contract, and the details, both logical and physical, of such interfaces shall be reflected in the Submittals and As-Built drawings.

E. If appropriate, interfaces with the Owner's Data Network, Telecommunications and

Communications System shall be coordinated with the Owner and Architect. F. All necessary back boards, back-boxes, pull-boxes, connectors, supports, conduit, cable

and wire shall be furnished and installed to provide a complete and reliable system. Exact location of all backboards, boxes, conduit and wiring runs shall be presented to the Owner / Architect for approval in advance of any installation. Provide as required and as specified in Division 26.

G. Where required provide 120-VAC, 60 Hz power from nearest electrical panel through a

junction box, to the system devices. Provide as required and as specified in Division 26. H. Where required, install conduit, cable and wire parallel and square with building lines,

including raised floor areas. Conduit fills shall not exceed 40%. I. All equipment shall be mounted with sufficient clearance to minimize EMI as well as meet

all applicable codes and facilitate observation and testing. Securely hand and/or fasten with appropriate fittings to ensure positive grounding, free of ground loops, throughout the entire system. Units shall be installed parallel and square to building lines.

J. Quiet and vibration-free operation of all equipment is a requirement of this installation.

Properly adjust, repair, balance or replace any equipment producing objectionable (in the judgment of the Owner or Architect) noise or vibration in any of the occupied areas of any building and provide additional brackets and bracing if necessary. Any such additions or changes shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

K. Installation shall comply with the CODES AND STANDARDS portion of this Section.

Where more than one code or regulation if applicable, the more stringent shall apply. L. Where new equipment is replacing old equipment, the Contractor is responsible for


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-12

removing and disposing of the old equipment and doing whatever repair work is necessary as specified by the Owner / Architect.

M. Install firestopping, as specified in Division 26 for all penetrations in slabs and firewalls to

meet code at the completion of work and prior to final testing demonstration to the Owner.

N. The installation shall be performed in a professional manner. O. On a daily basis, clean up and deposit in appropriate containers all debris from work

performed under the appropriate specification sections. Stack and organize all parts, tools and equipment when not being used.

P. Preparation, handling and installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's

written instructions and technical data appropriate to the product specified. Q. All work shall conform to the National Electrical Contractor's Association "Standard of

Installation" for general installation practice.

R. At the conclusion of the installation, all work areas, including all enclosures and boxes, shall be vacuumed and cleaned to remove all debris and grease.

3.02 COORDINATION WITH OWNER / ARCHITECT

A. Close coordination with the Owner / Architect is vital to achieve a complete, aesthetically pleasing job. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner / Architect is kept fully apprized of job progress.

3.03 CUTTING, PAINTING, AND PATCHING

A. Structural members shall not be drilled, bored or notched in such a manner that shall impair their structural value. Cutting of holes in structural members, if required, shall be done with core drills and only with the specific approval of the Owner / Architect for each instance.

B. All walls that require cutting or repair during the installation process shall be returned to

their original condition, including the matching of colors and finishes to the satisfaction of the Owner / Architect, and at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.04 WIRE AND CABLE

A. All low voltage cable shall be low smoke plenum rated, limited energy, with 300-volt insulation.

B. All wires in exposed areas shall run through conduit as specified in Division 26. C. Provide conduits, cable trays, raceways, wireways, boxes and outlets as specified in

Division 26. D. After installation, and before termination, all wiring shall be checked and tested to insure

there are no grounds, opens, or shorts on any conductors. In addition, all wires between buildings or underground and all coax cables shall have insulation tested with a megohmeter (megger) and a reading of greater than 20 megohms shall be required to successfully complete the test.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-13

E. Run wires continuously from termination to termination without splices. F. Wire and cable shall be supported in each equipment and terminal cabinet and in each

terminal and pull box in vertical risers and horizontal runs with wire duct and strap-type supports. At any point where wire duct is required for good wire management, whether shown on elevations or not, install appropriate duct. Where terminal boards are used, wire ducts shall be supplied on both sides and at not rime shall wires cross over terminal boards. Arrange cables neatly to allow inspection, removal and replacement. Lace cables as required. Spot tie wire bundles with plastic cable ties and securely affix to panels. If screw type terminals are specified, terminal strip connections shall be locking, tongue style, pressure crimp, and solderless spade lug.

G. Visually inspect wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation. Protect cable ends

at all times with acceptable end caps except during actual termination. At no time shall any coaxial cable be subjected to a bend less than a 6-inch radius. Protect wire and cable from kinks. Install 1 pull rope for all 2” or larger sized conduits.

H. Provide plastic bushings and strain relief material at all conduit exit points and where

necessary, to avoid abrasion of wire and excess tension on wire and cable. I. Cables above accessible ceilings shall not rest on ceiling tiles. Use Velcro tie wraps, J-

hooks or D-rings to hold cables. Provide independent support for all cables. Support is to be from building structure (do not support from pipes or conduits). Communications cables shall not tie off on HVAC supports, all-thread, ceiling grid hanger wire or electrical / mechanical piping system.

J. Ground and bond equipment and circuits in accordance with NEC and Division 26.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING

A. All cables, wires, wiring forms, terminal blocks and terminals shall be identified by labels, tags to other permanent markings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The markings shall clearly indicate the function, source, or destination of all cabling, wiring and terminals. All cables and wires shall be identified, utilizing heat-shrink, machine printed, polyolefin wire markers (Brady Type B-32 or equal). Hand written tags are not acceptable.

B. Should a situation arise where the wire tagging format as shown on the drawings cannot

be used, a substitute format shall be submitted which complies with the intent to provide documentation that will permit end-to-end tracing of all Communications Systems wiring.

C. All panels shall be provided with permanently attached engraved lamacoid labels with

identifying names and functions. All terminal points shall be appropriately labeled. Labels shall be consistent in form, color, and typeface throughout the system and all must contain the name of the system or subsystem as part of the label textual information. Design, color, font and layout shall be coordinated with, and approved by, the Owner.

D. Identification of Equipment:

01. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the manufacturer's address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size, and other pertinent data. Take care not to obliterate this nameplate. The legend on all nameplates or tags shall correspond to the identification shown on the Operating Instructions.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-14

02. A black-white-black 3 layer laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be permanently secured to each wireway, terminal cabinet, and communications (voice, data, video) cabinet or rack.

a. Identifying nameplates shall have 1/2-inch high, engraved letters. For equipment designation and ¼-inch letters indicating source circuit designation, (ie: “IDF(FCR) XXYY –served from MDF (BCR) XXGG).

03. Permanent, waterproof, black markers shall be used to identify each communications grid junction box, clearly indicating the type of system available at that junction box.

04. Pull Boxes: Field work each with a nameplate showing identity, and identifying equipment connected to it. Nameplates shall also indicate where pull box is fed from.

05. Communication hardware located above accessible ceilings: Provide ½-inch high black name plate with white 1/4-inch letters glued to bottom of t-grid ceiling below hardware located above ceiling. Identification shall be as short as possible yet identifying device above ceiling, i.e. “A/V-EQ”.

E. Prohibited Markings: Markings intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other

source from whom the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation in public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also prohibited are materials or devices that bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters Laboratories), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement.

F. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated

with access to or operation of communications facilities. Provide text of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with industry standards for color and design.

G. Wire and Cable Labeling: Provide wire markers on each conductor in all boxes, pull

boxes, gutters, wireways. Identify with drop/circuit number.

H. Underground Warning Tape: Thomas and Betts or approved equal. Six-inch wide plastic tape, colored red or orange with suitable warning legend describing buried communications lines. All underground conduits shall be so identified. Tape shall be buried at a depth of 6-inches below grade and directly above conduits or ductbanks. Provide magnetic marking tape below all underground conduits.


A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as authorized by the Architect / Engineer, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted.

3.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL

A. Prior to substantial completion, conduct an on-site training program to instruct Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the communications systems. 01. Provide the training during regular working day. 02. The Instructors shall be experienced in their phase of operation and maintenance

of the electrical systems and with the project.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-15

B. Time to be allocated for instructions.

01. Minimum of 20 hours dedicated instructor time 02. 4 hours on each of 5 days 03. Additional instruction time for specific systems as specified in other Sections.

C. Before on-site training, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; for review

and approval, minimum 48 hours prior to proposed training time and date. 01. One copy to the Owner 02. One copy to the Architect / Engineer

D. The Owner shall provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and shall coordinate

their attendance at the agreed upon times.

E. Use operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review manual with personnel in detail. Explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing,

maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment.

G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system).

H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the

need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.

I. Submit a report within one week after completion of training. List time and date of each demonstration, hours devoted to the demonstration, and a list of people present, with their respective signatures.

J. At the conclusion of the on-site training program, have the person designated by the

Owner sign a certificate to certify that he/she has a proper understanding of the system, that the demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are satisfactory.

K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each

Operating and Maintenance Manual. 3.08 OPENINGS

A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for boxes, equipment or conduits are specified under other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are included under this division.

3.09 OBSTRUCTIONS

A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions, which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, however, as to accuracy of location or complete information. 01. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's

representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all available information has been provided.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-16

02. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition.

B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction,

whether or not such existing facilities are shown. 3.10 VANDAL RESISTANT DEVICES

A. Where vandal resistant screws or bolts are employed on the project, deliver to the Owner 2 suitable tools for use with each type of fastener used.

B. Proof of delivery of these items to the Owner shall be included in the Operating and

Maintenance Manuals. 3.11 PROTECTION

A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and in original manufacturer's condition.

B. Do not deliver equipment to this project site until progress of construction has reached the

stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather shall be rejected, and the contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.12 SITE MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Contractor shall provide an on-site Project Manager as defined in SUPERVISION OF WORK portion of this Section.

3.13 START-UP RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Contractor shall initiate System operation. The Contractor shall provide competent Start-Up personnel on each consecutive working day until all Communications Systems are functional and ready to start the acceptance test phase. If the Contractor, in the Owner / Architect’s judgment, is not demonstrating progress in solving any technical problems, the Contractor shall supply Manufacturer’s factory technical representation and diagnostic equipment at no cost to the Owner, until resolution of those defined problems. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall bring the Systems on-line in their basic state (i.e., alarm reporting, facility code access control, etc.) It is the responsibility of the Owner to provide the specific database information that will be utilized for initial system programming.

B. Properly ground each piece of electronic equipment prior to applying power. Properly

ground all shielded wire shields to the appropriate earth ground at the hub end only, not at the remote or device end.

C. Use a start-up sequence that incrementally brings each portion of the system on-line in a

logical order that incorporates checking individual elements before proceeding to subsequent elements until the entire system is operational. The basic steps should include:


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-17

01. Establish ground planes at the equipment rooms and hub end of the systems asspecified in Division 26.

02. Disconnect power, connect the first device, reconnect power, and verifyoperational correctness. Repeat until the entire system is verified and operational.

3.14 PREPARATION FOR ACCEPTANCE (SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION)

A. All systems, equipment, and devices shall be in full and proper adjustment and operation, and properly labeled and identified.

B. All materials shall be neat, clean and unmarred, and parts securely attached.

C. All extra material as specified shall be delivered and stored at the premises as directed.

D. Test reports of each system and each system’s components and As-Built Project Drawings shall be complete and available for inspection and delivery as directed by the Owner.

3.15 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Before final acceptance or work, the Contractor shall perform and/or deliver each of the following in the order stated.

B. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) composite “System Operations and Maintenance” manuals in three-ring binders, sized to hold the material below, plus 50% excess. Each manual shall contain in appropriately tabbed sections: 01. A statement of Guarantee including date of termination and the name and phone

number of the persons to be called in the event of equipment failure. 02. A set of Operating procedures for the overall System that includes all required

Owner activities, and that allows for the Owner operation of all attributes and facilities of the System.

03. A section for each specific type of equipment containing the vendor manuals,instruction sheets, and any related literature that cam in the original shipping container for that piece of equipment. Include all warranty cards.

C. Testing: 01. The Contractor shall perform all tests required by Division 26 and those submitted

as part of this Section.02. The Contractor shall activate all devices for proper system operation, including

supervisory and trouble circuit tests. Similarly, audible alarms will not be activatedexcept on a one-time, coordinated basis, to check the actual sounding devices.

03. A test report for each piece of equipment shall be prepared by the Contractor andsubmitted to the Owner. This report shall include a complete listing of everydevice, the date it was tested, by whom and the results. The final test reportsshall indicate that every device tested successfully. Failure to completely test anddocument the tests will result in a delay of final testing and acceptance.

D. As-Built Drawings: 01. After completion of all the tests listed above, and prior to the final acceptance

test, The Contractor shall submit the complete As-Built drawings as identified in PART 1 – PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS.

02. The final As-Built Drawings shall consist on one set of reproducible prints, two (2)sets of Point-to-Point Detail Drawings, Equipment Schedules, and the complete


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0500-18

detailed technical data that was shipped by the manufacturer with all installed equipment.

E. Final Acceptance Test: The Final Acceptance Test shall demonstrate the installed and activated System’s performance and compliance with System Specifications. However, before this testing can begin the following must have received and reviewed by the Owner.

01. System Operations and Maintenance Manuals02. System Test Reports03. As-Built Drawings

3.17 NOTICE OF COMPLETION

A. When the Final System Acceptance Requirements described above including the Final Acceptance Test described above have been satisfactorily completed. The Owner / Architect shall issue a Letter of Completion to the Contractor indicating the date of such completion. The Notice of Completion shall be recorded by the Contractor upon receipt of the Owner / Architect completion letter. This date of record shall be the start of the warranty period.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SECTION 27 05 07 KMES-161061/161062

Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0507-1

SECTION 27 05 07 - COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA


A. Prepare submittals as required by Division 01 and as outlined below.

B. Submit product data shop drawings only for the following and for items specifically requested elsewhere in the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Architect / Engineer reserves the right to refuse shop drawings not requested for review and to imply that materials shall be provided as specified without exception.

C. The term submittal, as used herein, refers to all:

01. Shop Drawings 02. Coordination Drawings 03. Product data

D. Submittals shall be prepared and produced for:

01. Distribution as specified 02. Inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, as specified, in the related

section 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Present drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings.

B. Show all dimensions of each item of equipment on a single composite Shop Drawing. Do

not submit a series of drawings of components.

C. Identify field dimensions; show relation to adjacent or critical features or work or products. 1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with project name. Identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, or room number of contract documents. Minimum drawing scale: 1/4"=1'-0".

B. Prepare coordination drawings to coordinate installations for efficient use of available

space, for proper sequence of installation and to resolve conflicts. Coordinate with work specified in other sections and other divisions of the specifications.

C. For each room containing technology equipment and each rack with technology

equipment, submit plan and elevation drawings. Show: 01. Actual technology equipment and components to be furnished. 02. NEC working space and NEC access to NEC working space.

03. Relationship to other equipment and components and openings, doors and obstructions

04. Rack location and dimensions


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0507-2

D. Identify field dimensions. Show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products.

E. Verify location of communications station devices, telephone outlets and other work specified in this Division. 01. Coordinate with drawing details, site conditions and millwork shop drawings prior

to installation. 02. Where required for clarification, submit shop drawings prior to rough-in and

fabrication.

F. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing outlets and other devices in casework, cabinetwork and built-in furniture.

1.04 PRODUCT DATA

A. All product options specified shall be indicated on the product data submittal. All options listed on the standard product printed data not clearly identified as not part of the product data submitted shall become part of the Contract and shall be provided.

B. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to

specification section and article number.

C. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions and required clearances.

D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement

standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information not applicable.

E. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product to indicate a) acknowledgement of the

specification requirement (Comply), or b) acknowledgement that the particular specification requirement does not apply to this specific project (Not Applicable) or, c) acknowledgement that the specification requirement cannot be made or that a variance is being submitted for review to the Architect / Engineer / Owner (Does Not Comply, Explanation:)

1.05 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS

A. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up and adjusting.

1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Review submittals prior to transmittal.

B. Determine and verify: 01. Field measurements 02. Field construction criteria 03. Manufacturer's catalog numbers 04. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents

C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0507-3

D. Notify the Architect / Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents.

E. Do not fabricate products, or begin work for which submittals are specified, until such

submittals have been produced and bear contractor's stamp. Do not fabricate products or begin work scheduled to have submittals reviewed until return of reviewed submittals with Architect / Engineer's acceptance.

F. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved whether

Architect / Engineer reviews submittals or not.

G. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved whether Architect / Engineer reviews submittals or not, unless Architect / Engineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations on reviewed documents.

H. Submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract

Documents: 01. Proper sizes and capacities

02. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service 03. Construction methods, materials and finishes

I. Schedule submissions at least 15 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed.

1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other Contractor.

B. Number of submittals required:

01. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Submit four opaque reproductions. 02. Product Data: Submit the number of copies the contractor requires, plus those to

be retained by the Architect / Engineer.

C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 01. Date 02. Project title and number 03. Contractor's name, address and telephone number

04. The number of each Shop Drawing, Project Datum and Sample submitted 05. Other pertinent data

D. Submittals shall include:

01. The date of submission 02. The project title and number 03. Contract Identification 04. The names of:

a. Contractor b. Subcontractor c. Supplier d. Manufacturer

05. Identification of the product 06. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such 07. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0507-4

08. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or federal specifications numbers 09. Identification of deviations from contract documents

10. Suitable blank space for General Contractor and Architect / Engineer stamps 11. Contractor's signed and dated Stamp of Approval

E. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items.

01. Finishes which involve Architect / Engineer selection of colors, textures or patterns

02. Associated items requiring correlation for efficient function or for installation 1.08 SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATION INFORMATION

A. Every submittal document shall bear the following information as used in the project manual: 01. The related specification section number 02. The exact specification section title

B. Submittals delivered to the Architect / Engineer without the specified information will not

be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered.

1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals. 01. Indicate that the document or sample is a resubmittal 02. Identify changes made since previous submittals

B. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the Architect

/ Engineer. 1.10 CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF APPROVAL

A. Contractor shall stamp and sign each document certifying to the review of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents.

B. Contractor's stamp of approval on any submittal shall constitute a representation to Owner and Architect / Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents.

C. Do not deliver any submittals to the Architect / Engineer that do not bear the Contractor's

stamp of approval and signature.

D. Submittals delivered to the Architect / Engineer without Contractor's stamp of approval and signature will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered.

1.11 ARCHITECT / ENGINEER REVIEW OF IDENTIFIED SUBMITTALS

A. The Architect / Engineer will:


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0507-5

01. Review identified submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance withschedule. Specific equipment submittals that may be required to be expeditedshall be submitted separately without other submittal items not requiring the sameprompt attention.

02. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal orapproval of submittal

03. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission

B. Review of submittals will not extend to design data reflected in submittals that is peculiarly within the special expertise of the Contractor or any party dealing directly with the Contractor.

C. Architect / Engineer's review is only for conformance with the design concept of the project and for compliance with the information given in the contract. 01. The review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques or

procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 02. The review shall not extend to review of quantities, dimensions, weights or

gauges, fabrication processes or coordination with the work of other trades.

D. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.

1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Do not make requests for substitution employing the procedures of this Section.

B. The procedure for making a formal request for substitution is specified in Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

A. Submittals shall not be combined or bound together with any other material submittal.

B. Submit individually bound shop drawings and product data for the following when specified or provided: 01. Structural Cabling02. Communications System03. Integrated Audio Video Systems

3.02 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Submit coordination drawings as specified.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 27 05 09 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 KMES-161061/161062

Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0509-1

SECTION 27 05 09 - CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups and demonstrations.

1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM

A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with contract documents.

1.03 WORKMANSHIP

A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.

B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to

withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or equipment be suspended from structural bridging.

D. Provide finishes to match approved samples; all exposed finishes shall be approved by

the Architect / Engineer. Submit color samples as required. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.

B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect / Engineer before proceeding.

1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES

A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide a manufacturer’s qualified personnel to observe: 1. Field conditions. 2. Condition of installation. 3. Quality of workmanship. 4. Start-up of equipment. 5. Testing and adjusting of equipment.

B. Manufacturer’s qualified personnel shall make written report of observations and

recommendations to Architect/Engineer.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0509-2

1.07 MOCK UPS

A. Assemble and erect the specified equipment and products complete, with specified anchorage and support devices, seals and finishes.

B. Do not proceed with any work involving a mock-up, until the related mock up has been approved in writing.

C. Acceptable mock-ups in place shall be retained in the completed work where possible.

D. Perform tests and submit results as specified.

1.08 SCHEDULING OF MOCK-UPS

A. Schedule demonstration and observation of mock-ups, in phases, with Architect / Engineer. 01. Rough-in02. Finish with all appurtenances in place03. Demonstrations

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 REFERENCE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ADJUSTMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS

A. Contractor shall provide all adjustments and modifications as requested by the manufacturer’s qualified personnel at no additional cost to Owner.

3.02 MOCK-UPS

A. Mock-up a typical classroom, science lab of each type, and computer lab with all wiring devices, cover plates, rough-in boxes, conduits, etc. Provide all conductors from all wiring devices to above ceiling space to demonstrate conduit routing and conductor fill.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District FIRESTOPS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 27 05 10 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 KMES-161061/161062

Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0510-1

SECTION 27 05 10 - FIRESTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide firestop as required, and as specified. Refer to Architectural drawings for all fire and smoke rated partitions, walls, floors, etc.

B. Types: Firestop required for the project includes smoke stop.


A. UL Label: Firestops shall be UL labeled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Nelson.

B. 3M (Minnesota Mining Manufacturing).

C. Hilti

D. Specified Technologies, Inc.

2.02 MATERIAL AND COMPONENTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide firestop manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer, and as required for installation.

2.03 FIRESTOP

A. Conduits: Provide a soft, permanently flexible sealant for 1-1/2 to 2 hour rated fireproofing for steel conduits (up to 4" diameter).

B. Low Voltage Cables, Fiber Optic Cable and Innerduct: Provide Specified Technologies, Inc. EZ-Path single, double, or triple pathways as required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF FIRESTOPS

A. General: Install firestops in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and industry practices to ensure that the firestops comply with requirements. Comply with UL and NFPA standards for the installation of firestops.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District DATA COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURED CABLING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 27 10 00 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 KMES-161061/161062

Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-1

SECTION 27 10 00 - DATA COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURED CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Furnish and install horizontal cabling inclusive of Category 6 cabling, jacks, faceplates, patch cords, above-ceiling supports, labels, testing and all supporting equipment to provide a complete and fully functional solution as described in this specification.

B. Furnish and install backbone cabling inclusive of fiber, multi-pair copper, connectors, bulkheads, patch cords, above-ceiling supports, testing, and all supporting equipment to provide a complete and fully functional solution as described in this specification.

C. Furnish and install head-end equipment inclusive of 2-post racks, patch panels, fiber termination boxes, wire managers, ladder rack, fire-rated plywood, power-strips, grounding and all supporting equipment to provide a complete and fully functional solution as described in this specification.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE – STRUCTURED CABLING

A. Installer Qualifications: 01. The structured cabling contractor shall be licensed and shall meet all applicable

regulations.02. The contractor shall be certified by the manufacturing company in all aspects of

design, installation, and testing of the products described herein.03. The manufacturer shall have, at the district’s disposal, a certified employee or

support phone number that can be reached during normal operating hours forproduct support and service.

04. The contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall berequired to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type andsize. The contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary forsuccessful installation and testing of optical and metallic premise distributionsystems and shall have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of suchtools and equipment. Contractor shall provide evidence of minimum five (5) years’experience on similar structured cabling systems.

05. A resume of qualifications shall be submitted with the contractor’s proposalindicating the following:

a. A list of five (5) recently completed projects of similar type and size withcontact names, telephone numbers, and e-mail addresses for each.

b. A list of procedures, inclusive of testing equipment and best practices, fortesting the integrity of the cabling systems on this project.

c. A technical resume of experience for the contractor’s project managerand on-site installation supervisor who shall be assigned to this project.

d. A list of technical product training attended by the contractor’s personnelthat shall install the structured cabling systems shall be submitted.

e. Any subcontractor who shall assist the contractor in performance of thiswork shall have the same training and certification as the contractor.

06. The contractor shall employ full time local technicians and installers.

B. The Contractor shall attend a mandatory pre-construction meeting with individuals deemed necessary by the Owner’s representative prior to the start of the work.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-2

01. Items requested by the Owner/Engineer to finalize rack equipment configuration, rack cable management, rack cable terminations and other miscellaneous minor changes shall become part of the Contract Documents as supplementary information.

C. The products specified in Part 2 of this Specification shall be supplied by a single

manufacturer, within the acceptable manufacturer groups, with the exception of data racks and other hardware that is not defined as part of the channel test configuration by TIA/EIA TSB67, Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems outside plant (OSP) copper cable. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of seven (7) years’ experience and shall be ISO 9001 Certified.

D. The Owner’s representative reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work

performed, either on technical or aesthetic grounds. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the following standards and codes: 01. Local Building Code 02. Local Electrical Code 03. NEC National Electrical Code

B. Other references:

01. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 – Generic Communications Cabling for Customer Premises... 02. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 – Commercial Building Communications Cabling Standard

Part 1: General Requirements. 03. ANSI/TIA 568-C.2 – Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and

Components Standards 04. ANSI/TIA 568-C.3 – Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard 05. ANSI/TIA-568-C.4, Coaxial Cabling Component Standard 06. ANSI/TIA-569-C – Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces. 07. ANSI/TIA-492.AAAC-B – Detail Specification for 850-nm Laser-Optimized, 50-um

Core Diameter/125-um Cladding Diameter Class 1a Graded-index Multimode Optical Fibers (OM3/OM4). Current Edition

08. ANSI/ICEA S-83-596, Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable. 09. ANSI/TIA/EIA-598, Color Coding of Optical Fiber Cables 10. ANSI/ICEA S-87-640, Fiber Optic Outside Plant Distribution Cable. 11. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758: Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling

Standard. 12. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Single mode

Fiber Plant: OFSTP-7. 13. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed

Multimode Fiber Plant: OFSTP-14A 14. ANSI/TIA/EIA-TSB-125, Guidelines for Maintaining Optical Fiber Polarity Through

Reverse-Pair Positioning 15. ANSI/TIA/EIA-TSB-140, Additional Guidelines for Field Testing Length, Loss, and

Polarity of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems. 16. ANSI/TIA-606-B – Administration Standard for the Commercial

Telecommunications Infrastructure 17. TIA/EIA-607-B - 2011 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-3

18. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE 802.xLAN) 19. TIA/EIA 942 Data Center Standards 20. Current BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 21. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC). 22. BICSI – TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services International,

Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) C. Governing Codes and Conflicts: If the requirements of these specifications or the Project

Drawings exceed those of the governing codes, regulations, and manufacturer installation requirements, then the requirements of these specifications and the drawings shall govern. However, nothing in the drawings or specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all governing codes, regulations, and manufacturer installation requirements.

1.04 ABBREVIATIONS

A. The following abbreviations are used in this document: IC Intermediate Cross-Connect MC Main Cross-Connect UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair SCS Structured Cabling System RCDD Registered Communications Distribution Designer

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following items, for Owner review and approval, within twenty-eight (28) days of Notice to Proceed: 01. Proposed circuit routing and circuit grouping plan prepared by a BICSI certified

RCDD. The RCDD certification shall have been granted on or before five years previous of proposal due date.

02. Products: Provide standard manufacturer’s cut sheets and/or other descriptive information.

03. Testing: UTP cable test result forms, fiber optic cable test result forms, and a list of instrumentation to be used for systems testing.

04. Provide a line-by-line item specification review indicating compliance or deviation with full description of deviation.

05. Samples: Complete manufacturer’s product literature and samples of patch panel, fiber terminations, and station jacks with cover plate.

06. Provide coordination drawing with IC/MC equipment layout and rack elevations for approval, by Owner, prior to installation.

B. Documentation: Contractor shall provide documentation to include test results, and shop

drawings. An example of test results as they will be presented should be included with the shop drawings. 01. Work Station Cable Results: The results of the workstation cable tests shall be

provided in the form of printouts from the test equipment. 02. Fiber Test Results: Hand written results are not acceptable. Copies of test results

are not acceptable. Results to be provided on disk and printed form.

C. Project Completion: As a condition for project acceptance, the Contractor shall submit the following for review and approval: 01. Complete manufacturer’s product literature for all products installed during the

course of the Project for Operation & Maintenance.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-4

02. Inspection and Test Reports: During the course of the Project, the Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system to insure that the materials supplied and the work performed conforms to contract requirements. The Contractor shall provide written documentation that indicates that materials acceptance testing was conducted as specified. The Contractor shall also provide documentation, which indicates that all connectivity testing was completed and that all irregularities were corrected prior to job completion.

03. Operating and Maintenance Instructions for all devices within the system. These instructions shall reflect any changes made during the course of construction, and shall be provided to the Owner, for their use, in a three-ring binder labeled with the project name and description. Provide three printed (3) copies.

04. As-built Drawings shall include equipment layout and rack elevations. The as-built drawings shall be prepared using Auto Cad 2014 electronic format or later on CD.

D. Bill of Materials: The contractor shall provide an itemized pricing breakdown for the

turnkey solution that includes: labor, materials, wiring, termination, electrical equipment, electrical hardware, installation, etc. Pricing breakdown shall include the list price for each item provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Materials shall be as listed or shall be approved equivalent products of other manufacturers meeting the intent and quality level of the TIA/EIA specifications.

B. Ratings: All products shall be new and brought to the job site in the original

manufacturer’s packaging. Electrical components (including innerduct) shall bear the Underwriter’s Laboratories label. All communications cable shall bear flammability testing ratings as follows: CM Communications Cable CMP Plenum Rated Communications Cable CMR Riser-Rated Communications Cable OSP Outside Plant Cable

C. Initial Cable Inspection: The contractor shall inspect all cable prior to installation to verify

that it is identified properly on the reel identification label, that it is of the proper gauge, containing the correct number of pairs, etc. Note any buckling of the jacket that would indicate possible problems. Damaged cable or any other components failing to meet specifications shall not be used in the installation.

D. Cable Lubricants specifically designed for installing communications cable may be used

to reduce pulling tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS –

A. Horizontal Cabling Systems: 01. Commscope Uniprise

B. Backbone Cabling Systems: 01. Commscope Uniprise


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-5

C. Above-Ceiling Support Systems: 01. Tomarco CEAS 02. Panduit 03. Caddy 04. Arlington

D. Head-End Systems:

01. Chatsworth (CPI) 02. Commscope 03. Hoffman .

2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Horizontal Cabling Systems 01. Cable:

a. The Structured Cabling System provided shall be unshielded twisted pair, four-pair, solid copper conductor, meeting the intent and quality level of the TIA/EIA-568 Commercial Building Wiring Standard.

b. Cabling shall be rated CMP. c. Shall be Commscope 7504+.

02. Jacks:

a. Flush mount jacks shall be high quality 8p 8c modular jacks with circuit board construction and IDC style or 110-style wire, T568B terminations (verify with Owner). Jacks shall meet EIA/TIA TSB40 recommendations for connecting hardware.

b. Shall be standard 8-position, RJ-45 Style, FCC compliant c. Shall be designed for 4-pair, 100 Ohm balanced UTP Cable d. Shall terminate 26-22 AWG solid or stranded conductors e. Shall accept FCC compliant 6 position plugs. f. Shall have attached wiring instruction labels to permit either T568A or

T568B wiring configurations. g. Shall be backward compatible with existing Category 3, 5 and 5E cabling

systems for fit, form and function h. Shall meet or exceed transmission requirements for connecting

hardware, as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C2, Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm.

i. Shall be UL Listed and CSA certified. j. Each jack shall have category rating identified on the front face. k. Shall be Category 6

03. Patch Cords a. Shall be factory terminated, with strain-relief boot b. Shall match manufacturer of horizontal cabling system

c. Shall be Category 6 d. Patch Cables shall be provided by Contractor for each station outlet and

each patch panel jack (i.e. 2 cables per drop/tie cable). Patch cables shall be pinned per EIA 568B and shall be terminated with 8p8c non-keyed plugs at both ends. Patch cords shall be a length suitable to neatly run from farthest two jacks on patch panel and still provide slack to dress cable.

04. Faceplates a. Minimum four (4) ports


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-6

b. Blank insert covers shall be provided for unused workstation ports. c. Wall mount phone faceplate d. Provide 106-Style frame for floor-mounted boxes e. Faceplates shall be compatible with standard NEMA openings and

boxes. f. Faceplates shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified

05. Cabling Support Systems a. J-Hooks or Saddle Bags

i. Hold up to 5” diameter bundle of cable without sagging, bending or damaging cable

ii. All Velcro used above ceilings must be rated CMP 06. Labels

a. Labels: The Contractor shall label all outlets using permanent machine engraved labels approved by the Owner. Label patch panels in the wiring closet to match those on corresponding data outlets. The font shall be at least one-eighth inch (1/8”) in height, block. All labels shall correspond to as-builts and to final test reports.

b. Contractor shall ensure complete durable laser printable cable labels typed labeling of all outlets and cables with numbers that correspond to locations on the punch down block. Labeling system shall correspond to the Owner’s labeling system. Verify with Owner. Provide tags (black letters on white labels, plastic coated) on all cables and outlets. i. Durable laser printable cable labels. ii. Designed to function in most desktop laser printers. iii. Durable Polyester label stock. iv. Self -Laminating wrap around design. v. Available in US letter sheet size of 8.5" x 11". vi. Clear Polyester with White and Colored Print-on areas. vii. Polyester rated for 0F to 275F for indoor and outdoor

applications. viii. Patch Panel Port Identification. ix. Face Plate and Port Labels. x. 110 & NS6-110 Cross Connect Labels xi. Rack and Cabinet Labels. xii. Fiber Adapter Labels. xiii. Pre-Printed Port Labeling.

B. Backbone Cabling Systems

01. Fiber: a. Physical Characteristics;

i. Shall be suitable for use in indoors or in indoor/outdoor applications.

ii. Appropriately flame rated optical cable shall be suitable for use in risers, plenums and horizontal applications.

iii. Plenum rated optical cables shall have and be marked with an UL-OFNP and OFN FT6 Flame Rating. Riser rated optical cables shall have and be marked with an UL-OFNR and OFN FT4 Flame Rating

iv. Shall comply with the requirements of ICEA S-83-596 (Premises), ICEA S-104-696 (I/O), or ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 (Outside Plant, OSP).

v. Suitable for underground or aboveground conduits.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-7

vi. Optical cables and fibers shall be color coded in accordance with EIA/TIA-598-C.

vii. Shall have a ripcord for overall jacket. viii. Shall have armored jacket

b. OS2 Performance Characteristics; i. Dispersion - unshifted single mode optical fibers with Low Water

Peak complying with ITU-T G.652.D and with improved bending loss complying with ITU-T G.657.A1.

ii. The zero dispersion wavelength shall be between 1300 nm and 1320 nm. The ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-168 maximum value of the dispersion slope shall be no greater than 0.090 ps/km-nm2. Dispersion measurements shall be made in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-169 or ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-175-B.

iii. The nominal mode field diameter shall be 9.2 µm with a tolerance

of ± 0.4 µm at 1310 nm when measured in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-191-B.

iv. Transmission Characteristics: v. Maximum cabled attenuation for loose tube fibers shall be 0.4/0.3

dB/km @ 1310/1550 nm. vi. Maximum cabled attenuation for tight buffer fibers shall be

0.7/0.7 dB/km @ 1310/1550 nm.

vii. The cabled cutoff wavelength shall be ≤1260 nm when measured in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-80-C

02. Backbone Copper: a. Cat 6 – Match horizontal cabling

C. Head-End Systems 01. Racks/Grounding a. Racks i. 7’ Tall ii. Black b. Patch Panels i. Modular ii. Angled iii. 24/48-Port c. Ladder Rack i. Black ii. 12” Wide iii. Elevation and Top Plate Kits d. Vertical Wire Managers i. Black ii. 6”/10” Sizes iii. Double-Sided e. Grounding i. #6 AWG copper grounding wire ii. 12” grounding bus bar, TMGB pattern iii. 2-hole grounding lugs 02. Fiber Head-End Systems a. Fiber LIU i. 4RU - MC

ii. 2RU - IC b. Bulkheads


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-8

i. 12-Port Duplex ii. LC c. Connectors i. LC d. Patch Cords i. 3-Meter ii. LC-LC terminations

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. At completion the horizontal cabling system shall be inclusive of Cat 6, jacks, faceplates, patch cords, above-ceiling supports, labels, testing, and all supporting equipment to provide a complete solution as described in this specification.

B. At completion the backbone cabling system shall be inclusive of fiber, multi-pair copper,

connectors, bulkheads, patch cords, above-ceiling supports, testing, and all supporting equipment to provide a complete solution as described in this specification.

C. At completion the head-end system shall be inclusive of 2-post racks, patch panels, fiber

termination boxes, wire managers, ladder rack, fire-rated plywood, power-strips, grounding and all supporting equipment to provide a complete solution as described in this specification.

D. Conformance to the installation practices covered above is to be verified when completed. In some cases, the Owner/Engineer may observe before acceptance. E. All clean-up activity related to work performed shall be the responsibility of the contractor and shall be completed daily before leaving the facility.

3.02 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. It is encouraged that the contractor be familiar with the site and existing district infrastructure before submitting proposal. Congested building areas shall be inspected by the contractor to ensure coordination with the other trades during construction. No extras shall be permitted because of the contractor’s failure to properly investigate existing conditions or building design at the time of the proposal.

B. The Contractor shall coordinate with other system vendors, where appropriate, to

facilitate equipment installation, scheduling, protection of equipment and access to the project site in order to provide the Owner a substantially complete project in a timely manner.

3.03 HORIZONTAL CABLING

A. Colors/Types 01. Cable a. Blue 02. Jacks/Patch Cords a. Data – Yellow

b. VoIP – Orange


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-9

c. Wireless Access Points – Blue d. Security – Green e. POT – Gray f. Building Automation – Red g. Audio/Video – White h. Management – Black

03. Faceplates a. Coordinate with Division 26

B. Installation 01. Horizontal Cabling

a. One (1) cable shall be provided for each port shown on the drawings, unless otherwise shown on drawings. Cable shall be rated CMP. The SCS shall serve as a vehicle for transport of data, video and telephony signals throughout the network from designated demarcation points to outlets located at various desk, workstation and other locations as indicated on the contract drawings and described herein. Applications standards supported should include, but be not limited to, IEEE 802.3, 10Base5, 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.5, 4 Mbps, 16Mbps 328 ft. [100m], and TP-PMD. In addition, these links/channels shall be capable of supporting applications such as 100 Base-T and 52/155 Mbps ATM AND 77 Channel Analog Broadband Video to 550 Mhz. Gigabit cable performance shall be capable of supporting applications including AES/EBU Digital Audio, 270 Mbps Digital video, 622 Mbps 64-CAP ATM, 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet and 1.2 Gigabit ATM.

b. The cabling shall be installed per requirements of the manufacturer and the Project Documents, utilizing material meeting all applicable TIA/EIA standards. The contractor is responsible for providing all incidental and/or miscellaneous hardware not explicitly specified below as required for a complete and operational system.

c. Cable shall not run in close proximity (6 inches’ perpendicular, 12 inches parallel) to power conduits (and other electrical noise sources). No patch panel, cable, outlet or punch block shall be within 6 feet of transformers or 12 inches of fluorescent lights, light fixtures, A/C wiring, radio systems or any other RF emitting device in ceilings or in/on walls.

d. Furnish and install pull strings in all new conduits, including all conduits with cable installed as part of this contract. Pull test is not to exceed 200 pounds.

e. Conduit sleeves shall be provided from outside IC/MC location to below ceiling area above ladder rack inside IC/MC. Minimum conduit size for data cabling sleeves shall be 4 inch.

f. Any data cabling installed in any conduit that is run underground in or under building slab shall be outside plant rated and sealed at each end with approved gel cable/conduit sealant.

. g. Cable runs shall be free of splices, kinks, excessive slack, and damage to the outer jacket h. Cables shall not be painted. i. Cables shall be placed with sufficient bending radius so as not to kink,

shear or damage the cable jacket or to otherwise diminish the transmission capability of the wire inside.

j. Cable and/or cable bundles shall not be attached to any electrical wiring or light fixtures, nor will its vertical deflection allow it to come in contact with HVAC mechanical equipment, electrical wiring, conduits, piping, or


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-10

fluorescent light fixtures. k. All data cables shall be home runs from outlet at final termination to patch

panel at IC/MC. l. Cable Termination:

i. Number of twists per foot shall be maintained all the way to cable termination point.

ii. Provide three (3) foot service loop above ceiling for each drop, on workstation and head-end side

iii. Cable shall be terminated using tools specified by the cable manufacturer.

m. If there is no IC/MC within 90-meter cable limitations of drop, contractor shall be responsible for additional ICs as required for a complete system. Locate additional ICs in Mechanical/ Electrical Rooms or as directed by Owner. Provide additional 120-volt power and receptacles as required for additional IC locations, similar to those ICs indicated or specified elsewhere.

n. Cable Supports: i. In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where duct, cable

trays or conduit are not available, the Contractor shall bundle, in bundles of 50 or less, station wiring with cable ties snug, but not deforming the cable geometry. Cable bundles shall be supported and attached to the building structure and framework at a maximum of five (5) foot intervals.

ii. Cables shall not be attached to lift out ceiling grid supports or laid directly on the ceiling grid.

iii. Cables shall not be attached to or supported by fire sprinkler heads or delivery systems or any environmental sensor located in the ceiling air space.

o. Fire Wall Penetrations: The Contractor shall avoid penetration of fire rated walls and floors wherever possible. Contractor shall also seal all floor, ceiling and wall penetrations in fire or smoke barriers and in the wiring closet.

p. Wall Penetrations: Where penetrations are necessary, they shall be sleeved with metallic conduit and resealed with an Underwriter Laboratories (UL) approved sealant.

q. After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned free of lubricant residue.

r. Mounting heights shall conform to the Local Building Code Accessibility Standards. Mounting height shall match adjacent wiring devices unless noted otherwise.

s. Two (2) duplex receptacle(s) shall be installed at all IC locations and circuited to the nearest computer power panel board. Coordinate with Division 26.

t. Contractor shall not hang cabling on pipes or wiring looms. Provide and install separate J-Hooks, cable saddles or cable trays to carry cable plant that is installed. Cable support shall be secured to building structure.

u. Cable shall run parallel and perpendicular to building lines. Changes in direction will be made with smooth bends, not exceeding minimum bend radius.

v. Patch Cords: i. Furnish and install quantity one (1) 3-meter at workstation side ii. Furnish and install quantity one (1) 1-meter at head-end side


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-11

w. Emergency phone copper –Shall be provided, at minimum, at the following locations, coordinate with drawings: i. Emergency phone locations. ii. Elevator Machine Room iii. Building Management Control Panel. iv. Security System. v. Fire Alarm Panel

x. Wireless Access Points: i. Install each outlet above ceiling in biscuit style termination of

same design as station hardware y. Security Cameras:

i. Install each outlet above ceiling in biscuit style termination of same design as station hardware.

z. Damage: i. The Contractor shall replace or rework cable showing evidence

of improper handling including stretches, kinks, short radius bends, over-tightened bindings, loosely twisted and over-twisted pairs at terminals and excessive cable sheath has been removed.

ii. The Contractor shall replace any damaged ceiling tiles that are broken during cable installation. Ceiling tiles shall match existing or new as specified elsewhere.

3.04 BACKBONE CABLING

A. Colors 01. Fiber:

a. OS2 – Yellow 02. Backbone Copper

a. Cat 6 – Match horizontal cabling

B. Installation 01. Fiber:

a. Furnish and install 12-Strand OS2 Fiber Between MC and each corresponding IC

b. Furnish and install 6-Strand OS2 Fiber between MC and Marquee sign i. Furnish and install fiber transceiver/receiver pair to convert to

copper. c. Furnish and install factory terminated LC connectors, quantity to match

number of strands installed. d. Furnish and install quantity one (1) 3- meter LC-LC patch cord, factory

terminated, for every 2-strands installed. 02. Copper Backbone:

a. Furnish and install quantity two (2) – Category 6 Cables b. Furnish and install quantity of connectors necessary to terminate one pair

per port, on both sides. c. Furnish and install quantity (1) patch cord for each connector provided. d. Furnish and install 24-Port Patch Panel in each closet for termination of

backbone copper 3.05 HEAD-END SYSTEMS

A. Installation


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-12

01. Floor Mounted Equipment racks shall be assembled and mounted in IC/MC locations as required in locations indicated on the drawings. Each rack shall be s securely mounted to the floor and braced to the wall with cable tray in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Racks shall be mounted such that the side rails are plumb. Racks and cable tray shall be grounded in accordance with NEC requirements. Rack shall be installed for future expansion and with proper access behind after electronic equipment is installed.

02. Patch Panel Installation in order from top of rack: a. 2U fiber tie b. 2U blank for Owner equipment c. 2U patch panels as specified.

03. Backboard: Furnish and install an equipment backboard at each IC equipment location. Backboard shall be ¾” x 8’ x 4’ Grade A fire retardant plywood, with fire retardant paint. Coordinate placement of all equipment with Owner

04. Wire Management Components: Vertical cable management panels shall be installed on each side of the rack. In instances where more than one rack is installed in a single location, vertical cable management shall be installed between the racks.

05. Cable Placement: Cable installation in the wiring closet must conform to the Project Drawings. All cabling shall be routed so as to avoid interference with any other service or system, operation, or maintenance location. Avoid crossing areas horizontally just above or below any riser conduit. Lay and dress cables to allow other cables to enter the conduit/riser without difficulty at a later time by maintaining a working distance from these openings.

06. Cable shall be routed as closely as possible to the ceiling, floor or corners to ensure that adequate wall or backboard space is available for current and future equipment. All cable runs within the wiring closet shall be horizontal or vertical within the constraints of minimum cable bending radii. Minimum bend radius shall be observed. Cables shall not be tie-wrapped to electrical conduit or other equipment. All incoming cables shall be routed on the cable tray and neatly dressed down to the patch panels.

3.06 HORIZONTAL & BACKBONE CABLE TESTING/LABELING

A. Notification: The Owner/Architect/Engineer shall be notified one week prior to any testing so that the testing may be witnessed.

B. Final Acceptance: Before requesting a final acceptance, the Contractor shall perform a

series of end-to-end installation performance tests. The Contractor shall submit for approval a proposal describing the test procedures, test result forms and timetable for all copper and fiber optic cabling.

C. Procedures: Trained personnel shall perform all testing. Acceptance of the test

procedures discussed below is predicated on the Contractor’s use of the recommended products and adherence to the inspection requirements and practices set forth. Acceptance of the completed installation shall be evaluated in the context of each of these factors.

D. Errors: When errors are found, the source of each error shall be determined, corrected

and the cable retested. All defective components shall be replaced and retested. Retest results must be entered on the test results form. All corrections shall be made prior to final acceptance test.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-13

E. Twisted Pair Cable Testing

01. At a minimum, the Contractor shall test all station drop cable pairs from data closet termination patch panel port to station insert. Products shall be tested for compliance to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 and ISO/IEC 11801 for a rated installation. Test equipment used shall meet TIA/EIA TSB-67, Level 4 accuracy. Further, the Contractor shall have a copy of TSB-67 in their possession and be familiar with its contents. Testing shall be against either appropriate category standards or the manufacturer’s specifications whichever is more stringent and applicable.

02. Each wire/pair shall be tested at both ends for the following: a. Wire map (pin to pin connectivity) b. Length (in feet) c. Attenuation d. Near End Cross Talk (NEXT) e. Power Sum f. Structural Return Loss g. Delay Skew h. PSNEXT i. ACR j. PSACR k. Equal Level Far End Crosstalk (ELFEXT) l. PSELFEXT m. Far End Crosstalk (FEXT) n. Propagation Delay

03. Test equipment shall provide an electronic and printed record of these tests. Test equipment calibration documentation shall be available for on-site inspection.

04. Test results of each four-pair UTP cable must be submitted with identification to match labels on all patch panel ports and 8p8c jacks and must match as-builts associated with that cable.

F. Fiber Optic Cable Testing

01. Testing device for fiber optic cables shall be a high quality OTDR (Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer) equipped with a printer. The printed data shall show, in addition to any summary information, the complete test trace and all relevant scale settings. The OTDR must have the capability to take measurements from bare fiber strands as well as ST or SC connector terminations.

02. All fiber optic cable shall be tested on the reel before installation to ensure that it meets the specifications outlined herein.

03. After installation, the Contractor shall test each intra-building fiber strand with a power meter in accordance with EIA 455-171 Method D procedures (bi-directional testing) at both 850 and 1300 nm. A form shall be completed for each cable showing data recorded for each strand including length, total segment (end to end) loss (dB) and connector losses (dB) at each end. In addition, the printed data strip for each strand shall be attached to the form. Patch cables shall also be tested.

04. Acceptable fiber optic cable and connector loss shall not exceed 1.5 dB. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining minimum loss in fiber connections and polishing per manufacturer specifications.

G. Acceptance of the Data Communications Cabling System shall be based on the results of

testing, functionality, and the receipt of documentation. With regard to testing, all fiber segments and all workstation data cables must meet the criteria specified. With regard to


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 1000-14

functionality, the contractor must demonstrate to the Owner that 100 Base-T data signals can be successfully transmitted, bi-directionally, from the MC and from some number of individual data outlets. The number of outlet locations to be tested shall be determined by the Owner.

H. Coordinate with Architect and Owner's Information Systems Department the required SCS identification prior to construction. Exact nomenclature for identification shall be submitted in writing to the Architect for review prior to final identification.

I. Cable Drop Label Nomenclature: 01. Each port shall be identified; verify exact nomenclature with Owner.02. Each port on the “front” or facing side of each patch panel shall be identified.03. Each patch panel or “blade” shall be identified on the “front” or facing side.04. In each rack, numbering shall begin the upper left patch panel (as viewed from

the “front” of the patch panels), extending down vertically through each rack’scomplement of patch panels, and sequencing to the upper patch panel in the nextadjacent rack.

05. All data cable jackets should be labeled at both terminations:a. Cable end at faceplate termination should be labeled to match faceplate

designation.b. Cable end at IC/patch panel termination should be labeled to match back

port designation on patch panel.

06. Label fiber on each IC and MC patch panel. Label in a manner that designatesclearly which IC they are originating from and where they are going - i.e. FromIC#__ to Room #___ or to MC Room # ___.

3.07 WARRANTY

A. The Product Warranty shall cover the replacement or repair of defective product(s) and labor for the replacement or repair of such defective product(s).

B. A twenty (20) year extended product warranty and application assurance for this structured cabling system shall be provided as follows: 1. The extended product warranty shall ensure against product defects, that all

approved cabling components exceed the specifications of TIA/EIA 568 andISO/IEC IS 11801, exceed the attenuation and NEXT requirements of TIA/EIATSB 67 and ISO/IEC IS 11801 for cabling links/channels, that the installation shallexceed the loss and bandwidth requirements of TIA/EIA TSB 67 and ISO/IEC IS11801 for fiber links/channels. The warranty shall apply to all passive SCScomponents.

C. The extended warranty application assurance shall cover the failure of the wiring system to support the application which it was designed to support by recognized standards or user forums that use the ITA/EIA 568 or ISO/IEC IS 11801 component and link / channel specifications for cabling, for a twenty (20) year period.

D. Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the customer shall be provided with a numbered certificate, from the manufacturing company, registering the installation.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District INTEGRATED AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 27 41 00 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 KMES-161061/161062

Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0510-1

SECTION 27 41 00 – INTEGRATED AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install a complete classroom AV infrastructure inclusive of interactive monitors, wall mounts, patch cords, labor and all supporting equipment to provide a complete and fully functional solution as described in this specification.

B. Furnish and install large venue and conference room AV infrastructure inclusive of interactive monitors, projectors, projector screens, video conferencing, control, wall mounts, patch cords, labor and all supporting equipment to provide a complete and fully functional solution as described in this specification.

1.02 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Installer Qualifications: 01. The contractor shall be certified and shall meet all applicable regulations.

Contractor shall have Crestron DMC-D, and DMC-E on staff, to review beforeinstallation.

02. The contractor shall be certified by the manufacturing company in all aspects ofdesign, installation, and testing of the products described herein.

03. The manufacturer shall have, at the district’s disposal, a certified employee orsupport phone number that can be reached during normal operating hours forproduct support and service.

04. The contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall berequired to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type andsize. The contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary forsuccessful installation and testing of optical and metallic premise distributionsystems and shall have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of suchtools and equipment. Contractor shall provide evidence of minimum five (5) years’experience on similar structured cabling systems.

05. A resume of qualifications shall be submitted with the contractor’s proposalindicating the following:a. A list of five (5) recently completed projects of similar type and size with

contact names, telephone numbers, and e-mail addresses for each.b. A list of procedures, inclusive of testing equipment and best practices, for

testing the integrity of the cabling systems on this project.c. A technical resume of experience for the contractor’s project manager

and on-site installation supervisor who shall be assigned to this project.d. A list of technical product training attended by the contractor’s personnel

that shall install the structured cabling systems shall be submitted.e. Any subcontractor who shall assist the contractor in performance of this

work shall have the same training and certification as the contractor.

B. The Contractor shall attend a mandatory pre-construction meeting with individuals deemed necessary by the Owner’s representative prior to the start of the work. 01. Items requested by the Owner/Engineer to finalize rack equipment configuration,

rack cable management, rack cable terminations and other miscellaneous minorchanges shall become part of the Contract Documents as supplementaryinformation.

02. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0510-2

requirements surrounding installation of this system with all other trades and existing conditions.

C. The products specified in Part 2 of this Specification shall be supplied by a single

manufacturer, within the acceptable manufacturer groups, with the exception of data racks and other hardware that is not defined as part of the channel test configuration by TIA/EIA TSB67, Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of shielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems outside plant (OSP) copper cable. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of seven (7) years’ experience and shall be ISO 9001 Certified.

D. The Owner’s representative reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work

performed, either on technical or aesthetic grounds. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following items, for Owner review and approval, within twenty-eight (28) days of Notice to Proceed: 01. Wiring and interconnection schematics. 02. Complete point-to-point wiring diagrams 03. Riser diagrams. 04. Complete floor plan drawings locating all system devices. 05. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment proposed. 06. Detailed system operational description. Any specification differences and

deviations shall be clearly noted and marked. 07. Complete system bill of material.

B. Documentation: Contractor shall provide documentation to include test results, and shop

drawings. An example of test results as they will be presented should be included with the shop drawings. The installing contractor and/or equipment supplier shall provide complete and detailed shop drawings and include:

C. Project Completion: As a condition for project acceptance, the Contractor shall submit the

following for review and approval: 01. Complete manufacturer’s product literature for all products installed during the

course of the Project for Operation & Maintenance. 02. Inspection and Test Reports: During the course of the Project, the Contractor

shall maintain an adequate inspection system to insure that the materials supplied and the work performed conforms to contract requirements. The Contractor shall provide written documentation that indicates that materials acceptance testing was conducted as specified. The Contractor shall also provide documentation, which indicates that all connectivity testing was completed and that all irregularities were corrected prior to job completion.

03. Operating and Maintenance Instructions for all devices within the system. These instructions shall reflect any changes made during the course of construction, and shall be provided to the Owner, for their use, in a three-ring binder labeled with the project name and description. Provide three printed (3) copies.

04. As-built Drawings shall include equipment layout and rack elevations. The as-built drawings shall be prepared using Auto Cad 2014 electronic format or later on CD.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the following standards and codes:


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0510-3

01. Local Building Code 02. Local Electrical Code 03. NEC National Electrical Code

B. Governing Codes and Conflicts: If the requirements of these specifications or the Project

Drawings exceed those of the governing codes, regulations, and manufacturer installation requirements, then the requirements of these specifications and the drawings shall govern. However, nothing in the drawings or specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all governing codes, regulations, and manufacturer installation requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Control Hardware/Software/Cabling: 01. Crestron 02. No substitutions will be accepted

B. Interactive Monitors/Classroom AV 01. Promethean C. Ceiling Mounted Projector for LMC/Gymnasium 01. Optoma 02. Epson 03. Panasonic 04. Hitachi 05. Refer elsewhere in the specifications for substitution requirements.

D. Projection Screen for LMC/Gymnasium 01. Da-Lite 02. Draper 03. Screen Innovations 04. Elite 05. Refer elsewhere in the specifications for substitution requirements.

E. Mounting Hardware 01. Chief 02. Crimson 03. Peerless 04. Refer elsewhere in the specifications for substitution requirements.

F. Video Conferencing/Screen Sharing 01. LifeSize 02. Barco 03. No substitutions will be accepted. G. Speakers 01. Crestron 02. JBL

03. Refer elsewhere in the specifications for substitution requirements.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0510-4

H. Patch Cords 01. Quiktron 02. Liberty 03. Refer elsewhere in the specifications for substitution requirements. 2.02 CONFERENCE ROOM CONTROL HARDWARE/SOFTWARE/CABLING:

A. Conference Room Controller

01. Ethernet connectivity 02. RS-232 output 03. Crestron RMC-3 B. Touch-Panel Control Screen 01. 7” 02. Network connectivity 03. Crestron TSW-750 C. Conference Room Switch 01. 5-Port 02. Crestron CEN-SW-POE-5 2.03 INTERACTIVE MONITORS/CLASSROOM AV

A. Interactive Monitors 01. 65” screen size 02. 1080P 03. RS-232 serial port 04. Minimum of two (2) HDMI ports 05. Minimum of ten (10) points of touch 06. Mounting hardware

a. Articulating, with 19” Extension b. In Wall Storage Box - 14.25" x 14.25" x 3.9" minimum dimensions

B. Mini PC (NUC Device) 01. Minimum Requirements

a. i5 minimum b. 8GB RAM c. 256GB SSD d. HDMI out e. 802.11 A/B/G/N/AC

2.04 CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR/PROJECTION SCREEN LMC, CAFETERIA AND

TEACHING THEATER

A. Ceiling Mounted Projector 01. Minimum of 6000 lumens. 02. RS-232 serial port 03. Minimum of two (2) HDMI ports 04. Most have audio out either RCA or 3.5mm

B. Rear Projection Screen

01. 119” screen size 02. Front projection


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0510-5

03. Electric Rollup Screen04. 12-volt trigger capable

C. Mounting Hardware 01. 3’-5’ extension pole in LMC/Cafeteria

a. 18”-24” extension pole in Teaching Theater02. Speed tile above ceiling for support03. Universal project mount for attachment04. Black

2.05 ADMIN CONFERENCE ROOM(S)

A. Video Conferencing 01. Lifesize Icon 600 Codec

i. With Lifesize Camera 10X02. Lifesize Phone HD03. Lifesize RJ45 to Link Adapter

B. Screen Sharing 01. Barco CSE-200

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Cable 01. Crestron Cable

i. Copper - M-CBL-8G-P02. Speakers

i. Shielded 16/2 for each speaker

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Fire Wall Penetrations: The contractor shall avoid penetration of fire rated walls and floors wherever possible. Where penetrations are necessary, they shall be sleeved with metallic conduit and resealed with an Underwriter Laboratories (UL) approved sealant. Contractor shall also seal all floor, ceiling and wall penetrations in fire or smoke barriers and in the wiring closet.

B. Inspection and Test Reports: During the course of the project, the Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system to insure that the materials supplied and the work performed conform to Contract requirements. The Contractor shall provide written documentation that indicates that materials acceptance testing was conducted as specified. The contractor shall also provide documentation which indicates that all termination testing was completed and that all irregularities were corrected prior to job completion.

C. Operating and Maintenance Instruction for all devices within the system: These instructions shall reflect any changes made during the course of construction.

D. As-Built Drawings will include cable pathways, outlet locations with correct labeling and the installing wiring and connectivity diagram of the proposed projection system including the sound reinforcing equipment.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0510-6

E. The as-built drawings will be prepared using AutoCAD 2012 or later. Provide the owner with one Mylar plot of each drawing and one-half prints of each drawing. Provide the owner with electronic versions of the as-built on CD ROM.

F. Conduit Fill shall not exceed 40%.

G. Damage: 1. The Contractor shall replace or rework cables showing evidence of improper

handling including stretches, kinks, short radius bends, over-tightened bindings,loosely twisted and over-twisted pairs at terminals and cable sheath removed toofar (over 1-1/2 inches).

2. The Contractor shall replace any damaged ceiling tiles that are broken duringcable installation.

H. Clean-up: All clean-up activity related to work performed will be the responsibility of the contractor.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Projector/Screen Installation LMC, Teaching Theater and Cafeteria: 01. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.02. Coordinate with electrician for proper installation of electrical and wall mounted

electric operator(s) where specified.03. Coordinate with other trades as required to mount projection screens centered

about ceiling mounted projectors. Coordinate exact projector locations with thearchitect.

04. Coordinate sound input with Division 26.05. Provide and install all necessary patch cords.06. Add plenum rated amp, with speaker quantities shown on drawings for teaching

theater. Install patch cords necessary to amplify all audio from projector.

B. Interactive Monitor: 01. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.02. Coordinate with electrician for proper installation of electrical and wall mounted

electric operator(s) where specified.03. Coordinate with other trades as required to mount projection screens centered

about ceiling mounted projectors. Coordinate exact projector locations with thearchitect.

04. Provide and install two (2) in-wall boxes behind each interactive monitor locatedin conference rooms.

05. Provide and install one (1) Barco ClickShare at interactive monitor located inadmin conference rooms.

06. Admin Conference Room(s)a. Provide and install minimum of two (2) speakersb. Provide and install amp as necessary to power speakersc. Provide and install Crestron room control system, with 7” touch-screen

for control, and room controller for controld. Provide Lifesize video conferencing codec as specified. Run cable from

beneath conference table to Lifesize camera. Cable is for the Phone HDto interface with the codec device.

e. Provide eight (8) outlet power strip within recessed boxes.f. Place all codecs and logic boxes inside recessed boxes.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0510-7

07. Provide and install all necessary patch cords.

C. Classroom AV 01. Provide and install one (1) NUC device behind each monitor located in

classrooms.a. Provide programming time to image the Mini PC with Aldine provided

image. License by owner, installation by contractor.02. Provide and install all necessary patch cords to wire Mini PC for control and

video.

3.03 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install cables as recommended by the system manufacturer. Conductor quantities specified are minimum required. Conductors to be installed shall be coordinated with the system equipment supplier.

B. All cable must be handled with care during installation so as not to change performance specifications. Factory twists of each individual pair must be maintained up to the connection points at both ends of the cable. There shall never be more than one inch of unsheathed cable at any termination. 01. Wiring within Enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, and

lace the conductors to terminal points with service loop. Provide and use lacingbars where appropriate. Cabling shall be neatly strapped, dressed, andadequately supported.

02. Identification of Conductors and Cables: All cables shall be marked with wrap-around number or letter cable markers at both ends with clear shrink tubecovering the label. There shall be no unmarked cables at any place in the system.All cable markings shall correspond with system wiring diagrams and as-builtdocumentation.

03. Connection Practices: All wiring connections shall be made with approvedmechanical connectors.

C. Exposed Cable: 01. All cabling shall be installed inside walls or ceiling spaces whenever possible.02. Cables installed on exposed surfaces, in inaccessible locations, or underground

shall be installed in conduit.

D. Placement: All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as not to impair the owner’s efficient use of their full capacity.

E. Cable Routes: 01. All cabling placed in ceiling areas must be in conduit, cable tray or J-Hooks.

Cable supports shall be permanently anchored to building structure or substrates.Provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to whichattached and that are suitable sized to carry the weight of the cables to besupported. Do not route cable through webbing of structural steel. Cabling mustbe supported in dedicated supports intended to support cabling as described inthis section.

02. Attaching cable to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. Use J-Hooksfor up to 15 cables (Chatsworth hooks with appropriate brackets).Communications cable shall be rerouted so as to provide a minimum of 18 inchesspacing from light fixtures, sources of heat, power feeder conduits and EMI


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0510-8

sources. Cabling shall not be attached to ceiling grid support wires. Cable runs shall be parallel or perpendicular to building structure. Multiple cables to be bundled together every 6 feet.

03. All cables not installed in conduit shall be plenum rated.04. Cables not installed in conduit shall be grouped and bundled. Cable shall be

bundled on a maximum of 2’-6” on center and secured to the structure at amaximum of 5’ on center. Bundling and support shall be with plenum rated cableties.

05. Cables installed in hollow wall spaces shall be installed in conduit to anaccessible location.

F. Labels: The Contractor will label all outlets using permanent / legible typed or machine engraved labels approved by the owner (no handwritten labels permitted). The font shall be at least one-eighth inch (1/8”) in height, block. All labels shall correspond to as-built and to final test reports. 01. Tag each circuit at each end and at each terminal with a separate tag indicating

the area served.

G. Cable Support System: Cable saddles or J-Hooks shall be used to route all exposed cables (cable not in conduit or cable tray) in open access environments as well as in communications closets.

H. Cable Lubricants: After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned free of lubricant residue.

I. Allowable Cable Bend Radius and Pull Tension: In general, communications cable cannot tolerate sharp bends or excessive pull tension during installation. Refer to the cable manufacturer’s allowable bend radius and pull tension data for the maximum allowable limits.

J. Pull Strings: Provide pull strings in all new conduits including all conduits and cable installed as part of this Contract. Pull test is not to exceed 200 pounds. Data and video cables can be pulled together with pull strings.


A. Pre-testing: Upon completing installation of the system, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete pre-testing. Determine, through pre-testing, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pre-testing. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved.

B. Field Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pre-testing, testing, and adjustment of the systems.

C. Testing: Upon completion of pre-testing, notify the Architect/Owner a minimum of 10 days in advance of acceptance test performance. Schedule and conduct tests in with Owner’s designated personnel. Provide a written record of test results.

D. Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies at Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards. Provide a written record of all


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0510-9

retest results.

3.06 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting the performance of Video Systems Cabling. Advise Architect / Owner of any discrepancies between field conditions and drawings that effect subject work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Provide weekly status report. All concerns and issues related to maintaining the construction schedule should be addressed in these reports. Issues that are not documented in this format will be considered the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Control Circuit Wiring: Install control circuits in accordance with NFPA 70 and as indicated. Provide the number of conductors as recommended by system manufacturer to provide control functions indicated or specified.

D. Install all cabling with a bend radius of no less than is recommended by the cable manufacturer.

E. Exposed Wiring: Where wiring is indicated to not be in metal raceway, provide cable UL approved for plenum installation.

3.07 CABLE TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Requirements: 01. Notification: The Owner and Engineer shall be notified one week prior to any

testing so that the testing may be witnessed.02. Inspection: Before requesting a final inspection, the Contractor shall perform a

series of end-to-end installation performance tests. The Contractor shall submitfor approval a proposal describing the test procedures, test result forms and timetable for all copper and fiber optic cabling.

03. Procedures: Trained personnel shall perform all testing. Acceptance of the testprocedures discussed below is predicated on the Contractor’s use of therecommended products and adherence to the inspection requirements andpractices set forth. Acceptance of the completed installation will be evaluated inthe context of each of these factors.

04. Submit for approval, a sample of the form on which the test will be reported.a. Identify project.b. Provide a list of all system devices, arrange in numerical order of point

addresses1) Show descriptor and location of each.

c. Signatures of participants and observers. d. Results.e. Description of adjustment or corrections of defective components.f. Date.

05. Test, calibrate and adjust each device in the system.06. Verify operation of all specified functions.07. Provide documentation of all tests and verifications as specified.

B. Errors: When errors are found the source of each shall be determined, corrected and the cable retested. All defective components shall be replaced and retested. Re-test results must be provided on Owner approved forms and witnessed by the Owner.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0510-10

01. Continuity – As tested in the above testing requirements.

3.08 GRAPHIC FLOOR PLANS

A. Provide two (2) color coded floor plan detailed with actual room names, actual graphic room numbers as directed by the Owner, and adequate information to indicate group / zone / circuit information with non-fading floor plan media. Do not use architectural plan room names and numbers.

B. The floor plan shall be solvent welded in acrylic plastic. Mount in an extruded aluminum frame.

C. Install graphic floor plans as directed by Architect / Owner prior to substantial completion. Each area or room designation shall be verified with the communication device during testing.

3.09 GROUNDING OF EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment shall be grounded to the metallic structure of the building or to the building system power ground in accordance with NEC Section 250. Securely bond equipment to the ground system through a minimum 14-gauge green insulated conductor.

B. Electronic systems shall be grounded to the building system ground, with a maximum resistance of 0.1 ohm. Systems ground may be a driven ground rod, building steel, or other approved ground of the building power systems ground.

C. Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize to the greatest extent possible: ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

3.10 COMMISSIONING

A. Demonstrate to the Owner that Adjusting, balancing, and alignment all equipment has been completed for optimum quality and meets the manufacturer’s published specifications.

B. Demonstrate that the final system adjustments and tests meet the performance requirements. Provide all labor, materials, tools and measurement equipment required.

C. The Contractor shall satisfy all criteria requirements to the Owner’s satisfaction at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.11 TRAINING

A. Provide four days of training performed by factory authorized technicians for the Owner’s appointed personnel. This training shall be administered in four (4) hour sessions on each day, time and dates as selected by the Owner. Training shall occur after substantial completion using the installed and fully functional system. Training shall include, but not limited to proper usage of system as well as maintenance requirements of system. Provide all training materials and documentation required for owner to operate, configure and maintain all components of system.

3.12 WARRANTY


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 0510-11

A. The Contractor shall warrant the systems within this specification to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for not less than one year from the date of final acceptance of the Video Systems. Defects occurring in materials or labor within the warranty period shall be rectified by replacement or repair. Within this warranty period answers to service calls and/or requests for information shall be provided to the Owner within a 24-hour period and repair or replacement of any faulty item shall be completed within 72 hours, without charge, including parts and labor. This warranty shall not void specific warranties provided by the equipment manufacturers for greater periods of time or as specified otherwise for longer periods of time for specific products. It also shall not void any rights of the Owner guaranteed by law.

B. Upon Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall provide Owner with exact starting and ending dates of the warranty, as well as the name and telephone number of the firm’s primary contact for service work.

C. Correct defects in material or workmanship with a minimum loss of operating time at no cost to Owner.

D. On-site service.

E. Warranty installation and workmanship of Owner furnished, Contractor installed equipment for a period of 1 year from date of substantial completion.

3.13 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

A. The contractor shall provide a 1-year warranty of the installed system against defects in material and workmanship. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner during normal working hours. The warranty period shall begin on the date of acceptance by the Owner / Engineer.

B. The contractor shall, at the Owner’s request, make available a service contract offering continuing factory authorized service of this system after the initial warranty period.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 27 50 10 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 KMES-161061/161062

Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 5010-1

SECTION 27 50 10 - SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install a complete school communications system. 01. A complete system includes items such as wiring, push/call buttons, handsets, control consoles, and main distribution equipment.

02. Integrate all components to provide a complete and functioning system.

B. Locate equipment to accommodate millwork, fixtures, marker boards and other room

equipment at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Integrate the communications system with the following systems: 01. Clock and Bell System 02. Owner’s phone system 03. Local sound reinforcement sound systems

D. Return air plenum cable shall be used. Wherever cabling is run exposed, conduit shall be

used to cover and protect wiring. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide the system by a company that has been designing and supplying similar systems for a period of 3 years. Provide, upon request by Owner or Architect / Engineer names and addresses of similar installations.

B. Provide central processing control console wiring connections by factory engineers or

authorized factory trained personnel. 1.03 WARRANTY

A. Warranty equipment for a period of 1 year, from date of substantial completion.

B. Correct defects in material or workmanship with a minimum loss of operating time at no cost to Owner.

C. On-site service.

1.04 SUBMITTAL

A. The installing contractor and/or equipment supplier shall provide complete and detailed shop drawings and include: 01. Wiring and interconnection schematics. 02. Complete point-to-point wiring diagrams 03. Riser diagrams. 04. Complete floor plan drawings locating all system devices. 05. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment proposed. 06. Detailed system operational description. Any specification differences and

deviations shall be clearly noted and marked. 07. Complete system bill of material.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 5010-2

08. Line by line specification review stating compliance or deviation.

B. All submittal data will be in bound form with Contractor’s name, Supplier’s name, and

project name adequately identified.

C. Minimum size drawings: 11" x 17". 1.05 COORDINATION

A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements surrounding installation of the communication system with all other trades.

B. Pre-installation meeting: Schedule a pre-installation meeting specifically for the School

Communication System with Owner and Architect. 1.06 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Code.

B. UL

C. Communication systems connected to a telephone utility company shall comply with the Federal Communications Commission Rules Section 68 and the corresponding UL listing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Telecor B. Atlas Sound – Speakers and Attenuators C. Quam – Speakers and Attenuators

2.02 CENTRAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

A. The central equipment shall be mounted in a standard 19" equipment rack. The central equipment shall consist of but not be limited to: 01. The equipment housing. 02. A power supply to provide operating DC power for the circuitry contained within

the central equipment housing and all administrative control stations (ACSs) shall be provided.

03. A central microprocessor unit containing all solid-state memory and components necessary to provide the features specified herein.

04. Zone circuit boards as required to meet the system requirements for remote stations and/or communications linkage.

05. The provision for terminating the cabling from up to 128 remote stations and 8 administrative control stations (ACSs) shall be provided.

06. The provisions to automatically activate a selectable program source between class changes.

07. Network IP communications to receive district wide mass notifications over Owner data communications network.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 5010-3

2.03 EXTERNAL PAGING AMPLIFIER

A. External paging amplifiers shall be provided as required to meet the load requirements of the system when activated in the all-page mode. The system shall be equipped with equipment required for (one) program channel.

B. Program/paging amplifiers shall have the following:

01. Power output shall be capable of providing sufficient power for the speakers required to the project and include an additional 25% capacity.

02. Maximum .5% harmonic distortion from 20-20KHz. 03. Frequency response of 20Hz to 20KHz +/-1 dB. 04. 90 dB signal to noise ratio at 20Hz to 20 KHz. 05. 1V RMS input sensitivity at 1KHz. 07. Master volume control.

2.04 PROGRAM SOURCES

A. AM/FM tuner – Tascam TU-6900RD B. CD / I-Pod Dock / MP3 playback, Tascam CD-200iL

2.05 EMERGENCY TONE GENERATOR

A. Multi-tone generator with priority relay to override any paging or program function of the system.

B. The tone generator shall be activated from an external contact closure provided by

remote (fire alarm panel / emergency pushbuttons). 2.06 EQUIPMENT RACK

A. The central equipment shall be housed in a 19-inch W X 72-inch H equipment rack with casters. The rack shall be of sufficient vertical size to contain all of the specified equipment to be housed within. The rack shall be equipped with a locking rear door and removable side panels. All unused front panel space shall be filled with the appropriate size blank panels.

B. Telephone Type 66 blocks shall be mounted inside lockable, hinged panel with 3/4"

painted plywood backboard.

C. The program sources shall be remotely located from the control equipment. The rack shall be a wood grain finish, table top rack located as directed by the Owner.

2.07 SPEAKERS

A. Ceiling speakers: 01. General Purpose Speaker: 8" speaker with 5 oz. magnet complete with line

matching transformer. Program rating shall be 5 watts continuous. The speaker shall be a Quam System 12 2x2 lay-in at grid ceilings and Quam Solution 1 at hard ceilings. 25/70V transformers shall have primary taps of 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 and 5 watts. Tap speaker at 0.25 watt. White finish unless indicated otherwise.

02. Classroom, office, conference, telephone, teacher lounge, workroom speakers:


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 5010-4

8-ohm speaker with 5 oz. magnet, complete with line matching transformer. Program rating shall be 4 watts continuous. The speaker shall be a Quam System 12/VC 2x2 lay-in at grid ceilings and Quam Solution 2 at hard ceilings, with integrated volume control. 25/70V transformers shall have primary taps of 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 5 watts; tap speaker at 0.5 watt, or approved equal.

B. Recessed Vandal proof wall mounted paging horn:

01. Atlas Sound APF-15T with 193-8-6 square recessed back box and VP161-APF aluminum alloy grille, white finish, neoprene gasket, or approved equal.

C. Surface mount speaker/horn: Quam H16 surface mount wide-angle loudspeaker with

multitap line matching transformer, or approved equal. Tap at 2.0 watts

D. Remote Source Output Volume Control: Rack mounted in remote source rack. Provide line level volume control of output of each remote source device. Label each volume control for each output device.

2.08 CALL-IN DEVICES

A. Push to call button: Momentary call switch mounted on a stainless steel plate, with engraved PUSH-TO-CALL on plate.

B. Wall mounted handset (Switch Hook): Intercom station telephone.

C. Desk mounted handset (Switch Hook): Staff telephone station.

D. Administrative Control Station (ACS)

01. The administrative control station (ACS) shall be the control center for communications, paging, and signaling functions for the system. The ACS shall contain control panel with buttons for functional control and user programming.

02. For voice intercom, the ACS shall be equipped with a handset, keypad, speaker, microphone, and a TALK/LISTEN button.

03. Each ACS shall be equipped with a sounder for audible annunciation of incoming calls.

04. The ACS shall be capable of answering the next call in the calls waiting stack by depressing only one button.

05. An ACS shall have the ability to forward its call-in coverage to another ACS. An indication shall be shown in both the ACS forwarding coverage of calls as well as the ACS to which call coverage is being forwarded to. When in the forward coverage mode, an ACS shall still visibly annunciate incoming calls, and it can be used to make and answer calls or other assigned functions.

06. It shall be possible to manually activate and sound the time event signal to any of the 8 time zones from the ACS.

07. The ACS shall be equipped with a built-in tone generator, which provides for both time signal tone and user accessible tones (single chime, repetitive chime, steady tone, hi-lo, alarm, wail, and warble) for use as manually activated emergency or other signals.

08. All ACSs shall have a dedicated control labeled "ALL PAGE". The operation of this control shall gather all speakers for distribution of tone signaling distress or emergency signals, and emergency voice announcements. This control shall be defeatable as to restrict access into the all-page function only to assigned ACSs.

09. A designated ACS within the system shall have the ability to enter the user accessible functions for data input and programming. A "Security Code" number shall be required to enter this


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 5010-5

programming mode.

2.09 ANTENNA

A. Roof Mounted FM Antenna. 01. Gain of not less than 6.5dB at frequencies of 88 to 108 MHZ and 20 dB front to

back rejection ratio. 02. Coaxial antenna lead-in.

B. Loop type indoor AM antenna oriented and located as required.

2.10 MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM

A. The system shall contain an integral Master Clock and Programmer that shall be capable of performing the following functions: 01. Provide 500 discrete time event entries for programming functions based upon:

a. The time of day in hours and minutes b. The day or combination of seven days of the week on which the event is

to occur c. The selection of any one or any combination of 32 zones or (8) outputs to

be activated d. The selection of any one or combination of 16 schedules to allow for

maximum flexibility due to special circumstances or seasonal changes. e. The selection of 16 user-programmable Event Tones

1) Any combination of time schedules may be active simultaneously 2) Event Tones are programmable from a library of 25 Tone Types

B. Provide for Automatic Daylight Savings Time adjustment with Leap Year programming. C. Provide momentary contact closures for external device operation. Provide four inputs,

four outputs and four flex-puts. 01. Inputs shall be programmable by the user to initiate any desired system activity

(e.g. Page, Tone, Program, Event, System Reset, etc.) 02. Outputs shall be programmable by user to activate during any desired system

activity (e.g. Page, Tone, Program, Time of Day, etc.) a. Display the time of day in either 12 or 24-hour format at each

Administrative telephone b. Master Clock will interface with an existing master clock to allow the two

systems to synchronize c. Master clock shall correct compatible secondary clocks, analog, digital, or

both

2.11 UPS BATTERY BACK-UP

A. Provide UPS Battery back up for the communications system to operate a minimum of 24 hours stand-by then 20 minutes of operation upon loss of power.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Liebert, PowerWare, Best Power, APC, TrippLite

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INTERCOM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 5010-6

A. The intercom system shall consist of a central equipment cabinet, microprocessor control

unit, power supply, zone modules, administrative control stations (ACSs), amplifiers, and station loudspeaker assemblies. Provide all associated material hardware, wiring, and options as described herein to provide a complete working system, which shall meet the specified requirements.

B. The intercom system shall provide the following communications paths and functions.

01. ACS to remote loudspeaker station (provide two channels). 02. Administrative control station to administrative control station. 03. Remote speaker to administrative control station. 04. Zone paging

C. The system shall be designed so as to accomplish any combination or all of the above

functions simultaneously.

D. The system shall provide the facilities for the paging or sounding emergency signals or time event signals to selected groups or all remote speakers.

E. The system shall provide facilities for the control and distribution of up to two program

channels to individual, selected groups, or all remote speakers, as well as intercom communications and class change signals.

F. The system shall include the facilities of a built-in master clock and programmer capable

of correcting appropriate secondary clock displays and controlling events based on user programmed time schedule programs.

G. Provide remote control of program distribution. Distribution of the program source shall be

possible from any administrative control station (ACS).

H. Zone system as follows: 01. All speakers in corridors shall be zone area designation. (ie. all speakers in

corridors in the 100 series rooms, all speakers in corridors in the 200 series rooms. etc. etc.)

02. Restrooms, Toilets, Electrical Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, Telephone Closets, Data Closets, Janitor’s Rooms, and Storage Rooms shall be zoned with the nearest corridor zone.

03. All outside horns shall be one zone. 04. Each individual room such as and not limited to classrooms, cafeteria, kitchen office, conference room and gymnasium shall be an individual zone.

3.02 INTERCOM SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

A. The base system shall provide one simultaneous open voice speech paths between administrative control station and station loudspeakers within each 24-zone / classroom group. 01. The speech channels shall be true multiple, simultaneous, UNRESTRICTED,

amplified voice channels requiring no automatic queue or call stacking to access the intercom amplifier.

02 The system shall come equipped to provide modular expansion to eight (8) simultaneous open voice speech paths and a minimum expansion capability of 128 additional stations.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 5010-7

03 An intercom amplifier shall be provided integral with each ACS.

B. The system shall provide the capacity for both a loudspeaker station and a pushbutton at

each remote location. Each remote station shall be assigned an architectural or ID number to communicate with its assigned ACSs. The system shall permit user selection of 2, 3, 4, or 5-digit architectural dialing.

C. The system shall allow preselected coverage of calls from remote station to ACS on a

remote station basis. A remote station shall be able to report to multiple administrative control stations simultaneously. Functions of an unattended ACS may be forwarded by the user to an attended ACS. This provides overlapping or distinct coverage of remote stations by administrative control stations. Systems not allowing programmable flexibility of remote station coverage shall be unacceptable.

D. The system shall incorporate all necessary circuitry to prevent monitoring of remote

stations equipped with call origination switches with privacy mode.

E. The system shall have 8 user assignable groups of stations for zoned audio paging with any remote station belonging to more than one group. A separate group/zoning shall be user assignable for 8 zones of class change signals.

F. The system shall allow for user definable pre-selective access to "zone" and "all-page"

functions. This feature will prevent unauthorized paging from designated ACSs.

G. The system shall provide facilities so that the user has access for sounding selected tones from any ACS on either all-page or by zone basis for use as emergency or other alarm signals.

H. Provisions shall be provided inherent to the system, to allow for the use of a priority

override inputs (i.e. principal's microphone and telephone extension). This circuit, when activated by an external source, shall gather all speakers for distribution of the signal information provided by the external source. This priority override input shall preempt other functions currently under way in the system. Upon conclusion of the priority override function, all pre-empted functions shall be automatically restored.

I. The system shall have the capability to operate with external paging amplifiers to increase

the audio output available for paging. Adequate audio amplification shall be provided as required.

J. The system shall be equipped with control point outputs and activate outboard devices

such as priority override muting relays on remote local sound reinforcement systems. The control point outputs shall be activated when the system is placed in the emergency page mode or if the emergency tone generator is activated and shall mute the output of the local sound reinforcement system.

K. The system shall be equipped with RS-232 ports to allow for the following:

01. Diagnostics via a standard computer terminal. 02. Modem interface to allow remote factory engineering assistance. Systems not providing a port of access to the system shall not be acceptable.

L. System must allow simultaneous operation of both diagnostic and functional routines

(paging, zone page, time events, call-in, etc.).


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 5010-8

M. The system shall have the ability to perform scan functions from the administrative control

stations or computer terminal for: 01. Review of call-in coverage assignments to an ACS. 02. Review ID numbers of remote stations assigned to either of the two program

channels. 03. Review that ACSs are forwarding coverage. 04. Edit and review master clock time programs.

N. Higher priority calls shall not cancel when the "Clear All Calls" routine is used. Only

normal calls shall clear and cancel.

O. Line loss on two-way communications circuits to be no greater than .5dB per 500 feet of circuit length.

P. The system shall be provided with the capability to activate an emergency tone / signal /

wav file from remote emergency pushbuttons located throughout the building. Deactivation shall require pass-word protected access from an ACS.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install new communication system components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 01. Terminate all field wiring on telephone punch blocks mounted in an enclosure as

specified. 02. Label cables and wiring logically, legibly, and permanently for ease of

identification, using adhesive strip type labels. 03. All communications wire and cables, which are to be routed in the ceiling spaces

shall be identified and tagged every 50 feet. The identification shall include the room number on markers similar to T&B sleeve marker.

04. Provide integration of clock and bell, telephone system. 05. Provide integration of local sound reinforcement system override. 06. Provide integration of remote emergency pushbuttons.

B. Speaker Installation:

01. Install new speakers’ types as indicated on the drawings. 02. Speakers in high ambient noise areas (cafetorium, gymnasiums, etc.) Shall be

tapped as required to overcome the ambient noise generated by the public. 03. Provide silicone sealant to all openings and conduit penetrations at all exterior

back box locations.

C. Conduit and Cables 01. Install conduit, fittings and boxes as specified in Division 26. 02. Single system cables shall be grouped together in a common conduit of adequate

capacity to facilitate the ease of installation and prevent conductor or insulation damage. a. In no case shall the conduit fill exceed 50% capacity. b. Do not group conductors or cables of different systems in a common

conduit. 03. Cable:

a. Install cables as recommended by the system manufacturer. Conductor quantities specified are minimum required. Conductors to be installed shall be coordinated with the system equipment supplier.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 5010-9

b. Cables installed on exposed surfaces, in inaccessible locations, or underground shall be installed in conduit.

c. Cables installed above accessible, ceiling spaces may be installed without conduit. All cables not installed in conduit shall be plenum rated.

04. Cables not installed in conduit shall be grouped and bundled. Cable shall be bundled on a maximum of 2'-6" on center. Support cables from D-rings or J-hooks. D-rings and J-hooks shall be secured to the structure at a maximum of 5' on center. Bundling and support shall be with plenum rated cable ties.

05. Cables installed in hollow wall spaces shall be installed in conduit to an accessible location.

06. Tag each circuit at each end and at each terminal with a separate tag indicating the area served.

3.04 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide (20) “Live” intercom circuits for future portables. Wiring is to be pulled from headend to exit point. Punch down on 66 block above ceiling above exit door to future portable building area.

3.05 INSTRUCTIONS

A. Provide eight hours’ instruction to the operating/maintenance personnel, which shall include initial programming of eight schedules.

3.06 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

A. General 01. After completion of installation and start-up procedures, commence a verification

and testing sequence leading to final acceptance. 02. Submit for approval, a sample of the form on which the test will be reported.

a. Identify project. b. Provide a list of all system devices, arrange in numerical order of point

addresses. 1) Show descriptor and location of each.

c. Signatures of participants and observers. d. Results. e. Description of adjustment or corrections of defective components. f. Date.

03. Provide schedule of tests. Estimate dates of significant events.

a. All testing shall be performed in the presences of the Owner / Engineer. 04. Test, calibrate and adjust each device in the system. 05. Verify operation of all specified functions. 06. Provide documentation of all tests and verifications as specified.

3.07 GRAPHIC FLOOR PLANS

A. Provide two (2) color coded floor plan detailed with actual room names, actual graphic room numbers as directed by the Owner, and adequate information to indicate group / zone / circuit information with non-fading floor plan media. Do not use architectural plan room names and numbers.

B. Each plan shall clearly relate the room numbers on the annunciator to the area

description on the floor plan. All fire alarm devices located to correspond with the


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 27 5010-10

annunciator.

C. The floor plan shall be solvent welded in acrylic plastic. 01. Mount in an extruded aluminum frame.

D. Install graphic floor plans as directed by Architect / Owner prior to substantial completion. Each area or room designation shall be verified with the communication device during testing.

3.08 GROUNDING OF EQUIPMENT

A. Racks and cabinets shall be grounded to the metallic structure of the building or to the building system power ground in accordance with NEC section 250. Securely bond equipment to the ground system through a minimum 14-gauge green insulated conductor.

B. Electronic systems shall be grounded to the building system ground, with a maximum resistance of 0.1 ohm. Systems ground shall be a driven ground rod, building steel, or other approved ground of the building power systems ground.

3.09 ANTENNA

A. Furnish and install the Antenna as specified.

3.10 MASTER CLOCK

A. Provide all final connections as required for integration with communications system.

3.11 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE A. The contractor shall provide a 1-year warranty of the installed system against defects in

material and workmanship. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner during normal working hours. The warranty period shall begin on the date of acceptance by the Owner/Engineer.

B. The contractor shall, at the Owner’s request, make available a service contract offering continuing factory authorized service of this system after the initial warranty period.

C. The installing contractor shall submit evidence that he maintains in his service department the following items: 01. Central Switch Assembly02. Station Line Card03. Master Station Module04. System Control Card

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District LOCAL SOUND SYSTEMSJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 27 51 16MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 27 51 16-1

SECTION 27 51 16 – LOCAL SOUND SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL






E. Provide Shop Drawings, Submittals and Closeout Documents per Section 26 00 00.


2.1 CAFETERIA AUXILIARY SOUND SYSTEM

A. GENERAL: Provide auxiliary sound system for the Cafeteria.

B. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: System provides for the local origination and distribution of sound and music within the room. All connection points shall be recessed. Amplifiers and equipment shall be wall mounted in lockable cabinet for security and protection.

C. PRODUCTS

01 EQUIPMENT RACKS

a. Provide Atlas Sound 324-15 24RU, wall mounted equipment rack with locking, solid front door.

b. Provide one (1) lockable storage drawer, Atlas Sound SD3-14 with SD-LOCK option.

c. Provide minimum one (1) additional space and drawer for microphone storage.

d. Provide rack mounted power strip with illuminated power switch. Juice Goose JG8, Atlas Sound AP-S15LA or equal.

e. Fill all unused space with blank panels, Atlas SPR series.f. Provide five (5) extra rack keys.

02 MULTI CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

a. The amplifiers shall be rack mounted, multi-channel amplifiers. b. Provide Crown DCi4/600N, 4 Channel network based digital amplifier for

Ceiling Speakers1) Rated output power at 8 Ohm multi-channel shall be 600W with

1.4v present at input.c. Provide Crown DCi2/1250N for Wall Mounted Speakers.

1) Rated output power at 8 Ohm multi-channel shall be 1250W with 1.4v present at input.

d. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at rated output shall not exceed .5%.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 27 51 16-2

03 PROGRAM SOURCES

a. CD Player: TASCAM CD-200BT rack mounted CD player with Bluetooth receiver.

b. Provide PROCO iPlate flush mounted in front of stage. Include Mic outlet on iPlate. Wire mic separate from iPod input, back to sound rack.

c. Provide PROCO WPE 1XX Dual and Single Microphone Inputs as shown on drawings

d. Provide PROCO WPE135 Speaker Outlets as shown on drawings.e. Local A/V system. Provide input and cabling to connect audio out from

ceiling mounted projector input

04 DSP NETWORK PROCESSOR

a. Provide London Architect BLU100 with 12 inputs and 8 outputs, quantity as required.

b. Connect processor to control system for remote control of Volumes and Mutes see above for page layout.

c. Connect DSP processor to School Intercom System for remote override – provide a dedicated circuit to Intercom Head End so that override may be bypassed by Aldine ISD personnel. Provide one (1) RDL TX70 Speaker to Line Interface.

d. Connect DSP Processor to AMX Control System – provide GUI interface for Volume Controls and Mute Buttons for each active channel.

05 MICROPHONES:

a. Provide two (2) Shure SM87A dynamic handheld microphones and a 50 foot C50J cable with each.

b. Provide two (2) Atlas MS-20E floor microphone stands and two (2) Atlas BE-E microphone booms.

c. Provide three (3) Shure MX200 choir microphones, cabling and all associated equipment.

d. Provide two (2) Shure QLXD124/85 lavalier/handheld wireless microphone combo systems with WL185 lavalier microphone, SM58 handheld wireless microphone transmitter, power supply, antennas, and rackmount kit.

e. Provide Shure UA864 Wall-Mounted Wideband Antennas, quantity as required to cover the entire space. Provide UABIAST power adapter and RG58 coax cabling with each antenna. Maximum cable run shall be 100ft.

06 HEARING IMPAIRED SYSTEM:

a. Provide Williams PPA-BCS-FME hearing impaired system. Provide four (4) RPA-R7 receivers and antenna for the system. Provide a locking cabinet for transmitter or install transmitter in the same wall rack as the local sound system.

07 SYSTEM CONTROL:

a. Provide one (1) Touch Panel MSD 1001 10” Wall Mount Control Panel flush mounted in wall mounted enclosure protected by a Clear plastic cover.1) Split control pages into the following categories:

a) Wired Microphones b) Program Sourcesc) Monitor Feed d) Local Computer.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 27 51 16-3

e) Projector f) Projector Screen

For each Input used provide Volume Control and Mute Button. Mute Button to change color when pressed – RED for Mute – GREEN for unmute – Each active input on the process will have these controls as a minimum. Provide ON/OFF for each zone independent of other zones.

b. Provide one (1) Netgear wireless router WG R614.c. Provide on (1) AMX Controller NX1200d. Provide Interface modules for A/V equipmente. Provide Interface to Sound System Processorf. Provide POE power supply for Touch Panel AMX PS POE AF TC g. Provide AMX PSR4 as required.h. Provide Stopper Cover to Protect Touch panel

08 WIRING

a. Microphone Cable: 1 pr sh #22 plenum rated cable b. Projector Control Cable: 1 pr sh plus 1 pr unshieldedc. Screen control cable: 4 conductor #18d. Speaker Cable:

1) 12 gauge, 2 conductor, plenum rated to wall speakers 2) 14 gauge, 2 conductor for Ceiling Speakers and Monitor outlets

09 LABELS:

a. Provide engraved labels for all inputs, outputs connections and control switches.

10 CAFETERIA SPEAKERS:

a. Wall Mounted Speakers: JBL CBT1000+1000E speakers, mounted at approximately +12ft AFF. The speakers shall be placed and aimed by the contractor to provide sound coverage of the space. Provide a wall mounted bracket capable of tilting the speaker. Provide blocking in the wall to support the speaker mount and weight. Black.

b. Pendant Mounted Speakers: Provide JBL Control 67HC/T. Coordinate mounting height with Architect prior to rough-in.

a. Ceiling Mounted Flush Speakers: JBL Control 328CT with round grille and MCT300BB backcan – recessed.

c.

2.2 GYM AUXILIARY SOUND SYSTEM

A. GENERAL: Provide one (1) gym auxiliary sound system.

B. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: System provides for the local origination and distribution of sound and music within the room. All connection points shall be recessed. Amplifiers and equipment shall be wall mounted in lockable cabinet for security and protection.

C. PRODUCTS

01 EQUIPMENT RACK

a. Provide Atlas Sound 324-15 24RU, wall mounted equipment rack with locking, solid front door.

b. Provide one (1) lockable storage drawer, Atlas Sound SD3-14 with SD-LOCK option.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 27 51 16-4

c. Provide additional space and drawer for microphone storage.d. Provide rack mounted power strip with illuminated power switch. Juice

Goose JG8, Atlas Sound APS-15LA or equal.e. Fill all unused space with blank panels, Atlas SPR series.f. Provide five (5) extra rack keys.

02 MULTI CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

a. The amplifier shall be a rack mounted, multi-channel amplifier. Provide Crown DCi2/600N, network based digital amplifier.

b. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at rated output shall not exceed .5%.c. Rated output power at 8 Ohm multi-channel shall be 600W with 1.4v

present at input.

03 PROGRAM SOURCES

a. CD Player: TASCAM CD-200BT rack mounted CD player with Bluetooth receiver.

b. Provide PROCO iPlate flush mounted in wall. Include mic outlet on iPlate. Wire mic separate from iPod input, back to sound rack.

c. Provide PROCO WPE 1XX Dual and Single Microphone Inputs as shown on drawings

d. Local A/V system. Provide input and cabling to connect audio out from ceiling mounted projector input

04 DSP NETWORK PROCESSOR

a. Provide London Architect BLU100 with 12 inputs and 8 outputs, quantity as required.

b. Connect Processor to control system for remote control of Volumes and Mutes see above for page layout.

c. Connect DSP processor to School Intercom System for remote override – provide a dedicated circuit to Intercom Head End so that override may be bypassed by Aldine ISD personnel. Provide one (1) RDL TX70 Speaker to Line Interface.

d. Connect DSP Processor to AMX Control System – provide GUI interface for Volume Controls and Mute Buttons for each active channel.

05 MICROPHONES:

a. Provide two (2) Shure SM87A dynamic handheld microphones and a 50 foot C50J cable with each.

b. Provide two (2) Atlas MS-20E floor microphone stands and two (2) Atlas BE-E microphone booms.

c. Provide two (2) Shure QLXD124/85 lavalier/handheld wireless microphone combo systems with WL185 lavalier microphone, SM58 handheld wireless microphone transmitter, power supply, antennas, and rackmount kit.

d. Provide Shure UA864 Wall-Mounted Wideband Antennas, quantity as required to cover the entire space. Provide UABIAST power adapter and RG58 coax cabling with each antenna. Maximum cable run shall be 100ft.

06 HEARING IMPAIRED SYSTEM:

a. Provide Williams PPA-BCS-FME hearing impaired system. Provide four (4) RPA-R7 receivers and antenna for the system. Provide a locking cabinet for transmitter or install transmitter in the same wall rack as the local sound system.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 27 51 16-5

07 SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM:

a. Provide one (1) Touch Panel AMX MSD 701 Wall Mount Control Panels flush mounted in wall mounted enclosure protected by an STI Stopper II Cover. 1) Split control pages into the following categories:

a) Wired Microphones b) Program Sourcesc) Monitor Feed d) Local Computer. e) Projector f) Projector Screen

For each Input used provide Volume Control and Mute Button. Mute Button to change color when pressed – RED for Mute – GREEN for unmute – Each active input on the process will have these controls as a minimum.

2) Provide ON/OFF for each zone independent of other zones.b. Provide STI-7501H STI Mini Mega Stopper with thumb lock cover for

each touch panel.c. Provide one (1) Netgear wireless router WG R614.d. Provide one (1) AMX Controller NX1200 e. Provide Interface modules for A/V equipmentf. Provide Interface to Sound System Processorg. Provide POE power supply for Touch Panel AMX PS POE AF TC h. Provide AMX PSR4 as required.

08 WIRING

a. Microphone Cable: 1 pr sh #22 plenum rated cable b. Projector Control Cable: 1 pr sh plus 1 pr unshieldedc. Screen control cable: 4 conductor #18d. Speaker Cable: 14 gauge for ceiling speakers

09 LABELS:

a. Provide engraved labels for all inputs, output connections and control switches.

10 GYMNASIUM SPEAKERS:

a. JBL Control 328CT with round grille and MCT300BB backcan – surface mounted

2.3 PORTABLE WIRELESS MICROPHONE SYSTEM (PROVIDE TWO SYSTEMS, ONE FOR CAFETERIA; ANOTHER FOR GYM)

A. GENERAL: Provide a lightweight, self-contained portable microphone system. System shall be contained in a portable protective case capable of protecting the equipment inside.

B. RECEIVERS: Each individual receiver shall be on a different UHF frequency to allow simultaneous operation. Receivers shall have a detachable antenna to allow for remote mounting, and a 120-volt plug-in transformer. Outputs from receiver shall include both line level and microphone level.

C. MICROPHONES (per system):

01 Shure QLXD14/85 lavalier wireless microphone system with WL185 lavalier microphone, power supply, antennas, and rackmount kit. Provide two (2) per


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 27 51 16-6

system.

02 Shure QLXD24/SM58 handheld wireless microphone package with SM58 handheld wireless microphone transmitter, power supply, antennas and rackmount kit. Provide two (2) per system.

2.4 INSTALLATION

A. Provide all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the complete installation.

B. Terminations to equipment shall be by Local Sound System Contractor. Wiring for speakers, microphones and between system equipment shall be by Local Sound System Contractor.

C. Ensure that all speaker and amplifier circuitry maintains constant and correct polarity.

D. Route cable within the racks/cabinets in groups by signal level, and secure with plastic cable ties. Maintain as much physical distance between cables of different circuit levels as possible. Avoid tight bundling of cable.

E. Make all joints and connections with resin-core solder and with approved mechanical connectors, soldered after crimping. Splices will not be acceptable. Use spade lugs.

F. Provide wire guards on all antenna, wall mounted speakers, etc. in the Gyms.

2.5 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or non-conforming materials or workmanship.

B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following.

01 Noisy operation or static.

02 Loose or missing parts.

03 Shorted circuits.

04 Feedback and other distortions.

05 Defective equipment items.

2.6 TRAINING

A. Provide up to four (4) hours of training to a designated representative of the Owner with complete technical training in the proper use, operation, programming and routine maintenance of the system, at a time mutually convenient. He shall assist in the preparation of a set of detailed operating instructions for the system.

B. Provide two (2) 1-hour training sessions in the use, operation and programming of the system to Owner’s designated on-site staff at a time mutually convenient.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SECTION 28 01 00 KMES-161061/161062

Bid Issue 02/03/2017 28 0100-1

SECTION 28 01 00 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS


A. Compile Electronic Safety and Security (ESS) product data and related information appropriate for Owner's operation and maintenance of products furnished under Contract. Prepare ESS operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other sections of specifications.

B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems.

C. Submit 5 copies of complete manual in final form.

1.02 ESS OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Thirty (30) days after receipt of reviewed submittals bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance (including resubmittals), submit for review 1 copy of the first draft of the ESS Operating and Maintenance Manual. This copy shall contain as a minimum: 01. Table of Contents for each element. 02. Contractor information. 03. All shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data, bearing the Architect /

Engineer's stamp of acceptance. 04. All parts and maintenance manuals for items of equipment. 05. Warranties (without starting dates). 06. Certifications that have been completed. Submit forms and outlines of

certifications that have not been completed. 07. Operating and maintenance procedures. 08. Form of Owner's Training Program Syllabus (including times and dates). 09. Control operations / equipment wiring diagrams. 10. Coordination Drawings. 11. Schedule of Low Voltage Wire and Cable 12. Schedule of ESS Equipment 13. Schedule of ESS Field Devices 14. Other required operating and maintenance information that are complete.

B. Copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days with comments for corrections.

C. Submit the (5) completed manuals in final form to the Architect/Engineer:

01. Prior to substantial completion for Owner's use after the Owner accepts facility maintenance

02. Include all specified data, test reports, drawings, dated warranties, certificates, along with other materials and information

D. The Architect / Engineer shall review the manuals for completeness within 15 days.

E. The Contractor shall be notified of any missing or omitted materials. The Manuals shall be

reworked by the Contractor, as required, in the office of the Architect / Engineer. The manuals will not be retransmitted.


Bid Issue 02/03/2017 28 0100-2

F. Four complete manuals shall be delivered to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BINDERS

A. Commercial quality black, 3-ring binders with clear, durable, cleanable plastic covers.

B. Minimum ring size: 1". Maximum ring size: 3".

C. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings.

D. Label contents on spine and face of binder with full size insert. Label under plastic cover.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ESS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Form for Manuals: 01. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.

02. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11".

b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten.

03. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab and bind in text. b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

04. Provide flyleaf indexed tabs for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment.

05. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and Maintenance Instructions". List:

a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structures as applicable.

c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.

06. Binder as specified.

B. Content of Manual: 01. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic

order as outlined in the specifications. a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the

volume. c. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of:

i. Subcontractor or installer. ii. Maintenance contractor as appropriate. iii. Identify area of responsibility of each. iv. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.

d. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.

02. Product Data: a. Include those sheets pertinent to the specific product.


Bid Issue 02/03/2017 28 0100-3

b. Annotate each sheet to: i. Identify specific product or part installed. ii. Identify data applicable to installation. iii. Delete references to inapplicable information.

03. Drawings: a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate:

i. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. ii. Cable Plant Layout

b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation.

c. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

04. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different

procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.

05. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving:

i. Proper procedures in event of failure. ii. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.

06. Shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data as specified.

C. Sections for Equipment and Systems. 01. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate:

a. Description of unit and component parts.

i. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.

ii. Performance data, engineering data and tests. iii. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable

parts. b. Operating procedures:

i. Start up, routine and normal operating instructions. ii. Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency

instructions. iii. Special operating instructions.

c. Maintenance procedures: i. Routine operations ii. Guide to trouble-shooting. iii. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. iv. Adjusting and checking. v. Routine service

d. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.

e. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.

i. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. f. Schedule of low voltage wire and cable g. Schedule of ESS equipment h. Schedule of ESS field devices

i. Each Contractor's coordination drawings.

i. As installed color coded wiring and cabling diagrams.


Bid Issue 02/03/2017 28 0100-4

j. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

k. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications.

02. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomesapparent during instruction of Owner's personnel.

03. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as outlined in respective sections of specifications.04. Provide complete information for products specified in Division 28.05. Provide certificates of compliance as specified in each related section.06. Provide start up and testing reports as specified in each related section.07. Provide signed receipts for spare parts and material.08. Provide training report and certificates.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools GENERAL PROVISIONS MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SECTION 28 05 00 KMES-161061/161062

Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-1

SECTION 28 05 00 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, applicable provisions of Division 01 General Requirements, and other provisions and requirements of the Contract Documents apply to work of Division 28.

B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 28.

C. The general provisions of the Contract and the requirements of the following Sections apply

to the Work specified in this Section. See Division 26 for related general and specific requirements.


A. All equipment and work performed shall comply with all of the current and applicable Codes, Rules, Ordinances, Regulations and Standards (including those not specifically listed in this Specification) as interpreted and enforced by the authorities having jurisdiction including:

01. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

02. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) - Local 03. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 04. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Communications Cables -

B694, B736, D4565, D4566, D4730, D4731, D4732 05. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) 06. Code of Federal Regulations - Title 47 07. Electronics Industries Association (EIA) Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic

Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices - EIA-455 Series

08. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) - Communications Act and FCC Rules

09. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) Federal Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces - FIPS PUB 175, FIPS PUB 176

10. The Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) Communications Cable Stands - P-47-434, S-56-434, S-80-576, S84-608, S-85-625, S-86-634, S-87-640, S-89-648, S-90-661, S-98-688, S-99-689, S-100-685

11. International Electro-technical Commission (IEC) 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Local Area

Networks/Metropolitan Networks Standards Collection - LAN/MAN 802 Series 13. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) (ISO/IEC) Premise Wiring

Core and LAN/MAN Core Equivalents-11801, 8802, 14763-1 14. International Telecommunication Union (ITU-T) Telecommunications

Standardization 15. National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Code - NFPA 70 16. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA) Standards of Installation 17. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Performance Standard for

Twisted Pair Premise Voice and Data Communications Cable-WC 63.1, WC 63.2, WC 66

18. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-2

19. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72, Life Safety Code NFPA 101

20. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE) 21. Local Accessibility Standards 22. Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA) (ANSI/TIA/EIA) Wiring and

Cabling Standards - 526, 568, 569, 570, 571, 598, 606, 607, 758, TSB 31-B, 63, 67, 72, 75 and 95

23. Uniform Building Code (UBC) 24. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) - 497A, 910, 1077, 1863, 1283, 1459, 1604,

1651, 1681, 1690, 1778, 1977

B. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos

NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations.

D. Obtain all permits required. 1.03 SUMMARY

A. Provide complete and working ESS Systems including equipment, conduit, wiring, material, labor and training as described in this Specification and the Drawings. The ESS Systems Drawings and Specifications are the sole property of the Architect and are not to be duplicated, scanned, loaned or in any way made available to persons not designated as authorized by the Architect. All ESS Systems plans and specifications are to be returned to the Architect following completion of bid.

1.04 SPACE REQUIREMENTS

A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this respect.

1.05 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other Divisions of these specifications to determine their requirements. Extend electrical services and final connections to all items requiring same.

B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously

study the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents.

C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open

ends of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them.

D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in

sufficient time to prevent delay in the work.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-3

E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to equipment furnished under other Division. Determine from the General Contractor / Construction Manager for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect / Engineer, the exact location of all items. The construction trades involved shall furnish all roughing-in drawings and wiring diagrams required for proper installation of the electrical work. 01. Make final connections to all ESS equipment indicated on the drawings, except

as noted.

F. Request all Shop Drawings required in ample time to permit proper installation of all electrical provisions.

G. Extend services as indicated to the various items of equipment furnished by others.

Rough-in for the various items and make final connections ready for operation upon placing of the equipment.

1.06 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK

A. When the word "concealed" is defined as hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or above ceilings. "Exposed" is defined as open to view, in plain sight.

1.07 GUARANTEE

A. Guarantee work for a minimum of two years or as noted longer elsewhere from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or equipment shall be provided.

1.08 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer.

1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION

A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of work, and judged objectionable by the Owner, Architect, or Engineer, rectify such conditions at no additional cost to the Owner. If the item of equipment is judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart.


A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 28 are used to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit competition. Equipment of similar design, equal to that specified, manufactured by a named manufacturer shall be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before proposal due date. Submit complete design and performance data to the Architect. The Architect and Owner issue approvals of acceptable manufacturers as addenda to the Construction Proposal


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-4

Documents. 1.11 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS

A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities included within the scope of this work: 01. Obtained from utility maps and other substantially reliable sources. 02. Are offered separate from the Contract Documents as a general guide only

without guarantees to accuracy.

B. Examine the site and verify the location and elevation of all utilities and of their relation to the work. Existing utilities indicated on the site plans are for reference only and shall be field verified by the Contractor with the respective public or private utility.

1.12 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements.

B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to compare the scale of all electrical drawings with

the scale of the architectural drawings and make adjustments to all electrical drawings which have the incorrect drawing scale so that his material takeoffs are not in error due to an incorrectly labeled drawing scale and his proposal is complete.

1.13 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

Abbreviations:

A/V Audio/Visual

AWG American Wire Gauge

BCR Building Communications Room

CMP Communications Media Plenum

CMR Communications Media Riser

dB Decibel

EMI Electromagnetic Interference

ER Equipment Room

ESS Electronic Safety and Security

FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel

FCR Floor Communications Room

Hz Hertz

IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame

Km Kilometer

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LED Light Emitting Diode

M Micron

MDF Main Distribution Frame

MHz Megahertz

NEXT Near-End Cross Talk

nm Nano-meter

OFN Optical Fiber Non-conductive

OFNP Optical Fiber Non-conductive Plenum

OFNR Optical Fiber Non-conductive Riser

OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer

TC Telecommunications Closet (Now referred to as TR)


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-5

TR Telecommunications Room (A.K.A. TC - Telecommunication Closet)

UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair Wire

Definitions: Low Voltage Wire - Wire or cable used for one or more systems that operate on 24 volts or less. Low Voltage Wire is used to install and interconnect one or more of the ESS Systems. Low Voltage Wire includes patch cords, jumpers and all portions of cable or wire used to make the ESS Systems operational or for system communications.

Electronic Safety and Security Systems - One or more of the following and associated equipment: Fire Detection/Alarm Systems, Intrusion Detection/Alarm Systems, Access Control Systems, Video Surveillance Systems,


A. Equipment Standards: 01. System and all components shall be brand new stock from manufacturer. 02. All electronics shall be 100% solid state. 03. System and all components shall bear a UL Label.

B. Contractor Qualifications:

At the time of Proposal, the Contractor shall: 01. Have manufactured, supplied or installed at least three (3) other systems of

similar size, complexity, and general operation as the systems described in these specifications. The Contractor shall furnish in writing to Architect proof of compliance with this paragraph at the time of proposal.

02. Hold all legally required Texas State Contractor's licenses necessary to accomplish the installation and activation of the described system at the facilities indicated. The Contractor shall submit copies of licenses to the Architect prior to the start of work

03. Hold all legally required state registrations to meet local requirements for submittal drawings.

04. Have a local office within fifty (50) miles of the project site staffed with factory trained technicians who have experience on systems of similar complexity and function as the systems described in these specifications. These technicians shall be fully capable of system engineering support, installation supervising, system start-up, and providing the Owner with training and service on both hardware and software for the systems specified.

05. Certify complete and total compliance with the provisions of these specifications by letter or submittal of the proposal response forms, signed by an officer of the corporation, or a principal if other ownership currently exists. In addition, the letter or forms shall include a complete listing of exceptions, if any.

1.15 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide SUBMITTALS according to Division 1 and the following.

B. Requirements: 01. Submit paragraph-by-paragraph specification review indicating compliance or

deviation with explanation. 02. Submit proof that all system components and cables are U.L. Listed. 03. An equipment list with names of manufacturers, model numbers, and technical


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-6

information on all equipment proposed. Clearly mark exact model number proposed to be installed.

04. Product technical information sheets for each principal components in the proposed system, including cable, wire, terminal marking, and wire marking material.

05. Certification from the manufacturer stating that the system Contractor is an authorized distributor or installer of the proposed system when such certifications exist.

06. A statement listing every technical and operational parameter wherein the submitted equipment varies from that which was originally specified. If the submitter fails to list a particular variance and his submittal is accepted, but is subsequently deemed to be unsatisfactory because of the unlisted variance, the submitter shall replace or modify such equipment at once and without cost to the Owner.

1.16 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. The Contractor shall have visited the site and familiarized himself with all existing conditions prior to submitting his proposal and shall be prepared to carry out the work within the existing limitations. Failure or neglect to do so shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities not entitle him to additional compensation for work overlooked and not included in his proposal.

B. The Contractor shall confirm the availability of the proper power source for each piece of

specified equipment, through site visits and Drawings as necessary. Where proper power does not exist, the Contractor shall provide the required power, circuits, outlets, conduits, and wire as specified under Division 26.

1.17 DATA ACCURACY

A. Absolute accuracy of information regarding existing conditions cannot be guaranteed. The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor and exact locations, distances, elevations, etc., shall be governed by actual field conditions. Where variations from the contract documents are required, such variations shall be approved by the Architect / Owner.

1.18 SECURITY

A. The Contractor is responsible for complying with all of the Owner's and facility security's requirements to prevent theft or damage to equipment, tools and materials. If any deviation from facility security requirements is necessary, approval for such deviation shall be coordinated with the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall not disclose any confidential information of the Owner. The

Contractor acknowledges that such action is highly injurious and can do damage to the Owner. The Contractor will agree to and comply with the standard policies and provisions of the Owner regarding outside Contractors and Consultants.

1.19 UTILITIES

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all temporary connection and cables, lighting, light stands and power. The facilities shall be used in accordance with all applicable


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-7

regulations regarding operations, safety and fire hazards of the governmental Authorities Having Jurisdiction, provided they are not used in a wasteful manner.

1.20 PERMITS

A. All permits required for the specified performance and completion of the work shall be secured by the Contractor. These permits shall be presented and reviewed at the initial project progress meeting.

1.21 NOTIFICATION

A. The Contractor shall not shut off any existing systems. The Contractor shall give the Owner at least ten (10) calendar days’ notice of any requirements to shut off or interference with existing alarm, regulating, computer or other service systems. The Owner will arrange and execute any shutdown. All work such as splicing, connections, etc., necessary to establish or re-establish any system shall be completed by the Contractor in close coordination with the Owner.

1.22 INTERFERENCES WITH THE OWNER

A. Transportation and storage of materials at the facility, work involving the facility, and all other matters affecting the habitual use by the Owner of its buildings, shall be conducted so as to cause the least possible interference, and at times and in a manner acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall make every effort to delivery equipment per the schedule required by the project.

1.23 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as-built" changes and diagrams of those portions of work in which actual construction is significantly at variance with the contract drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various major and minor feeders, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Record underground and under slab cables installed, dimensioning exact location and elevation of such installations.

B. At conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, electronic AutoCAD 2012 /

Revit CAD files of the original drawings and transfer as-built changes to these. Provide the following as-built documents including all contract drawings regardless of whether corrections were necessary and include in the transmittal: “2 sets of CDs and prints for Owner’s use, one set of CDs, prints, and Mylar’s for Architect / Engineers Records”. Delivery of these as-built electronic, reproducible and prints is a condition of final acceptance. 01. 3 sets of electronic AutoCAD (2012 dwg) / Revit CAD drawing files, on CD-ROM

media, of each contract as-built drawing. 02. One reproducible Dayrex mylar film positive of each contract as-built drawing. 03. Three sets of blue or black-line prints of each contract as-built drawing.

C. As-Built Drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum:

01. Indicate all addendum changes to documents. 02. Remove Engineer’s Seal, name, address, and logo from drawings. 03. Mark documents AS-BUILT DRAWINGS.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-8

04. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY:05. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of

all conduit and cables, etc that were deviated from construction drawings.06. Indicate exact location of all underground ESS raceways, and elevations.07. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer.08. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of Drawings and

specifications upon which all locations of equipment, devices, and all deviationsand changes from the construction documents in the work shall be recorded.

09. Exact location of all ESS equipment in building. Label panel schedules to indicateactual location.

10. Exact location of all ESS equipment in and outside of the building.11. Location, size and routing of all ESS cables, conduits, equipment, etc. shall be

accurately and neatly shown to dimension.12. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations.13. Cloud all changes.

1.24 OPERATING TESTS

A. After all ESS systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect / Engineer and Owner. Provide minimum 24-hour advance notice of scheduling of all tests. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems.

1.25 WARRANTY

A. All equipment shall be covered for the full manufacturer’s warranty period and systems shall be warranted by the Contractor for a period of two years commencing with the filing date of substantial completion. The Warranty shall cover all costs for warranty service, including parts, labor, prompt field service, pick-up, transportation, delivery, reinstallation, and retesting. A contract for service shall cover the period starting with the first expected activation of each system and shall continue without interruption to cover the period to the end of the two-year warranty as defined above. The end of the warranty period shall be handled such that a smooth transition to a maintenance agreement with the Owner shall be achieved with no lapse in coverage.

B. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

1.26 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION

A. It shall be the responsibility of the sub-contractor to consult the Architectural and Engineering drawings, details and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself as to the construction and all job related requirements. All construction trades shall cooperate with the General Contractor / Construction Manager job site superintendent and lay out work so that all piping, cables, pathways, raceways, and other items are placed in the walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so that there shall be no delay in the job.

1.27 TEMPORARY FACILITIES


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-9

A. General: Refer to Division 01 for general requirements on temporary facilities.

B. Temporary Wiring: Temporary power and lighting for construction purposes shall be provided under Division 26. Installation of temporary power shall be in accordance with NEC Article 305.

C. Temporary facilities, wire, lights and devices are the property of this Contractor and shall

be removed at the completion of the Contract.

1.28 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Keys: Provide three (3) sets of all keys for system cabinets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WORK INCLUDED:

A. All materials listed in PART 2 - PRODUCTS of this Division Sections and on the Drawings shall be provided by the Contractor unless specifically excluded or modified in other portions of this Specification or Addendums.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. This project has a critical path, which must be closely followed in order to meet the completion date. The Contractor shall review the proposed schedule at the Award of Contract meeting and be prepared to staff his work force according to the schedule constraints presented at that time.

B. Aesthetics are an important consideration in this installation. All components shall be

installed so as to have aesthetically pleasing results as determined by the Owner and Architect. Actual locations of all visible components shall be coordinated in advance with the Owner and Architect.

C. Install, make fully operational and test the system as indicated on the Drawings and in the

Specifications. Where information is not available the worst-case condition must be assumed to ensure a complete, functional system.

D. Any interfacing with other systems shall be the Contractor's responsibility under this

contract, and the details, both logical and physical, of such interfaces shall be reflected in the Submittals and As-Built drawings.

E. If appropriate, interfaces with the Owner's Data Network or Telecommunications System

shall be coordinated with the Owner and Architect. F. All necessary back boards, back-boxes, pull-boxes, connectors, supports, conduit, cable

and wire shall be furnished and installed to provide a complete and reliable system. Exact location of all backboards, boxes, conduit and wiring runs shall be presented to the Owner / Architect for approval in advance of any installation. Provide as required and as specified in Division 26.

G. Where required provide 120-VAC, 60 Hz power from nearest electrical panel through a


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-10

junction box, to the system devices. Provide as required and as specified in Division 26. H. Where required, install conduit, cable and wire parallel and square with building lines,

including raised floor areas. Conduit fills shall not exceed 40%. I. All equipment shall be mounted with sufficient clearance to minimize EMI as well as meet

all applicable codes and facilitate observation and testing. Securely hand and/or fasten with appropriate fittings to ensure positive grounding, free of ground loops, throughout the entire system. Units shall be installed parallel and square to building lines.

J. Quiet and vibration-free operation of all equipment is a requirement of this installation.

Properly adjust, repair, balance or replace any equipment producing objectionable (in the judgment of the Owner or Architect) noise or vibration in any of the occupied areas of any building and provide additional brackets and bracing if necessary. Any such additions or changes shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

K. Installation shall comply with the CODES AND STANDARDS portion of this Section.

Where more than one code or regulation if applicable, the more stringent shall apply. L. Where new equipment is replacing old equipment, the Contractor is responsible for

removing and disposing of the old equipment and doing whatever repair work is necessary as specified by the Owner / Architect.

M. Install fire-stopping, as specified in Division 26 for all penetrations in slabs and firewalls to

meet code at the completion of work and prior to final testing demonstration to the Owner.

N. The installation shall be performed in a professional manner. O. On a daily basis, clean up and deposit in appropriate containers all debris from work

performed under the appropriate specification sections. Stack and organize all parts, tools and equipment when not being used.

P. Preparation, handling and installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's

written instructions and technical data appropriate to the product specified. Q. All work shall conform to the National Electrical Contractors Association "Standard of

Installation" for general installation practice.

R. At the conclusion of the installation, all work areas, including all enclosures and boxes, shall be vacuumed and cleaned to remove all debris and grease.

3.02 COORDINATION WITH OWNER / ARCHITECT

A. Close coordination with the Owner / Architect is vital to achieve a complete, aesthetically pleasing job. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner / Architect is kept fully apprised of job progress.

3.03 CUTTING, PAINTING, AND PATCHING

A. Structural members shall not be drilled, bored or notched in such a manner that shall impair their structural value. Cutting of holes in structural members, if required, shall be done with core drills and only with the specific approval of the Owner / Architect for each instance.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-11

B. All walls that require cutting or repair during the installation process shall be returned to

their original condition, including the matching of colors and finishes to the satisfaction of the Owner / Architect, and at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.04 WIRE AND CABLE

A. All low voltage cable shall be low smoke plenum rated, limited energy, with 300-volt insulation.

B. All wires in exposed areas shall run through conduit as specified in Division 26. C. Provide conduits, cable trays, raceways, wireways, boxes and outlets as specified in

Division 26. D. After installation, and before termination, all wiring shall be checked and tested to insure

there are no grounds, opens, or shorts on any conductors. In addition, all wires between buildings or underground and all coax cables shall have insulation tested with a megohmeter (megger) and a reading of greater than 20 megohms shall be required to successfully complete the test.

E. Run wires continuously from termination to termination without splices. F. Wire and cable shall be supported in each equipment and terminal cabinet and in each

terminal and pull box in vertical risers and horizontal runs with wire duct and strap-type supports. At any point where wire duct is required for good wire management, whether shown on elevations or not, install appropriate duct. Where terminal boards are used, wire ducts shall be supplied on both sides and at not rime shall wires cross over terminal boards. Arrange cables neatly to allow inspection, removal and replacement. Lace cables as required. Spot tie wire bundles with plastic cable ties and securely affix to panels. If screw type terminals are specified, terminal strip connections shall be locking, tongue style, pressure crimp, and solderless spade lug.

G. Visually inspect wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation. Protect cable ends

at all times with acceptable end caps except during actual termination. At no time shall any coaxial cable be subjected to a bend less than a 6-inch radius. Protect wire and cable from kinks. Install 1 pull rope for all 2” or larger sized conduits.

H. Provide plastic bushings and strain relief material at all conduit exit points and where

necessary, to avoid abrasion of wire and excess tension on wire and cable. I. Cables above accessible ceilings shall not rest on ceiling tiles. Use Velcro tie wraps, J-

hooks or D-rings to hold cables. Provide independent support for all cables. Support is to be from building structure (do not support from pipes or conduits). ESS cables shall not tie off on HVAC supports, all-thread, ceiling grid hanger wire or electrical / mechanical piping system.

J. Ground and bond equipment and circuits in accordance with NEC and Division 26.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING

A. All cables, wires, wiring forms, terminal blocks and terminals shall be identified by labels, tags to other permanent markings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The markings shall


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-12

clearly indicate the function, source, or destination of all cabling, wiring and terminals. All cables and wires shall be identified, utilizing heat-shrink, machine printed, polyolefin wire markers (Brady Type B-32 or equal). Hand written tags are not acceptable.

B. Should a situation arise where the wire tagging format as shown on the drawings cannot

be used, a substitute format shall be submitted which complies with the intent to provide documentation that will permit end-to-end tracing of all ESS Systems wiring.

C. All panels shall be provided with permanently attached engraved lamacoid labels with

identifying names and functions. All terminal points shall be appropriately labeled. Labels shall be consistent in form, color, and typeface throughout the system and all must contain the name of the system or subsystem as part of the label textual information. Design, color, font and layout shall be coordinated with, and approved by, the Owner.

D. Identification of Equipment:

01. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the manufacturer's address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size, and other pertinent data. Take care not to obliterate this nameplate. The legend on all nameplates or tags shall correspond to the identification shown on the Operating Instructions.

02. A black-white-black 3 layer laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be permanently secured to each wireway, terminal cabinet, and ESS cabinet or rack.

a. Identifying nameplates shall have 1/2-inch high, engraved letters.

03. Permanent, waterproof, black markers shall be used to identify each ESS grid junction box, clearly indicating the type of system available at that junction box.

04. Pull Boxes: Field work each with a nameplate showing identity, and identifying equipment connected to it. Nameplates shall also indicate where pull box is fed from.

E. Prohibited Markings: Markings intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other

source from whom the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation in public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also prohibited are materials or devices that bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters Laboratories), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement.

F. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated

with access to or operation of ESS facilities. Provide text of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with industry standards for color and design.

G. Wire and Cable Labeling: Provide wire markers on each conductor in all boxes, pull

boxes, gutters, wireways. Identify with drop/circuit number.

H. Underground Warning Tape: Thomas and Betts or approved equal. Six-inch wide plastic tape, colored red or orange with suitable warning legend describing buried ESS lines. All underground conduits shall be so identified. Tape shall be buried at a depth of 6-inches below grade and directly above conduits or ductbanks. Provide magnetic marking tape below all underground conduits.



Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-13

A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 for the cutting and patching of other

work to accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as authorized by the Architect / Engineer, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted.

3.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL

A. Prior to substantial completion, conduct an on-site training program to instruct Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the ESS systems. 01. Provide the training during regular working day. 02. The Instructors shall be experienced in their phase of operation and maintenance

of the electrical systems and with the project.

B. Time to be allocated for instructions. 01. Minimum of 12 hours dedicated instructor time 02. 4 hours on each of 3 days 03. Additional instruction time for specific systems as specified in other Sections.

C. Before on-site training, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; for review

and approval, minimum 48 hours prior to proposed training time and date. 01. One copy to the Owner 02. One copy to the Architect / Engineer

D. The Owner shall provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and shall coordinate

their attendance at the agreed upon times.

E. Use operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review manual with personnel in detail. Explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing,

maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment.

G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system).

H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the

need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.

I. Submit a report within one week after completion of training. List time and date of each demonstration, hours devoted to the demonstration, and a list of people present, with their respective signatures.

J. At the conclusion of the on-site training program, have the person designated by the

Owner sign a certificate to certify that he/she has a proper understanding of the system, that the demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are satisfactory.

K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each

Operating and Maintenance Manual. 3.08 OPENINGS


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-14

A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for boxes, equipment or conduits are specified under

other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are included under this division.

3.09 HOUSEKEEPING PADS

A. Provide concrete equipment housekeeping pads under outdoor mounted ESS equipment.

B. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Division 03, or as indicated or noted.

C. Concrete pads:

01. 6-inches thick minimum indoors; 8-inches thick minimum outdoors, or as indicated on the drawings or in other sections of the specifications.

02. Chamfer strips at edges and corner of forms. 03. Smooth steel trowel finish. 04. Extend 3-inches minimum indoors beyond perimeter of equipment unless otherwise

shown. 05. 6-inch x 6-inch #8 wire reinforcement mesh.

3.10 OBSTRUCTIONS

A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions, which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, however, as to accuracy of location or complete information. 01. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's

representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all available information has been provided.

02. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition.

B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction,

whether or not such existing facilities are shown. 3.11 VANDAL RESISTANT DEVICES

A. Where vandal resistant screws or bolts are employed on the project, deliver to the Owner 2 suitable tools for use with each type of fastener used.

B. Proof of delivery of these items to the Owner shall be included in the Operating and

Maintenance Manuals. 3.12 PROTECTION

A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and in original manufacturer's condition.

B. Do not deliver equipment to this project site until progress of construction has reached the

stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather shall be rejected,


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-15

and the contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.13 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: ¾ inch, fire retardant, exterior grade plywood, painted gray, both sides. 01. Provide minimum of two 4-ft. by 8-ft. sheets of plywood for each location shown.02. Provide minimum of two 4-ft. by 4-ft. sheets of plywood for each ESS location.

3.14 SITE MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Contractor shall provide an on-site Project Manager as defined in SUPERVISION OF WORK portion of this Section.

3.15 START-UP RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Contractor shall initiate System operation. The Contractor shall provide competent Start-Up personnel on each consecutive working day until all ESS Systems are functional and ready to start the acceptance test phase. If the Contractor, in the Owner / Architect’s judgment, is not demonstrating progress in solving any technical problems, the Contractor shall supply Manufacturer’s factory technical representation and diagnostic equipment at no cost to the Owner, until resolution of those defined problems. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall bring the Systems on-line in their basic state (i.e., alarm reporting, facility code access control, etc.) It is the responsibility of the Owner to provide the specific database information that will be utilized for initial system programming.

B. Properly ground each piece of electronic equipment prior to applying power. Properly ground all shielded wire shields to the appropriate earth ground at the hub end only, not at the remote or device end.

C. Use a start-up sequence that incrementally brings each portion of the system on-line in a logical order that incorporates checking individual elements before proceeding to subsequent elements until the entire system is operational. The basic steps should include: 01. Establish ground planes at the equipment rooms and hub end of the systems as

specified in Division 26.02. Disconnect power, connect the first device, reconnect power, and verify

operational correctness. Repeat until the entire system is verified and operational.

3.16 PREPARATION FOR ACCEPTANCE (SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION)

A. All systems, equipment, and devices shall be in full and proper adjustment and operation, and properly labeled and identified.

B. All materials shall be neat, clean and unmarred, and parts securely attached.

C. All extra material as specified shall be delivered and stored at the premises as directed.

D. Test reports of each system and each system’s components and As-Built Project Drawings shall be complete and available for inspection and delivery as directed by the Owner.

3.17 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0500-16

A. Before final acceptance or work, the Contractor shall perform and/or deliver each of the following in the order stated.

B. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) composite “System Operations and Maintenance” manuals in three-ring binders, sized to hold the material below, plus 50% excess. Each manual shall contain in appropriately tabbed sections: 01. A statement of Guarantee including date of termination and the name and phone

number of the persons to be called in the event of equipment failure.02. A set of Operating procedures for the overall System that includes all required

Owner activities, and that allows for the Owner operation of all attributes andfacilities of the System.

03. A section for each specific type of equipment containing the vendor manuals,instruction sheets, and any related literature that cam in the original shippingcontainer for that piece of equipment. Include all warranty cards.

C. Testing: 01. The Contractor shall perform all tests required by Division 28 and those submitted

as part of this Section.02. The Contractor shall activate all devices for proper system operation, including

supervisory and trouble circuit tests. Similarly, audible alarms will not be activatedexcept on a one-time, coordinated basis, to check the actual sounding devices.

03. A test report for each piece of equipment shall be prepared by the Contractor andsubmitted to the Owner. This report shall include a complete listing of everydevice, the date it was tested, by whom and the results. The final test reportsshall indicate that every device tested successfully. Failure to completely test anddocument the tests will result in a delay of final testing and acceptance.

D. As-Built Drawings: 01. After completion of all the tests listed above, and prior to the final acceptance

test, The Contractor shall submit the complete As-Built drawings as identified inPART 1 – PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS.

02. The final As-Built Drawings shall consist on one set of reproducible prints, two (2)sets of Point-to-Point Detail Drawings, Equipment Schedules, and the completedetailed technical data that was shipped by the manufacturer with all installedequipment.

E. Final Acceptance Test: The Final Acceptance Test shall demonstrate the installed and activated System’s performance and compliance with System Specifications. However, before this testing can begin the following must have received and reviewed by the Owner.

01. System Operations and Maintenance Manuals02. System Test Reports03. As-Built Drawings

3.18 NOTICE OF COMPLETION

A. When the Final System Acceptance Requirements described above including the Final Acceptance Test described above have been satisfactorily completed. The Owner / Architect shall issue a Letter of Completion to the Contractor indicating the date of such completion. The Notice of Completion shall be recorded by the Contractor upon receipt of the Owner / Architect completion letter. This date of record shall be the start of the warranty period.

END OF SECTION


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0510-1

SECTION 28 05 10 - CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups and demonstrations.

1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM

A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with contract documents.

1.03 WORKMANSHIP

A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.

B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or equipment be suspended from structural bridging.

D. Provide finishes to match approved samples; all exposed finishes shall be approved by the Architect / Engineer. Submit color samples as required.

1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.

B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES

A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide a manufacturer’s qualified personnel to observe: 1. Field conditions.2. Condition of installation.3. Quality of workmanship.4. Start-up of equipment.5. Testing and adjusting of equipment.

B. Manufacturer’s qualified personnel shall make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect/Engineer.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 0510-2

1.07 MOCK UPS

A. Assemble and erect the specified equipment and products complete, with specified anchorage and support devices, seals and finishes.

B. Do not proceed with any work involving a mock-up, until the related mockup has been

approved in writing.

C. Acceptable mock-ups in place shall be retained in the completed work where possible.

D. Perform tests and submit results as specified. 1.08 SCHEDULING OF MOCK-UPS

A. Schedule demonstration and observation of mock-ups, in phases, with Architect / Engineer. 1. Rough-in 2. Finish with all appurtenances in place 3. Demonstrations

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REFERENCE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ADJUSTMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS

A. Contractor shall provide all adjustments and modifications as requested by the manufacturer’s qualified personnel at no additional cost to Owner.

3.02 MOCK-UPS

A. Mock up a typical classroom, science lab of each type, and computer lab with all wiring devices, cover plates, rough-in boxes, conduits, etc. provide all conductors from all wiring devices to above ceiling space to demonstrate conduit routing and conductor fill.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 28 10 00 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 KMES-161061/161062

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 0510-1

SECTION 28 10 00

ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The contractor shall furnish and install a complete microprocessor based access control system as specified herein. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control equipment, power supplies, power circuits, signal initiating and signaling devices, door hardware, conduit, wire, fittings, labor and all other accessories required to provide a fully functioning system.


The system shall comply with the applicable Codes and Standards as follows:

A. National Fire Protection Association Standards: 01. NFPA 70 National Electric Code 02. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code 03. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

B. Local & State Building Codes

C. Requirements of Local Authorities having Jurisdiction

D. Underwriters Laboratory Requirements and Listings for use in Security Alarm Systems.

E. Requirements of American Disabilities Act (Public law 101-336).

F. Texas Accessibility Standards (T.A.S.)

G. State Fire Marshall.

H. Texas Insurance Code.

1.03 RELATED WORK A. Division 08710 - Door Hardware

B. Section 28 20 00 – Video Surveillance

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. ACS – Access Control System

B. CSA – Client Software Application

C. DGM – Dynamic Graphical Maps

D. ALPR – License Plate Recognition


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 0510-2

E. SDK – Software Development Kit

F. SMA – Software Maintenance Agreement

G. SSM – Server Software Module

H. UI – User Interface

I. USP – Unified Security Platform

J. USW – Unified Web Client

K. VMS – Video Management System

L. DVS – Digital Video Server 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor Qualifications: 01. The installing contractor shall be the authorized representative of the access

control system manufacturer to sell, install, and service the proposed manufacturer’s equipment. The installing contractor shall have represented the security alarm manufacturer’s product for at least two years.

02. The installing contractor shall be licensed by the State of Texas as a security services contractor to design, sell, install, and service security alarm systems.

03. The installing contractor shall provide 24 hour, 365 day per year emergency service with factory trained service technicians.

04. The installing contractor shall have personnel on their staff that has been actively engaged in the business of designing, selling, installing, and servicing security alarm systems for at least ten (10) years.

B. The system programmer shall have attended manufacturer training and obtained

certification in Genetec Security Center - Synergis Technical Certification.

C. Optionally, the system programmer shall have attended manufacturer training and obtained certification in Genetec Security Center - Enterprise Technical Certification.

D. The system programmer shall be a Genetec certified partner with the following level of qualification: 01. Elite Reseller or up

E. All Contractors shall submit to the Owner prior to starting any work the factory training certificates for all personnel that will be working on the access control system. No person is allowed to work on the system without proper manufacturer’s certification.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. The installing contractor and/or equipment supplier shall provide complete and detailed shop drawings and include: 01. Control panel wiring and interconnection schematics. 02. Complete point to point wiring diagrams. 03. Riser diagrams. 04. Complete floor plan drawings locating all system devices.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 0510-3

05. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment proposed. 06. Detailed system operational description. Any specification differences and

deviations shall be clearly noted and marked. 07. Complete system bill of material. 08. Line by line specification review stating compliance or deviation.

B. All submittal data will be in bound form with Contractor’s name, supplier’s name, project

name, and state security license number adequately identified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Head-End/Software 01. Genetec B. Controllers 02. Mercury C. Card Readers 01. HID D. Wiring 01. Belden 02. Approved Equal E. Intrusion Devices 01. Bosch 02. DMP 03. Honeywell

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Controllers: 01. Network Controller: Genetec Synergis CloudLink 02. System Controller: a. Up to 64-Doors b. 12-24VDC c. Minimum quantity of one (1) RS-485 output 03. Door Controller a. Minimum quantity of two (2) reader outputs b. 12-24VDC

c. RS-485 communication 04. Multi-Device Interface Panel a. 16-Inputs b. Capable of fail-safe or fail-secure B. Card Readers

01. MutliClass reader 02. 50/75mA @ 12VDC 03. Wiegand interface 04. Wall mounted: RP40 05. Mullion mounted: RP10


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 0510-4

06. Cards: HID iClass #2000 – PGGMV C. Wiring

01. Plenum rated 02. Minimum of 18 AWG

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. The contractor shall have furnished and installed a complete microprocessor based access control system as specified herein. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control equipment, power supplies, power circuits, signal initiating and signaling devices, door hardware, conduit, wire, fittings, labor and all other accessories required to provide a

3.02 HARDWARE INSTALLATION

A. General 01. Provide mock-up of a typical entry door, complete with conduit, outlet boxes,

cables and access control devices prior to installation. 02. All 120V Power shall be furnished as specified in Division 26. Coordinate with

Division 26. 03. All security conduit as required for a complete installation of this system shall be

provided as specified in Division 26. 04. Coordination with the Division 26 is the responsibility of the Security Contractor to

ensure all conduit is in place for a complete installation. 05. All systems shall be connected to a dedicated circuit and on an emergency power

source if available. 06. All door hardware to be coordinated with Division 08, reference Division 08 for

hardware requirements.

B. Wiring/Conduit 01. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, Local Codes,

and article 760 of NFPA Standard 70. All wiring sizes shall conform to recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, and as indicated on the engineered shop drawings.

02. All wire shall be UL Listed CL2 for limited energy (300V) applications and shall be installed in conduit. Limited energy MPP wire may be run open in return air ceiling plenums provided such wire is UL Listed for such applications and is of the low smoke producing fluorocarbon type and complies with NEC Article 760 if so approved by the local authority having jurisdiction.

03. No AC wiring or any other wiring shall be run in the same conduit as security alarm wiring.

04. All wire shall be installed in an approved conduit/raceway system (except where permitted by NEC and the local authority having jurisdiction). Maximum conduit "fill" shall not exceed 40% per NEC.

05. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4" EMT. Install conduit per engineered shop drawings.

06. Systems utilizing open wiring techniques with low smoke plenum cable shall provide conduit in all inaccessible locations, inside concealed walls, all mechanical/electrical rooms, or other areas where wiring might be exposed or


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 0510-5

subject to damage. 07. All vertical wiring and all main trunk/riser wiring shall be installed in a complete

raceway/conduit system. All riser boxes shall be adequately sized for the number of conductors transversing the respective box as well as the number of terminations required.

08. All plenum wiring is to be installed parallel and perpendicular to the building structure. Install wiring tight up against structure for protection. Cable shall be bundled on a maximum of 2'-6" and secured to the structure at a maximum of 5' on center. Bundling and support shall be with plenum rated cable ties.

09. Contractor is required to provide all mapping and software configuration required to operate system as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

10. All wire not installed inside conduit or a designated cable tray system shall be installed in a dedicated j-hook style cable support system for the entire run of each cable. Including, but not limited to service loops.

11. The cable support system shall be attached directly to the building steel at a serviceable height. In the event that the building steel is not 5’ of the finished ceiling, the contractor shall provide a dedicated threaded rod extending within 5’ of the finished ceiling and mount the support hook to the treaded rod.

12. Power wiring may all be run from central location for door hardware. C. System 01. Furnish and install one (1) card reader for each location shown on drawings.

02. Provide and install a centralized architecture, with each access panel being installed on the wall in the each of the (2) new IC closets. Running each half of the building to the closets on the plan north and plan south. Centralized power supply for locking hardware is preferred. Provide one CloudLink device per closet where an access panel is being installed, for network tie-in. Closets with CloudLink Devices are: MC, IC C113, IC D137.

03. Furnish and install one (1) door position switch, for each location shown on drawings.

04. Furnish and install quantity of Multi-Device Interface Panel necessary to add all door position switches into system.

05. Furnish and install sixty-five (65) iCLASS HID cards, per site, and program with owner provided list.

06. Provide an additional four (4) hours per site of programming, coordinate final programming with district personnel.

07. Provide four (4) hours of training for all school personnel, per site . 08. Furnish and install intrusion devices are shown on drawings. Genetec system to

monitor intrusion devices. Provide programming time necessary to integrate intrusion panel into existing district-wide Genetec monitoring.

3.03 TESTING

A. Submit a written test report from an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer that the system has been 100% tested and approved. Final test shall be witnessed by Owner, Engineer, Electrical Contractor and performed by the equipment supplier. Final test report shall be received and acknowledged by the Owner prior to substantial completion.

B. Provide instruction as to proper use and operation of system, for the Owner's designated

personnel.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 0510-6

3.04 DEPLOYMENT SERVICES AND SYSTEM COMMISSIONING A. General Requirements

01. The contractor shall engage the services of the USP vendor to assist in the management of the deployment of the USP at the end-user site on the project.

02. The USP vendor services shall include Deployment Management and System Configuration and Commissioning.

B. Deployment Management Service

01. The Deployment Management service from the vendor shall include a Project Manager acting as the single point of contact for all communications between the contractor and the vendor organization and who will be responsible for: a. Conducting a Risk Assessment of the impact of potential risk factors on

the operation of the vendor's USP. b. Providing a project plan for the deployment of the vendor's USP. c. Managing the development and deployment of the custom solution

components that will be integrated into the vendor's USP (if applicable). d. Providing a scope of work detailing the services to be provided by the

vendor to assist in the deployment of the vendor’s USP. e. Coordinating and scheduling the vendor field services with the contractor

to assist with the deployment of the vendor’s USP. f. Providing regular project status updates to the contractor regarding the

development of custom solutions (if applicable) and the deployment of the vendor’s USP.

C. System Configuration and Commissioning Service

01. The System Configuration and Commissioning service from the vendor shall include a Field Engineer who will be responsible for: a. Assisting the contractor’s or/subcontractor’s onsite/remote technicians

with the configuration and commissioning of the vendor’s USP at the client site.

b. Conducting a test of the USP following the deployment of the system using real-world operator scenarios to ensure optimal system performance.

c. Providing the contractor with a Service Report detailing the tasks completed during the deployment of the USP at the client site, as well as any recommendations for improving the performance of the USP that must be implemented by the contractor.

d. Providing a knowledge transfer of the vendor's USP to the contractor following the deployment of the USP at the client site.

3.05 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall provide minimum of one (1) year warranty of workmanship and product.

Must support (24) hour turn time to fix and/or replace any system issues or hardware B. The product shall perform in all material respects in accordance with the accompanying

user manual, and the media on which the Software Product resides will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. Software defects are covered through Service Releases and Cumulative Updates which are available for a period of 1 year from the date of substantial completion

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District VIDEO SURVEILLANCE Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 28 20 00 MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01 KMES-161061/161062

Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 2000-1

SECTION 28 20 00 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish and install IP closed-circuit television system including cameras, mounts, licensing, NVR,

and system programming.

B. The contractor shall coordinate with other system vendors, where appropriate, to facilitate

equipment installation, scheduling, protection of equipment and access to the project site in order

to provide the Owner a substantially complete project in a timely manner.

C. Contractor is responsible for coordinating all electrical work required on this project for

connection of servers, cameras, conduit, and power supplies. Contractor shall provide a complete

solution to the owner and be responsible for the complete installation of the video security camera

system. Power requirements for the NVR and in-wall conduits shall be provided by Division 26.

Any additional power requirements for power supplies and additional pathway conduits/sleeves are

to be provided by the system installing contractor’s licensed electrician or the project’s electrical

contractor.

D. Contractor will be required to meet with district security representative before any cabling is to be

installed to walk the site and coordinate proposed camera locations and cable routing.

E. The NVR shall be provided by the Contractor. Data cabling for IP/PoE cameras shall be provided

as specified in the Structured Cabling System, by the structured cabling contractor.

F. Contractor shall provide a complete installation of camera including testing of all cameras. Testing

and camera aiming must be conducted in conjunction with the Owner’s Security personnel prior to

installation.

G. Locate equipment to accommodate millwork, fixtures, marker boards and other room equipment at

no additional cost to the Owner.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 26 and Division 27

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ACS – Access Control System

B. CSA – Client Software Application

C. DGM – Dynamic Graphical Maps

D. DVS – Digital Video Server

E. LPR – License Plate Recognition

F. NVR – Network Video Recorder


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 2000-2

G. SDK – Software Development Kit

H. SMA – Software Maintenance Agreement

I. SSM – Server Software Module

J. UI – User Interface

K. USP – Unified Security Platform

L. USW – Unified Web Client

M. VMS – Video Management System


A. Installer Qualifications:

01. The contractor shall be licensed and shall meet all applicable regulations. The contractor

shall be a firm normally employed in the security industry.

02. The contractor shall be certified by the manufacturing company in all aspects of design,

installation and testing of the products described herein. Each contractor shall furnish

with their submittal a letter from the manufacturer indicating they are a dealer in good

standing.

03. The contractor must be certified by the manufacturer of the products, adhere to the

engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturer

components and distribution channels.

04. The contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be required to

demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. The contractor

shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful installation and

testing of video surveillance distribution systems and have personnel who are adequately

trained in the use of such tools and equipment.

05. A resume of qualifications shall be submitted with the Contractor’s proposal indicating the following: a. A list of five recently completed projects using the product proposed of similar

type and size with contact names and telephone numbers for each.

b. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the installed integrity of

metallic cable systems on this project.

c. A technical resume of experience for the contractor’s Project Manager and on-

site installation supervisor who shall be assigned to this project.

d. A list of technical product training attended by the contractor’s personnel that

shall install the video surveillance system shall be submitted.

e. Any subcontractor who shall assist the video surveillance contractor in

commissioning / programming of this work shall have the same training and

certification as the video surveillance contractor.

B. It is acceptable for a non-certified contractor to furnish and install security cameras. Final

licensing, and commissioning / programming shall be performed by VMS manufacturer certified

contractor.

C. Contractor must be a current integrator of solution in the Houston/Galveston metropolitan area,

have a permanent office located within 75 miles of the project, and be able to include information

on current support staff to be able to service this client.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 2000-3

D. The Owner’s representative reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work performed,

either on technical or aesthetic grounds.

E. Contractor shall schedule a pre-construction meeting with Owner / Engineer to review specific

project requirements.

F. The system programmer shall have attended manufacturer training and obtained

certification in Genetec Security Center - Enterprise Technical Certification. G. The system programmer shall be a Genetec certified partner with the following level of

qualification:

01. Elite Reseller or up H. The system programmer shall submit proof of certifications.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the following

standards and codes:

01. Local Building Code

02. Local Electrical Code

03. NEC National Electrical Code

B. Other references:

01. TIA/EIA-568-A - Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard

02. EIA/TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and

Spaces.

03. TIA/EIA-606 - The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure

of Commercial Buildings

04. TIA/EIA-607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications

05. TIA/EIA TSB 67 - Transmission Performance Specification for Field Testing of

Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems.

06. ISO/IEC 11801 - Generic Cabling Standard

07. EN 50173 - Generic Cabling Standards for Customer Premises

C. Governing Codes and Conflicts: If the requirements of these specifications or the Project Drawings

exceed those of the governing codes, regulations, and manufacturer installation requirements, then

the requirements of these specifications and the drawings shall govern. However, nothing in the

drawings or specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all governing

codes, regulations, and manufacturer installation requirements.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall meet with Owner’s Security representative prior to submission of formal/final

shop drawings to Engineer to allow the Owner and Engineer to review a preliminary draft copy of

the submittal to verify compliance with the specifications and any detailed requirements of the

project. The contractor shall then submit the final and formal submittal to Engineer for review.

After the draft submittal has been reviewed by the Owner / Engineer, and formal shop drawings

have been reviewed by Engineer and returned to the Contractor, the required pre-construction


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 2000-4

meeting shall take place with Owner / Engineer.

B. The video surveillance system installer shall furnish all CCTV system submittals in a single

consolidated submittal.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit the following items, for Owner review and approval:

01. Samples: Complete manufacturer’s product literature and samples (if requested) for all

pre-approved substitutions to the recommended products made during the course of the

Project.

02. Permits: The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and provide copies to the

Owner/Engineer

03. Product Literature: Complete manufacturer’s product literature for all electronics, cable,

cable supports, cable labels, outlet devices, and other products to be used in the

installation. In addition, whenever substitutions for recommended products are made,

samples (when requested by the Owner/Engineer) and the manufacturer’s supporting

documentation demonstrating compatibility with other related products shall be included.

04. Testing: Proposed Contractor test result forms, a list of instrumentation to be used for

systems testing.

05. A complete point-to-point floor plan diagram indicating camera locations and all required

cabling to connect systems.

D. Project Completion: As a condition for project acceptance, the Contractor shall submit the

following for review and approval:

01. Inspection and Test Reports: During the course of the Project, the Contractor shall

maintain an adequate inspection system to ensure that the materials supplied and the work

performed, conform to contract requirements. The Contractor shall provide written

documentation that indicates that materials acceptance testing was conducted as specified.

The Contractor shall also provide documentation, which indicates that all cable

termination testing was completed and that all irregularities were corrected prior to job

completion.

02. Operating and Maintenance Manuals for all devices within the system. These instructions

shall reflect any changes made during the course of construction, and shall be provided to

the Owner, for their use, in a three-ring binder labeled with the project name and

description.

03. All training sessions with district staff and training media shall be complete. 04. As-built Drawings shall include cable pathways, camera locations with correct

labeling and MDF/IDF locations. The as-built drawings shall be prepared using AutoCad V. 2013 or later. Provide the Owner with electronic versions of the as-builts on CDs.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. The Contractor is responsible for providing all incidental and/or miscellaneous hardware not

explicitly specified below as required for a complete and operational system.

B. Materials shall be as listed or shall be approved equivalent products of other manufacturers

meeting the intent and quality level of the specifications. All approved equivalent products shall be

published by addendum ten days prior to proposal for Engineer review.

C. All equipment and materials used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured, regularly


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 2000-5

utilized in the manufacturer’s system.

D. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.

E. All systems and components shall be provided with the availability of a toll free 24-hour technical

support phone number from the manufacturer. The phone number shall allow for immediate

technical assistance for either the dealer/installer or the end user at no charge.

F. All systems and components shall be provided with an explicit manufacturer warranty.

2.2 DATA CLOSET (MDF/IDF) TERMINATION HARDWARE

A. Security contractor is responsible to coordinate with data/voice cabling contractor on acquiring

network connections. Contractor shall coordinate with District technology department on acquiring

any network configuration information such as IP numbers that will be required to connect NVR to

district network.

B. Structured Cabling Contractor is responsible to provide network cabling connection, either fiber or

category 6, to Owner provided network equipment. This connection allows NVR/Cameras to be

connected to Owner’s local area network.

2.3 CABLE AND INSTALLATION

A. The data cabling to each camera location on this project shall be provided by Structured Cabling

Contractor installing new infrastructure on site.

B. Provide all penetrations and all conduits as necessary for installation of CCTV installation.

C. All exterior penetrations require necessary weatherproofing to avoid moisture penetration.

D. All outdoor cable runs underground shall be rated for underground use.

E. Provide all power circuits required for the NVR and camera power supplies.

G. Contractor shall not run any power cabling for any security equipment on rack tray system due to EMI

considerations. Contractor shall provide individual cabling support for all low voltage power cabling.

H. All cabling for entire project shall be installed at 5’-0” intervals in dedicated support system using

supports such as j-hooks or saddle support systems. Cable supports shall be securely attached directly

to building structure. Do not attach cabling or supports to ductwork, piping, grid hangers, conduit, or

equipment.

2.4 CAMERAS

A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – Genetec Gold partner only

01. Bosch

02. Sony

03. Axis

04. Panasonic

05. Pelco

06. Samsung


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 2000-6

07. Vivotek

08. Arecont

B. Interior Dome Cameras:

01. 2 MP minimum

04. Verifocal Lens

05. SD Card Slot

06. True Day/Night with IR Cut Filter

07. Edge Analytics

08. Capable of Alarm Triggering

09. PoE powered

10. H.264 Compression

C. Outdoor Dome Cameras:

01. 2 MP Minimum

02. IP68

03. IK10 Vandal Resistant

04. Verifocal Lens

05. SD Card Slot

06. True Day/Night with IR Cut Filter

07. Edge Analytics

08. Capable of Alarm Triggering

09. PoE powered

10. H.264 Compression

D. Life Skills Cameras

01. Axis Main Unit Box – F-44

02. Imager – Axis 4005-E

03. Microphone – Axis T8351

E. Field of View Determination by the contractor as necessary for fixed camera locations shall be

performed at no additional cost to provide the view desired by the owner. Contractor shall

coordinate all final camera views and locations with owner for final approval.

F. Ceiling mounted cameras shall be installed with the weight of the camera being supported by the

building structure. At no point should the weight of any camera be supported by the ceiling tile.

G. All cameras installed shall be focused at nighttime in black and white/low resolution mode to

insure the best possible view.

2.5 VIDEO SERVER AND EQUIPMENT

A. IP Camera Server – Genetec – BCD104-VA-120-8TB 01. 8 Terabyte Storage Capacity 02. RAID 5 Configuration 03. 110V NEMA 5-15P 04. 8 Frames per Second 05. 50% motion event recording


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 2000-7

B. Licensing: Provide the Owner with all licenses as required for installation. Genetec Security Center Omnicast Enterprise Camera Connection; (1) for each camera on drawings.

2.6 VMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Manufacturer:

01. Genetec Security Center: a. Omnicast Enterprise

B. The VMS shall be based on a true open architecture that shall allow the use of non-

proprietary workstation and server hardware, non-proprietary network infrastructure and non-proprietary storage.

C. The NVR shall be multicast enabled.

2.7 ARCHIVING

A. Coordinate programming of IP address of Owner provided wide area archiver.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Cable Support:

01. All wire not installed inside conduit or a designated cable tray system shall be installed in

a dedicated cable j-hook style support system for the entire run of each cable. Including,

but not limited to service loops.

02. The cable support system shall be attached directly to the building steel at a serviceable

height. In the event that the building steel is not 5’ of the finished ceiling, the contractor

shall provide a dedicated threaded rod extending within 5’ of the finished ceiling and

mount the support hook to the treaded rod.

03. Cable support shall be installed at a maximum of 5’ on center.

04. All cable installed shall be attached to the hook support system with plenum rated Velcro

and a plenum rated Velcro tie shall be installed between each cable support to keep wires

neatly bundled throughout the entire run. Tie wraps will only be allowed to be used inside

the control panels as required to manage the wires within each type of panel.

05. Absolutely no cable, not installed in conduit, will be allowed to be attached directly to the

building’s steel or supported in any other method than that stated above.

06. It is the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate with all other trades on the

project to ensure that the pathway of this system does not interfere with the installation of

the other trades and to prevent the installed product of other trades from putting strain on

the installed wiring.

07. Do not route cable through webbing of structural steel.

B. Conduit / Raceway:

01. All wire shall be installed in an approved conduit/raceway system (except where

permitted by NEC and the local authority having jurisdiction). Maximum conduit "fill"

shall not exceed 40% per NEC.

02. Conduit and raceway system shall be installed as specified under the general electrical

section of the specifications, and per NEC.

03. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4" EMT. Install conduit per engineered shop drawings.

04. Systems utilizing open wiring techniques with low smoke plenum cable shall provide

conduit in all inaccessible locations, inside concealed walls, all mechanical/electrical


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 2000-8

rooms, or other areas where wiring might be exposed or subject to damage.

05. All conduit ends shall have a protective bushing to prevent cable damage. Bushings must

be installed prior to installing cable. Cutting bushing to install around installed cables will

not be accepted.

C. Fire Wall Penetrations: The Contractor shall avoid penetration of fire rated walls and floors

wherever possible. Contractor shall also seal all floor, ceiling and wall penetrations in fire or

smoke barriers and in the wiring closet.

D. Wall Penetrations: Where penetrations are necessary, they shall be sleeved with metallic conduit

and resealed with an Underwriter Laboratories (UL) approved sealant.

E. Install new roof mounted conduits on portable pipe supports – (low profile type), as manufactured

by Portable Pipe Hangers or Advanced Support Products. Provide roof protection pads under each

support. Coordinate location and routing with design engineer prior to rough-in or installation of

system.

F. Do not install wall mounted cameras into metal fascia. Ensure they are mounted into brick, and

sealed top and sides (not bottom)

G. Life Skills Cameras:

01. For each location showed provide the following:

a. Furnish and install (2) Imagers per classroom, to allow for no blind spots.

b. Furnish and install (1) microphone per classroom, and (1) per changing

room/bathroom attached to life skills classrooms.

c. Furnish and install (1) main unit box per classroom.

d. Furnish and install quantity of Genetec licenses necessary for integration

into wide area storage device, for the necessary amount of storage be

SB-507.

3.2 EQUIPMENT RACK CONFIGURATION

A. Cable Placement: Cable installation in the wiring closet must conform to the Project Drawings. All

cabling shall be routed so as to avoid interference with any other service or system, operation, or

maintenance location. Avoid crossing areas horizontally just above or below any riser conduit. Lay

and dress cables to allow other cables to enter the conduit/riser without difficulty at a later time by

maintaining a working distance from these openings.

B. Cable shall be routed as closely as possible to the ceiling, floor or corners to ensure that adequate

wall or backboard space is available for current and future equipment. All cable runs within the

wiring closet shall be horizontal or vertical within the constraints of minimum cable bending radii.

Minimum bend radius shall be observed. Cables shall not be tie-wrapped to electrical conduit or

other equipment.

C. All incoming cables shall be routed on the cable tray and neatly dressed down to the patch panels.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. General:

01. All network cabling shall be provided and installed by the network cabling contractor.

Cabling between wiring closet and camera locations shall be made as individual home


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 2000-9

runs. No intermediate splices may be installed or utilized between the wiring closet and

the camera location.

02. All cable must be handled with care during installation so as not to change performance

specifications.

03. Coordinate jack color with structured cabling specification.

B. Placement: All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of

available space. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as not to impair the

Owner’s efficient use of their full capacity.

3.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Confirm rack hardware mounting locations with Owner prior to installation.

B. Coordinate with network cabling contractor to ensure installation of cable service loops to all

camera locations and future camera locations.

C. Provide final aiming, focus, and other camera configuration adjustments as directed by Owner.

3.5 DOCUMENTATION

A. Labels: The Contractor shall label all outlets using permanent machine engraved labels approved

by the Owner. Label patch panels in the wiring closet to match those on corresponding camera

locations. The font shall be at least one-eighth inch (1/8”) in height, block. All labels shall

correspond to as-built and to final test reports.

B. Contractor shall ensure complete typed labeling of all cameras with numbers that correspond to

locations on video server. Labeling system shall correspond to the Owner’s labeling system. Verify

with Owner. Provide tags (black letters on white labels, plastic coated) on all cables and outlets.

C. All cables shall be labeled at both ends with a machine label and all terminations shall be stenciled

with a typed label for quick circuit identification. Labeling shall conform to TIA/EIA standard 606

and include interconnect cable identification numbers.

D. A floor plan, clearly labeled with all numbered camera locations, shall be included in the as-built

plans.

3.6 CABLE TESTING - BY MANUFACTURER’S REQUIREMENTS

A. Notification: The Owner/Engineer/Consultant shall be notified one week prior to any testing so

that the testing may be witnessed.

B. Final Acceptance: Before requesting a final acceptance, the Contractor shall perform a series of

end-to-end installation performance tests. The Contractor shall submit for approval a proposal

describing the test procedures, test result forms and time table for all copper and fiber optic

cabling.

C. Procedures: Trained personnel shall perform all testing. Acceptance of the test procedures

discussed below is predicated on the Contractor’s use of the recommended products and adherence

to the inspection requirements and practices set forth. Acceptance of the completed installation

shall be evaluated in the context of each of these factors.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 2000-10

D. Errors: When errors are found, the source of each error shall be determined, corrected and the

cable retested. All defective components shall be replaced and retested. Retest results must be

entered on the test results form. All corrections shall be made prior to final acceptance test.

3.7 INSPECTION

A. Conformance to the installation practices covered above is to be verified when completed. In some

cases, the Owner/Engineer may observe before acceptance.

3.8 WARRANTY

A. The product shall perform in all material respects in accordance with the accompanying user manual, and the media on which the Software Product resides will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. Software defects are covered through Service Releases and Cumulative Updates which are available for a period of 1 year from the date of the software purchase. One Year Genetec Advantage Warranty.

3.9 DEPLOYMENT SERVICES AND SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

A. General Requirements

01. The contractor shall engage the services of the USP vendor to assist in the management of the deployment of the USP at the end-user site on the project.

02. The USP vendor services shall include Deployment Management and System Configuration and Commissioning.

03. Provide 4 hours of system programming per site.

B. Deployment Management Service

01. The Deployment Management service from the vendor shall include a Project Manager acting as the single point of contact for all communications between the contractor and the vendor organization and who will be responsible for: a. Conducting a Risk Assessment of the impact of potential risk factors on

the operation of the vendor's USP. b. Providing a project plan for the deployment of the vendor's USP. c. Managing the development and deployment of the custom solution

components that will be integrated into the vendor's USP (if applicable). d. Providing a scope of work detailing the services to be provided by the

vendor to assist in the deployment of the vendor’s USP. e. Coordinating and scheduling the vendor field services with the contractor

to assist with the deployment of the vendor’s USP. f. Providing regular project status updates to the contractor regarding the

development of custom solutions (if applicable) and the deployment of the vendor’s USP.

C. System Configuration and Commissioning Service

01. The System Configuration and Commissioning service from the vendor shall include a Field Engineer who will be responsible for: a. Assisting the contractor’s or/subcontractor’s onsite/remote technicians


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 28 2000-11

with the configuration and commissioning of the vendor’s USP at the client site.

b. Conducting a test of the USP following the deployment of the systemusing real-world operator scenarios to ensure optimal systemperformance.

c. Providing the contractor with a Service Report detailing the taskscompleted during the deployment of the USP at the client site, as well asany recommendations for improving the performance of the USP thatmust be implemented by the contractor.

d. Providing a knowledge transfer of the vendor's USP to the contractorfollowing the deployment of the USP at the client site.

3.10 MANUFACTURER END USER OPERATOR TRAINING

A. The contractor shall engage the services of the USP vendor to assist in the end user training of the USP at the end-user site for 4 hours of training.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 28 31 00MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01SEG - 1602

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 31 00-1

SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Equipment shall meet or follow applicable requirements in other sections of the specifications and on the drawings.

C. Equipment shall meet applicable requirements include in the NEC, UL, NEMA, NFPA and ANSI Standards and be so labeled.

D. Provide Shop Drawings per Section 26 00 00.


2.1 GENERAL

A. Design, furnish and install a complete fire alarm system based on a fire alarm panel utilizing addressable architecture with analog intelligent devices as specified herein and shown on the drawings. Equipment shall be manufactured by Silent Knight. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The system shall conform to the most recent issue of the applicable NFPA Sections, the National Electric Code and applicable local codes for fire detection/alarm requirements. This also includes the State of Texas requirements for school facilities.

B. Note that the complete fire alarm system shall be designed by the fire alarm contractor’s licensed designer per all applicable codes. In the event that certain devices are shown on the drawings that may be in excess of the minimum code standards, incorporate these additional requirements into the contractor’s design since the Owner’s requirements are in addition to the minimum code requirements. Devices are shown to indicate the areas of coverage and to provide a means for the electrical contractor to estimate raceway requirements, and to assist in coordinating with architectural constraints. Fire alarm contractor shall produce his own signed, sealed and certified drawings based on his design for submission to the governmental authorities.

C. The following are acceptable suppliers of the specified equipment:

Silent Knight Advantage Security, Firesafe, Firetron, Convergint Technologies, Wilson Fire, CLS

D. The system shall consist of all fire alarm panels, manual pull stations, automatic detectors, visual and audible alarm devices and accessory equipment as described in the specifications and/or indicated on the drawings. All components of the system shall be standard products of the manufacturer, approved by Factory Mutual and Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Provide Ditek surge suppression protector on 120 volt power connections, telephone connections and for system circuits that extend between buildings.

E. Where detection and alarm devices are shown on the drawings they indicate areas for detection and alarm coverage and not the exact number and placement of devices. Provide devices in sufficient number and locate to protect and alarm the specified areas


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 31 00-2

in accordance with the NFPA, these specifications and the limitations of the devices provided.

F. Under this Division, engage the services of a fire alarm company who is an authorized distributor for an approved fire alarm system (as indicated below) who shall:

01 Maintain a staff of specialists for engineering assistance, installation and maintenance of the fire alarm system and associated equipment.

02 Stock the required spare parts to keep the fire alarm system in operation.

03 Have proof of experience in the installation and maintenance of the type of fire alarm system specified herein.

G. After installation and prior to the final inspection, the Contractor must certify in a letter to the Owner that the system is working in accordance with the Contract Documents.

H. Provide an adequate period of instruction on the operation of the system to the Owner's designated personnel upon completion of the system installation.

I. Provide the Owner with the following:

01 Two composite wiring diagrams of the system indicating point to point connections, one to be placed in the control panel.

02 Two block diagrams of the system indicating conduit and number and size of wires between all devices, one to be placed in the control panel.

03 Three complete instructional/operational maintenance manuals, one to be placed in the control panel.

04 Floor plan of building noting zoning, pull station and detector locations, acceptable to the Fire Marshall. Provide frame and install where directed by the Fire Marshall.

J. Contractor shall have a representative at the job site during the final inspection by the Engineer to demonstrate system operation and specification compliance. Representative will be required to "smoke test" a number of randomly selected active devices.

K. System warranty shall be for one year of complete maintenance coverage after final acceptance of the system and include all material and labor to provide consistent peak performance of the system. Post-warranty maintenance shall be available on contract or call basis.

2.2 SYSTEM LAYOUT

A. Device layout shown on the Drawings shows areas of coverage and to assist the electrical contractor in estimating junction box requirements during bidding. Fire alarm supplier shall properly design a system based on his equipment and devices that meets ADA, NFPA and Texas Accessibility requirements and these specifications.

B. Provide sound and visual alarm coverage of the building.

C. Building is fire sprinkled. Provide pull stations as indicated on the drawings and required by code.

D. Provide smoke detector coverage of all halls and corridors, Central Mechanical Room and each AHU Room.

E. Provide smoke duct detector in the return air or supply air of each air handling unit. Where return air is not ducted, provide photoelectric coverage of return air openings in the room. Provide smoke duct detector in each fan powered VAV box 2000 CFM or larger.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 31 00-3

F. Interlock alarm with Kitchen hood fire suppression system.

G. Interlock alarm with fire sprinkler system

01 Monitor position of O S & Y valves and Post Indicator Valve.

02 Monitor underground fire sprinkler vaults, reference civil drawings for locations. Interlock fire alarm system with fire sprinkler system and monitor position of shutoff valves and post indicator valves. Route 1” conduit from building to PIV vault for fire alarm conduit.

03 Provide individual address for each valve sensor and flow switch.

H. Provide a heat detector adjacent to each fire sprinkler head located in the elevator equipment room and elevator shaft. Heat detector shall be coordinated with sprinkler head sensor such that the heat detector will alarm first. Upon alarm, elevator shall be signaled to return to the first floor, then elevator power shunt trip circuit breakers shall be tripped. In the event an alarm is sounded by a device other than these heat detectors, elevator shall be signaled to return to the first floor, but the circuit breakers shall not be tripped.

I. Refer to Drawings for additional information.

2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Actuation of any alarm initiating device shall cause the following:

04 An LCD readout on the main control panel shall indicate the device in alarm.

05 Alarm tones shall sound throughout the facility. Upon expiration of the alert tone, a digitized predetermined voice evacuation message shall be automatically transmitted throughout the facility via evacuation speakers. The system shall have the capability to generate multiple distinct digital messages as determined by event initiated programs

06 All horn/speaker/flasher alarms shall sound continuously until reset at main panel.

07 De-energize air handling units serving the area in alarm. Also de-energize supply fans, VAV boxes and other air circulating devices if 2000 CFM or over, serving the area in alarm. Exhaust fans to the exterior and devices less than 2000 CFM are required to be controlled.

08 Interface with the elevators.

09 Release fire doors and smoke dampers.

10 Transmit alarm warning to remote location via telephone line.

B. The actuation of automatic detection devices shall be visually identified by light on device. The light shall remain illuminated until the initiating device has been restored to normal and the Fire Alarm Panel reset. A remote alarm lamp shall light where indicated on drawings.

2.4 SYSTEM PANEL

A. GENERAL: All equipment shall be manufactured by the same company as the control panel or be a factory authorized compatible device. Devices that may operate but are not factory authorized compatible shall not be used. This includes remote power supplies, horns and strobes. Devices shall be WHITE in color where that option is available. Communication between the Silent Knight control panel and remote devices shall use the SK protocol.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 31 00-4

B. CONTROL PANEL: The control panel shall be a Silent Knight Model 5820XL, microprocessor based, addressable intelligent system enclosed in a semi-flush style cabinet. The door and frame assembly shall be equipped with a lock and transparent door panel for viewing of indicators of operation and annunciation. The control panel shall contain, but not limited to the following:

01 Control modules as required to provide system monitoring, alarm control, trouble sensing and remote equipment control.

02 City/remote station module to service as interface unit between the fire alarm control panel and an authorized remote monitoring point.

03 Power supply modules as required to supply continuous filtered power of the proper voltage. Module shall indicate a normal power, battery trouble and power supply trouble, all readable on front of the enclosure. System shall also meet additional spare capacity requirements below.

04 Sealed and rechargeable battery supply, sized for 24 hour sensing and 5 minute alarm capability. System shall also meet additional spare capacity requirements below.

05 Remote alarm signal distributing panels with power supplies as needed by final design of the fire alarm contractor. Remote power supplies shall be located in mechanical and electrical rooms. Do not install in storage rooms or finished spaces.

06 All power supplies and battery supplies shall be sized based on the system installed plus 50% additional alarm devices. For example, no more than 4A shall be allocated on a 6A power supply to provide spare capacity for future growth. Battery and power supply calculations must be submitted for engineer review.

2.5 VOICE COMMUNICATIONS

A. The voice communications panel shall be modular in design utilizing solid state MICROPROCESSOR circuitry. The voice evacuation system shall integrate with the main fire alarm control panel. Side car voice evacuation systems are not acceptable.

B. Communications Controls: The communications control panel shall incorporate the following controls and indicators:

01 All call

02 General alarm

03 Audio trouble LED

04 AUDIO LEVEL LED

05 Manual tone/MESSAGE select switches with LED indicators

06 Communications zone select switches and select indicators

07 Communications monitor speaker with volume control

08 Dynamic paging microphone

C. Paging

01 The microprocessor based one-way paging system shall be provided with a means to selectively activate voice, tones or digitized messages to any or all zones in the system via electronic membrane touch-pad controls. In addition, visual indication by zone will be provided.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 31 00-5

02 Each audio/speaker circuit will be totally supervised for opens, shorts or grounds with direct shorts prohibiting selection of the respective zone. All audio circuits shall be POWER LIMITED. Each speaker zone shall be provided with an amber trouble LED for circuit trouble conditions and an active/on LED indicator.

03 Alarm/Paging zones shall be provided as required.

D. Alarm Electronics

01 The voice communications center shall be a microprocessor based, supervised, multi-function, audio generator. The communications generator shall contain:

a. Independent Voice communications CPU.

b. Nonvolatile RAM memory.

c. One custom digitized message circuits.

d. Up to four selectable tone generator/oscillators.

e. Each sub circuit of the communications center shall be fully supervised and failure of any tone oscillator or digital message generator shall revert the system to the default standby generator.

02 The system shall be provided with a custom field programmable digitized message.

03 The system shall provide adequate audio amplification. The system shall be capable of amplifier capacity and expansion as required. Each amplifier shall be continuously monitored electronically for proper output level. Each unit shall be equipped with diagnostic indicators. Each amplifier shall provide a minimum of 50 watts of 25 VRMS of power. Each unit shall be equipped with its own individual power/pilot LED, audio input trouble LED, battery input trouble LED, and amplifier trouble/fail LED. Provide amplification for 1/2 watt per speaker plus 25% spare capacity. Electrical Contractor shall provide and install a 120 VAC dedicated circuit to each remote amplifier cabinet (if needed).

2.6 REMOTE EQUIPMENT

A. MANUAL PULL STATIONS: Addressable type, red Lexan, non-coded, dual action type. Provide Stopper II cover with battery powered sounder over all pull stations.

B. AREA SMOKE DETECTORS: White, analog addressable, photoelectric type, non-polarized with 360° smoke entry, LED normal/alarm status light and separable base.

C. DUCT DETECTORS: Analog addressable, photoelectric type with DPST auxiliary relay. Provide LED remote alarm light with engraved stainless steel plate on ceiling near detector where detectors are not located in mechanical rooms.

01 Provide a duct smoke detector located within 5 feet of each smoke or fire/smoke damper. Reference mechanical drawings for locations.

D. HEAT DETECTORS: White, analog addressable. Heat detectors shall be rate of rise type except in kitchen spaces which shall be 135°F fixed temperature.

E. HORNS: White, semi-flush, ADA compatible, electronic horn with high visibility, synchronized strobe and field selectable sound level. Set level based on individual application (hall, classroom, restroom, office, etc.) Audible portion shall sound a three beat temporal tone for alarm signaling as required by NFPA. Strobe intensity shall conform to NFPA Chapter 6 requirements and also 75 candela to meet ADA and TAS requirements.

F. SPEAKERS AND SPEAKER STROBES: White, semi-flush, ADA compatible, electronic


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 31 00-6

speakers with high visibility, synchronized strobe and field selectable volume. Set volume level based on individual application (hall, classroom, restroom, office, etc.) Audible portion shall comply with audibility and intelligibility standards as required by NFPA. Strobe intensity shall conform to NFPA Chapter 6 requirements and also 75 candela to meet ADA and TAS requirements.

G. STROBE LIGHTS: White, semi-flush, ADA compatible, synchronized strobe with intensity suitable for the individual application (hall, classroom, restroom, office, etc.). Strobe intensity shall conform to NFPA 1993 Chapter 6 requirements and also 75 candela to meet ADA and TAS requirements.

H. DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR: Two channel dialer/modem to automatically call two different designated numbers in the event of a fire or system trouble.

I. RELAYS: Provide and install control relays to perform the specified functions. This includes relays to shut down the various HVAC equipment. Relays shall be mounted near items to be controlled. Coordinate with HVAC controls contractor for relay contact voltage capability (120 volts minimum) and preferred mounting location.

J. WEATHERPROOF: Devices located outside, even if sheltered from rain shall be weatherproof and suitable for outdoor installation.

K. PROTECTIVE GUARDS: Provide Stopper Type Lexan protective guards on devices located in gymnasiums and locker rooms, and in additional areas noted on the Drawings.

L. REMOTE STROBE CONTROLLER: Provide local controller as necessary to power and synchronize flash for strobe devices.

M. SURGE SUPPRESSOR: Provide a Ditek Model DTK-120SD surge suppressor mounted in a junction box above the ceiling at the fire alarm panel. Note unit must be a minimum of three feet from the panel. Fire alarm panel shall monitor the suppressor dry contact so panel will go into failure if the suppressor is inoperable. Provide Ditek surge suppression protector on all 120 volt power connections and for system low voltage circuits (including telephone circuits) that extend to the exterior of the building or between buildings.

2.7 SPARE PARTS AND ATTIC STOCK

A. Provide the following spare devices:

01 Smoke Detectors Five (5)

02 Heat Detectors Three (3)

03 Duct Detectors Three (3)

04 Monitor Module Two (2)

05 Control Module Two (2)

06 Strobes Three (3)

07 Speakers Three (3)

08 Speaker/Strobes Three (3)

09 AHU Relays Two (2)

B. The fire alarm contractor shall include in his bid the cost to provide and install the additional spare parts and attic stock and associated cabling as indicated on the schedule on the contract drawings. All devices on this schedule not used during construction shall be turned over to the owner at the time of job completion


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 31 00-7

2.8 INSTALLATION

A. WIRING:

01 Fire alarm contractor shall provide and install all wiring for his system. He shall include wiring of control relays and the landing of power and control wiring to these relays to “break” control circuits or power wiring to controls transformers, door release magnets and other devices requiring shutdown. HVAC controls interlock wiring between fire alarm relay and starters, VFD’s or other temperature controls devices shall be provided by the temperature controls contractor.

02 All wiring shall be installed in conduit. In existing areas not in mechanical rooms, use metal, Wiremold surface raceway where exposed. Low smoke wiring may be installed without conduit above accessible ceilings if wiring is supported at structure or walls 48” on center with cable rings or other manufactured devices specifically designed for supporting cable. Do not support from data system cable rings. Provide conduit sleeve with protective end fittings through all walls and floors where raceway system is not installed. All connections shall be in supported junction boxes. All auxiliary control circuits shall be connected to NAC type circuits and be supervised per NFPA.

03 Wiring outside or between buildings shall be suitable for and installed properly for this application, and comply with NEC Article 800. Provide isolation and surge suppression for all aerial and inter-building cables.

04 Wire shall be color coded in accordance with IPCEA Standards. Provide numbered labels on all wires entering annunciators, terminal boxes and the main control panel.

05 The minimum wire sizes to be used when not otherwise directed by Codes are as follows:

a. Detector Circuits #18 AWG

b. Remote Annunciators #18 AWG

c. Remote Alarm Lamps #18 AWG

d. Notification Circuits: #14 AWG (up to 1.1 A) or larger as necessary

e. Speaker Circuits #16 AWG Twisted/Shielded

f. 120 volt or higher AWG #12

g. All other wiring AWG #18

06 Limited energy cable for 24 volt low voltage systems shall be Plastic Wire and Cable Company Low Energy Safety Control Wire, 105° C, 18/2 solid copper cable.

07 Should 120 volt power be required other than at the main panel, include the cost of additional circuits.

B. RACEWAY SYSTEMS

01 RACEWAY CAPACITY: It shall be the contractor's responsibility to determine the correct sizes of all type of raceway, to be installed, as instructed in the NEC and all applicable Codes.

02 See Section Common Work Results for Electrical for conduit types and installation requirements.

C. CEILING SUPPORTS: All devices installed in lay-in ceilings shall have bracket to support device from ceiling tees.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 28 31 00-8

D. MOUNTING HEIGHTS

01 PULL STATIONS: 46" above finished floor to top

02 HORNS/SPEAKERS/STROBES: 80" or 6" below ceiling (or on ceiling)

E. LABELING: All devices shall be labeled with their system address.

F. REMOTE LED INDICATOR: Any automatic detection device concealed from view, such as a duct detector for an FCU above the ceiling, shall have a remote alarm lamp with engraved steel faceplate on the ceiling or wall visible from an occupied space.

2.9 TESTING

A. REQUIREMENTS: All components and circuits of the fire alarm system shall be tested under operating conditions for proper functions. The testing shall demonstrate that all requirements as herein specified have been successfully accomplished, and that the system is fully operational. Testing shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

01 INITIATING DEVICES: Each initiating device shall be activated and proper operation of all visual and audible alarm and auxiliary devices shall be demonstrated.

02 DUCT AND PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTORS: Each detector shall be adjusted with electronic measuring equipment for calibration sensitivity. Each detector shall subsequently be checked for operation.

03 AUDIBLE ALARM DEVICES: Each audible alarm device shall be tested for proper operation and connection to the correct circuit.

B. TEST REPORT: Upon completion of testing, three copies of a report shall be submitted to the Owner containing the following information:

01 Complete as-built wiring diagrams

02 Detailed catalog data on all components of system

03 Ionization detector sensitivity settings

04 Certification of system performance and operation as specified

C. FIRE MARSHAL REVIEW: System shall be demonstrated to the local Fire Marshall for his review and approval. Make adjustments as required to obtain the approval for certificate of occupancy.

2.10 WARRANTY

A. System (materials and installation) shall be warranted for one year following substantial completion. Problem trouble shooting and repair shall begin within 24 hours of notification.

2.11 TRAINING

A. Provide designated representatives of the Owner with complete technical training in the proper operation of the system, at a time mutually convenient. They shall assist in the preparation of a set of detailed operating instructions for the system.

B. Provide number of hours and quantity of training sessions to Owner’s onsite and maintenance personnel as required in specification section 26 00 00.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District SITE CLEARING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 311000 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004


SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Stripping and stockpiling rock. 6. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 7. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and [removing site utilities] [abandoning site utilities in

place]. 8. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil," but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil; the zone where plant roots grow.



D. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil; the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.

E. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings.

F. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings.

G. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or video recordings. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each

tree or other plant designated to remain.

B. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling program.

C. Rock stockpiling program.

D. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.

E. Burning: Documentation of compliance with burning requirements and permitting of authorities having jurisdiction. Identify location(s) and conditions under which burning will be performed. Obtain permission from owner prior to any onsite burning.


A. Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and equipment during the Work. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement and protection of stockpiles.



B. Rock Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and equipment during the Work. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement and protection of stockpiles.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and plant-protection measures are in place.

E. Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones: Protect according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

F. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the soil is dry or slightly moist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

B. Antirust Coating: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, self-curing, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #23 (surface-tolerant, anticorrosive metal primer) or SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 zinc-rich coating.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Verify that trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated have been flagged and that protection zones have been identified and enclosed according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor.

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.



B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

C. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.

D. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

E. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

F. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections; in applicable fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security, and utilities sections; and in Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" and Section 024119 "Selective Demolition."

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Grind down stumps and remove roots larger 3 inches (75 mm) in diameter, obstructions,

and debris to a depth of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade. 3. Use only hand methods or air spade for grubbing within protection zones. 4. Chip removed tree branches dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to depth indicated on Drawings in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.



C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or other materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm). 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. 3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be

stockpiled or reused. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Burning tree, shrub, and other vegetation waste is permitted according to burning requirements and permitting of authorities having jurisdiction. Control such burning to produce the least smoke or air pollutants and minimum annoyance to surrounding properties. Burning of other waste and debris is prohibited. All ashes and debris from burning shall be removed and disposed of offsite. Burying ashes is not allowable.

C. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials, and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.


Aldine Independent School District EARTH MOVING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 312000 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004


SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site. 2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade walks pavements turf and grasses and plants. 3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 4. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 5. Subbase course for concrete pavements. 6. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving. 7. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures. 9. Excavating well hole to accommodate elevator-cylinder assembly.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.



1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet (9 m) in length.

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock-excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:

1. Equipment for Footing, Trench, and Pit Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) maximum-width, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,700 lbf (128 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,400 lbf (82 kN) with extra-long reach boom.

2. Equipment for Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 230-hp (172-kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 47,992-lbf (213.3-kN) breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket.

I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m)] or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches (97 blows/50 mm) when tested by a geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586.

J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

K. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

L. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

M. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture. 2. Warning tapes.



B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:

1. Warning Tape: 12 inches (300 mm) long; of each color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Material Test Reports: For each [on-site] [and] [borrow] soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to [ASTM D 698] [ASTM D 1557].

C. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth-moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.


A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth-moving operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service call 811 for area where Project is located before beginning earth-moving operations.

D. Do not commence earth-moving operations until temporary site fencing and erosion- and sedimentation-control.

E. Do not commence earth-moving operations until plant-protection measures as indicated on plans are in place.

F. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:



1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

G. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

H. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification [Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487] [Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3 according to AASHTO M 145], or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

1. Liquid Limit: <Insert value>. 2. Plasticity Index: <Insert value>.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification [Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487] [Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to AASHTO M 145], or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 294/D 2940M 0; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.



H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of [washed ]crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.

J. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M; fine aggregate.

K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.



3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract Time may be authorized for rock excavation.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; and soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.



2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.

3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Excavate by hand or with an air spade to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. If excavating by hand, use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: As indicated.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities.

3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."



3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.11 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork.



5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in [Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete

D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 6-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than [30 inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of [6 inches (100 mm) of cement stabilized sand before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course.

E. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

F. Initial Backfill:

1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material or satisfactory soil], free of particles larger than [1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit.

a. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

2. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

G. Final Backfill:

1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

2. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to final subgrade elevation.

H. Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.



3.13 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction t indicated of optimum moisture content, within tolerance.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to [ASTM D 698]:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent.



3.16 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the following subgrade tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.

3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course[ and base course] on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course[ and base course] under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Shape subbase course[ and base course] to required crown elevations and cross-slope

grades. 3. Place subbase course[ and base course] 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted

thickness in a single layer. 4. Place subbase course[ and base course] that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted

thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

5. Compact subbase course[ and base course] at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course[ and base course] to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase[ and base] layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.18 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:



1. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single

layer. 2. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers

of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

3. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements.

2. Determine that fill material classification and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements.

3. Determine, during placement and compaction, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with requirements.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2937, and ASTM D 6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab but in no case fewer than three tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length but no fewer than two tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet or less of trench length but no fewer than two tests.

F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.



3.20 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshapeand recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.

1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legallydispose of them off Owner's property.


Aldine Independent School District BUILDING EXCAVATION AND FILL Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 31 2300 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SPE-Project No. 1614

Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 31 2300-1

SECTION 31 2300 - BUILDING EXCAVATION AND FILL 1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 COORDINATION

A. The General, Supplementary, and Special Conditions of these specifications shall all be considered as a part of this Section insofar as they may be termed applicable, whether attached or not.

B. Cooperation by Contractor for work of this section of the specifications with all

other trades is mandatory, so that all phases of work may be properly coordi-nated, without delays or damages to any parts of any work.

C. The Contractor shall provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods

listed, mentioned, or scheduled on the drawings and/or herein, including all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary and required for their completion.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Excavation within building lines and 5’-0” beyond.

B. Installations of select building fill.


A. Clearing and grading.

B. Under slab membrane.

C. Termite treatment.

D. Soil stabilization.

E. Testing laboratory services

F. Site drainage.

G. Excavation and fill under paving and walks.

H. Excavating and backfilling for mechanical, electrical and plumbing work is included under the respective trade sections of the specifications. Excavation and backfilling for such work shall be performed in accordance with these specifications.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 31 2300-2

2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Select Earth fill

1. Clean, inactive earth material free from vegetation, lumps, stones or other material not acceptable to the testing laboratory.

2. Select earth fill shall consist of inactive clean, sandy clay with a maximum liquid limit of 35 percent and a plasticity index (PI) range between 10 and 20 percent. Compliance shall be confirmed by the Owner’s testing laboratory.

B. Cardboard Carton Forms: Not required.

3 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Excavation Under Building 1. Excavate existing disturbed soil down to firm stable soil and remove

completely minimum 3 ft. within the building lines and 5 ft. beyond. Observe during proofrolling to detect any wet, soft or pumping soils. Treat any such soils with stabilizing agents as approved by the testing laboratory, or remove and replace with compacted select fill.

2. Proofroll the exposed soil with a 15-ton roller to locate any wet, unstable or loose areas. Soils that are observed to cut or deflect excessively under the moving load should be under cur and replaced with properly compacted select fill.

3. Notify Architect immediately should any uncharted utilities be encountered during excavation. Discontinue excavation operations until utilities can be identified and properly rerouted, capped, or removed.

B. Installation of Building Fill

1. After subgrade preparation and observation have been completed, place at least 2 feet of properly compacted select fill, using additional select fill as necessary to achieve the desired finished grade. The first layer of select fill should be placed in a relatively uniform horizontal lift and be adequately keyed into the exposed subgrade soils. Select fill materials should consist of clay sand or inactive lean clay that is free of organic or other deleterious materials, have a maximum particle size of less than 3 inches, and have a liquid limit not greater than 35 and a plasticity index between 8 and 20. Fill should be placed in maximum lifts of 8 inches of loose material and compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density at ± 2% of the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D 698. The select fill should be placed/compacted within the perimeter of the proposed building and for a distance of at least 5 feet beyond the perimeter of the proposed building, where applicable.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 31 2300-3

2. If water must be added to achieve optimum moisture content value, it shall be applied and thoroughly mixed into the soil by disking or scarifying.

3. Each lift of select fill shall be uniformly compacted and each lift tested by the Owners Testing Laboratory.

4. The moisture content and the degree of compaction of select fill shall be maintained until covered by foundation and building slabs.

5. Sheepsfoot rollers or other suitable compaction equipment shall be used to compact soil fill materials. a. Compact soil in layers not exceeding 8 inches in depth (loose measure-

ment). b. For those portions of fill which cannot be reached with the sheepsfoot

roller, such as corner areas, mechanical tampers shall be employed to obtain specified compaction.

c. Verify that completed select earth fill meets all laboratory requirements and meets elevation and grade requirements indicated on the drawings.

6. Stabilize the top 6" with lime and/or fly ash as specified.

C. Structure Excavation 1. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated in the drawings plus

sufficient space to allow for forms or shoring where required. Do not excavate beyond required depths.

2. Ensure that all excavations meet OSHA Safety Requirements for shoring and requirements of Selection 01560 Trench Safety.

3. Remove standing water from excavations prior to concrete placement. 4. Where grade beams are earth formed (unexposed faces only), increase

required width of grade beam 1-1/2" for each earth formed face. Coordinate forming requirements with concrete contractor.

D. Utility Excavation and Backfill

1. Where utilities are to be located within building fill, excavate carefully to required depths with minimum disturbance of surrounding fill. Coordinate excavation and backfill with requirements of Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing divisions of these specifications. Use only select earth building fill.

2. Backfill excavations to the level of the original surrounding surface using material excavated. Place backfill in 8" loose lifts and compact to specified requirements with mechanical tamping and proof rolling with heavy equipment.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 31 2300-4

E. Testing Laboratory Control 1. All work under this section shall be observed, tested and confirmed by the

Owner’s testing laboratory that materials and installation comply with thisspecification. Compacted fill not meeting testing requirements shall beremoved and replaced.

2. Reference Section 01 4500, Testing Laboratory Services, for additionalrequirements.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District SOIL TREATMENT FOR TERMITE CONTROLJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 31 3116MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01SBA-16141

SECTION 31 3116 - SOIL TREATMENT FOR TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Work of this section includes soil treatment with termiticide.

B. Related work: Rough Carpentry section; for wood preservative treatment by pressureprocess.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS:

A. General: In compliance with Section 01 3300 and as specified herein.

B. Product data: Submit product data for termiticide, indicating chemical to be used,installation instructions and copy of container label.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS:

A. Qualification data: For Installer of termite control products.

B. Soil treatment application report: After application of termiticide is completed, submitreport for Owner's record information, including the following:1. Date and time of application.2. Moisture content of soil before application.3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.6. Areas of application.7. Water source for application.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS:

A. Warranty: Submit warranty as specified herein.


A. Qualifications: Engage a professional pest control operator, who is licensed according toregulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment andproducts in jurisdiction where Project is located.

B. Regulatory requirements: Formulate and apply termite treatments according to theEPA-Registered Label.

C. Source limitations: Obtain termite control products through one source.

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS:

A. Environmental limitations for termiticide-treated soil: To ensure penetration, do not treatsoil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

1.7 COORDINATION:

A. Soil treatment: Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, andconcreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supportedslabs before construction.

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 31 3116-1


1.8 WARRANTY:

A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifyingthat termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will preventinfestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage isdiscovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused bytermite infestation.

B. Warranty period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Warranty shall state dates of application and chemicals used, including quantities andconcentrations.

D. Warranty shall be renewable on a year-to-year basis at the end of the five year period, atOwner's option, for a fee to be mutually agreed upon at time of renewal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Termiticides acceptable manufacturers:1. Basis of design; Bayer Corp., Environmental Science Group., “Premise 75".2. BASF Corp.3. Dow AgroSciences.4. FMC Corporation, Specialty Products Group.5. Syngenta.

2.2 SOIL TREATMENT:

A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements ofauthorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termiteinfestation. Provide quantity required for application at label volume and rate formaximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product'sEPA-Registered Label.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance withrequirements for moisture content of soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundationwork, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control.

B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION:

A. General: Comply with most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction andwith manufacturer's product data for preparation before beginning application of termitecontrol treatment. Remove extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other ediblematerials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, andconstruction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.

B. Soil treatment preparation: 1. Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease

treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. 2. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas

under slabs and footings.

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 31 3116-2


3. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs ifrecommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer.

4. Fit filling hose connected to water source at site with a backflow preventer,complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL:

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdictionand with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.

3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT:

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Applyquantity required for application at label volume and rate for maximum specifiedconcentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to thefollowing so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone isestablished around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.1. Slabs-on-grade and lowest level slabs: Under ground-supported slab

construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overalltreatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.

2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter offoundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbingpipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior columnfooters, piers, and chimney bases; also along the entire outside perimeter, fromgrade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.

3. Masonry: Treat voids, including insides of hollow masonry units and behindmasonry veneers.

4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will bepenetrated.

B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completelydry.

C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted untilground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according toEPA-Registered Label instructions.

D. Post warning signs in areas of application.

E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,landscaping, or other construction activities following application.

END OF SECTION

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 31 3116-3

Aldine Independent School District LIME/FLY ASH STABILIZATION Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 31 3213 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SPE-Project No. 1614

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 31 3213-1

SECTION 31 3213 - LIME/FLY ASH STABILIZATION 1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 COORDINATION

A. Drawings and General provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide lime stabilization treatment of the top 6 inches of exposed subgrade under

concrete slab and 5 feet beyond the edge of the slab.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 311000 - Site clearing, grading, excavation and fill.

B. Section 321313 - Concrete paving, curbs and sidewalks

C. Section 01 4500 - Testing laboratory requirements

1.4 REFERENCES

A. The following publications of the latest issues listed below, but referred to hereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by references thereto. 1. Harris County Public Infrastructure Department, Engineering Division.

Specifications for the Construction of Roads and Bridges within Harris County, Texas. a. Item 220, Lime Stabilized Subgrade. b. Item 221, Hydrated Lime and Lime Slurry.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials Standards (ASTM). a. ASTM C977 b. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort. c. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and

Plasticity Index of Soils. 3. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT)

a. TxDOT Tex-600J - Lime Testing Procedure


A. Sampling and Testing: Determined by TxDOT Test Method Tex-600-J, Lime Testing Procedure.

B. Moisture-Density Relationships on materials secured from stabilized subgrade: ASTM

D698.

C. In-place density determination: ASTM D2922 or D1556; 3 tests for each 1000 square feet of stabilized subgrade.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 31 3213-2

2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. A mixture of lime and fly ash: 3% lime by dry soil weight and 8% dry ash by dry soil

weight.

B. The use of a mixture of lime and fly ash such as TruBln may be used under this specification. The lime slurry shall be a pumpable suspension of solids in water. The water or liquid portion of the slurry shall not contain dissolved material in sufficient quantity to be injurious or objectionable for the purpose intended. The solids portion of the mixture, when considered on the basis of solids contents, shall consist principally of hydrated lime obtained by treating quicklime with water, of a quantity and fineness sufficient to meet the following requirements. 1. Chemical composition: The solids content of the lime slurry shall have a hydrate

alkalinity Ca (OH) 2 of not less than 90 percent by weight. The use of Carbide lime or by-product lime is prohibited.

2. Residue: The percent by weight of the residue in the "solids contents" of the lime slurry shall conform to the following requirements: a. Residue retained on a No. 6 Sieve Max. 0.0 percent b. Residue retained on a No. 10 Sieve Max. 1.0 percent c. Residue retained on a No. 30 Sieve Max. 2.5 percent

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Machinery, tools and equipment necessary for the proper execution of the work shall be

maintained in satisfactory operating condition. The Contractor shall at all times provide sufficient equipment to enable continuous prosecution of the work. The equipment shall be operated by experienced and capable workmen.

3 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

A. Lime/fly ash shall be applied only to such areas that the first mixing operations can be completed during the same working day.

B. The placing and mixing of the lime/fly ash with the subgrade shall be obtained as

described below: 1. Quantity:

a. 6 percent by dry soil weight or approximately 31 pounds of TruBln per square yard of surface area for a depth of 6 inches, at light traffic areas.

b. 6 percent by dry soil weight or minimum 42 pounds of TruBln per square yard of surface area for a depth of 8 inches at medium traffic areas drives and approaches.

2. Scarifying of subgrade: a. Paving subgrade and 12 inches beyond shall be scarified and stabilized to a

depth of 6 inches and 8 inches respectively as indicated in subparagraph 1 and 2 above.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 31 3213-3

3. The required amount of lime/fly ash shall be applied by mixing with water trucks or approved distributor and applied as a mixture of slurry, with the distribution of the lime/fly ash being attained by successive passes over a determined section of ground. The water truck or distributor shall be equipped with an agitator which will keep the lime and water in a consistent mixture.

4. The slurry shall then be placed and thoroughly mixed with a pulverizing mixer until a homogeneous friable mixture of soil and lime is obtained to the required depth by approved road mixers, disking, harrowing, plowing or other method of pulverizing and mixing approved by the testing laboratory.

5. The lime mixed subgrade shall be allowed to cure from one to four days as determined by the testing laboratory during which time mix shall be kept wet by sprinkling.

6. Stabilize the upper 6 inches of the exposed subgrade soils with a mixture of lime and fly ash (3% lime by dry soil weight or 16 pounds of lime per square yard of surface area for a depth of 6 inches and 8% fly ash by dry soil weight or 42 pounds of fly ash per square yard of surface area for a depth of 6 inches). The blended soil-lime-fly ash mixture should be compacted to an in-place dry density equal to at least 95% of the maximum dry density at a moisture content within 0 to + 3% of the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D 698. Stabilization procedures should be performed in accordance with Item 223, "Lime-Fly Ash or Fly Ash Stabilized Subgrade" from the most recent revision of the Harris County Public Infrastructure Department - Engineering Division (HCPID) Specifications entitled "Specifications for the Construction of Roads and Bridges within Harris County, Texas". Lime-fly ash stabilization should extend a minimum of 5 feet beyond the perimeter of the building to preclude moisture migration to the soils below. In lieu of lime and fly ash, a mixture of lime and fly ash such as TruBln may be applied at a rate of 6% by dry soil weight or approximately 31 pounds of TruBln per square yard of surface area for a 6 inch depth.

7. Place/compact imported select backfill over the lime-fly ash stabilized subgrade for a minimum thickness of 3 feet. Select fill should consist of clayey sand or inactive lean clay with a maximum liquid limit of 35 and a plasticity index ranging from 8 to 20. The select fill should be placed in 8-inch thick loose lifts and compacted to an in-place dry density equal to at least 95% of the maximum standard dry density (ASTM D 698) at moisture content within ± 2% of the optimum moisture content. The select fill should be placed/compacted within the perimeter of the proposed building and for a distance of at least 5 feet beyond the perimeter of the proposed building, as applicable.

8. Stabilize the upper 6 inches of the pad using 3% lime and 8% fly ash by dry soil weight (16 pounds of lime and 42 pounds of fly ash per square yard of surface area for a 6 inch depth). In lieu of lime and fly ash, a mixture of lime and fly ash such as TruBln may be applied at a rate of 6 percent by dry soil weight or approximately 31 pounds of TruBln per square yard of surface area for a 6-inch depth. Stabilization will allow construction equipment to operate on the pad with less destruction.


Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 31 3213-4

C. The required amount of water necessary to provide the optimum moisture content shall be added uniformly and thoroughly mixed with the soil and lime. The completed soil-lime mixture shall be spread evenly over the processed width of the subgrade and placed in a loose condition ready for immediate compaction by the rollers. The completed soil-lime mixture shall be homogenous and uniform in appearance. The completed soil-lime mixture shall be compacted immediately behind the final mixing operation. Compaction shall begin at the bottom and shall continue until the standard proctor density is achieved. The Contractor shall be permitted to utilize alternate construction methods with the approval of the testing laboratory and Architect, provided such methods result in a mixed subgrade material meeting the specifications herein described. If the total thickness of the stabilized subgrade cannot be mixed in one operation, the previously mixed material then shall be bladed to a window just beyond the area to be stabilized and the next layer mixed with lime as specified above. The subgrade shall be cut to the required lines and grades in accordance with the typical sections. The completed section shall be compacted and rolled.

D. Compaction Requirements: The lime stabilized soil shall be compacted to an in-place dry density equal to at least 95 percent of the maximum standard dry density (ASTM D698) at moisture content from 1 percent below to 3 percent above the optimum moisture content as determined by the testing laboratory.

E. Traffic shall not be permitted on the treated subgrade until it has cured to the satisfaction of the testing laboratory.

F. Construction methods and materials shall comply to those specified in Item No. 220, "Lime Stabilized Subgrade" of the Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges within Harris County.

3.2 MEASUREMENTS

A. Stabilized subgrade of the required depth shall be measured by the square yard to neat lines. Lime shall be measured by the ton (2,000 pounds).

B. The weight of the lime slurry shall be calculated from the number of gallons of slurry applied to the subgrade as directed by the testing laboratory. The calculation shall be based upon the solids by weight in the slurry.

3.3 TESTING LABORATORY CONTROL

A. A representative of the testing laboratory shall be present during all lime stabilization operations. Density tests shall be taken of the compacted soil-lime mixture during each operation in accordance with Section 01 4500.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS Johnson & Francis Elementary School SECTION 31 6329 MA Nos. R306408.01 & r306409.01 SPE – Project No. 1614

Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 31 6329-1

SECTION 31 6329 - DRILLED CONCRTE PIERS AND SHAFTS 1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 COORDINATION

A. The General, Supplementary, and Special Conditions of these specifications shall all be considered as a part of this Section insofar as they may be termed applicable, whether attached or not.

B. Cooperation by Contractor for work of this Section of the specifications with all

other trades is mandatory, so that all phases of work may be properly coordinated, without delays or damage to any parts of any work.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in

conjunction with drilled pier foundations complete, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Layout of drilled piers. 2. Excavation for drilled piers. 3. Furnishing and placing reinforcing steel. 4. Furnishing and placing concrete. 5. Removal of spoil (excavated material) resulting from drilled pier excavations.

B. Extent of drilled piers is shown on Drawings including locations, diameters of

shafts, estimated bottom elevations, top elevations, reinforcement, and details of construction.

C. Related Sections:

1. Testing Laboratory Services: Section 01 4500. 2. Reinforcement Material Properties: Section 03 3000. 3. Concrete: Section 03 3000.

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Comply with American concrete Institute ACI 336.3R, “Suggested Design and

Construction Procedures for Pier Foundations.

B. Testing Laboratory Services: 1. Refer to Section 01 4500 for additional information concerning laboratory

services in conjunction with drilled pier work.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 31 6329-2

2. Laboratory Services on Site: a. Laboratory representative shall monitor all pier drilling operations and

shall maintain an accurate and complete pier log showing diameter, top and bottom elevations of each pier, casing required or not required, actual penetration into bearing stratum, elevation of top of bearing stratum, volume of concrete used, and deviations from specified tolerances. Provide copies to Architect and Contractor.

b. Contractor shall give a minimum of two days notice to laboratory for services in conjunction with drilled piers.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for layout of all drilled pier work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for drilled pier work including

dimensioned plan layout, dowel setting plans, shaft sizes, top elevation, and details of reinforcement.

B. Drilled Pier Log: Submit drilled pier log for Architect’s record.

C. Concrete design mix, see Section 03 3000.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Subsurface Information:

1. Reference Document 00 3123 Geotechnical Information for boring log information obtained from the Owner’s geotechnical investigation report.

2. Site Information: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of continuity of such conditions. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Data is made available for convenience of contractor and is not guaranteed to represent conditions that may be encountered.

3. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be conducted by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Existing Utilities:

1. Locate existing underground utilities before starting drilled pier excavation operations. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled pier operations.

2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be

encountered during drilling consult Architect immediately for directions as to procedure. Cooperate with Owner and public or private utility companies in keeping their respective service and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility Owner.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 31 6329-3

3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect, and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

1.6 UNIT PRICES FOR DRILLED PIERS

A. Contract price shall be based on base lengths of piers as shown on Drawings.

In addition, bidders shall quote unit prices for the following: 1. Unit price per linear foot excluding casings for piers longer or shorter than

base lengths. Deduct unit price shall be two-thirds of the add unit price. 2. Unit prices per linear foot of casing used. Measurement for payment shall

be from top of pier to top of bearing stratum.

B. Unit prices shall include all labor, materials, equipment, overhead and fee for drilled piers complete. Adjustments to Contract shall be based on total linear feet of each pier size greater than or less than the sum of base lengths of each size.

C. Cost of providing casings is not to be included in Base Proposal for drilled piers.

If casings are required, cost will be added to contract based on unit price. 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Steel: Refer to Section 03 3000.

B. Concrete Materials: Refer to Section 03 3000.

2.2 FABRICATION OF REINFORCEMENT

A. Refer to Drawings and Section 03 3000.

2.3 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. Refer to Section 03 3000.

2.4 CONCRETE PRODUCTION AND DELIVERY

A. Refer to Section 03 3000. 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect areas and conditions under which drilled pier work is to be performed and notify Architect any Geotech Lab representative of any unsatisfactory conditions.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 31 6329-4

3.2 EXCAVATION FOR DRILLED PIERS

A. Excavate for drilled piers, of required diameters, to bearing strata indicated on

Drawings and as confirmed by laboratory representative at site.

B. Excavate into bearing strata required penetration depths indicated on Drawings.

C. If flowing water or caving soil is encountered, provide and place temporary steel casings to seal off caving soil and/or flowing water. Install casings a sufficient distance into bearing stratum to ensure watertight seals. Steel casings shall be of sufficient thickness to withstand compressive displacement and withdrawal stresses, and to maintain shaft walls. Temporary casings may be left in place or may be withdrawn as concrete is placed (at Contractor’s option). Drilling of bearing strata shall be done in-the-dry. All water shall be removed from the hole prior to and during scheduled drilling penetrations.

D. Tolerances: Locate center lines of drilled piers to be on center lines of bearing

construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not exceed the following tolerances: 1. Shaft Center Line Location: 1/24 of shaft diameter or 3 inches, whichever is

less. 2. Shaft Variation to Plumb: 1 percent of length. 3. Top of Pier Elevation: Plus 1 inches to minus 3 inches. 4. If above tolerances are exceeded, provide additional or corrective construc-

tion methods to Architect for review before proceeding.

E. Obstructions: Work of this Section may include demolition and removal of rock, boulders, concrete, masonry, and other subsurface materials in order to drill piers, and such work will not be considered a change in work.

F. Dewatering:

1. Provide and maintain pumping equipment to keep excavations free of water during drilling and before placing concrete. If excessive water is encoun-tered and drilling operations must be halted, consult with Architect before using alternate methods of construction. Do not use water to aid drilling.

2. Conduct water to general site run-off ditches and disposal areas with discharge lines. Provide ditching as required, to conduct water to site drainage facilities.

G. Over excavation: No payment will be made for extra length, when shafts are excavated to a greater depth than required or authorized by Architect, due to over drilling by Contractor. Complete drilled pier and fill extra depth with concrete, if other conditions are satisfactory. Over excavated shafts will be measured and paid for to original design or authorized depth.

H. Safety: Workmen shall not be permitted to enter pier hole due to potential for

caving soil.

I. Excavated Material: Remove excavated material and dispose off site.


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 31 6329-5

3.3 REINFORCING STEEL AND DOWELS

A. Before placing, clean reinforcing steel and dowels of loose rust, scale, dirt,

grease, and other material which could reduce or destroy bond.

B. Fabricate and erect reinforcing cages in shafts as one continuous unit. Place reinforcement accurately and symmetrically about axis of hole and hold securely in position during concrete placement.

C. Tie dowels in place before placing concrete. Provide blocking and holding

devices to maintain required position during concrete placement.

D. Protect exposed ends of dowels from mechanical damage and exposure to weather.


A. Fill drilled pier excavations with concrete immediately after inspection and

approval, and within time limit stated on Drawings. If holes are left open longer than stated time limit, drill an additional scheduled penetration length below the bottom of the hole and comply with time limit.

B. Place concrete continuously and in a smooth flow without segregating mixed

materials. Direct concrete down center of shaft so that it does not contact sides of shaft or reinforcing cage. Provide mechanical vibration for consolidation of at least top 5'-0" of each shaft.

C. Place concrete by means of a bottom discharge bucket with downpipe or flexible

drop chute, elephant trunk hopper, or tremie. Use drop chute or tremie for placing concrete to limit free fall of concrete to a maximum of 25 feet, or pump concrete into place.

D. Place concrete in-the-dry. If water occurs, pier hole shall be pumped dry

immediately before concreting. No more than 2 inches of standing water is permitted at time of pouring.

E. Maintain a sufficient head of concrete to prevent reduction in diameter of pier shaft by earth pressure and to prevent extraneous material from mixing with fresh concrete. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement operations, to maintain a head of concrete approximately 5 feet above casing bottom until top of fresh concrete reaches cut-off elevation shown.

F. Stop concrete placement at cut-off elevation shown, screed level and apply a

scoured, rough finish. Where cut-off elevation is above ground elevation from top section above grade and extend shaft to required elevation.

G. Interrupted placing operations of over one hour duration, requires a cold joint

installation. Leave resulting shaft surface approximately level and rough. At


Bid Issue – 02/03/2017 31 6329-6

resumption of concrete placing, clean off surface laitance and soil particles and slush with one part sand to one part cement grout before remainder of concrete is placed.

H. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306R, “Cold Weather Concreting,” and as herein specified. When air temperature has fallen to, or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing, to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less that 50 degrees F and not more than 80 degrees F, at point of placement.

I. During hot weather temperature of mix delivered to site shall not exceed 95 degrees F. All work shall be in accordance with ACI 305R, “Hot Weather Concreting.”

J. Place concrete immediately upon delivery. Keep exposed concrete surfaces and formed shaft extensions moist by fog sprays, wet burlap, or other effective means.

3.5 CLEANUP

A. Clean up all debris caused by the work of this Section, keeping the area clean and neat at all times.

B. Remove excavated soils from building pad and site.

C. Provide select fill to fill depressions in building pad as may be caused by drilling equipment and operations. Compact to required densities.

END OF SECTION

Aldine Independent School District ASPHALT PAVING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 321216 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004


SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 2. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 3. Asphalt surface treatments.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 2. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job

mix proposed for the Work. 3. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Material Certificates: For each paving material.

C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material, by a qualified testing agency.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated.



C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of <Insert applicable standards> of <Insert name of state or local DOT> for asphalt paving work.

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C). 2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C). 3. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910. 4. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and rising at

time of placement. 5. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at time

of placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.

B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692/D 692M, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.

C. Fine Aggregate: [ASTM D 1073] [or] [AASHTO M 29], sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.

1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass.

D. Mineral Filler: [ASTM D 242/D 242M] [or] [AASHTO M 17], rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320, [PG 64-22] [PG 58-28] [PG 70-22].

B. Asphalt Cement: [ASTM D 3381/D 3381M for viscosity-graded material] [ASTM D 946/D 946M for penetration-graded material].



C. Cutback Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt, [MC-30 or MC-70] [MC-250].

D. Emulsified Asphalt Prime Coat: [ASTM D 977] [or] [AASHTO M 140] emulsified asphalt, or [ASTM D 2397] [or] [AASHTO M 208] cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

E. Tack Coat: [ASTM D 977] [or] [AASHTO M 140] emulsified asphalt, or [ASTM D 2397] [or] [AASHTO M 208] cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

F. Fog Seal: [ASTM D 977] [or] [AASHTO M 140] emulsified asphalt, or [ASTM D 2397] [or] [AASHTO M 208] cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

G. Water: Potable.

H. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141/D 3141M; pumping consistency.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Recycled Materials for Hot-Mix Asphalt Mixes: Reclaimed asphalt pavement; reclaimed, unbound-aggregate base material; and recycled [tires] [asphalt shingles] [or] [glass] from sources and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations, equal to performance of required hot-mix asphalt paving produced from all new materials.

B. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA, and not classified as "restricted use" for locations and conditions of application. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.

C. Sand: [ASTM D 1073] [or] [AASHTO M 29], Grade No. 2 or No. 3.

D. Paving Geotextile: AASHTO M 288 paving fabric; nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to chemical attack, rot, and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications.

E. Joint Sealant: [ASTM D 6690] [or] [AASHTO M 324], [Type I] [Type II or III] [Type IV], hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified bituminous sealant.

2.4 MIXES

A. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for recycled content.>

1. Surface Course Limit: Recycled content no more than [10] <Insert number> percent by weight.

B. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense-graded, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes [approved by authorities having jurisdiction] [; designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types";] and complying with the following requirements:



1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located.

2. Base Course: <Insert mix designation>. 3. Surface Course: <Insert mix designation>.

C. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 3910, [Type 1] [Type 2] [Type 3].

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.

B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction[, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction]. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes).

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 COLD MILLING

A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated.

1. Mill to a depth of [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] [3 inches (75 mm)] <Insert dimension>.

2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of excessive gouges, grooves, and ridges. 3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course. 4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling. 5. Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material

separate from milled hot-mix asphalt. 6. Patch surface depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) after milling, before wearing

course is laid. 7. Handle milled asphalt material according to approved waste management plan required

in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 8. Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust. 9. Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on-site.



3.3 PATCHING

A. Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into perimeter of adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat concrete pieces firmly.

1. Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slab until slab is stabilized or, if necessary, crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly.

2. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending into perimeter of adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

C. Tack Coat: Before placing patch material, apply tack coat uniformly to vertical asphalt surfaces abutting the patch. Apply at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

D. Placing Patch Material: Fill excavated pavement areas with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

E. Placing Patch Material: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) in existing pavements.

1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of [1/4 inch (6 mm)] <Insert dimension>.

1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide. Fill

flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide.

Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.



3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.

1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.

C. Cutback Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. m). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure.

1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.

2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.

D. Emulsified Asphalt Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a rate of 0.10 to 0.30 gal./sq. yd. per inch depth (0.5 to 1.40 L/sq. m per 25 mm depth). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure.

1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.

2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.

E. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.6 PAVING GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION

A. Apply [tack coat] [asphalt binder] [asphalt cement] uniformly to existing pavement surfaces at a rate of 0.20 to 0.30 gal./sq. yd. (0.8 to 1.2 L/sq. m).

B. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer's written instructions. Broom or roll geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches (100 mm) and transverse joints 6 inches (150 mm).

C. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage, and place hot-mix asphalt overlay the same day.



3.7 PLACING HOT-MIX ASPHALT

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 3. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C). 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of

one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and

tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required.

1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Overlap mix placement about 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm) from strip to strip to ensure proper compaction of mix along longitudinal joints.

2. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.8 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm). 4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes

work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints [using either "bulkhead" or "papered" method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving Operations."] [as shown on Drawings.] <Insert joint requirement.>

5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement.

6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.9 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).



B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to [ASTM D 6927] [or] [AASHTO T 245], but not less than 94 percent or greater than 100 percent.

2. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent or greater than 96 percent.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.10 ASPHALT CURBS

A. Construct hot-mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).

1. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.

B. Place hot-mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand-placed materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot-mix asphalt has cooled.

3.11 ASPHALT TRAFFIC-CALMING DEVICES

A. Construct hot-mix asphalt speed [bumps] [humps] [cushions] [and] [tables] over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a tack coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).

1. Tack Coat Application: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m.)

2. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.



3. Before installation, mill pavement that will be in contact with bottom of traffic-calming device. Mill to a depth of 1 inch (25 mm) from top of pavement to a clean, rough profile.

B. Place and compact hot-mix asphalt to cross section indicated, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand-placed materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot-mix asphalt has cooled.

3.12 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: [1/4 inch (6 mm)] <Insert dimension>. 2. Surface Course: [1/8 inch (3 mm)] <Insert dimension>. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm).

C. Asphalt Traffic-Calming Devices: Compact and form asphalt to produce the contour indicated and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) of height indicated above pavement surface.

3.13 SURFACE TREATMENTS

A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.45 to 0.7 L/sq. m) to existing asphalt pavement and allow to cure. With fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal.

B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to cure.

1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.


A. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.

C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.



D. Asphalt Traffic-Calming Devices: Finished height of traffic-calming devices above pavement will be measured for compliance with tolerances.

E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to [ASTM D 979] [or] [AASHTO T 168].

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from foursamples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according toASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samplesaccording to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less ofinstalled pavement, with no fewer than three cores taken.

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclearmethod according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 orASTM D 2726.

F. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.

G. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.15 WASTE HANDLING

A. General: Handle asphalt-paving waste according to approved waste management plan required in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."


Aldine Independent School District CONCRETE PAVING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 321313 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004


SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Driveways. 2. Roadways. 3. Parking lots. 4. Curbs and gutters. 5. Walks.


1. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and

contraction joints within concrete paving and in joints between concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction.

2. Section 321713 "Parking Bumpers." 3. Section 321723 "Pavement Markings."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.



B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.




A. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.

B. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:

1. Aggregates: Include service-record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.



A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

B. Cold-Weather Concrete Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.



C. Hot-Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap, so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray form, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do not use notched and bent forms.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, fabricated from steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.

D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed.

E. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) pain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

F. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.



G. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), internally and externally threaded. Design hook-bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against paving form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.

H. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded-wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

I. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Concrete shall be manufactured within 100 miles of Project site from aggregates and cementitious materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 100 miles of Project site.

B. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,portland cement Type I or Type III. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, 1 ½” to No. 4 Sieve, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

F. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.



2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

1. Retarder shall be certified to be compatible with concrete marking paint.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.


F. White, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B, dissipating.


2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade complying with requirements, and of the following types:

1. Types I and II, nonload bearing Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

D. Chemical Surface Retarder: Water-soluble, liquid, set retarder with color dye, for horizontal concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of concrete to a depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.



1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.

2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain laboratory test results that comply with or exceed requirements.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 3-1/2 percent plus or minus 1 percent for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

2. Air Content: 4-1/2 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

3. Air Content: 3-1/2 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture high-range, water-reducing admixture high-range, water-reducing and retarding admixture or plasticizing and retarding admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

F. Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi 2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches plus or minus 1inch.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For concrete batches of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.



2. For concrete batches larger than 1 cu. yd. increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd.

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of water added.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons.

3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.



D. Install welded-wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) overlap of adjacent mats.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys

unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 4. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.

Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 60 feet unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if

joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together. 6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooving-tool marks on concrete surfaces.



2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.

3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.


A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement dowels and joint devices.

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

J. Curbs and Gutters: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.



K. Slip-Form Paving: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of slip-form paving machine during operations.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.

2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.



2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch minus 1/4 inch 3. Surface: Gap below 10-feet- long; unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch 4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12

inches of tie bar. 5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch 6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per

12 inches of dowel. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch , no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch , no minus.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 5000 sq. ft. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.



6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

I. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.


Aldine Independent School District CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 321373 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004


SECTION 321373 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied joint sealants. 2. Hot-applied joint sealants. 3. Cold-applied, fuel-resistant joint sealants. 4. Hot-applied, fuel-resistant joint sealants. 5. Joint-sealant backer materials. 6. Primers.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing nontraffic and traffic joints in locations not specified in this Section.



B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Paving-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For [Installer].

B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory.




A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer [ or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C)].

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D 5893/D 5893M, Type NS.

B. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D 5893/D 5893M, Type SL.

C. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane, Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.

D. Single Component, Pourable, Urethane, Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.

E. Multicomponent, Pourable, Urethane, Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.

2.3 COLD-APPLIED, FUEL-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Fuel-Resistant, Single-Component, Pourable, Modified-Urethane, Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.



B. Fuel-Resistant, Multicomponent, Pourable, Modified-Urethane, Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 12-1/2 or 25, for Use T.

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. Joint-Sealant Backer Materials: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

C. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control joint-sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

D. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

2.5 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Before installing joint sealants, clean out joints immediately to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.



Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions.

C. Install joint-sealant backings to support joint sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant

application and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install joint sealants immediately following backing installation, using proven techniques that comply with the following:

1. Place joint sealants so they fully contact joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:

1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess joint sealant as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturers.

B. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.



3.5 PAVING-JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints within concrete paving.

1. Joint Location:

a. Expansion and isolation joints in concrete paving.b. Contraction joints in concrete paving.c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Single-component, self-leveling, silicone joint sealant.3. Joint-Sealant Color: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints within concrete paving and between concrete and asphalt paving.

1. Joint Location:

a. Joints between concrete and asphalt paving.b. Joints between concrete curbs and asphalt paving.c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Hot-applied, single-component joint sealant.3. Joint-Sealant Color: Manufacturer's standard.


Aldine Independent School District AGGREGATE TRAILJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 32 1540MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01SBA-16141

SECTION 32 1540 - AGGREGATE TRAIL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. This section specifies the requirements for providing and placing aggregate trails andsidewalks, edging, and geotextile fabrics.


A. The work of this section shall be preformed by a company that specializes in the type ofaggregate trail work required foe this Project and shall be performed by skilled workmanthoroughly experienced in the necessary craft.

B. Manufacturer shall specialize in manufacturing the type of aggregate specified in thissection, with a minimum of five (5) years of documented successful experience and havethe facilities capable of meeting all requirements of Contract Documents of a single-source responsibility and warranty.

C. Tolerance: Final surface slope shall not exceed 1:20 along the trail, and 1:50 side slopeswhen compacted.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS:

A. ASTM International (ASTM) as referenced herein.



B. Aggregate: Material supplier, source, and sample shall be submitted for approval by theLandscape Architect or Owner’s Representative.

C. Landscaping Edging: Product Data shall be submitted for approval by the LandscapeArchitect or Owner’s Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Decomposed Granite and gravel: Reddish rust in color, must be free of all deleteriousmaterials, such as stones, sticks, and excessive clay. ‘Texas Pink’ Decomposed Graniteand Gravel or approved equal.1. Clean, hard, durable particles of fragments of 1/16" to 1/4". Fines shall be evenly

mixed throughout the aggregate.2. The crushed aggregate screenings shall be free from clay lumps, vegetable

matter, and deleterious material. Granite gravel shall include limited fines.3. The material must comply with the following gradation:

a. Grading Requirements:

Sieve Size Percent Passing3/8-inch 100No. 4 95-100No. 8 75-80

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 1540-1


Sieve Size Percent PassingNo. 16 55-65No. 30 40-50No. 50 25-35No. 100 20-25No. 200 5-15

Note: Gradation based upon AASHTO T11-82 and T27-824. Solidifying Emulsion: Solidifying emulsion must be either a water-based polymer,

or non-toxic organic powdered binder specifically manufactured to hardendecomposed granite. The solidifying emulsion must not alter the decomposedgranite color.

B. Geotextile Fabric: Rot resistant polypropylene filter fabric, water permeable, andunaffected by freezing and thawing. Trevia Spunbound, Type 1114, Mirafi 140-N, orapproved equal.

C. Geogrid: High density, durable plastic slope retention grid material. Contractor shallsubmit proposed manufacturer for approval by the Landscape Architect or Owner’sRepresentative.

D. Pre-emergent Herbicide:1. Pre-Emergence Weed Control : In areas of Woody Ornamental Plants Eptam or

Eptam-5-G as manufactured by Green Light Products Company, Missouri Owner,Texas 77459, (713) 438-6824 or approved equal.

2. Contact Weed Control: Roundup by Monsanto, 800 N. Lindbergh, St. Louis, MO63167, (314) 694-1000 or approved equal.

E. Concrete Curbing: Cast in Place Concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Layout: The Contractor shall layout all proposed trails and/or sidewalks for approval bythe Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative.

B. Clearing and Grubbing: The Contractor shall remove any existing vegetation or understoryplantings unless approved by the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative.

C. Sub-grade: Prior to placing crushed aggregate screenings, shape, fill, grade, andcompact the sub grade where needed.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. No motorized equipment shall be allowed in the root zone area of existing trees.

B. Contractor to use lightweight hauling and construction equipment.

C. Contractor to exercise care in using equipment and to avoid damaging trees or othersensitive areas.

D. Install aggregate paving system in strict compliance with approved shop drawings,manufactured recommendations and Contract Documents.

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 1540-2


E. Aggregate:1. Placing Crushed Aggregate Screenings: Install aggregate trail to width specified

on the drawings. For a 4-inch thickness or more, apply in two 2-inch lifts andcompact. The Contractor shall crown the trail at the centerline at a maximumslope of 2% away from the centerline in either direction. Edges of trail shall be ina clean, crisp linear line. For areas that do not have existing aggregate trailsurface provide geotextile fabric under full aggregate depth.

2. Edging Restraints: Install concrete curbing prior to installation decomposedgranite paving surface to elevations shown on the plans and details.

3. Compaction: Wet aggregate; Compact to 85% compaction utilizing a heavy lawnroller (minimum 225 pounds and maximum 30 inch width), to achieve finish gradeand initial compaction. Hand tamp edges around benches, signposts, interpretiveexhibits, bridges, etc. Use a heavy (1 ton minimum) small rider, after havinginitially used the lawn roller, to obtain the desired final dense, smooth, uniformtexture.

4. Finishing: After finished compacted trail surface has been achieved, finishadjacent shoulders by backfilling shoulders of trail with stockpiled topsoil,compacting to match existing undisturbed ground, and slope to required gradeand cross section. Longitudinal grade of trail shall not exceed a one foot (1’) risein twenty feet (20’) of length in any section, unless distance corresponds toallowances in Texas Accessibility Standards and Americans with Disabilities ActGuidelines.

F. Solidifying Emulsion:1. Mix solidifying emulsion thoroughly and uniformly throughout the decomposed

granite per the manufacturer's recommendations. Mix the material in the fieldusing portable mixing equipment, or delivered in mixer trucks from a local ready-mixed plant.

2. Apply a final application off solidifying emulsion as recommended by themanufacturer. Prevent runoff or overspray off solidifying emulsion onto adjacentpaved or planting area.

3.4 INSPECTION:

A. Finished surface of trail shall be smooth, uniform and solid, with no evidence of chippingor cracking. Dried compacted trail material shall be firm all the way through with no soggyareas.

B. Any significant irregularities shall be smoothed out prior to final acceptance of work.Smoothing shall be accomplished by rewetting/saturating rough areas thoroughly, and then rolling the trail again with a heavy roller (91,000-15,000lbs powered walk-behind orsmall rider).

C. Final thickness of completed trail shall not vary more than one inch (1”) from dimensionindicated. Measurements may be taken by means of test holes taken at random infinished trail surface. Correct any variations in the thickness beyond the allowable 1-inchby repeating the procedures listed above.

D. Final width of completed trail shall not vary more than 2 inches from typical dimensionindicated. Measurements may be taken at random cross sections in the finished trailsurface.

3.5 PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE:

A. After compaction of proposed trail contractor shall apply an approved pre-emergentherbicide treatment to the entire surface area of the aggregate trail.

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 1540-3


3.6 CLEANING:

A. Upon completion of trail construction operations, clean areas within contract limits,remove tools, and equipment. Provide site clear, clean, free of debris, and suitable for sitework operations.

END SECTION

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 1540-4

Aldine Independent School District PARKING BUMPERS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 321713 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004


SECTION 321713 - PARKING BUMPERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wheel stops.



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish requiring color selection.

C. Samples for Verification: For wheel stops, 6 inches showing color and cross section; with fasteners.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PARKING BUMPERS

A. Concrete Wheel Stops: Precast, steel-reinforced, air-entrained concrete, 4000-psi minimum compressive strength, 4-1/2 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches. Provide chamfered corners, transverse drainage slots on underside, and a minimum of [three] factory-formed or -drilled vertical holes through wheel stop for anchoring to substrate.

1. Surface Appearance: Free of pockets, sand streaks, honeycombs, and other obvious defects. Corners shall be uniform, straight, and sharp.

2. Mounting Hardware: Galvanized-steel spike or dowel, 1/2-inch diameter, 10-inch minimum length.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that pavement is in suitable condition to begin installation according to manufacturer's written instructions.


Aldine Independent School District PARKING BUMPERS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 321713 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install wheel stops according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive before anchoring.

C. Securely anchor wheel stops to pavement with hardware in each preformed vertical hole in wheel stop as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Recess head of hardware beneath top of wheel stop.


Aldine Independent School District PAVEMENTS MARKINGS Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 321723 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004


SECTION 321723 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes painted markings applied to [asphalt] [and] [concrete] pavement.



1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Shop Drawings: For pavement markings.

1. Indicate pavement markings, colors, lane separations, defined parking spaces, and dimensions to adjacent work.

2. Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with disabilities.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified; on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of City of Houston for pavement-marking work, within public rights of way.

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section.


A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of [40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for alkyd materials] [55 deg F (12.8 deg C) for water-based materials], and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C).



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAVEMENT-MARKING PAINT

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, [Type N] [Type F] [Type S]; colors complying with FS TT-P-1952.

1. Color: As indicated

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #32, alkyd traffic-marking paint.

1. Color: [White] [Yellow] [Blue] [As indicated] <Insert color>.

C. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P-1952, Type II, with drying time of less than [three] [45] minutes.

1. Color: [White] [Yellow] [Blue] [As indicated] <Insert color>.

D. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #97, latex traffic-marking paint.

1. Color: As indicated.

E. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1[ made of 100 percent recycled glass].

1. Roundness: Minimum [75] [80] percent true spheres by weight.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that pavement is dry and in suitable condition to begin pavement marking according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Proceed with pavement marking only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

B. Allow paving to age for a minimum of 30 days before starting pavement marking.

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.



1. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils, firmly secured topavement. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paintapplication beyond the stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath the stencil.

2. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 kg/L).

3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect pavement markings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.


Aldine Independent School District TACTILE WARNING SURFACNG Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 321726 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004


SECTION 321726 - TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cast-in-place detectable warning tiles. 2. Surface-applied detectable warning tiles. 3. Detectable warning mats. 4. Detectable warning unit pavers.


1. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete walkways serving as substrates for tactile warning surfacing.

2. Section 321400 "Unit Paving" for unit paving installations incorporating detectable warning unit pavers specified in this Section.



B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for recycled content.> 2. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for regional materials.>

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish requiring color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of tactile warning surface, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated, showing edge condition, truncated-dome pattern, texture, color, and cross section; with fasteners and anchors.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For tactile warning surfacing, to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.


A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing.

B. Weather Limitations for Adhesive Application:

1. Apply adhesive only when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F (10 deg C) and when temperature has not been below 35 deg F (2 deg C) for 12 hours immediately before application. Do not apply when substrate is wet or contains excess moisture.

C. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:

1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks, and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and higher.

a. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or when wind velocity exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h) and ambient temperature exceeds 90 deg F (32 deg C), set unit pavers within 1 minute of spreading setting-bed mortar.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of tactile warning surfaces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering and wear. b. Separation or delamination of materials and components.

2. Warranty Period: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities] [and] [ICC A117.1] for tactile warning surfaces.

1. For tactile warning surfaces composed of multiple units, provide units that when installed provide consistent side-to-side and end-to-end dome spacing that complies with requirements.

B. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for recycled content.>

C. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for regional materials.>

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of tactile warning surfacing[, joint material] [, setting material] [, anchor] [, and] [fastener] from single source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

2.2 DETECTABLE WARNING TILES

A. Cast-in-Place Detectable Warning Tiles: Accessible truncated-dome detectable warning tiles[ with replaceable surface] configured for setting flush in new concrete walkway surfaces, with slip-resistant surface treatment on domes and field of tile.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Material: [Cast-fiber-reinforced polymer concrete tile] [Molded glass- and carbon-

fiber-reinforced polyester]. 3. Color: [Safety yellow] [Red brick] [Black] [Gray] [As selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full line]. 4. Shapes and Sizes:

a. Rectangular panel, [12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm)] [24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm)] [24 by 36 inches (610 by 914 mm)] [24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm)] [24 by 60 inches (610 by 1524 mm)] [36 by 48 inches (914 by 1219 mm)] [36 by 60 inches (914 by 1524 mm)] <Insert dimensions>.

b. Radius panel, nominal 24 inches (610 mm) deep by [6-foot (1829-mm)] [8-foot (2438-mm)] [10-foot (3048-mm)] [12-foot (3658-mm)] [15-foot (4572-mm)] <Insert dimension> outside radius.

5. Dome Spacing and Configuration: [1.67-inch (42.4-mm) spacing] [2.35-inch (59.7-mm) spacing] [Manufacturer's standard compliant spacing] <Insert spacing>, in [square] [diamond] [manufacturer's standard] pattern.

6. Mounting:

a. Permanently embedded detectable warning tile wet-set into freshly poured concrete.

b. Detectable warning tile set into formed recess in concrete and adhered with [mortar] [adhesive].



c. Replaceable detectable warning tile wet-set into freshly poured concrete and surface-fastened to permanently embedded anchors.

B. Surface-Applied Detectable Warning Tiles: Accessible truncated-dome detectable warning concrete tiles configured for surface application on existing concrete walkway surfaces, with slip-resistant surface treatment on domes, field of tile, and beveled outside edges.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Material: [Cast-fiber-reinforced polymer concrete tile] [Molded glass- and carbon-

fiber-reinforced polyester]. 3. Color: [Safety yellow] [Red brick] [Black] [Gray] [As selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full line]. 4. Shapes and Sizes:

a. Rectangular panel, [12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm)] [24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm)] [24 by 36 inches (610 by 914 mm)] [24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm)] [24 by 60 inches (610 by 1524 mm)] [36 by 48 inches (914 by 1219 mm)] [36 by 60 inches (914 by 1524 mm)] <Insert dimensions>.

b. Radius panel, nominal 24 inches (610 mm) deep by [6-foot (1829-mm)] [8-foot (2438-mm)] [10-foot (3048-mm)] [12-foot (3658-mm)] [15-foot (4572-mm)] <Insert dimension> outside radius.


6. Mounting: Adhered[ and fastened] to existing concrete walkway.

C. Cast-in-Place Detectable Warning Metal Tiles: Accessible truncated-dome detectable warning metal tiles[ with replaceable surface] configured for setting flush in new concrete walkway surfaces, with slip-resistant surface treatment on domes and field of tile.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Material:

a. Stainless-Steel Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, [Type 304] [Type 316L].

1) Finish and Color:

a) Manufacturer's standard powder coat, [safety yellow] [red brick] [black] [gray] [color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line].

b) Mill finish.

b. Cast Iron: Gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, CL 35.

3. Shapes and Sizes:

a. Rectangular panel, [12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm)] [18 by 24 inches (457 by 610 mm)] [24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm)] [24 by 36 inches (610 by 914 mm)] [24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm)] [24 by 60 inches (610 by 1524 mm)] [36 by 48 inches (914 by 1219 mm)] [36 by 60 inches (914 by 1524 mm)] <Insert dimensions>.



b. Radius panel, nominal 24 inches (610 mm) deep by [6-foot (1829-mm)outside radius] [8-foot (2438-mm)outside radius] [10-foot (3048-mm)outside radius] [12-foot (3658-mm)outside radius] [15-foot (4572-mm) outside radius] [17.5-foot (5334-mm)outside radius] [outside radius indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>.


5. Mounting:

a. Permanently embedded detectable warning tile wet-set into freshly poured concrete.

b. Permanently embedded detectable warning tile set into formed recess in concrete and adhered with [mortar] [adhesive].

c. Replaceable embedded detectable warning tile fastened to permanently installed anchors.

D. Surface-Applied Detectable Warning Metal Tiles: Accessible truncated-dome detectable warning metal tiles or plates configured for fastening to surface of existing concrete walkway surfaces, with slip-resistant surface treatment on domes, field of tile, and beveled outside edges.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Material: Stainless-Steel Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666,

[Type 304] [Type 316L]. 3. Finish and Color:

a. Manufacturer's standard powder coat, [safety yellow] [red brick] [black] [gray] [color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line].

b. Mill finish.

4. Shapes and Sizes:

a. Rectangular panel, [24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm)] [24 by 36 inches (610 by 914 mm)] [24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm)] [24 by 60 inches (610 by 1524 mm)] <Insert dimensions>.


6. Mounting:

a. Replaceable surface-applied detectable warning tile fastened with permanently installed anchors to existing concrete walkway.

b. Permanently fixed detectable warning tile adhered[ and fastened] to existing concrete walkway.

2.3 DETECTABLE WARNING MATS

A. Surface-Applied Detectable Warning Mats: Accessible truncated-dome detectable warning resilient mats, UV resistant, manufactured for adhering to existing concrete walkway surfaces, with slip-resistant surface treatment on domes, field of mat, and beveled outside edges.



1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Material: Modified rubber compound, UV resistant. 3. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As

selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 4. Shapes and Sizes:

a. Rectangular panel, [24 by 36 inches (610 by 914 mm)] [24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm)] [24 by 60 inches (610 by 1524 mm)] <Insert dimensions>.


6. Mounting: Adhered to pavement surface with adhesive[ and fastened with fasteners].

2.4 DETECTABLE WARNING UNIT PAVERS

A. Detectable Warning Concrete Unit Pavers: Solid paving units, made from normal-weight concrete with a compressive strength of not less than 5000 psi (34 MPa) <Insert value>, water absorption of not more than 5 percent according to ASTM C 140, and no breakage and not more than 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance according to ASTM C 67, with accessible detectable warning truncated domes on exposed surface of units.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Shapes and Sizes:

a. Thickness: [2 inches (51 mm)] [2-1/2 inches (63 mm)] <Insert dimension> at field of tile.

b. Face Size: Nominal [12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm)] [24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm)] <Insert dimensions>.


4. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.

B. Setting Bed: Comply with requirements in Section 321400 "Unit Paving."

C. Aggregate Setting Bed:

1. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.

2. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33/C 33M for fine aggregate.

3. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

D. Mortar Setting Bed:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II. 2. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M.



3. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.

4. Thinset Mortar: Latex-modified portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4. 5. Water: Potable.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of tactile warning surfaces, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Furnish [Type 304] [Type 316] stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use. 2. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead or oval countersunk screws

and bolts with tamper-resistant heads, colored to match tile.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer for adhering tactile warning surfacing unit to pavement.

C. Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer for sealing perimeter of tactile warning surfacing unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that pavement is in suitable condition to begin installation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Verify that installation of tactile warning surfacing will comply with accessibility requirements upon completion.


3.2 INSTALLATION OF TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

A. General: Prepare substrate and install tactile warning surfacing according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

B. Place tactile warning surfacing units in dimensions and orientation indicated. Comply with location requirements of AASHTO MP 12.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF DETECTABLE WARNING TILES

A. Cast-in-Place Detectable Warning Tiles:

1. Concrete Paving Installation: Comply with installation requirements in Section 321313 "Concrete Paving." Mix, place, and finish concrete to conditions complying with



detectable warning tile manufacturer's written requirements for satisfactory embedment of tile.

2. Set each detectable warning tile accurately and firmly in place and completely seat tile back and embedments in wet concrete by tamping or vibrating. If necessary, temporarily apply weight to tiles to ensure full contact with concrete.

3. Set surface of tile flush with surrounding concrete and adjacent tiles, with variations between tiles and between concrete and tiles not exceeding plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from flush.

4. Protect exposed surfaces of installed tiles from contact with wet concrete. Complete finishing of concrete paving surrounding tiles. Remove concrete from tile surfaces.

5. Clean tiles using methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.

B. Removable Cast-in-Place Detectable Warning Tiles:

1. Concrete Paving Installation: Comply with installation requirements in Section 321313 "Concrete Paving." Mix, place, and finish concrete to conditions complying with detectable warning tile manufacturer's written requirements for satisfactory embedment of removable tile.

2. Set each detectable warning tile accurately and firmly in place with embedding anchors and fasteners attached, and firmly seat tile back in wet concrete by tamping or vibrating. If necessary, temporarily apply weight to tiles to ensure full contact with concrete.

3. Set surface of tile flush with surrounding concrete and adjacent tiles, with variations between tiles and between concrete and tiles not exceeding plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from flush.

4. Protect exposed surfaces of installed tiles from contact with wet concrete. Complete finishing of concrete paving surrounding tiles. Remove concrete from tile surfaces.

5. Clean tiles using methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.

C. Surface-Applied Detectable Warning Tiles:

1. Lay out detectable warning tiles as indicated and mark concrete pavement. 2. Prepare existing paving surface by grinding and cleaning as recommended by

manufacturer.

a. Cut perimeter kerf in existing concrete pavement to receive metal tile flange.

3. Apply adhesive to back of tiles in amounts and pattern recommended by manufacturer, and set tiles in place. Firmly seat tiles in adhesive bed, eliminating air pockets and establishing full adhesion to pavement. If necessary, temporarily apply weight to tiles to ensure full contact with concrete.

4. Install anchor devices through face of tiles and into pavement using anchors located as recommended by manufacturer. Set heads of anchors flush with top surface of mat.

5. Mask perimeter of tiles and adjacent concrete, and apply sealant in continuous bead around perimeter of tile installation.

6. Remove masking, adhesive, excess sealant, and soil from exposed surfaces of detectable warning tiles and surrounding concrete pavement using cleaning agents recommended in writing by manufacturer.

7. Protect installed tiles from traffic until adhesive has set.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF DETECTABLE WARNING MATS

A. Lay out detectable warning mats as indicated and mark concrete pavement at edges of mats.



B. Prepare existing paving surface by grinding and cleaning as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Apply adhesive to back of mat in amounts and pattern recommended by manufacturer, and set mat in place. Firmly seat mat in adhesive bed, eliminating air pockets and establishing full adhesion to pavement. If necessary, temporarily apply weight to mat to ensure full contact with adhesive.

D. Install anchor devices through face of mat and into pavement using anchors located as recommended by manufacturer. Set heads of anchors flush with mat surface.

E. Mask mat perimeter and adjacent concrete, and apply sealant in continuous bead around perimeter of mat.

F. Remove masking, adhesive, excess sealant, and soil from exposed surfaces of detectable warning mat and surrounding concrete pavement using cleaning agents recommended in writing by manufacturer.

G. Protect installed mat from traffic until adhesive has set.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF DETECTABLE WARNING UNIT PAVERS

A. Unit Paver Installation, General:

1. Setting-Bed and Unit Paver Installation: Comply with installation requirements in Section 321400 "Unit Paving."

2. Mix unit pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures.

3. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible.

4. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.

B. Aggregate Setting-Bed Applications:

1. Place aggregate base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator, and screed to depth indicated.

2. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and uniform until unit pavers are set and compacted.

3. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds. 4. Set unit pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8

inch (3 mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines.

5. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.

6. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.

C. Mortar Setting-Bed Applications:

1. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.



2. Apply mortar-bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes beforeplacing mortar bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing settingbed. Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) thickness for bond coat.

3. Apply mortar bed over bond coat; spread and screed mortar bed to uniform thickness atsubgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.

4. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers beforeinitial set. Before placing pavers, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set.

5. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers onmortar bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick bond coat to mortar bed or to backof each paver with a flat trowel.

6. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact withsetting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in asingle operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturbpavers for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.

7. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide [3/8-inch (10-mm)] [1/2-inch (13-mm)] nominal joint widthwith variations not exceeding plus or minus [1/16 inch (1.5 mm)] [1/8 inch (3 mm)].

8. Grouted Joints: Grout paver joints complying with ANSI A108.10. Grout joints as soon aspossible after initial set of setting bed.

a. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces.b. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard.c. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days unless otherwise

recommended by grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.

9. Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.10. Protect installation from traffic until grout has set.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace tactile warning surfacing that is broken or damaged or does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect. Replace using tactile warning surfacing installation methods acceptable to Architect.

B. Protect tactile warning surfacing from damage and maintain free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.


Aldine Independent School District OUTDOOR BASKETBALL COURT SURFACINGJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 32 1824MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01SBA-16141

SECTION 32 1824 - OUTDOOR BASKETBALL COURT SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. This Section specifies the requirements for outdoor basketball court surfaces.



B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s printed product data sheets.


A. Manufacturer’s warranty.

1.4 WARRANTY:

A. Manufacturer’s two (2) year written warranty signed by Contractor and materialsmanufacturer.

B. Warranty begins at date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Acceptable manufacturers:1. California Products Corporation .2. Chevron USA, Inc.3. Neyra Industries.4. United Coatings, Inc.

B. Basis of design; Neyra Industries, Inc., Dynaflex Sports Surfacing.1. Top coating: Dynaflex Acrylic Color Coating, even-textured, non-glare surface; is

a premium quality, highly pigmented, acrylic emulsion that contains high tensilestrength geotextile fibers for greater toughness, flexibility and longer service lifeThe Geotextile Fiber Advantage, geotextile fibers which impart significant crackresistance, prevents the settlement of pigment and aids in sand suspension foran even-textured, uniform surface.

2. Line paint: Dynastripe, fast drying UV resistant acrylic latex striping paint.3. Resurfacer: Dynaflex Acrylic Resurfacer; is a premium quality, highly

pigmented, acrylic emulsion recommended for smoothing and filling texture onasphalt surfaces prior to application of Dynaflex color coating.

4. Patching Material: Dynabinder Quick Patch Binder; a high tensile strength, acryliclatex bonding agent. Dynabinder is formulated to patch new or existing asphaltand concrete surfaces. It can also be used as a primer for new or existingconcrete surfaces.

5. Crack Sealant: Dynaflex Acrylic Crack Sealant or Dynabinder, acrylic patchingmaterial.

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 1824-1


2.2 COURT STRIPING AND CRACK REPAIR MATERIALS:

A. Line paint: Water-based acrylic striping paint recommended by color coat manufacturer.Color to be selected from manufacturers standard colors.

B. Patching material: Water-based acrylic, polymer/portland cement/sand patching materialrecommended by color coat manufacturer.

C. Crack sealant: Dynaflex Acrylic Crack Sealant, minimum dry solids by volume sixty nine(69) percent.

D. Aggregate:1. Washed, dry silica sand free of dust, trash, clay, organic materials or other

contaminants and supplied in bags to insure correct measurement.2. Gradation: To have an American Foundry Society grain fineness number that is

no less than sixty five (65) and no more than ninety five (95), when tested inaccordance with ASTM C136 and with ninety nine (99) percent passing forty (40)mesh.

E. Mixing water:1. Potable and free from harmful soluble salts.

2.3 EXPANSION JOINT REPAIR MATERIALS:

A. Sealant: Two-part gun grade polyurethane elastomeric sealant capable ofweatherproofing moving expansion joints as specified in Joint Sealants section.

B. Backing or filler material: Suitable, long lasting filler material. To be approved.

2.4 MIXES:

A. As per manufacturer's specifications on submittals.

2.5 EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS:

A. All equipment, tools and machinery used for handling materials and executing any part ofwork shall be subject to approval by Architect/Engineer before work is started.

B. Use equipment for applying mixture that is designed for applying tennis court colorcoating and capable of applying required coating weights evenly to provide a smooth,uniformly coated surface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Substrate must be thoroughly cleared of debris and foreign material that will telegraphthrough court surfacing materials. All cracks 1/4" and larger must be repaired.

B. Uncoated concrete substrate must be prepared with concrete conditioner in compliancewith court surfacing manufacturerUs recommendations and instructions.

C. Substrate to have slope of 1" in 10'-0", all in one plane with variations not exceeding 1/8"when measured with 10U-0" straightedge.

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 1824-2


3.2 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION:

A. Concrete Surface Cracks:1. Remove all loose previous color coats by power washing entire surface.2. Repair all bird baths that hold water more than 1/8" deep one (1) hour after rain

has stopped with court patch binder.3. Clean out and fill all cracks less than 1/4" wide with acrylic crack sealant.4. Clean out and fill all cracks greater than 1/4" wide with court patch binder.5. Clean entire surface.

B. Expansion Joints:1. Clean out expansion joint material of dirt, debris, and rotted wood.2. Side concrete surfaces of joint must be clean and dry. Loose dust must be

thoroughly brushed off.3. Install new backer rods to control sealant depth.4. After joint is clean and dry, and the backing is properly placed, sealing can begin.5. Sealants can be applied by gun or knife. Two considerations6. Must be kept in mind; a) Fill opening from bottom up or out; entrapped air is7. Not a sealant; b). Use some force to help the sealant wet the surface. Sealed

joint should not bulge out from excess material, but be slightly concave.8. The surface of a sealant joint may be tooled or smoothed in order to obtain a

better appearance. In order to obtain as smooth a surface as possible, thefinishing tool should be wet with solvent. Do not use alcohol, toluene or xylene isrecommended.

3.3 APPLICATION OF PLAYING LINES:

A. Playing Lines: Playing court lines shall be laid out according to standard regulation tennisand basketball configurations complete(basketball court to have a three point arc line).

B. The painting shall be done by skilled mechanics in a workmanlike manner in accordancewith the manufacturer's standard printed instructions. Color of court lines shall beselected.

C. Taped lines are not permitted.

3.4 STORAGE AND CLEANUP:

A. Store in a cool, dry place, below 80ºF.

B. Clean equipment with paint thinner.

3.5 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES:

A. Contractor shall take measures to protect existing pavement and structures fromoverspray caused by the repainting of metal work.

B. It is recommended that the paint refinishing occur before any court resurfacing activities.

C. Any adjacent pavement or structures that receive overspray shall be cleaned immediatelyby the Contractor at no additional cost to the City.

END OF SECTION

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 1824-3

Aldine Independent School District CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATESJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 32 3113MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01SBA-16141

SECTION 32 3113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Product data: Indicate material types, gauges, sizes and finishes, construction anderection details, including spacing of posts and foundation details.

C. Delegated-design submittal: For structural performance of chain-link fence and gateframeworks, including analysis data signed and sealed by the registered professionalengineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Applicable standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM), standards as referenced herein.2. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI), Product Manual and #WLG

2445 Wind Load Guide.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Delegated design: Engage a professional engineer registered in the state Texas to designchain-link fence and gate frameworks.

B. Structural performance: Chain-link fence and gate frameworks shall withstand the designwind loads and stresses for fence height(s) and under exposure conditions indicatedaccording to ASCE/SEI 7.

2.2 STANDARD CHAIN LINK FENCING:

A. Fencing: 1. Reference standards: Fencing shall meet the CLFMI requirements, ASTM F1043

and ASTM F1083.2. Description: Hot dip galvanized chain link fence complete with supports,

bracings, gates and other accessories to complete the work indicated; heights asindicated on the drawings.

B. Chain link fabric: 2" mesh, formed from 9 ga. steel wire; top and bottom selvageknuckled.

C. Posts: Formed of round or square steel sections meeting ASTM F1043 or ASTM F1083.

D. Fences 6'-0" to 10'-0" high; component dimensions and weights:1. End, corner and pull posts: 2.875" dia., weighing minimum of 5.79 lbs./l.f., or

2.50" sq., weighing minimum of 5.10 lbs./l.f.2. Line posts: 2.375" dia., weighing minimum of 3.65 lbs./l.f., or 2.25" by 1.70" ‘C’

section, weighing minimum of 2.64 lbs./l.f.3. Top rails and bracing: 1.660" dia., weighing minimum 2.27 lbs./l. f., or 1.500" sq.,

weighing minimum of 1.90 lbs./l. f. Top rails shall be minimum 18'-0" long.

E. Gates 6'-0" to 10'-0" high; component dimensions and weights:1. Gate posts for gates less than 6'-0" wide: 2.875" dia., weighing minimum of 4.64

lbs./l. f.2. Gate posts for gates over 6'-0" wide to maximum 12'-0" wide: 4.0" dia., weighing

minimum 8.65 lbs/l.f.

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 3113-1


3. Gate posts for gates over 12'-0" wide to maximum 18'-0" wide: 6.625" dia.,weighing minimum 18.02 lbs/l.f.

4. Gate frames: 1.900" dia., weighing minimum of 2.28 lbs./l.f., or 2.0" square,weighing 2.53 lbs./l.f.

F. Diagonal truss braces: 3/8" diameter, high carbon steel with turnbuckle.

G. Post tops and fittings: Hot dip galvanized steel or malleable iron. Provide tops withintegral top rail supports.

H. Bands: Pressed steel or malleable iron.

I. Stretcher bars: 3/16" by 3/4" hot dip galvanized steel, 2" less in length than chain linkfabric width. Provide one stretcher bar at each gate and end/terminal post; two at eachcorner and pull post.

J. Swinging gates: Welded construction with adjustable, diagonal cross bracing. Providethe following hardware for gates:1. Hinges: Galvanized steel or malleable iron of size to suit gate size, non-lift-off

type, offset to allow 180 degree operation. Furnish one pair of hinges per leaf.2. Latch for pass leaf gate: Forked type with center drop rod, integral padlock eye

and keeper to receive padlock.3. Stops: Mushroom type at double leaf gates; to engage drop rod.4. Locks: Master Lock, “Security Hasp”. Exact model to be selected by Architect.

K. Finish on all exposed surfaces: Polyvinyl chloride coating, minimum 0.010" thickness,fusion bonded to steel substrate; in color selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install chain link fence and gates in accord with ASTM F567.

B. Standard fencing: Space posts at equidistant intervals not exceeding 10'-0" o. c.,uniformly between corners and ends.1. Ground-set installation:

a. Foundation hole diameter: Hole diameter shall be four (4) times thediameter of the post for each foundation hole, as follows:1) 1.90" o.d. post: 8" hole diameter.2) 2.375" o.d. post: 9.5" hole diameter.3) 2.875" o.d. post: 11.5" hole diameter.4) 4.00" o.d. gate post: 16" hole diameter.5) 6.625" o.d. gate post: 26.5" hole diameter.

b. Foundation depth: Minimum depth for 4'-0" high fence shall be 2'-0". Forhigher fences, depth shall increase by 3" for each 12" of height above4'-0", as follows:1) 6'-0" high fence: Minimum 30" deep foundation hole.2) 8'-0" high fence: Minimum 36" deep foundation hole.3) 10'-0" high fence: Minimum 42" deep foundation hole.4) Gate posts: Minimum 42" deep foundation hole.

c. Set posts plumb and true in 3000 psi concrete; embed posts 3'-0",minimum. Crown concrete surface to shed water.

2. Slab-set installation: Set sleeves in concrete. Set all posts in sleeves using non-shrink type grout.

C. Brace end, corner and pull posts with horizontal intermediate brace and truss braces.

D. Install top rail continuous with couplings not less than 6" long.

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 3113-2


E. Install chain link fabric on exterior of enclosed space. Stretch fabric taut, allowingapproximately 1" clearance at grade. Fasten to line posts and top rail with ties; all otherposts with stretcher bars. Tie fabric to post at 1'-0" o. c.; top rail at 2'-0" o. c. Fabric shallnot bypass end, gate, corner or pull posts.

F. Join chain link fabric lengths by weaving a single strand into roll ends to form acontinuous length.

G. Install gates complete with specified hardware at locations indicated. Adjust and lubricatehardware.

H. Protect surfaces from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. Replacecomponents damaged during installation.

END OF SECTION

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 3113-3

Aldine Independent School District ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCE AND GATESJohnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 32 3119MA No. R306408.01 & R306409.01SBA-16141

TSECTION 32 3119 - ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCE AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Work of this sections includes installation of new fence specified herein for locationsindicated on drawings.


A. Structural Design Criteria: Design, fabricate and install fence to resist concentrated loadof fifty (50) pounds per linear foot applied at any point nonconcurrently, verticallydownward or horizontally.

B. Qualifications of Welders: Welders employed on the work qualified in position for whichemployed, in compliance with AWS B2.1 test procedures.



B. Product Data: Indicate product description for specified coating system and instructionsfor preparation of surfaces to receive coatings, rates and methods of applications andfinishes to be expected in finished work.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes, shapes, configuration, sections, locations, fabrication andinstallation details. Indicate fabricated sizes. Include dimensioned plan of built-inanchorage devices, materials, finishes and itemization of parts and accessories.

D. Color and Finish Samples: Indicating colors and finishes to be expected in finished work.

E. Calculations: For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, includestructural computations, materials properties, and other information needed for structuralanalysis, signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer licensed in State of Texas.1. Indicate that fence meets code requirements for vertical and horizontal loading.


A. Welder Certification: Present evidence, in compliance with AWS B2.1, that each welderhas satisfactorily passed qualification tests for welding processes involved and hasundergone recertification if welder has not welded for more than six months.

1.5 WARRANTY:

A. Furnish 15 year written warranty against fencing and gates becoming unserviceable orcausing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or non-conformingmaterials and workmanship.1. Defects shall include, but not limited to, the following: cracking, peeling, blistering,

corroding or failure of mechanical parts or assemblies.

B. Warranty begins at Date of Substantial Completion.

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 3119-1


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements:1. Ameristar/Aegis.2. Delgard.3. Jerith.4. Security Fence Manufacturing and Supply Co., Inc.5. Basis of design; Monumental Iron Works/Master Halco, Inc., “Estate K Flat Top

2-Rail”.

2.2 ORNAMENTAL PICKET FENCE:

A. Pickets: Flat top; galvanized square steel tubular members manufactured in accordancewith ASTM A787, having a 45,000 psi yield strength and G90 zinc coating, 0.90 oz/ft².Size pickets 3/4 inch by minimum wall thickness 16 gauge. Space pickets 3-15/16 inchmaximum face to face. Attach each picket to each rail with 1/4 inch #4 industrial driverivets.

B. Rails: Two Rails, flat top style, 1-1/2 inch x 1-3/8 inch x 1-1/2 inch, 11 gauge thickgalvanized steel “U” channel in accordance with ASTM A653 or ASTM A1008, having a50,000 psi yield strength and G90 zinc coating, 0.90 oz/fl2. Punch rails to receive picketsand rivets and attach rails to rail brackets with two each, 1/4 inch #4 industrial drive rivets.Steel for rail produced under ASTM A653.

C. Posts: Galvanized square steel tubular members manufactured in accordance with ASTMA787 having 45,000 psi yield strength and G90 zinc coating, 0.90 oz/fl2). Zinc coating isinside and outside. Posts which are zinc coated outside and painted inside, areunacceptable. Minimum post size 3 inches square, having 12 gauge wall thickness,weighing 4.286 lb./ft.

D. Accessories: Assembled panels with ornamental accessories attached using industrialdrive rivets to prevent removal and vandalism.

E. Finish: All pickets, channels, posts, fittings and accessories shall be polyester coatedindividually after drilling and layout, to ensure maximum corrosion protection. Allcomponents are given a four stage “Power Wash” pre-treatment process that cleans andprepares the galvanized surface to assure complete adhesion of the finish coat. All metalis then given a polyester resin based power coating applied by the electrostatic sprayprocess, to a thickness 2.5 mils. The finish is then baked in a 450 degrees F (metaltemperature) oven for 20 minutes.

2.3 SWING GATES:

A. Gate Frames: Fabricate Straight Style (no arch) ornamental picket swing gate using flattop galvanized steel members, ASTM A283, structural quality steel, 45,000 psi tensilestrength, with galvanized G90 coating. Frame members welded using stainless steelwelded to form rigid one-piece unit. (no substitution) Minimum size vertical uprights, twoinches square 13 gauge wall thickness.

B. Ornamental Picket Infill: “U” channel rails, formed from hot rolled, structural steel, 1-3/8inch wide x 1-1/2 inches deep, 11 gauge wall thickness. Punch rails to receive flat toppickets, and weld inside gate frame. Pickets, flat top, galvanized steel, 3/4 inch squaretube of gauge, spacing, and with accessories to match fence. Attach pickets to “U” railsby 1/4 inch industrial drive rivets, size #4.

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 3119-2


C. Bracing: Provide diagonal adjustable length truss rods on gates to prevent sag.

D. Hardware Materials: Galvanized steel or malleable iron shapes to suit gate size.

E. Hinges: Structurally capable of supporting gate leaf and allow opening and closing without binding. Non-lift-off type hinge design shall permit gate to swing 180 degrees.

F. Latch: Capable of retaining gate in closed position and have provision for padlock.

G. Keeper: Provide keeper for each gate leaf over 5 feet wide. Gate keeper shall consist ofmechanical device for securing free end of gate when in full open position.

H. Double Gates: Provide drop rod to hold inactive leaf. Provide gate stop pipe to engagecenter drop rod. Provide locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of latch,requiring one padlock for locking both gate leaves.

I. Gate Posts: Square members, ASTM A787, structural quality steel 45,000 psi tensilestrength, with galvanized G90 coating; size as indicated below:Gate Leaf Single Width Post Size (square) Post Depth3 ft to 4 ft 3 inches 36 inches4 ft to 8 ft 4 inches 42 inches12 ft. to 18 ft. 6 inches 48 inches

2.4 FENCING AND GATES FINISH:

A. Polyester Powder Coat Finish: After components have been galvanized to provide maximum corrosion resistance, pre-treat, clean, and prepare galvanized surface to assure complete adhesion of finish coat. Apply 2.5 mil thickness of polyester resin basedpowder coating by electrostatic spray process. Bake finish for 20 minutes at 450 degreesF, metal temperature.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect. Gates color shall match ornamental picket fence.

2.5 ACCESSORIES:

A. Rail Attachment Brackets - Die cast of zinc (ZAMAK #3 Alloy) in accordance with ASTMB86-83Z 33521. Ball and socket design capable of 30° swivel (up/down-left/right). Bracketto fully encapsulate rail end for complete security. (no substitution).

B. Industrial Drive Rivets: Of sufficient length to attach items in a secure non-rattlingposition. Rivet to have a minimum of 1100 lbs. holding power and a shear strength of1500 lbs.

C. Ornamental Picket Fence Accessories: Provide indicated items required to completefence system. Galvanize each ferrous metal item in accordance with ASTM B695 andfinish to match framing.

D. Post Caps: Formed steel, cast of malleable iron or aluminum alloy, weathertight closurecap. Provide one flat top style post cap for each post.

E. Picket Tops: Flat tops extending above rail.

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 3119-3


2.6 SETTING MATERIAL:

A. Concrete: Minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

B. Flanged Posts: Provide flange type base plates with 4 holes for surface mounting of postswhere indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FENCE INSTALLATION:

A. Fence height shall be 6'-0" high, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Install fence in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Space posts uniformly at 7'-8-3/4" maximum face to face, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Concrete Set Posts: Drill hole in firm undisturbed or compacted soil. Holes shall havediameter four times greater than nominal outside dimension of post, and depthsapproximately 6" deeper than post bottom. Excavate deeper as required for adequatesupport in soft and loose soils, and for posts with heavy lateral loads. Set post bottombelow surface when in firm, undisturbed soil to depth as indicated in table above. Placeconcrete around post in a continuous pour. Trowel finish around posts and slope to directwater away from posts.

E. Gate Posts and Hardware: Set keepers, stops, sleeves and other accessories intoconcrete. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and maintain in position duringplacement and finishing operations.

F. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and maintain in position during placementand finishing operation.

G. Align fence panels between posts. Firmly attach rail brackets to posts with 1/4” (6 mm)bolt and lock nut, ensuring panels and posts remain plumb.

3.2 ORNAMENTAL PICKET GATE FRAMING INSTALLATION:

A. Install gate posts in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Concrete Set Gate Posts: Drill holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Holes shallhave diameter four times greater than outside dimension of post, and depthsapproximately 6 inches deeper than post bottom. Excavate deeper as required foradequate support in soft and loose soils, and for posts with heavy lateral loads. Set postbottom 36 inches below surface when in firm, undisturbed soil. Place concrete aroundposts in a continuous pour. Trowel finish around post and slope to direct water away fromposts.

C. Gate Posts and Hardware: Set keepers, stops, sleeves into concrete. Check each postfor vertical and top alignment, and maintain in position during placement and finishingoperations.

3.3 GATE INSTALLATION:

A. Gate height shall be as indicated on drawings.

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 3119-4


B. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference.

C. Attach hardware by means which will prevent unauthorized removal.

D. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

E. Install post caps and other accessories to complete fence.

3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING:

A. Clean up debris and unused material, and remove from site.

B. Post hole excavation material shall be scattered uniformly away from the posts orremoved as directed by Architect.

C. Concrete splatter shall be cleaned from exposed surfaces of posts.

D. Adjust gates for level, smooth, quite operation.

END OF SECTION

Bid Issue - 02/03/2017 32 3119-5

Aldine Independent School District COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 330500 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004


SECTION 330500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping joining materials. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Sleeves. 5. Identification devices. 6. Grout. 7. Flowable fill. 8. Piped utility demolition. 9. Piping system common requirements. 10. Equipment installation common requirements. 11. Painting. 12. Concrete bases. 13. Metal supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions.

B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

C. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

D. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Product Data: For the following:



1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Identification devices.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if devices are applied to surfaces.

C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Formwork, reinforcement, and concrete requirements are specified in [Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."] [Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."].



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

2.2 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Transition Fittings, General: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

B. Transition Couplings NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller:

1. Underground Piping: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 2. Aboveground Piping: Specified piping system fitting.

C. AWWA Transition Couplings NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure piping.



D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: [CPVC] [CPVC and PVC] [PVC] one-piece fitting with manufacturer's

Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint[ or threaded] end.

E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: MSS SP-107, [CPVC] [CPVC and PVC] [PVC] four-part union. Include

brass[ or stainless-steel] threaded end, solvent-cement-joint[ or threaded] plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

F. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be

joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Dielectric Fittings, General: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: Factory fabricated, union, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.

a. Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum] [250 psig (1725 kPa)] at 180 deg F (82 deg C).

b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4

(DN 65 to DN 100) and larger.

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

E. 1. Description: Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges, NPS 2-1/2

(DN 65) and larger.

a. Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum] <Insert pressure>. b. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.



c. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. d. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

F. Dielectric Couplings: 1. Description: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining,

NPS 3 and smaller.

a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. b. End Connections: Threaded.

G. Dielectric Nipples:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining.

a. Pressure Rating: [300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F. b. End Connections: Threaded or grooved.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

D. Cast-Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

G. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other utilities Sections. If more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.

B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped.

1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.

2. Location: Accessible and visible.



C. Stencils: Standard stencils prepared with letter sizes complying with recommendations in ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 1-1/4 inches (30 mm) for ducts, and 3/4 inch (20 mm) for access door signs and similar operational instructions.

1. Material: Fiberboard or Brass. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd-gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicated.

Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1,

unless otherwise indicated.

D. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap-on type. Include color-coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pressure-sensitive-vinyl type with permanent adhesive.

F. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.

G. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, at least three times letter height and of length required for label.

H. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Architect.

I. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.

1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions of flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

J. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive vinyl tape, at least 3 mils thick.

1. Width: 1-1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 2-1/2 inches for larger pipes.

2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole for fastener.

1. Material: 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick, [polished brass] [or] [aluminum]. 2. Material: 0.0375-inch- (1-mm-) thick stainless steel. 3. Material: 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick plastic laminate with 2 black surfaces and a white

inner layer. 4. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic. 5. Size: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) in diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Shape: As indicated for each piping system.

L. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link or beaded chain; or brass S-hooks.

M. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.



1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification.

2. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), for units up to 20 sq. in or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch

for larger units. 4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.

N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes:

1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above. 5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:

a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,

and speed.

7. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.

O. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inches (83 by 143 mm). 2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT

OPERATE.

P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in piped utility identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of piped utility systems and equipment.

1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of same name are indicated.

2.6 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.



2.7 FLOWABLE FILL

A. Description: Low-strength-concrete, flowable-slurry mix.

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, portland. 2. Density: [115- to 145-lb/cu. ft. (1840- to 2325-kg/cu. m)] <Insert value>. 3. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine and crushed gravel or stone, coarse. 4. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine. 5. Admixture: ASTM C 618, fly-ash mineral. 6. Water: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. 7. Strength: [100 to 200 psig (690 to 1380 kPa)] <Insert value> at 28 days.

2.8 CEMENT STABILED SAND 1. Cement stabilized sand backfill shall be in accordance with Harris County engineering

department standards engineering specifications Item 443 “Cement Stabilized Sand Bedding and Backfill Material”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPED UTILITY DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping. Fill abandoned piping with flowable fill, and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational.

5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 DIELECTRIC FITTING APPLICATIONS

A. Dry Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric unions. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300): Dielectric flanges[ or dielectric flange kits].



B. Wet Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric [couplings] [couplings or dielectric nipples] [nipples].

2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Dielectric nipples. 3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 65 to DN 200): Dielectric nipples[ or dielectric flange kits]. 4. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): Dielectric flange kits.


A. Install piping according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

E. Install piping at indicated slopes.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

I. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

a. [PVC] Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.

L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.



M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.

3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.

I. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

J. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure seal fitting with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.



L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

N. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

O. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Install dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar metal pipes.

3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.

C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Painting of piped utility systems, equipment, and components is specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 099123 "Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.

1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1.



2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot noninsulated piping.

3. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following:

a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark

each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious. c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible

enclosures. d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of equipment.

1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (610 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) high for distances up to 72 inches (1800 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering.

2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.

3.9 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement.

3.10 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor piped utility materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.



3.11 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.


Aldine Independent School District STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING Johnson & Francis Elementary Schools SECTION 334100 MA Nos. R306408.01 & R306409.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0002 & 1137-0004


SECTION 334100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Drains. 4. Encasement for piping. 5. Manholes. 6. Catch basins. 7. Stormwater inlets. 8. Stormwater detention structures. 9. Pipe outlets. 10. Stormwater disposal systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers. 2. [Catch basins] [stormwater inlets] [and] [dry wells]. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, frames, covers, and grates. 3. Stormwater Detention Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames,

covers, design calculations, and concrete design-mix reports.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of cast-iron soil pipe and fitting, from manufacturer.



A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

D. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify [Architect] no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without [Architect's] written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Type PSM Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM D 3034, [SDR 35] <Insert SDR>, PVC Type PSM sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints.

2. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, PVC with bell ends. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

B. PVC Gravity Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 679, PVC gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends and with integral ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals for gasketed joints.

2.2 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE

A. Corrugated profile-wall smooth limed pipe for gravity storm sewer and storm sewer culvert pipe per ASTM 3350 manufactured per ASTM 2306, Joints shall be installed such that connection of pipe sections will form continuous line free irregularities in flow line. Suitable joints are:



1. Integral Bell and spigot. Bell shall overlap minimum of two corrugations of spigot and when fully engaged.

2. Exterior bell and Spigot. Bell shall be fully welded exterior of pipe and overlap spigot end so that flow lines and ends match when fully engaged.

3. Gaskets: Meet requirements of ASTM F 477. Use gasket modeled into circular form or extruded to proper section and then spiced into circular form. When no contaminant is identified, use gaskets of properly cured, high-grade elastomeric compound. Basic polymer shall be natural rubber, synthetic elastomer, or blend of both.

2.3 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M).

1. Bell-and-spigot ends and [gasketed joints with ASTM C 443 rubber gasket 2. Class III.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts:

1. Description: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and

round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.

2. Top-Loading Classification(s): [Light Duty] [Medium Duty] [Heavy Duty] [and] [Extra-Heavy Duty].

3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.

B. Plastic Cleanouts:

1. Description: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser

to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.

2.5 DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Area Drains:

B. 1. Description: ASME A112.6.3 gray-iron round body with anchor flange and

round[ secured] grate. Include bottom outlet with inside calk or spigot connection, of sizes indicated.

2. Top-Loading Classification(s): As Indicated.

C. Cast-Iron Trench Drains:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>



2. Description: ASME A112.6.3, 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide top surface, rectangular body with anchor flange or other anchoring device, and rectangular grate. Include units of total length indicated and quantity of bottom outlets with inside calk or spigot connections, of sizes indicated.

3. Top-Loading Classification(s): As Indicated.

D. Steel Trench Drains:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: Factory fabricated from ASTM A 242/A 242M, welded steel plate, to form

rectangular body with uniform bottom downward slope of 2 percent toward outlet, anchor flange, and grate. Include units of total length indicated, bottom outlet of size indicated, outlet strainer, acid-resistant enamel coating on inside and outside surfaces, and grate with openings of total free area at least two times cross-sectional area of outlet.

3. Plate Thicknesses: As Indicated. 4. Overall Widths: As Indicated.

a. Grate Openings: As Indicated.

2.6 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:


2. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section

as required to prevent flotation. 4. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (102-mm)

minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

5. Riser Sections: 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated.

6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated, and top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole

walls, for each pipe connection. 9. Steps: [Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder wide enough to allow worker to place both

feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches.

10. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

11. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover, and height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

B. Designed Precast Concrete Manholes:



1. Description: ASTM C 913; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (AASHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Ballast: Increase thickness of one or more precast concrete sections or add concrete to manhole as required to prevent flotation.

3. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 4. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole

walls, for each pipe connection. 5. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, wide enough to allow worker to place both

feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than [60 inches (1500 mm)] <Insert dimension>.


7. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

C. Fiberglass Manholes:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: ASTM D 3753. 3. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 4. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete base as required to prevent flotation. 5. Base Section: Concrete, 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness. 6. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole

walls, for each pipe connection. 7. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, wide enough to allow worker to place both

feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than [60 inches (1500 mm)] <Insert dimension>.


9. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover, and height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

D. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (175- to 225-mm) riser with 4-inch- (102-mm-) minimum width flange and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER."

2. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron unless otherwise indicated.



2.7 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R (ACI 350M/350RM), and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.


C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.

a. Invert Slope: [1] percent through manhole.

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

a. Slope: [4] percent.

D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.


2.8 CATCH BASINS

A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins:


2. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

3. Riser Sections: 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1200-mm) diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated.

4. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

5. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber.



6. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, that match 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and grate.

8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section.

B. Designed Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 913, precast, reinforced concrete; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for joint sealants.

1. Joint Sealants: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 2. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape

matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

3. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, that match 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and grate.

4. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section.

C. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural loading. Include flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings.

1. Size: As Indicated. 2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent unless otherwise indicated.

D. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural loading. Include 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings.

1. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.9 STORMWATER INLETS

A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening[, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards].

B. Gutter Inlets: Made with horizontal gutter opening[, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards]. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.

C. Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings[, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards]. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.

D. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty[, according to utility standards].

2.10 PIPE OUTLETS

A. Head Walls: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides.



B. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregularly sized and shaped, graded stone according to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control."

1. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-3, screen opening 2 inches (51 mm). 2. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-4, screen opening 3 inches (76 mm). 3. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-5, screen opening 5 inches (127 mm).

C. Filter Stone: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control," No. FS-2, No. 4 screen opening, average-size graded stone.

D. Energy Dissipaters: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control," No. A-1, 3-ton (2721-kg) average weight armor stone, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process of microtunneling.

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow. 2. Install piping minimum cover as indicated. 3. Install HDPE corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321. 4. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 5. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."



G. Install force-main pressure piping according to the following:

1. Install piping with restrained joints at tee fittings and at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place concrete supports or anchors.

2. Install piping with minimum cover as indicated on drawings 3. Install PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23, or ASTM D 2774 and

ASTM F 1668. 4. Install PVC water-service piping according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 1668.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join corrugated HDPE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push-on joints. 2. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-

seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasketed joints. 3. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-seal

joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints. 4. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation

Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints. 5. Join dissimilar pipe materials with structures.

B. Join force-main pressure piping according to the following:

1. Join PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23 for gasketed joints. 2. Join PVC water-service piping according to ASTM D 2855 for solvent-cemented joints.

3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in [earth or unpaved foot-traffic] areas.

2. Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in [paved foot-traffic] areas. 3. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in [vehicle-traffic service] areas.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface.



3.5 DRAIN INSTALLATION

A. Install type of drains in locations indicated.

1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification drains in [earth or unpaved foot-traffic] <Insert other> areas.

2. Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification drains in [paved foot-traffic] <Insert other> areas.

3. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification drains in [vehicle-traffic service] <Insert other> areas.

4. Use Extra-Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification drains in [roads] <Insert area>.

B. Embed drains in 4-inch (102-mm) minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated.

D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface.

E. Assemble trench sections with flanged joints.

F. Embed trench sections in [4-inch (102-mm)] <Insert dimension> minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

3.6 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops [3 inches (76 mm)] <Insert dimension> above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.

3.8 STORMWATER INLET[ AND OUTLET] INSTALLATION

A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.

B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.

C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.



D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.

E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated.

3.9 DRY WELL INSTALLATION

A. Excavate hole to diameter of at least 6 inches (150 mm) greater than outside of dry well. Do not extend excavation into ground-water table.

B. Install precast, concrete-ring dry wells according to the following:

1. Assemble rings to depth indicated. 2. Extend rings to height where top of cover will be approximately 8 inches (203 mm) below

finished grade. 3. Backfill bottom of inside of rings with filtering material to level at least 12 inches (300 mm)

above bottom. 4. Extend effluent inlet pipe 12 inches (300 mm) into rings and terminate into side of tee

fitting. 5. Backfill around outside of rings with filtering material to top level of rings. 6. Install cover over top of rings.

C. Install manufactured, PE dry wells according to manufacturer's written instructions and the following:

1. Assemble and install panels and cover. 2. Backfill bottom of inside of unit with filtering material to level at least [12 inches (300 mm)]

<Insert dimension> above bottom. 3. Extend effluent inlet pipe [12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert dimension> into unit and terminate

into side of tee fitting. 4. Install filter fabric around outside of unit. 5. Install filtering material around outside of unit. 6. Install manhole over top of dry well. Support cover on undisturbed soil. Do not support

cover on lining.


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.

B. Piping Systems: Excavate trenches of width and depth, and install piping system, filter fabric, and backfill, according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.

3.11 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains specified in Section 221413 "Facility Storm Drainage Piping."

B. Connect force-main piping to building's storm drainage force mains specified in Section 221413 "Facility Storm Drainage Piping." Terminate piping where indicated.



C. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch (150-mm) overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).

2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20 (DN 100 to DN 500). Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).

3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 (DN 525) or larger, or to underground manholes and structures by cutting into existing unit and creating an opening large enough to allow 3 inches (76 mm) of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches (300 mm) to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.

a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) unless otherwise indicated.

b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials.

4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

D. Connect to sediment interceptors specified in Section 221323 "Sanitary Waste Interceptors."

E. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.

a. [Unshielded] [Shielded] flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different

OD. c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space

between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force-main joints.

3.12 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:

1. Close open ends of piping with at least [8-inch- (203-mm-)] <Insert dimension> thick, brick masonry bulkheads.



2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.

B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required and use one procedure below:

1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least [36 inches (915 mm)] <Insert

dimension> below final grade. Fill to within [12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert dimension> of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.

C. Backfill to grade according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.13 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.

1. Use[ warning tape or] detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (610 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice.



4. Submit separate report for each test.5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities havingjurisdiction.

b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417.c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M).

6. Force-Main Storm Drainage Piping: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, supports,and anchors have hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the maximumsystem operating pressure, but not less than [150 psig (1035 kPa)] <Insert value>.

a. Ductile-Iron Piping: Test according to AWWA C600, "Hydraulic Testing" Section.b. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.15 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials.[ Flush with potable water.] [ Flush with water.]
